RECOMMENDATIONS,

The

following Recommendations of the

Work

and statements

to the study of the Syriac language are respectfully submitted

in respect

FORMERLY OF THE THEOLOGICAL SCHOOL CONNECTED

WITH HARVARD UNIVERSITY.
"It is one of the best Grammars of any language with which I am
The Syriac is easily learned with the help of that proficiency
acquainted.
in the Hebrew which is now generally carried away from our Theological >
institutions
and the little labor necessary for its acquisition is richly
repai J by the privilege of consulting a version of the New Testament, which
ranks before all others as the oldest and best, and which, besides its imporPROM

O.

J.

PALFREY,

V.

I).,

tance in respect to evidence of the genuineness of the Sacred Text, has the
peculiar interest of presenting the discourses of Our Saviour essentially in
the same language in which they were originally pronounced."

FROM PROF. SMITH, OF BANGOR THEOLOGICAL INSTITUTION.

"I

have been acquainted with the Grammar for many years, and I regard
it as better
adapted for translation in this country than any other grammar
that I know of.
I shall be heartily glad to see an English translation of it,
and I have no doubt that such a work would greatly tend to promote, what,
by the way, is a most desirable object, the knowledge of the Syriac among
our Clergymen and Theological students. There has not been hitherto so
much interest taken in our Seminary in the study of the languages cognate
to the

Hebrew
FROM

" It

as I could wish."

C. E.

STOWE,

D. D.,

OF ANDOVER THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY.

highly desirable that all Theological students should make themselves acquainted with the Syriac tongue
for it is not only (next to the
Chaldee, perhaps.) the eldest sister of the Hebrew, and the Sacred dialect
of that interesting people, the Nestorians but it gives us the very best
translation of the Hible, (especially of the New Testament) that has ever
been made in any language."
is

FROM HIS PREDECESSOR, THE LATE B. B. EDWARDS, D. D.

have been much pleased with Uhlemann's Syriac Grammar.
the best for purposes of instruction with which I am acquainted."
"I

FROM T. J. CONANT, D. D., OF ROCHESTER UNIVERSITY.

"Uhlemann's Syriac Grammar is an admirable work for its

object,

It

is

and

the best extant for school use.

I should be glad to see it translated and
furnished at a price which could be afforded by Theological students.
If a
Grammar could be obtained at a moderate price, I think the study would
is

eoimmm among ministers. The privilege of reading

the oldest version of the New Testament would richly reward all the trouble
lunl expense of
acquiring the language."
"The Exercises and 'hrestumathy have been very carefully prepared,
with good success, Both would be very serviceable to the learner."
soon become pretty

FROM
"

here."

J. A. ALEXANDER, D. D., OF PRINCETON THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY.

good translation of Uhlemann would command a constant sale

SYRIAC GRAMMAR,

A COURSE OF EXERCISES, A CHRESTOMATHY, AND A BRIEF

LEXICON.

UHLEMANN'S

SYRIAC GRAMMAR,
TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN

BY ENOCH RUTCHINSON.
WITH A COURSE OP

EXERCISES

SYRIAC GRAMMAR,

IN

AND A

CHRESTOMATHY AND BRIEF LEXICON

PREPARED BY THE TRANSLATOR.

NEW YORK:
D.

APPLETOX &

CO., 346

&

EDINBURGH
T.

J.

CLARK,

38

BROADWAY.

348
:

GEORGE STREET.

1855.

Entered according to Act of Congress,

BY

E.

in the

year 1855,

HUTCHINSON,

in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District

of

New

York.

TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.

THE

following translation

the suggestion of several

increasing desire

was undertaken

and

literary friends,

among American

in accordance with

in view of

students to become acquainted

with a language in which the earliest and best version of the

Testament
is

is

Uhlemann's Grammar
of rare excellence

and

it

spoken by our Saviour.

is
is

acknowledged by

hoped

all to

be a manual

an English dress,

that, in

be found to be well adapted to promote the progress of

ental philology in this country.

Some

of our helps of

in the study of the Syriac, are too brief,

minous.
its,

New

generally admitted to have been made, and which

essentially the language

will

Uhlemann has aimed

a work

tion.

The

sufficiently extensive for

to

tliis

it

ori-

kind,

and others are too volu-

to present, within

moderate lim-

ordinary purposes of instruc-

translator has endeavored to give as literal a transla-

tion as is compatible with perspicuity.

seemed

an

be

He

has added, where

necessary, occasional explanatory notes.

it

After

having prepared an abridgment of the paradigms of verbs and

nouns, following Winer's arrangement in his Chaldee
he, on the whole, concluded

Grammar,

to insert the full

paradigms as they

make

the attempt to im-

stand in the original work, and not to

prove a grammar BO nearly faultless.

TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.

Vi

The

translation

grammar, which,

is

if

followed by a course of Exercises in Syriac

carefully studied, will,

it

rially facilitate the progress of the learner in

ledge of the elements of the language.

is

believed, mate-

an accurate know-

After having read, with

care, the introduction, and cursorily examined other parts of the

grammar, the pupil may,

remarks

to the Exercises) as a

enable him to solve the

analyzing the
trusts that

first

commence upon

at once,

and merely consult the grammar

the Exercises,

(as directed in the introductory

book of reference, in order to

with which he

difficulties

page of the Chrestomathy.

may meet

The

in

translator

he shall not be considered as obtrusive in calling

special attention to a

method of analysis which he has found

be of great advantage in teaching classes in Hebrew.

structors have probably adopted a similar one,

have devised

still

better methods.

sideration of those teachers

This

is

Some

to
in-

and others may

submitted to the con-

who have not already adopted a

satisfactory one.

brief Chrestomathy

tor, follow the

and Lexicon, prepared by the transla-

Exercises.

The former

is

composed of selections

from that beautiful edition of the Peshito Bible published by the

British and Foreign Bible Society in London, in 1816, and
reprinted in smaller type in 1826.
of the Syrian Christians in India.

It

It

as far as the Acts of the Apostles,

was executed

for the use

was corrected for the press,

by Dr. Buchanan, and com-

pleted by Rev. S. Lee, Professor of Arabic in the University of

Cambridge.
is

Several manuscripts were consulted, and the text

considered as very correct, though

some typographical

we have discovered

in

it

errors.

In the Exercises, an extended analysis will be found of the

first

TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.

vtf

page of the Chrestoraathy, and merely brief explanatory remarks

on the remaining pages.

The

basis of the Lexicon

grammar,

to

is

M.

consulted the Syriac Lexicons of

Gutbier, and ^Emilius Rodigcr.

to include those

Some
and

There

The

Testaments, have

are, probably, others

Trost, E. Castell, ^Egidius

The Lexicon

is

intended merely

numerous references

by the

may

Old

which were not observed.

literary public.

found by teachers who

to the

been discovered and corrected.

translator trusts that this effort will be

indulgence

in his

words which occur in the Chrestoinathy.

errors, in the author's

New

Uhlemann

that inserted by

which the translator has made many additions, having

received with

Errors will doubtless be

use the Manual, and he will be very

thankful to receive suggestions from any quarter, by which a

future edition, should

The

it

ever be called for,

publication of the

may

be improved.

work has been unexpectedly delayed,

most of the stereotype plates, when nearly completed, having been

destroyed by a disastrous

The

translator avails himself of this opportunity to express his

obligations to

Seminary of
sity,

fire.

and

J.

Mr.

W. W. TURNER,

this city,

T.

J.

late of the

Union Thelogical

CONANT, D. D., of Rochester Univer-

G. PALFREY, D. D., formerly of the Theological School

connected with Harvard University, for valuable suggestions;

also to

Mr. A. H. GUERNSEY, of

this city, for

important aid in

the examination of the manuscript before going to press.

NEW

YORK, Jan. 1855.

EXTRACTS FKOM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.

THE

earlier sheets of this

Text hook, designed, principally,

had heen printed, and that part of

the Manuscript which contains the elementary principles and
paradigms had been for a considerable time out of my hands,
when the more comprehensive work of Professor HOFFMANN
made its appearance. In the preparation of this work my
plan had especially led me to present, with as much brevity
as was consistent with clearness, what is most essential for
for academical instruction,

understanding the language in its grammatical forms. 1

was of the opinion that the more extended treatment of
separate phenomena of the language might be dispensed
with, since the greater portion ot the Syriac forms may be
explained from those of the Hebrew language ; and in fact,
a knowledge of the Hebrew implies an acquaintance with
the principles of the Syriac.
Upon a close examination of the
above-mentioned work, I was convinced, that I had proceeded
upon almost the same principles, had made a similar use
of the older grammarians, such as Amira, Ludov. de Dieu,
Buxtorf, Michaelis, and others, and had deviated only in the
collocation of separate rules. Although I might have appr< >xi-

mated more nearly to the work of Hoffmann, by isolated

alterations, yet I deemed it advisable, where deviations

my own views ; as for example, in the tabular arrangement of derivative nouns. Following the older
grammarians, I have introduced a separate paradigm of the
nouns placed under Declension III.,* instoiul of classing them
with the Segholate forms ; this was done because the vo\\vl
entering into the inflection of these nouns is not an original
one, as in the case of the Segholate forms, but is introduced
on account of the difficulty of pronunciation. Real Segholate
existed, to follow

48,

Ded. IIL

EXTRACTS FROM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE.

forms, monosyllabic nouns, namely, those derived from verbs

3 rad. Olaph quiescent, belong rather, according to their
principal inflection, to the substantive-stems of Declension V.,
and, in only a few instances, coincide with the Segholate
forms. In preparing the Syntax, I have, like Professor Hoffmann, followed the Lehrgebdude of Gesenius ; and like him,
also. I have made use only of those passages of the Old Testament collected by Gesenius, in which the translator, unfettered by the Hebrew text, seems to have wrought more in
accordance with the genius of his own language. In addition
to this, I have frequently consulted the translation of the
Tew Testament, as the oldest Syriac writing known to us ;*
Ephraemi Opera Syr., Romse, 1743, torn. III., fol.; Barhebraei
Chronicon Syr., ed. Kirsch. Lips. 1789 ; and Assemani Bibliotheca Orient. Clementine-Yaticana, Romae, 1719, torn. III.,
fol.; so that a close and impartial examination will easily
determine what has been added from my own not inconsiderable collections.f

******

BERLIN, March, 1829.

* In
point of time the Fesbito version of the Old Testament is the most ancient
in the Syriac language, though the New Testament was transMichaelis suplated into Syriac from the original Greek about the same time.
poses, that the Syriac version of both Testaments was made near the close of the
TR.
first, or in the early part of the second century.
t The remainder of the Author's Preface relates mainly to his Reading Lessons,
which we have not inserted, they being, in our opinion, too difficult for beg'nnera

document extant

Ttt.

11

CONTENTS,

Brief Historical

INTRODUCTION.

View

of the Syriac Languagt

and Literature

17

PART FIRST.
ELEMENTS OF THE LANGUAGE.

CHAPTER

I.

WRITTEN CHARACTERS AND THEIR USB.

.28

1.

Consonants

2.

Yowels

3.

Vowel Signs

4. Diacritical

5.

Kushoi and Rukok

32

6.

Ribui

33

7.

Mehagyono and Marhetono

34

8.

Linea Occultans

35

9.

Tone

2 10.

Marks

in general

(Vowel

Letters and

Vowel

Signs)

30
30

Points which supply the place of Vowels

........

31

35

35

of Punctuation

CHAPTER

H.

%
PECULIARITIES

AND CHANGES OF LETTERS.

View

3 11.

General

{ 12.

Changes of the Consonants

36
36

CONTENTS.

in

turn
g

13. Quiescent Letters

\ 14.

15.

Vowel

Letters which are not sounded (Otiant)

in the

Changes

...

Vowels

39

40
41

PART SECOND.
ETYMOLOGY, OR PARTS OF SPEECH.

CHAPTER L
PRONOUNS.

and Possessive Pronouns

16. Personal

Table of Pronouns and Suffixes

2 17. Other

44
45

Pronouns

48

CHAPTER

IT.

THE VERB.
$18. General
I.

2 19.
I.

II.

The

View
Regular

Inflection of

49
Verbs.

Regular Verbs in General

...

Table of Personal Inflection

52

Table of the Temporal Inflection of Regular Verbs

A. Personal

50

53

54

Inflections

B. Inflection of the Tenses and Moods

55

2 20.

A. The Ground-form Peal

2 21.

Ethpeel

58

2 22.

Pael and Ethpaal

59

2 23.

Aphel and Ethtaphal

60

its

formation and signification

56

B. Derivative Conjugations.

24.

Shaphel and Eshtaphal

61

2 25.

Conjugations occasionally used and Quadriliteral Verbs

2 26.

Verbs with Gutturals

2 27.

General

II.

62

63

Irregular Verbs.

View

Table of Irregular Verbs

...

...

63
65

CONTENTS.

xni

MB
A.

Quiescent Verbs.

67

{ 28.

Verbs 1 Rad. Olaph Quiescent

$ 29.

Verbs

2 30.

Verbs Med. Olaph Quiescent

Verbs Med. Had. Vau and Yud Quiescent

31.

2 32.

Rad.

Yud

Quiescent
.

....
....

Verbs 3 Rad. Olaph Quiescent

68

70
70
72

B. Defective Verbs.
1
\

Nun

33.

Verbs

34.

Verbs Med. Rad. doubled

2 35.

1 Rad.

75

Doubly Irregular and Defective Verbs

....

Paradigms of the Regular and Irregular Verbs

2 36.

...

Regular Verb with Suffixes

76

80
97

Table of the Same

2 37. Suffixes to

75

102

Verbs 3 Rad. Olaph Quiescent

.103

Table of the Same

108

2 38. Auxiliary or Substantive

Verbs

110

CHAPTER m.
THE NOUN.
2 39.

Derivation of

2 40.

Nouns

Nouns

derived from

Ill

Verbs

112

Tabular View of Nouns derived from Regular and Irregular

Verbs
\

113

41. Denominative

Nouns

122

and Exotic Nouns

2 42. Composite

123

2 43.

Gender of Nouns

124

2 44.

Number

126

2 45. Different

2 46.

of

Nouns

Relations (states) of the

Noun

....

129

Table of the Same

132

Nouns with

136

Suffixes

2 47. Declension of

Nouns

in general

....

.139

CONTENTS.

xiv

PACK
\ 48.

49.

Nouns according
Anomalous Nouns

Exhibition of

to Declension

145

Paradigms of Nouns with Suffixes

g 50. Adjectives

139

148

and Numerals

150

CHAPTER

IV.

PARTICLES.
\ 51.

152

Adverbs

52. Prepositions

Table of Prepositions with Suffixes

| 53.

.....

Conjunctions and Interjections

153
155
156

PART THIRD.
SYNTAX.

CHAPTER

I.

THE PRONOUN.
54.

Use of Separable Personal Pronouns and

Suffixes

.157

A. Separable Personal Pronouns

157
-

B. Suffixes
55. Pleonastic use of

Pronouns

159

160

A. Separable Personal Pronouns

160

B. Suffixes

161

General Remarks on Personal Pronouns

57.

Use of Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns

58. Pronouns for which the Syrians have no special forms

A. Reflexive Pronouns
B. Other Pronouns

.163

164

Use

of the Relative

Pronoun

56.

....

166

.166
166
167

CONTENTS.

x*
FAOl

CHAPTER

II.

THE VEBB.
J 59. General

172

View

g 60.

Use

| 61.

Use of the Future

172

of the Preterit

175

178

Use of the Imperative

62.

Use of the

2 63.

A.

Infinitive

Infinitive

Use of the
General

\ 65.

View

II.

III.

.179

180
182

Manner

of Designating all the different

Tenses, and particularly the Imperfect, Pluper-

of the

188

Verb

190

Verbs with the

different

Cases and with

Prepositions

193

Verbs with the Accusative

193

Verbs with Prepositions

Passive Verbs and their Construction

Mode
2 68.

179

^ or the Construct form

of the

2 67. Construction of

I.

and Optative

The Persons

66.

Participle

Moods and
fect,

Absolute

B. Infinitive with
2 64.

....
....

of expressing Greek Composites

The Substantive Verb and some

Verbs

in

General

Zeugma

203

204

AA^

204

B. Indirect Discourse
C. Ellipsis

201

other peculiarities chiefly

relating to the Construction of

A. Useof]oOl AJ) and

196

205

Paronomasia and Puns

206

CHAPTER m.
THE NOUN.

Noun

2 69.

Use

2 70.

Gender of Nouns

210

2 71.

Number

212.

of the

of the

in General

Noun

207

CONTENTS.

xvi

PAGE
\ 72.

Apposition and Duplication of Nouns

73.

The Emphatic State

The Construct State and the Genitive

g 74.

75. Designation
76.
77.

.212
214

.215

....

and Use of the other Cases

Comparison of Adjectives

222

A. The Comparative
B. The Superlative
\ 78. Construction of

222
223

Numerals

224

A. Cardinal Numbers

224

B. Ordinal Numbers

224

C. Other Eelations of
| 79.

80.

Numbers

226

Union of the Noun with Adjectives

Union of the Noun with the Yerb

A. In Eespect

to

227

229

Number

229

B. In respect to Gender
C. In respect to both Gender and

D. Construction of Sentences
or

in

Number

....

which there

is

232

234

a Compound

more than one Subject

234

Nouns

237

81. Peculiarities relating to

A.

218

220

The Case Absolute

Ellipsis of the

Noun

237

B. Zeugma and Hendiadys

The rendering of Composite Greek Nouns

CHAPTER

....

238
238

IV.

PARTICLES.
2 82.

Construction and Union of Adverbs

| 83.

Use of the

Particles of interrogation, affirmation

\ 84. Prepositions
J 85.

240

Conjunctions

and negation

242

244

..."

246
249

2 86. Interjections

Peculiarities in respect to the Position of

Words

250

T H O D U C T I O N.

BRIEF HISTORICAL

VIEW

SYKIAC LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE.

1. THE Syriac
language (sometimes called the "Western
Aramaean, to distinguish it from the Chaldsean or Eastern
Aramaean, with which it constitutes the Aramaean dialect of
the Semitic family of languages), formerly extended over the
whole northern part of Aram, from the borders of Palestine
to Natolia, and from the Mediterranean to and beyond the
It degenerated at an early period, and, during
Euphrates.*

the continual changes of government, particularly by the reception of Persian and Greek words, lost much of its original
Of its pure state, no written monuments have come
purity.
down to our times. But at the beginning of the fourth century after Christ, the language enjoyed a flourishing period,
and kept its place for a long time at Edessa as a written language. As from the earliest period the Palmyrene dialect
was recognized as the principal one, so this period has been
designated by the name of the Edessene Period. Moreover,
at various times, mention is made of the Damascene, the
Chalnic or Ctesiphontic, the Acharic or Nesibene, and the
Maronite dialects. The essential difference between these consisted very likely in the pronunciation ; this may be asserted
with still more confidence in respect to the Nabatoean
The ancient written language of Antioch or Comdialect.
is still used
magene
by various Christian sects, in particular
* E.
Rodiger says of the Aramaean language: "It was called Syriac in the
in which it appeared in the Christian Aramwan literature, and Chaldee
when it appeared in the Jewish Araimean writings." See Geseuius' JK'b.
Gramm., 15th edit, by Rodiger, Leipz. 1848 Einleitung, 1. 2. b. Tm
form

18

INTRODUCTION.

by the Maronites, Nestorians, and Thomas-Christians of India,

as their ecclesiastical language.
So also the Zabians, or socalled St. John's Disciples, are said to make use of it, in
their religious ceremonies.
But as the language, as early as
the eighth and ninth centuries, was greatly corrupted by the
frequent use of the Arabic, and was driven by the Arabs
from the cities in the tenth and eleventh, and from the
villages in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, it may be
safely assumed that it is no longer in use as a vernacular Ian
guage.
Although several modern travelers of note, as
JSTiebuhr and Brown, maintain that it is still spoken in some
parts of Mesopotamia, about Raka, Edessa, and Damascus, as
well as upon Lebanon, they are opposed by Ferrieres
Sauveboeuf and Volney, while Chateaubriand, Seetzen,
Clarke, Joliffe, and Buckingham pass the matter over in
silence; and Burckhardt only remarks, that the Maronites
in the convent of Kashia use the Syriac, at the present day,
as we do the Latin.*

REM.

The LXX,

even, use Syria, (2utec, 2poi, Ju^itfTt) in the

? *

wider sense, for the Old Testament

comp. the "Apijxoj

Hesiod
Strabo
783;
Theog. 304;
Geog. i. 2. xi. 14;
Stephanus Byzant. under "Api/xa, and Bochart Geogr. S. ii 5, 6 ); and
the Greek and Roman Authors often confound Syria with Assyria (comp.

in

Horn.

II.

31

5,

Od.

II.

(^>1

ii.

13; Herodot. vii. 63; Strabo xvi. 2

Xenoph. Cyrop.
1
Lucian de Dea Syr.
Oppian, Kuvrj^ III. 402 Horat.
11, 16; III. 4, 32. Justin, i. 2; Ammian Marcell. xxiii. 6.

Diod. Sic.
vii.

ft^a

ii.

The Arabs

call

it

UiJf

as

it

lay at the

left,

when

their faces

were

turned towards the east (eomp. Abulfeda Tab. Syr. p. 5; Assemani

In the earliest times this country
Bibl. Orient. T. III. P. ii. p. 782.)
was divided into several small nations, ruled by kings (comp. Jahn Bibl.
Archaol. Thl. i. Bd. i. p. 51 seq.; Mannert Geogr. Bd vi. p. 1 seq.;
Vater Commentar viber den Pentat. Bd. I. p. 152 ; Winer Bibl. Realworterbuch, Bd. i. p. 51 seq.); of these, subsequently to the time of

David, Zobah and Damascus are mentioned in the Scriptures, as the

most powerful; David conquered them both (2 Sam. viii. 3 sq.; x. 6;
1 Chron. xix [xviiij 3, 4. sq), and Solomon kept possession of them
* Since Uhlemann
prepared

his

grammar,

it

has been ascertained that the Nes-

Mr. Lnyard, in his admirable

torians use the Syriac language at the prrsent day.
work on the ruins of Nineveh, sjiys of the Nestorians (or Chaldoeans as he incor-

" Most of their church books are written in

them)
Syriac,
the Latin in the West, became the sacred language in the greater part
Missionaries who are laboring
See Layard's Nineveh, chap. viii.
of the East."
among the Nestorians, bear testimony to the same fact. TR.
rectly denominates

which,

like

INTRODUCTION

19

Reson Ben-Eliada, who had been general of the king of Zoba

(1 Kings xi. 23 sq.), re-established at Damascus a government independent of that of the Hebrews. Subsequently the Syrians were incorporated with the monarchies of the Assyrians (738 B. c.), the Per-ian.-.
nntil

(539 B. c.), and the Macedonians (331 B. c.). Though after the death
of Alexander the Great, they arose again for a time under the Seleucidae
(301 B. c.), yet they again lost their independence by means of Pompey (64 B.C.), and their kings reigned only at Edessa, till the third
century after Christ, when this kingdom came also under the Roman
At the division of the Empire, under Theodosius (395), Syria fi-11
sway.
to the Byzantine Empire, after Jovianus hud (A. D. 3G3) already surrendered Nesibis* to Sapores II, king of Persia. Afterwards it was taken
possession of by the Arabs (636), and was subjected (660) to the
Onimiades and several other Arabic royal families, whose dynasties
At the time of the
were, in 1086, brought to a close by the Scljooks.f
Crusades, the Christians could maintain themselves there against the
Seljooks but a short time (1097 and subsequently) ; and in 1171, Sahv
In 1369, Syria became a prey to
din wrested the country from them.
the marauding inroads of the Mongols under Timor and it has now,
for three centuries, sighed under the Turkish yoke(cf. Gatterer, Handluicli der Universalhist, Bd. I. p. 248 sq. ; Beck, Weltgeschichte, Bd.
I. p. 213 sq. ; Heeren, Ideen iiber die Politik, u. s. w. Thl. I. p.
213 sq. ; Riihs, Handbuch der Geschichte des Mittelalters, p. 152,
The transition into broadness of pronunciation (irXarutfrofxov)
sq.).
seems not to have extended much beyond the time of the Babylonish
captivity ; and the Palmyrene Dialect, which is known to us by some
inscriptions found among the ruins of Palmyra or Tadmor, and deciphered by Bartheleray and Svvinton, may have grown up soou after Solomon, the founder of that city. In the Edessene Period, during which
flourished Ephraem (died 378), Jacob Vou Sarug, Isaac the Syrian,
and Xenaias of Mabug, all of whom Jacob of Edessa, at the middle of
the seventh century, recognizes as classical writers, theological learning
was zealously cultivated (cf. Assem. T. III. P. II. p. 994). The Manmitcs
on the Orontes and upon Lebanon, originally disciples and followerp
of St. Maro (cf. Assem. I. 496 sq. ; PfeiH'cr, in his Auszuge, p. 166 sq. ;
Kuhs, HandGieseler, Lehrbuch der Kircliengeschichte, Bd. I. p. 675
buch der Geschichte des Mittelalters, p. 37) approximate to the ancient Syriac dialect still more closely do the Ncstorians (cf. As<cin. T.
III. P. II. p. 379), and the Thomas-Christians of India, who differ from
the N'cstorians nnlv in name and place of residence (ef. As<em. a. a. (). pp.
413, 435. sq.
PfeUfer, pp. 2S5, 484 ; Giescler, Bd. I. pp. 417, 638),
all of whom make use of it only as an ecclesiastical language
the two
former shaking Arabic in common life, ami the latter, the language
;

* A celebrated
city ami military post in Mesopotamia, generally written Nisibia.
f Called, also, Seljuka, Seljouks, or Seljoukian Turks. TR.

Ti.

INTRODUCTION.

20
of Malabar.

Different from this

is

the dialect of the so-called Johannes-

Christians, Mandaeans, or Zabians (who are not to be confounded with

a Mohammedan sect of the same name, in Maraccii Coran. Sur. II. p. 33

Assem. T. III. P. II. pp. 509-515 Pfeiffer, p.510 sq.; cf. Gieseler, Bd.
66 Neander, Allgemeine Geschichte der christlichen. Religion uud
Kirche, Bd. I. Abth. II. p. 427), whose religious books are written in
a corrupted Syriac, and which appears, from the numerous Ghebric
expressions which occur in them, to have been drawn up in the Persian
Irak.
By the Nabatsean, according to Barhebrseus (in Assem. T. I. p.
476) is to be understood the former language of the Syrian countryOn the question, whether the Syrian is still a vernacular
people.
language, compare Niebuhr, Reisebeschr von Arabien, Bd. II. p. 352
sq.

I. p.

Brown,

Biblioth. der neuesten Reisebeschr.

Thl.

I.

p.

489

Ferrieres

Sauveboeuf, Mernoires historiques, etc., T. II. p. 169

Volney,
etc., T. I. p. 331 ; and Burckhardt, Travels in Syria,
22, 186.
;

en Syrie,

Voyage
etc.,

pp.

2. Syriac literature, vrhich extends over almost all branches

of knowledge, and in a special manner over the department of
Theology, and possesses valuable works upon Oriental and Ecclesiastical History, flourished principally in the period between the
The language
fourth and tenth centuries of the Christian era.
itself, which gave proof of its versatility of expression by the

and other Greek authors, and by its

accurate representation of mathematical subjects, had found, at
an earlier period, in its own country, zealous cultivators in the
departments of Grammar and Lexicography.
As the most ancient grammarians, whose works have been lost,
history records the names of Achudeinen (died 575), Joseph Huzita (died 580), Jacob of Edessa (died G98), who labored to restore
the purity of the ancient language, Jesudenah (at the beginning
of the eighth century), John Stylita (about 830), John, son of Chamis, Bishop of Themanum (850), and Honain, the physician (died
The first accurate grammar, however, was written by John
876).
Bar Zugbi, a Nestorian monk, at the beginning of the thirteenth

translations of Aristotle

century about which time, also, Joseph Bar Malcon seems to

have composed his Rete Punctorum, and Barhebraeus (died 1286)
At the beginning
to have made known his grammatical works.
;

of the sixteenth century, the study of the Syriac language was

Theseus Ambrosius learned the Syriac
transplanted to Europe.
language from Syrians at Rome, in 1514, and became, in 1529,
teacher to Albert Widmansladt, who subsequently pursued
the study under Simeon, Bishop of the Syrians upon Lebanon.
Through the labors of these men, and of Moses vonMerdin, whom

INTRODUCTION.

21

Ignatius, Patriarch of Antioch, had sent, in 1552, to Julius III.

at Rome, and whose instructions were enjoyed by Andreas Dumas
(Masius), the publication of the New Testament was effected in

At the close of the sixteenth century, the grammatical

study of the Syriac language was much promoted at Rome itself,
by the Maronites Amira and Abraham Ecchellensis, whose
1555.

copious grammatical works had already been preceded by the

attempts of Theseus Ambrosius,Widmanstadt, Tremellius, Dumas,
and Waser. They were followed, about the middle of the seventeenth century, by Isaac Sciadrensis and Joshua Accurensis.
From this period onwards, the Syriac language has been grammatically pursued in Germany; partly independently of other
languages, most copiously by the two Michaelises and Hoffmann ;
partly in connection with the Chaldee, as by Ludov. de Dieu and
Jalm ; or with the other Semitic languages, as by Buxtorf, Hottinger, Schaaf, Vater, and others.
The earliest attempts at Syriac lexicography
in the ninth and tenth centuries, in Syria, by

were also made

Honain Isa or

Joshua of Maruz, and Gabriel, the son of Bochticsu. More important, however, are the contemporary works of Isa Bar-Ali
(about 885), of Ananiesu Bar-Saru (about 900), and the most
serviceable work of this kind by Abulhasan, Isa Bar-Bahlul (about
963,) which is still extant. The lexicons of Dumas, de la Boderie,
Schindler, Crines, Buxtorf, Trost, Hottinger, Gutbier, Nicolai,
Schaaf, and Zanolini, which have appeared since the sixteenth
century, are confined to the New Testament, with which the
FerSyriac literature in 1555 made its appearance in Europe.
rarius, and Edm. Castell, on the other hand, availed themselves
of the above-mentioned Syriac works relating to the same subject,
and John David Michaelis enriched the labors of the latter by
valuable remarks and additions. The valuable work of Lorsbach,
who compared all the Syriac works which had then been printed,
besides a number of manuscripts, and collected the words and
significations

pleted.

wanting in Syriac lexicons, still remains uncomrecently, copious works have been promised by

More

Bernstein and Quatremere, philologists of great merit in the

department of Oriental literature. Glossaries are contained in
the Chrestomathies of Michaelis, Kirsch, Tychsen, Grimm, Halm,
and Sieffert.

REM. Eusebius (Hist. Eccl. I. 13) cites the letter of Abgarus to

and the answer to ft, aa among the mst ancient Syriac writings
III. P. II. p. 8
(cf. Assem. I. 554
Giesder, Bd. I. p. 74)
and,
Jesus,

INTRODUCTION.

22
in like

manner, John

language.

is

said to have written his Gospel in the Syriac

of undoubted authenti-

But the most ancient Syriac work

perhaps the translation of the New Testament,* which musi

have existed as early as the second century (cf. Hug, Einleitung
in die Schriften des N. T., Thl. I. p. 348
Gieseler, Bd. I. p. 123).
That the Syrians considered their language to be richer than the Araand its capacity for
bic is attested by Asseman (III. P. I. p. 326 sq.)
rendering Greek authors may be judged from Barhebraeus (Chron. p.
city, is

231. ed. Bruns), compared with Aristotle (Top. I. cap. 4). AbulpharaPocock, p. 147, mentions Theophilus
of Edessa as the author of a successful translation of two books of the
In addition to the larger work of
Iliad (cf. Assem. I. p. 521).
Asseman (Assemani Bibliotheca Orientalis Clemeutino-Yaticana,
Romae, 1729,) 3 vols. fol, and the abridgment of it by Pfeiffer, Erlangen,

gius, in his Historia Dynast., ed.

1776, we possess a brief history of Syriac literature by Hoffmann, in

Bertholdt's kritischem Journal der neuesten theologischen Literatur,
Thl.

XIV.,

pp. 225-291.

I.

GRAMMARS.

Thesd Ambrosii, Introductio in Chald. linguam, Syriacam,

etc.,

Papiae,

1539.

Aug. Caninii, Institutiones

linguse Syriacse, Parish's, 1554.

Widmanstadii, Syriacse lingua? prima ekmenta, Viennae, 1555, 4to. ed.

II. Antwerp, 1572.
loh. Merceri, Tabulae in grammaticen linguae Chald., quse et Syriaca
Eiusd. grammatica Chald. et Syr. Vitedicitur, Paris, 1560. 4to.
bergae, 1579, 8vo.

Imman. TremeUii, Grammatica Chald. et Syr. Genevae, 1569, 4to. Appended also to his edition of the New Testament.
Aiidr. Masii, Grammatica linguaa Syriacae (im Tom. YI. der Antwerp,
Polygl.) 1573, fol.
Casp. Waseri, Institutio linguae Syrae ex optimis quibusque apud Syros
scriptoribus collecta. Lugd. Bat. 1594. 4to. Ed. II. Leidae, 1619,
4to.

Georg. Amirce, Grammatica Syr. sive Chald.

Christoph. Crinesii,

Gymnasium

culae perfecta institutio, etc.

lo. Buxtorfii,

II.

Syr. h.

e.

etc.

Romae, 1596, 4to.

linguae lesu Christo verna-

Yitebergae, 1611.

Grammaticae Chald.

et Syr. libri III. Basil. 1615.

Ed.

1650, 8vo.

*
Hug, in his Introduction to the New Testament, says that the Translation of the
New Testament was appended to that of the Old Testament, and that both were
included under the same name, Pcshito. TR.

INTRODUCTION.

To. Casp. Myriad, Grammatica Syro-Chaldaea.

Genev. 1619, 4to.
Herm. Nicolai, Idea linguarr. Aramasaruin per comparationem etc
Copenh. 1627, 8vo.

Abrah. EccheUensis, Linguae Syr. s. Chald. perbrevis institutio. Rom,

1628, 16mo.
Ludov. de Dieu, Grammatica linguarr. orientt. Hebraeorum, Chald. et
Syr. inter se collatnrum Lugd. Bat. 1628, ex recens. Clodii. Francof.

ad M. 1683,

4to.

Rom,

Isanc Sciadrensis, Grammatica lingua? Syr.

1636, 8vo.
loh. Michael. Dilherri, Rudimenta grammaticae Syr. Halis, 1637. Ed.
II.,

1646, 12mo.

Grammatica linguae Syr. Roma3, 1647, 8vo.

Ernst. Gerhardi, 2xia^a<pi'a, linguae Syro-Chald. Hal. Sax. 1649.
Andr. Sennerli, Ebraimus, Chaldaismus, Syriasmus, Arabismus nee non
Rabbinismus, etc. Viteb. 1666, 4to. Eiusd. Chaldaismus et Syriasraus, etc., 1666.
loh. Henr. Hottingeri, Grammatica Chald. Syr. et Rabbinica Turic.
1652, 8vo. Eiusd. Grammatica quatuor linguarr. Hebr. Chald. Syr.
et Arab, harmonica Turici, 1659, 4to
(the Syriac also printed
losephl Acurensis,

lo.

separately).
Briatii Waltoni, Introductio

ad lectionem linguarr. orientt. Hebr.

Chald. Samarit. Syr. Arab. Pers. Armen. Copt. Loud. 1653, 12mo.
lo. Leusdeni, Scholae Syriacae lib. III. etc.
Ultraiect. 1658, Hvo.
Guil. Bevendgii,
8vo.

Edm.

Grammatica

Syr. tribus libris tradita. Loud. 1658,

Castdli, Brevis et harmonica

quontum fieri potuit grammaticae

Hebr. Chald. Syr. JSthiop. Arab, et Pers. delineatio.
Lond. 1669
(preceding his Lex. Heptagl.)
Dav. Grafunderi, Grammatica Syriaca cum Syntaxi, etc. Viteb. 1665.
lo. Nicolai, Grammatica linguarr. Ebr. Chald. Syr. Arab. ^Ethiop.
Pers.orientalium secuudum prima prasccpta delineata harmonica. lenae,
1670. 4to. Ed. II. Critica Sacra Francof. et Hamb. 1686.
lo. Altingi, Synopsis iustitutionum Chald. et Syr. Francof. ad M. 1676.
Ed. VI. a Georg. Othone adornata, 1701, 8vo.
Christ. Cellarii, Porta Syriaca.
Cizas, 1677, 8vo. Eiusd. Porta Syria?
linguarr.

patentior, etc., 1682.

Henr.

Opitii,

Syriasmus facilitati ct integritati suas restitutus, etc. Lij>s.

1678. 4to. in compendium redactus a Christ. Ludovici

et Francof.

Viteb. 166U, 4to.

Car. Schafii, Opius Aramaenm complectens grammaticam ChaldaicoSyriacam, Lugd. Bat. 1686, 8vo.
Ed. III.
lo. Au>r. D<i/i-ii, Aditus Syriae reclusus, etc.
lenoe, 1689.
1715, 8vo.
lo.

Ern. Gerhardi, Harmonia Hugua3 Chald. Syr. et JBthiop. leiwe,

1693, 4to.

INTRODUCTION.

24
Herm. von der Hardt

Syriacae linguae fundamenta.

Helmst. 1694.

8vo.

(Only Paradigms.)
Othonis Palaestra linguarr.

Ge.

etc.

lo.

orientt.

Chald. Syr. Arab. -^Eth. Pers.

Francof. 1702. 4to.

Phil.

Hartmanni

harmonica.
Frid. Bucheri

institutio

Sam.

methodus
Christ.

Hebraicae, Chald. Syr. et Samarit.

Francof. ad M. 1707. 4to.

Thesaurus

orientalis

s.

linguarum

compendiosa

et facilis

linguarr. orientt. etc. Francof. et Lips. 1725. 4to.

Michaelis

Bened.

Syriasmus

i.

e.

grammatica linguae Syr,

Halis, 1741. 4to.

lo. David Michaelis

Grammatica Syr. Halis, 1784. 4to.

G. Kals Grammatica Hebraeo-harmonica cum Arab, et Aram.
Amstelod. 1758. 8vo.
lac. Ge. Christ. Adlerii Brevis linguae Syr. institutio etc. Altonae,
1784.
W. Jfesel, Syrische Sprachlehre. Lemgo, 1788. 4to.
loh. Gottfr. Hasse Practisches Handbuch der Aramaischen oder
lena, 1794. 8vo.
Syrisch-Chaldaisch-Samaritanischen Sprache.
Innoc. Fessleri Institutiones linguarr. orientt. Hebr. Chald. Syr. et
Arab. Vratisl. Halis et lenae, 1787 et 1789.
01. Gferh. Tychseni Elementale Syr. Rostochi, 1793. 8vo.
(Ap/.

to his Chrestomathy.)
lahn. Aramaische oder Chaldaische und Syrische Sprachlehre
Wien 1793. 8vo. neu herausgegeben von Oberleitfur Anfanger.
ner Elementa Aramaic* s. Chaldaeo-Syriacae linguae etc. Viennae,
1820. 8vo.
loh. Sev. Vater Handbuch der Hebr. Syr. Chald. und Arab. Grammatik.
Leipzig, 1802 u. 1817. 8vo.
Thomas Yeates Syriac Grammar, principally adapted to the New
Testament in that Language. Lond. 1819. 8vo.
Hampus Tullberg Elementale Syr. P. I. et II. Lond. 1824. 8vo.
Paul Ewald Lehrbuch der syr. Sprache. Erlangen, 1826. 8vo.

pended

lo.

Grammatics

Andr. Theoph. Hoffmanni

Syriacae

h'bri

III.

Halae,

1827. 4to.

II.

LEXICONS.

Andr. Masii Syrorum peculium.

Antwerp, 1521. folio.

Fabr. Boderiani Dictionariurn Syro-Chald. Antw. 1572. (Tom. VI.
of the
Val.

Antw. Polygl.)

Schindleri

Lexicon pentagl.

1635 Francof. 1653. 1695.

Hanoviae,

1612.

1649.

fol.

Viteb. 1612. 4to.

Christoph. Crinesii Lexicon Syriacum.
loh. Bapt. Ferrarii Nomendator Syriacus.
Romae, 1622. 4to.
Basil. 1622. 4to.
loh. Buxtorfii iun. Lexicon Chald. et Syr.
Martini Trostii Lexicon Syr. etc. Cothenis Anhalt. 1623. 4to.

Lond.

SYRIAC CHBE8TOMATHIE8.

g5

Thomas a Novaria Nomenclator Syr. llomie, 1636. 8vo.

Andr. Sennerti Lexici Chald. et Syr. compendium. Viteb. 1666. 4to.
loh. Henr. Hottingeri Etymologicum oricntt. s. Lexicon harmonicum
heptagl. etc. Francof 1661.

Dav. Grafunderi Compendium

Grammar.)

Turici,

1664.

Lexici, Syr.

4to.

(Appended

to bis Syriac

Hamb. 1667. 8vo. (Appended to his

Aegid. Outbirii Lexicon Syr.
New Testament.)
Edm. Castclli Lexicon heptagl. Lond. 1669. From this has been
specially edited the Syriac, by J. G. Michaelis, under the title,
Edmundi Castelli Lexicon Syr. Getting. 1788. Tom. II. 4to.
lo. Fr. Nicolai Hodogeticum orientale harmonicum etc.
lense,
1670. 4to.
Christoph. Cellarii Glossarium Syro-Latinuin.
Cizae, 1683. 4to.
Car. Schafii Lexicon Syr. concordantiale.
Lugd. Bat. 1708. (Appended to the New Testament )
Ant. Zanolini Lexicon Syriacum.
Patav. 1742. 8vo.
(Appended
to the

New

Testament.)

IIL

CHRESTOMATHTES.

Dav. Michaelis Syrische Chrestomathie Thl. 1. Gottingen,

Die II. Ausg. 1783. mit einem Glossar. u. Anm.
1768. 8vo.
loh. Dav. Michaelis Chrestomavervollstandigt unter dem Titel

loh.

thia Syr. Ed. III. glossario adnotationibusque instructa a /.

Ch.

Dcepke. 1829.
/. C. Cf. Adleri Chrestomathia Syr.
Hafn, 1784.
loh. Gottfr. Ifasse Lectiones Syro-Arabico-Samaritano-^Ethiopic
Regiom. et Lipsias, 1788. 8vo.
Georg. Guil. Kirschii Chrestomathia Syr.
Hofifi, 1789. 8vo. (Newly
edited

by

Bernstein.)

Olai Gerh. Ti/chsen Elementale Syriacum etc.

Rostochi, 1793. 8vo.
Henr. Ad. Grimm Neue Syrische Chrestomathie mit einem Glossarium
u. s. w.
Lemgo, 1795. 8vo.
Gust. Knoes Chrestomathia Syr. maximam partem e Codd. MSS.
collecta.
Getting, 1807. 8vo.
Aug. Hahn et Sieffert Chrestomatliia Syr. s. S. Ephraemi carmina
selecta.
Lips, 1825. 8vo.
(With a Lex. Syr.)

SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

PART FIRST.

ELEMENTS OF THE LANGUAGE

TABLE OF CONSONANTS.
1

CONSONANTS.

28

CHAPTER

I.

WKITTEN CHARACTERS AND THEIR USE.

Consonants.

1.

The

Aramaean Language, has an alphabet

Hebrew and Chaldee, of twenty-!

Syriac, or "West

consisting, like that of the

In common with the Arabic, it connects

together the several letters of a word by horizontal lines
at the bottom ; from which arises a fourfold form,
though
essentially the same, according as a letter is initial, medial,
or final, or is connected or unconnected with the preceding
letter, 'as exhibited in the table on the preceding page.

two consonants.

REM.

The

1.

called Peshito,
Jacobites,

and

character

is

exhibited

the simple.
said to have

i. e.

in

the

preceding alphabet,

is

employed by the Maronites and

been invented by Jacob of Edessa in
Besides this, Amira mentions the Estrangelo,
It

is

the seventh century.

not from rfrpoyyuXo?, round, (see Asseman Biblioth. Orient. T. III.
P. II. p. 378.) which, according to Micbaelis Gram. Syr., p. 15,
means the Gospel character (scriptura evangelii). It was the basis
of the Nestorian smaller character, to Avhich the so-called double

alphabet, used for inscriptions and titles of books, bears a strong

There is also the Palmyrene alphabet, found in inscripresemblance.
tions on the ruins of Palmyra or Tadmor, and the Mandwan or
Nabatcean alphabet. The latter, in consequence of the amalgamation
of the gutturals | with 1 and Ol with A* consists of only twenty con,

sonants.

It is written in a continuous line, with four different forms of

each letter, viz., the simple consonant, and the consonant with the
vowels a, i, or u.
REM. 2. The letters \, r Ol, Q, I, *, 'r A, connect only
After one of these letters, therefore, >
with the preceding letter.
.
,

at the
"\

stand unconnected

beginning of a word.

before

of a

^ is

written

-^

and

also,

The

and

final letters are

after

word takes the form of m.

with the exception of

^

it

The

or

letter

)$
G,

Double
in

'X>

always

.
,

at the

end

words adopted from

CONSONANTS.

29

Several consonants, where they terother languages, is written "XS

minate a word, are slightly inflected upward ; e. g. JD, ID, a, etc.

REM.

The

3.

gutturals express the several gradations of guttural

and Ol may be compared

and Spiritus asper of the Greek language
with the
sounds are *** (
the German ch )
12.
5.
Deeper
guttural
b).
(
and 1 which the Greeks express, sometimes by the Spirilus asper,
and sometimes by 7. The sound of 2 is formed in the fore-part of
**
that of O farther back towards the throat.
the mouth
"Qj
sometimes stands for at the end of Greek words, and is pronounced,
according to Amira, p. 9, sc before e and i. The aspirated consonAl2 r .f> are, in some MSS., marked as such with a red
ants
sounds from the weakest to the strongest.

Spiritus lenis

point placed over them; the removal of the aspiration

by the same sign beneath them ( 5).

REM.

The

4.

organs of speech,

MA*OI| occasion

is

same

the

less

as

JL

and Q,

to

it is

reference

than in Hebrew,

difficulty

Of the

be remarked

a) that

as the

e.g.

u\ and

o and

au and eu

c)

between two vowels has

and

that initial

pronounced

1} that

(=

with
.

fixed, it is
8.

before Ol

b)

e. g.

a and

=
i

i,

forms the dipthongs

e),

and even when }

Ihudho

pOOUf

REM.

5.

numerals as

The
far as

pronounced

like

is

pre-

*i

is

4>

and

quiesces in

;
7

Sheva and

after

the

iO^O ko-yem
7

(=

to

gutturals

gutturals, in connection

*P

the sound of y

indicated

But the

Hebrew.

in

Daghesh forte are wanting in Syriac.

with

with

of consonants,

division

is

e.

g.

d) that initial

>Oli chadh.

the Alphabet suffice for designating the

400 (Vid. Table of Consonants, Amira, p.12. sq).

letters of

compound numbers, the larger stand first e. g. poZ 441. From

500 900, the tens of 50 90 are denoted by a dot over the letter

In

Thousands are designated by

placed under
the units, ten thousand by ~=, ten thousand thousand by
The
numbers 20 and 50 are also expressed by double ^2 and ,-J. tuc
Fractional numbers
final loiters tailing awav \\ lien- units arc :uM'tl.
are designated lv :v small line drawn obliquely downward, from left
to right, over the letter which expresses the denominator of the
-co GOO,
e.g.

>

800.

fraction

"e.g.

2 =,

i <fec.

VOWEL LETTERS AND VOWEL

80
2.

SIGNS.

Vowels in General (Vowel Letters and

Vowd

Signs).

InSyriac, the vowel-letters }, o, and *a originally served to

designate the vowels, and, at the time of Mohammed, the
Syrians were acquainted with only three vowel-signs, which
sufficed for their language,' and which the Arabs appear to
have borrowed from them. Afterwards the Monophysites
sought to express the Greek vowels, and increased their
number to seven (v. Asseman T. I. pp. 477, 478 ; Gesenius
Lehrgeb. p. 34), and since the time of Theophilus of Edessa,
in the eighth century, the Greek vowels appear to have been
in common use.
The Nestorians, on the other hand, make
use of diacritical points (Asseman T. III. P. II. p. 378).
The Monophysites or Maronites commonly use them only in
doubtful cases.
'

REM.

Even

in the last century, the

Maronite Gabriel Heva em-

ployed the vowel-letters to designate the vowels,

I

o,

==

e,

_t

i,

and

3.

Vowel

(v.

making

*\

or,

Michaelis. p. 29).

Signs.

The Syrians denote the vowels by diacritical points, or by

characters formed from and in imitation of the Greek vowels,
the latter mode being that now generally used. In ancient
manuscripts both modes occur together.
SOUND.

NAME.

FORM.

GREEK.

SYRIAC.
7

or

or

Pethocho

or

Revotzo

or

Chevotzo

VLaAS
*A

\
)

a.

Zekofo

or

Etzotzo

(jabl

o.

DIACRITICAL POINTS WHICH SUPPLY TJIK PLACE OF VOWELS. 31

REM.

The names

1.

pronouncing the vowel.

are derived from the form of the organ used in

The Greek forms from which they are derived

=u

also occurs without

are easily recognized.

vi

^\O

in

and

(For |A-*r^>, Luke

^&SO.
Psalm

xi

The

6).

first

xvii. 29, stands more correctly ]A*;I3

three vowel-signs may also be written beneath

the consonants.
7

REM.

As

2.

seems to have denoted a and

to pronunciation,

ae,

was sometimes sounded by the Nestorians like a (V.

In foreign words it quiesces in Q.
Asseman T. III. P. II. p. 379).
though
k

In

are contained both the

REM.

As

3.

to quantity

German

it

and

u.

be assumed with some certainty

may
7

ff

that

always
"
long, and

is

always short
7

and

with **,

with

Q are

according to others,

is

long;

short, except in foreign words.

Amira, on the other hand, maintains that

#,

6,

and the

Some grammarians also denote

even
with Q, are common.
the quantity of the vowels by different signs, thus ;

others,

SHORT.

LOXG.

Revotzo.

Chevotzo.

O
REM.

The dipthongs

4.

with

Etzotzo.

are formed with

preceding at the beginning or

Q and

**.

With Vau

middle of a word, au

e.

a)
g.

Oj

(ZolD:
I

preceding, ol

in

the

(the German eu

nearly

middle

of a

word,

after

^aiQj^QJ
Amira

with

ft)

_OlQjA')

to

-O

u).

I'M

a,

e.

g.

e.

g.

d)

Vau

doubled, the

With Yud

first

with

(besides the combinations b

ou

and

according
c above);
f

'

a)

with

a preceding

middle and

4.

at the

ai

end of a word,

Q.

oi

g.
e.

p*\

were employed

b)

with

in the

g.

Diacritical Points which sujyrfy

Tliese

earlier than

tin

place of Vowels.

were the vowels, and

KCSHOI AND RUKOK.

32

were used even

The point which

Nestorians.
OT

fern.

after the invention of the vowels,

by the

designates the suffix 3 sing.

seems to have originated from that system.

X

REM.

According

wiGl

wiOl

more

Amira

to

p. 51,

OO1==OCTI

while OO1

O01;

wCl= -Ol
<

definitely in his

Ludov. de Die.u has treated

Grammar,

p.

35

seq.

point when above the consonant denotes

a, o,

this subject

according to him the

and

u,

under

un-

it e,

The principal use of this point in

der wi and ( i, and under Q u.
the verb, is to denote the different persons and tenses (v. Amira,
Lud. de Dieu, p. 37). Throughout the preterite, with the
p. 51
In the partiexception of the 1 sing., it stands under the radicals.
y
it denotes, over the first radical, in Peal, _L, in Aphel,
or
ciple,
*
In the imperative and infinitive it may be
in Verbs med. Vau,
omitted or written underneath. The future takes it only under the
radicals, not under the preformatives, with the exception of the 1
where it stands above it (comp. Isenbiehl, Beobachtungen
sing.,
von dem Gebrauche des Syrischen Puncti diacritic! bei den Verbis,
;

Gottingen, 1773).

Kushoi and Riikok (- *r>o

5.
According to Lud. de Dieu and Norberg, the Syrians
have in fact the Sheva, and pronounce a vowelless consonant
1.

with a short half-sound of e

e.g.

Some Grammarians, as Amira,

^OQQJ pronounced n kum.

and the Zabians, use

according to Asseman, the doubling of consonants in
pronunciation (Daghesh forte) occurs among the Oriental
Syrians, and, according to the analogy of the Hebrew, in Pael

So

""

p.42,

too,

andEthpaalofVerbs^2>andMi* But as the doubly

consonant falls away where analogy would require
retained

8),

this

This duplication

is

written

to be
grammatical usage is still very doubtful.
retained only in foreign words.
it

Analogous withDaghesh lene

2.

is Kushoi,(\.Q. hardening),
a red point inserted over the aspirates, in manuscripts, which
removes the aspiration. The retention of the aspiration is
indicated by a point placed underneath, called liukok (i. e.
*

'Tr.

should be borne in mind that Sheva and Daghesh are not^ in

denoted by any written characters, and appear only in pronunciation.

It

>vriuc,

EIBDI.

33

REM. Some consider Kushoi to be Daghesh forte, which is

Lud. de Dieu, p. '25 sq., places
denied by Amira and Gabriel Sionita.
it
a) at the beginning of words, except where ^OpO precede, or where
;

the

word ends

preceding

retained;

,V,

e.g.

quiescent letter

e.

g.

w, O,

in

f,

in

^So,; 6)

OlluXSD

which case Rukok

the

in

c) after dipthongs

e.

after

middle,
g.

is

AA_^ IZoSo,
;

Rukok, on the contrary, occurs, besides

the cases noted under'a above a) when one of the aspirates ends a
syllable, but is in the same case hardened by a preceding vacant
17 as.

consonant

T.yo
;

e.

^\OL\

g.

follow a movable

So too

"\r*\-

Sheva

when, according

b)

e.

g.

(Ab)QO

to

c) after

Hebrew analogy, they

an open syllable

these consonants are not pronounced as aspirates in

e.

g.

Pa

and Ethpa. of Verbs ^<b, when the J preceding them has fallen away ;
from \yXJ and in verbs with the middle radical doubled,
g. iQAo

e.

where, in Hebrew, Daghesh forte stands.

Furthermore, here belong
the letters in which one having fallen away before them, is to be compensated

for, in

the future and infinitive of verbs jk2>, or in general

forte euphonic stands in Hebrew.
These points do

where Daghesh

not occur in printed works.

6.

Ribui

1. To distinguish the plural of nouns and verbs from

the singular written with the same consonants, the Syriac
makes use of Ribui, i. e. two points placed horizontally over
This sign is still retained, like the vowels, in
the word.

Thus, by means of these points

printed books.

|n \V)

|nV>

is

read

the kings, and distinguished from pVf), the kiny.

is also used in the 3 pltir. fern. pret. of Verbs 3 rad.
in all the conjugations except Peal ( 32), to distin-

This sign

Olaph

guish

it

from 3 sing. masc.

tJieinselves

,from

mannor Uilmi
pret.

e. g.

*a\

T yV*1

..tZ|

they

naveprafad

..Z] he has praised himself.

In liko

betwoon the 3 i>lur.

where the formatives Q and ^ at the

strongtln'iis llu> distinction

muse, and

end sometimes

A\

loin.,

away from the 3 sing, masc.; e. g. VL4o

The plurals, which are easily recognized, re-

fall

MEHAGYONO AND MAKHETONO.

34:

main without

this designation, though it is not omitted in

suffixes. In numerals the usage is arbitrary.
forms
with
plural
Some mark with this sign only the feminines, and the forms

with suffixes
REM.

e. g.

Amira,

-aZ>l2, tQQj>_2.
v

p. 48,
**

*"

*k*

when

omits Ribui,
A

the plural form

44)

has the signification .QJ| or OOUAjf, i. e. they are, but adopts the
above-mentioned use
numerals, and uses it also with prepositions
joined with plural suffixes ( 16. c).

2.

Ribui also serves

to

denote collectives

e.

1;QO a

g.

beeve,

a herd of beeves.

When

REM.
and

pret.

Ribui stands over > (with the exception of the 1 sing.

4.
participles Act. Pe., according to
REM.),

and the

fut.,

or coincides with a diacritical

one of the points
,
point representing
is omitted.
When three points come together, one of them represents

Kushoi.

7.

Mehagyono and Marhetono.

When

an accumulation of consonants without vowels,

and the Syrians wish to indicate that a monosyllabic
word is to be pronounced as a dissyllable, or a dissyllabic
word as a trisyllable, and so on, they place a line under the
occurs,

more rarely

consonant to which a vowel (usually

be supplied

e. g.

}AL**j.

This line

called

is

is

to

Mehagyono, and

accumulation in utterance
denotes a removal of this
is to
If, on the contrary, the voice
hurry over
(Diaeresis).
these same consonants, a line is drawn above them, which is
called

REM.

Marhetono, e. g. lAojl.
1.
Some Grammarians

viVnX and

before

**

in

place

jA**)>.

Mehagyono

Amira,

p. 41. sq.,

only

before

compares the

two with Diaeresis and Synceresis, which may have been transferred
from prosody into prose.
(Vd. Chrestom. Syr. ed. Hahn et Sieffert,
Lips. 1825. p. 11).

REM.
e.

g.

2.

*1*

Sometimes a
.

12

abbreviations

b) in
-

line is

found over consonants a) in numerals

"
~

e.

g rO

of exclamation O|, to distinguish

it

for

&
from Of.

c)

over the particle

T 7

|A-*rO

LINEA OCCULTANS.
8.

35

Linea Occultans.

This line placed under consonants denotes

a) that the
under which it stands is not pronounced
e. g.
;

letter

Z^a

by Ol
1.

is

beginning of a word, followed

to be pronounced weaker, and like 1
e.g. >Oll (vid.

12. 1); b) that

at the

Rem.4)

that the letter quiesces,viz., in the imperf. of

c)

the pass. Ethpeel and Ethpaal

^4^1, pronounced
and imp. from ^O19 which with the transposition
of the first two radicals is *>O1 (comp.
12. 1).
ethkatl,

e. g.

REM. Some have extended this also to the imperatives Ethtaphal

and Eshtaphal but in the latter especially, it appears to be merely
a diacritical designation of the imperat. As such it may in general
be regarded as coming under b and c above.
;

Tone.

9.

1.

ble,

The tone
when the

consonant

e. g.

fov/), Mdlco.

In an accumulation of consonants, where by Mehagyono

becomes the antepenultimate, the tone

REM.
(

stands regularly upon the penultimate syllaultimate does not terminate in a movable

7) the penultimate syllable

remains upon the stem-syllable.

It is more difficult to determine whether words, which, according
to Amira, p. 462, have Q in the penultimate, follow the same rule
;

e.

*.

g. (JCUjj,

2.

The tone

consonant

is

e. g.

on the ultimate, when

oA*

so too with

have arisen from 2a and

vid.

'

'

and should be pronounced ackuno or achuno.

Amira, pp.

A*.

e.

g.

it

ends in a movable

Q and

-i.

m\V)

final,

if

they

from ZosXso.

467469.
10. Signs of Interpunctum.

The Syrians, who do not possess the

accents, divide their periods, according to

Hebrew system of
Amira,

p. 475, into

GENERAL VIEW.

36

and apodosis, which again are subdivided into

smaller parts, and include the more precise designation of
In this respect they designate ; a)
subject and predicate.
the separate members of the protasis with (:) ; i) the close
of the protasis with (.), which is also the sign of interrogation ; c) the separate members of the apodosis with (.*),
which also marks longer interrogations ; and d) the close
of a period is marked by a point, which as it also occurs in
the middle of a period, some consider to be the smallest
mark of interpunction, and (>) or (::) the largest point.
REM. Amira, p. 479, mentions a point standing over a word
which indicates a question, address, admiration, praise, command, and
protasis

the

like.

CHAPTEE

II.

PECULIARITIES AND CHANGES OF THE LETTERS.

11.

General View.

As the changes in the different parts of speech are effected

partly by consonants and partly by vowels, this chapter is
In the first place, those
naturally divided into two parts.
take
which
place uniformly, in accordance with
changes
fixed laws, in pronouns, verbs, and nouns, must be accurately
distinguished from those which occur only in individual forms.
Though the former class of changes will be here principally
treated, yet in order to afford a proper connection between
them, that which occurs universally will be first treated of,
and that which takes place in special and individual cases
will be
appended, either independently or in remarks.

12.

Of

Changes of the Consonants.

those changes in the radical consonants which Hebrew

grammarians classify as Assimilation, Transposition, Falling

CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS.

87

away, Exchange, and Addition, the first only is wanting in

And this want is only in form, for in point of fact
Syriac.
this feature exists in those cases where a letter is
dropped
in pronunciation by the occurrence of Linea occultans (^ 8.
comp. Gesenius, Lehrgebaude, p. 132). Here should be noticed the following
1. Consonants are dropped in pronunciation,
by the
In Oeneral ;
occurrence of Linea occultans, as follows A)
:

nouns whose middle radical

a) in

mano ;

b) >

doubled

is

without a vowel before 2;

e.

e. g.

12,**
Q

suffixes of the 3 masc. sing. wiOl

uOlQ

the verb, and

..lOlO

of the noun plural

of

wiOiCu.

16); or

Table to

(v.

Ol in

c)
%.

woUb,

when Linea occultans has arisen from theGreek Spirilus asper;

i

*,

^LDOOl>

e.g.

ff

Pw|jw]

from

as (jijoo*
V"

with

O in derivatives of verbs ^^aand

(I)

\S>,

<

1^

In particular

B)

"

*i

initial

in

^-^l

^-***!

s*

is

'^

**J|

this the case

a)

an d in the pronoun
_ *
9

t>

Ml in connection with the participle, p] \\+

b)

with

Ol.
.

particularly in the following cases

and wOI

a) in the

pronouns OOl

with the throwing back of the vowel upon the

*

preceding vacant consonant

A^A

ooi

e. g.

or with the

with the preceding vowel

e. g.
ooi |AO pronounced frsheu; in which case, however, before
r
falling

^ *

away of the

"*>

passes into

OOl,
(v.

letter

when

38)

T 1

he /mil killed]
in ^l]

to

back upon

the pronouns AJ]

oAj) masc. ,-iAj]

and

finally

U.KM.

those

when

go away,
the

c)

oou

y) in

e. g.

with

> in

Linoa occultans

adiliH-otl undi-r

(/

an<l

and

(OO1

give;

in

28)

(v.

**hl\ fern.,

xs^O

c)

with

falls

d) with J in

and

their plurals

sonic other words; e.g. ]Als;

2^3 duiujhUv

is ivt:iinrtl

I-.LT.

tt

^'

e.g.

should have a vowel which

&Sffbt ASif

mase.
fi'in.,

it

p) in ]ooi

..

OOU fo

for

p|

'

^'^*

lor

an auxiliary verb;

is

il

ooi p|

e. g.

nmlrr

jZni>t|

(v.

|2>*|

in

8).

nouns

(Icriv.-d

|2omJ^

from

and ninnv

CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS.

38

**

>

"X

*X

OO1 and w01 when they are used

occurs in (j|
16. 1.,
54. A. 3.
for the logical copula or substantive verb (comp.
a and c). In these pronouns, even when they stand pleonastically
oo. A), the logical copula is fundamentally involved, as is con(
others.

also

It

firmed by the pleonastic use of ]ool ( 68. A), which verb loses
Liuea occultans only when it is used absolutely in the sense of
to be, to become, to come to pass ;
As to further inflection of

2*

bOTU
2.

changed into

is

sibilants in Eihpe., Etlipa.,

wi^Am] from VCD

Etihta.- e. g.

for

L before

is

Transposed

Rem.

29. 1.

compare

7 7

.LDfl|

^-?l

for

*jjoA] from _oo.

after

..

*>

^-J

There

^_1^|.

^L

doubled in Ethpe. of Verbs

31. 2). j as middle radical

,a3|Zl from

"

into > after

e.

g.

and Ql

e.

Dropped
7
fc*J| ^) and

with Linea occultans

as

first

J>Q...Co22]

g.

sometimes transposed

is

|O* Also > in the imperat. from ,.oi)

are

no transposition when

is

(v.

e. g.

8).

07

3.

i"^^

1<

is

(v.

and

e. g.

>>J;Q

for

intin.

and

^oa"!)

and

in

^>]

for

and Ql

31. 1)

in

28. 1)

+*

b)

Verbs

+*s>

and

}iamk>

for

sing. fat. Be.

^cb]

e. g.

for

J as first radical,

29. 2),

Qio fromQ2j.

e. g.

nouns as |innV>

%a]

^}

and Q as middle radical

]si

the 1

in

radical

Verbs

part. Pa. of

^S

33. 1),

Here belong such

The same

is

true also in

Verbs ^il ( 34. 1), and the

one of two Z without a vowel

respect to the middle radical of

nouns derived therefrom

standing between them

c)

e. g.

Also when

jZp** for IZZpAi.

L stand together in the fut. pass.

e. g.
*\&oLL for
^\4oZZZ. Finally Z falls away at the end of the fern, endthree

ings
4.
e. g.

ZQ and

AJL

e. g. <*>^\^"> for

Exchanged are
^iOl] for

Syriac,

1 into

-^

^011;

b)

passes into >,

and

J
;

the gutturals

a)

also

Zo^ALo.
2

and

before Ol

in transferring

Hebrew words

into

into

-,

-35

of verbs

*\y

Z^,

into

into

sometimes
Ol

e.

QUIESCENT LETTERS.

89

c) 2, when transposed with sibilants, in the

into > and ^, according to Rem. 2. above;
over
passive, goes
2
in
construct state fern., and before suffixes
with
the
]
(t)

45,

aud in the Ethpe. and ^Apa. of verbs

^
-*

-46);

"

Rem.

REM.

]s>

28.

r^ZZf for r^|Z|

e. g.

This

has been also applied to nouns derived from

last

|2>

Verbs;

JjxlZ.

e.g.

e.

the form

)">
(

j..

many

|Z

The

found.

is

^ IL

5.

where

'Pwftaioff

12. 1.

A.

wAl

e. g.

for wiA
i

^QJ.^OI
words

Ol

*,

and

tf-jvoiJoj ;

does not represent Spiritus asper

added where

c) J is

13.

in

e. g.

supplies the place

it

-,

of Daghesh forte with Linea occultans

even in compound

c);

DOOUQD

later Syriac; e. g.

Hence

\^

Aphel do not belong

oi to denote the Spiritus asper in Greek"

)jL.k>ooi>
"

Tlie

doubt-

at the beginning, before a

I))

words in the

Ol

or J v t|

\^

1T

e. g.
2a3} for 2aD
Greek words beginning with 2

S-aSiw

cases

<L

is

g.

vacant consonant

e. g.

derivatives from

also in

'

which may be derived from

*

(A^joZ from ^?O|.

Added are a) sometimes
e.

here;

cases this usage

r

Irvi^

g.

In

a r

*f

ful

from **jJ|,

e. g.

'r

21 ^

= TUWi

Quiescent Letters.

w.
vowel-letters
o, 1, and, according to some,
in
the
preceding vowel.
quiesce
,

also,

Here belongs only Ol

REM.

for

of the suf. 3 sing. fern.

oi

of the Hebrew.

ft

The following
1.

and
falls

^lij

e.g.

^o]!sD

back upon
for

Hebrew;

^)*J.
*. g.

letters

and

1 final in

quiesce
e. g.

D|SD

]3^,

and

Uy-J

if

it

medial in -

have a vowel,

the preceding vacant consonant

And
>p

this

e.

g.

so in words transferred from the

VOWEL-LETTERS WHICH ARE NOT SOUNDED.

40

words

REM.

and

1Zao]r>

on are

xi/3w<ro

a and

for

represented by

fD j|o

sometimes by

e.

N.g>

g.

"

is

medial and
-

initial

71
x

>

ap%aff.

and

usually quiesces in

14.

e. g.

V>1^,

jA^JJ for jA^J).

Vowel- Letters which are not sounded

j, O,

],

toAj]

(Oliant).

are not sounded

the pronouns 2 plur.masc. and

conjoined with the participle

e. g.

g.

In the following cases

1. ) in

e.

back upon the preceding vowelless prefix e. g.

7 T
OL^O* Also between two consonants A quiesces
'
Vt *
\

e. g.

find

quiesces, in

final,

we

the later language

falls

for
QlrtO
"

e.g.

used

also

%^

g.

^.u^, kjJiL..Z1*

QDQ

and

e.g.

stands

in the termination

= $iXK'of.
r

^.,

4).

*i

3.

In Greek

i>

also

11*

fl>[

SOOD and sometimes OQ

e.

"iV

and

In the later Syriac

In
hCDQ2)| = a^aij.
x.7
=
kDaL^| 'ASr]vai; DQ3)| =

ai

77

|f

ai

xcupoj.

e.g.

pp>r><y>

for

f\

Greek words O quiesces in

In
05

e.

o quiesces in
Jljooi (3. Eem.

OQ =

P^,

2.

REM.

y
1
/ 1
in pfl.,

quiesces in

fern.

^oAj]

to denote the present

kotelitun, in

^\fto pronounced

^-iAj)

tense,

which case the

^ of the participle is not sounded.

at the end of words ; a) in verbal endings
2. O and w
without any vowel preceding (2 pret. sing. fern. ; 3 plur.
masc. and fern.: imperat. sing. fern, and plur. masc. and 2
;

fat. sing, fern.)

^^a

n>.

e. g.

wkOiQ
~

lowed by 001
.

^lAL^fi

0^4

where w.

is

&)

n the suffixes

sounded only when

fol-

e.

\V)Z] yesterday,

the emphatic state

g.
.

i\
(

OOl

li^O pronounced bekyu ;

rest,

and the

46. 1).

like,

which form

in

]1 in

CHANGES

IN T1IK VOWELS.

41

Changes in the Vowels.

to a less extent than in Hebrew, the
15.

Although

vowels

in

Syriac, undergo various changes and modifications in

pect to formation and derivation, still they are exchan>/l.

add"

transposed, dropped or

I.

exchanged partly in accordance with tli<_They

genius of the language, and partly in transferring Hebrew
and Chaldee words. The genius of the language requires
the following exchanges of vowels a) in the preformativ ~
are

I.

of the
+*S)

and infm. Pe. in simple

fut.

(U-*

passes over into

32),

but before gutturals and

for jf

>r

e. g.

^D)J,

V,
.90

with

'

struct state, passes over into

e.g.

in the con-

construct state

^04

e. g.

rS]io

the end of words, into

> at

b) in the feminine

Verbs

in

syllables,

In transferring words from the Hebrew and

the
Chaldee,
following vowel changes may be noted a) for

Ao4

45. 2).

the Syriac prefers

e.

M VI

g.

= nb} ^M = 0~i^
XT-:
5

\\

names mostly with

exchanged in proper
*
*

is

6)

r.

with

Q-

c.

l*?OO

g.

= ^'i

when

perat. plur. masc. Pe.

with suffix woi ciL^ao

vowel over
52. 1;
1

U?QO

in general; a)

a suffix

is

added

= (ChaKl.

]k>CLt

in the iin-

e. g.

n ^ n ^P,

concerning the falling back of

13.

tl

u-

1.

a syllable
(

pn>lixcd,
e.

e. g.

1 with

3;
^,
OH, upon prefixes, compare
Rem. B) in Particular ; a) in ^l), win-nvacant, the vowel of the ^ falls back upon it e.g.
ASlI (12.1); b) in some nouns of the form ^OfO.

},

45. 3

emphatic state

A)

e. g.

c)

A^ll for

when

Q_

= nSlSP

or

53.1.

is

6)

g.

**A2Lt

or with

Vowels are transposed

2.

ever

e.

ir

is

is

appended and in the emphatic state

of the form
48. A. Decl. IV)
Ijoa.
;

]Xoa
placed

^DQQ^

^OOb and VOfOO with .^

before Q wlu-n Q and > retain tlu-ir

r)

in

T-VoonVw.

In ,1

whon

it

enters

int..

CHANGES

42

THE VOWELS.

IN"

moves forward upon r e. g. ^-kOpl, l^Orl*

The vowel of a final mixed syllable is dropped, wKen
an entire syllable is added at the end, especially when
composition,

3.

the last radical begins the

new

syllable

A&jQ fern.; in the nouns

This vowel remains unchanged a)

in the verb

e. g.

masc.

HEM.

when merely a

formative

letter, without a vowel, is added ; e.g. ClX^,O from ^j^O

b)
a syllable is added, if the
stem-syllable remain a mixed one ;
;

o^O

from

becomes a simple one,

and moreover

the following cases ;

of the 3
fem.plur.pret.and 2 fern. plur. imperat;

Daghesh

forte stands

in

e.

^Ql emphatic

g.

/)in words ofDeclension I.masc. (comp.

7

^0

state

iOQj emphatic

(1 *,S;

/3)

where inHebrew

state

In

^i\

emphatic

original vowel only

0Q-, the

state

g.

the stem-syllable
in the second form

48.A).

-p

e.

when

c)

when

reappears (comp. 48. A. Decl. IV).

Vowels are added ;

4.

ning of words

(imp.), >Oll

but

a) with

*, and

1,

and 1 usually take

I
wi

at the begin-

i,

and
;

e. g.

JDAj

vacant consonants at the beginning of a word,the

*

e. g.

-p

vf>*"> for

^QD\

e.g.

i*

usually takes

of two

b)

first

(Vf>~>

when two vacant

so also

consonants in the middle of a word follow

for

IA.MJO

when

or

takes

in

Hebrew, the

first

(>.

|A>j^j

e. g.

has Daghesh

from tl^K or finally when

VAytf
three vacant consonants would come together in the middle
forte

of a

e.

word

ft,.") for

g.

e. g.

Al^L^t

is

sometimes

before A,

for

.7
;

13.

the participle

fern.

This assumed vowel

.

.7

*
from \v4^
in the emphatic state of
3), excepting
and
pass, of Verbs |] in Pa., Aph.,

e.g.

(v.

AS&of.

&.QO

(pret. PC.)

where
is added to distinguish it from the^active
Eshta.,
48. B. Decl.IV. Kern.).
Finally Q is asparticiple (comp.
sumed in the emphatic state sing, of some words ; e. g.
from ]3aLo for "jAlaSo
c) a vowel is assumed
this vowel is _I_
with Q between two vacant consonants
e. g.
:vhen it stands at the beginning of a mixed syllable

")'A^Q2iS>

CHANGES IN THE VOWELS.

j
;

but

when

it

43

stands in a simple syllable

e. g.

d) The assumption of a vowel is arbitrary, when

there are two vacant consonants, of which the first can be
attached to the preceding, and the second to the following
syllable

e.

g.

VQ,V)

and )A.O^D;

if

the second consonant

must be assumed, for .*., Q and

1,
without a vowel between two consonants.

be

cannot stand

PART SECOND.
ETYMOLOGY,

OR,

PARTS OF SPEECH.

CHAPTEK L

PRONOUNS.

16.

Personal and Possessive Pronouns.

The Personal Pronouns are divided into two classes

Separate Pronouns, which stand as separate words, and
and Suffixes, consisting of
mark the nominative case

formed from the separate pronouns, which are

appended to other parts of speech appended to Verbs, they
mark the accusative
appended to nouns, the possessive

syllables

pronoun, or the relation of the genitive

they form the remaining cases.

tions,

and, with preposi-

TABLE OF PRONOUNS AND SUFFIXES.

TABLE OF PRONOUNS AND SUFFIXES.

SUFFIXED TO VERBS.

8CFFIXED TO NOONS.
IK

-*

Sing.
1

1.

Sim.

In

2.

C.

2 m.
2 f

OOI

01-

3 m.

01-

OOI

01

Ol

f.

01

OU.

Plur.
7

c.

in.

2 f

.on*.

SEPARATE FROM THE VERB.

3 m.

OOI

,-UOI
f.

QL*.

46 REMARKS AND EXPLANATIONS CONCERNING THE TABLE.

REMARKS AND EXPLANATIONS CONCERNING THE TABLE.
Tke Personal Pronoun.

I.

The second and

first

is

third persons have

of the

person
is denoted by

.7

sing.,

common
+*.

gender. The fern, of the 2

to the masc.
In the 3

appended

t>

001 masc. and wOl

sing.

two genders, while the

fern.,

are used rather in a

demon-

strative sense, while ooi masc. and aOT fern., are used in
connection with adjectives and participles rather to designate
the present tense.
And so in the plur., the first forms given
above are used rather substantively as nominatives, and the
second as accusatives (comp.
36).
Concerning Linea occultans under 1 and Ol of the 1 and 3 sing., see
12.1.
II.

Suffix Pronouns.

SUFFIXES

A.

OF THE VERB.

In the suffixes, or abbreviated forms of the separate pronouns, an ancient obsolete form whose characteristic was
not 2 but D, lies at the basis of the 2 sing, and plur. (comp.
Gesen. Lehrgeb. 203).

Of the

suffixes to verbs, given in the Table, those marked

two classes ; the first of which are attached to consonants (with the exception of ) in the forms of the regular
a, fall into

verb

and the second mainly

and in part

to the

imperat. and

to the

same forms of Verbs

fut.

]),

of the regular verb.

The forms placed between 1 and 2, are common to both.

The suffixes marked b are appended to forms with Q and
Where this form is
A, which then quiesce in _1 and _L.
wanting under b it is comprehended under a. Finally the
and also to
suffixes under c are attached to the forms with
^,
The forms wanting
the ii sing. masc. and 3 plur. fem. pret.
under c are comprised under a. On their mode of union,
36, and 37, and the accompanying Tables.
comp.
1

B.

The
in

SUFFIXES OF NOUNS or POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

suffixes of the

nouns masc.

noun

sing.,

(possessive pronouns) are attached,

to the emphatic state ( 45,) with the

SUFFIXES TO PARTICLES.

47

e.g. ,AV)
away, of \emphatic state
*) Vf)> In the
with suflT.
plural they coalesce with the endfalling

ing of the construct state

state

does

jk

vowel.

^V^n with

"iVv~

suff.

and

pass into Q,

In the noun

Only

fern,

considered

e.g.

construct

in the 3 sing. masc.

_L

the union

is

the suffix with a union vowel

is

with the falling away of

oiA^oAo from emphatic

g.

noun

in the 3 sing. fern.

attached to the emphatic state,

e.

may be

so that they

-.,

as attached to the final consonant of the

state

In

]A^oAo.

the remaining persons (1 sing. 2 and 3 plur.) suffixes sing.

e. g.
46. 2)
are attached to the construct state (v.
;

*jASoA^ from

the construct state

from construct

state

A^oAo,

plur.

^^DA^oAc

A^oAo.

REM. For the complete union of nouns and suffixes, compare

46 48, and the accompanying Tables.
Besides, the possessive pronoun may be expressed in a
separate form from the noun,

(from

>

chald.

"ittfja

i 1}

by means of some form of

and ^ ) with a suffix, thus

Plural.

Singular.

2.

^i-lNo

<QQAjj

'>.

^_OlXj>

jOOl\j>

REM.

your.
<JLl->

their.

This form, which corresponds with the

I

v^-^t)

relating to;

e.

AV^\Zo,

g.

^Qn\j>

Prepositions,

A/x.

German der meinige

noun, indicates an emphasis

<r-

,ij

G.

The

Ou^i>

/ier.

(mine)etc. occurring after a suffix to the

e. g.

but thy scholars.

Sometimes

it

signifies

to us.

SUFFIXES TO PARTICLES.

which were

take suffixes sing, and plur.

in part originally nouns,

Singular suffixes are attached

OTHER PRONOUNS.

48

JS

to

in,

jAcQQ and jAa

,S\Q
or

Jr** or *J9,-K about,

without,

towards^

yj.

>QM>-^O

The

ow account of ;

e.

and Ai
REM.

suffix plural

oA^Lo

g.

>]

(AjjaZ before

occurs with

^&k>

compare the Table

suffixes,

52.

6Mer Pronouns.

The Demonstrative Pronoun

is

declined as follows

Plural.
F.

only

aside,

."> between.

17.
1.

2ox2

fern,

15.

with both plural suffixes

For the complete union with

belonging to

from,

^^ over,

*?\\**for,

oe/ore,

io^o

after,

nouns) under.

^D

to,

\>,*Snn\ towards, against,

comp.

after,

Plural suffixes are attached to

2.

2oL

the sign of the dative,

Singular.

M.

C.

M.

F.

(,6.)

(>

REM.

Sometimes, in the

sing.,

the

fern.

(>O1

wC7l|)C7I.
I

~>

"

2.

e.

g.

f^

The

ti7

^i\|

or

^\O1

Relative for all

is

^*J!>

pi.

pOl

OOljiist

this,

only used in compari-

WCft.

numbers and genders

7
*

which, that,

e.g.

y^|>,

70
QJO1 and

-.

The Chaldee ^--^l

<Ais.

*jOl, forming

Sometimes OO1 and ^O1 precede

(JO! ^01,/MS^

sons;

OO1 and fem.

-\

united with the

is

personal pronoun 3 sing, masc.

"

and with the pronouns ^So

M-]
it becomes interrogative.
c.

r/2.

is
-7

J,

H /
(

cow. preceding,
*P

REM.

*7

|L| having

a relative signification with J following

an exception to the general

3.

The

numbers

Interrogative
is

^0 who.

it,

is

rule.

a) for persons of both genders

It unites

and

with ooi following, and

II

VERB

IK

GENERAL VIEW.

forms oilo and ]L*\ masc.

49

who? VrO &" who?

1 -

I) lib

and

TD

what, refer to things

both persons and things.

Jiib, iOLo

c)

'^'] refers to

The Reciprocal and Reflexive Pronouns are formed

21. 2.
22. 2.
24. 2), or by the nouns
(
l*U soul, and ]V>Oin person, with suffixes appended
4.

partly by passives

(comp. the Syntax).

CHAPTER

II.

THE VERB.
18.

General View.

1. The Verb is, as in Hebrew, the most important of the

parts of speech, since it lies at the basis of the formation of
the others. Verbs may be divided into the three following
classes, in so far as new verbal forms are derived from them

in

accordance with definite laws, or as a noun

considered as their stem:

VH&O

'write,
1>

c.

to

Mil

Primitives',

a)

5)

e.

g.

t>

to celebrate

Easter, from

The Stem-form

in

from paoi ten

;fiQ^ to tithe,

fc^

Easter.

j**^

the 3 sing.

masc. pret.

ced as a monosyllable, by the help of

middle radical intransitive, and

usually of three radicals (verbum triliterum),

From

to

Denoiiiumtu'tt*, Bnltteqnent

c)
7

'2.

*oAD

be

from *D>1

formations from nouns

.*)]

g.

to

Verbal Derivatives (Conjugations)

g. *ojl to justify,

e.

is

and

is

consists

pronoun-

placed over the

in intransitive verlx.

Derivatives or Conjugations,
which agree closely with the ground-form in the inflection
"f persons, and the principal characteristics
mood and
tense. Modem graniniariaus have added a third conjuo;ation,
Shaphel, to the two originally derived from the groima-form.
3.

this are fornu-d

flu-

The passive

^>

.t'

formed by prefixing Z|, and has not only a

nassive but also a reciprocal and ivtlexive signitication.
is

THE REGULAR VERB.

">0

The Conjugations

are

follows

as

Passive.

Active.
1.

Peal

,0

to

kill;*

2.

Pael

^\&O

to

murder

3.

Aphel

^&o)

to

cause to kill

Shaphel

^^n* to cause to kill

REM.

Ethpeel

Ethpaal

;
;

Ethtaphal

(rare) Eshtaphal

do not have the whole of the conjugations; and

All verbs

wherePael andAphel are found together, there

77

in their signification;

4.

The

e.

'

g. r

d*

is

to

honor, J-DO|

usually a difference

to be

burdensome.

like the other Semitic dialects, has a Pre-

Syriac,

and Future. It has, moreover, an Imperative in the

passive, and two Participles, an active and a passive, in the
active.
The Hebrew Infinitive absolute and Infinitive construct are in Syriac united in one form (v.
19.B.3).
terit

REM.
manner

The other
;

the Present

relations of time are supplied in the following

is

expressed by the participle with the personal

001
It
the former joined with the participle, the latter with the preterite.
are contained in the future, to denote which more explicitly, (OO1 is also frequently used (v.Syntax).

The Optative and Subjunctive^

5. Verbs, finally, are divided into two principal classes,

In regular verbs the radical letters
Regular and Irregular.
remain unchanged, while in irregular' verbs, one of the radicals either falls away (Defective Verbs), or quiesces (Quies-

cent Verbs) v.

27.

1.

19.

The

REGULAR VERBS.

Inflection of

Regular Verbs in General.

The formation of Verbs, in respect to person,

mood is effected, in general, by uniform laws.

tense,

and

The

irre-

gular verbs are formed in a different manner, in particular

The infinitive being considered in English the
*Literally, he killed, etc.
is
ground-form of the verb, and for the sake of brevity,
uniformly used to
TR.
represent the Syriac ground form 3 masc. sing.

REGULAR VERBS.

51

It will therefore
cases only, according to their special laws.
be most convenient to treat, under the regular verb, of whatever belongs to the universal analogy of the verb.

In the following Tables of the Inflection of Kegular and

Irregular Verbs, the following signs are used The radical
The vowels which stand immeletters are denoted by *.
the
over
*,
diately
belong to the inflection of transitive
verbs; and those vowels which are separated from the
*
by .... belong to intransitive or guttural verbs, or denote
Radical letters which have fallen
other forms in erjual use.
in
of Irregular Verbs,
the
Table
are
denoted
27 by
away,
Those which take their place, stana over this sign.
:

TABLE OF PERSONAL INFLECTIONS.

52

8
O
S
p^

^
o
02

W
An
fe

O
W
H?
w
<1
H

TABLE OF THE TEMPORAL INFLECTION OF KEOULAB VERBS. 53

g
w

w
w
H
O
hrt

PERSONAL

54

A.

The

INFLECTIONS.

Personal Inflections (comp. Table

inflection of persons is

found in

its

1).

most simple form

and imperative, where formative syllables

appended only to the stem (Affirmatives). In the future
the form is more complex, additions being received at the
beginning (Preformatives\ and at the end. The inflection
in the preterit

are

is

as

follows

In the 3 sing. pret. the simple verbal stern suffices for the
masc.; but in the fern., 2, preceded by _!_ (= n~)> i g appended and considered as a sign of that gender. The 3 plur.,
which has a two-fold gender, is distinguished in the masc.
by the addition of the plural-sign Q, from which the fern,
in its simple form is distinguished only by a silent - instead
In the same person of the fut. the inquiry into the
of Q
of
the preformative J in the sing. masc. and the plur.
origin
masc. and fern., is a difficult one. The opinion that the J
had its origin in * is opposed by the fact that among the
Zabians this preformative exists, while there is no similarity
between those two letters. More consideration is probably
*

&

-X

>

due to the derivation from poi and ^QJOI (comp.

17).

In

the masc., in addition to the preformative J, is

distinguished as in the pret., by the plural-sign Q with ^ paragogic, which causes the vowel of the last radical syllable
And thus the ^ in the fern, reminds one of
to fall away.
the paragogic final syllable H5 in Hebrew. The abbreviated
the

plur.,

form of the personal pronoun evidently appears in the 2

Thus in the pret. sing., L masc. and .-/
sing, and plur.
\\\ masc. and uAj] fern., as ,oZ masc.
~
~**A"lT
A" n*
and ^_Z fem. are to ^pAj) masc. and ^Ajj fem. in the plur.
The same is true of the preformative L in the same person
of the fut. sing, and plur. where the fem. sing., in order to
designate the gender, takes wi final and ^ paragogic, with a
like influence upon the vowel of the preceding radical

fem. are related

>

*1

In the plur. the 2 pers. shares with the 3 pers.,

syllable.
this same character at the end.
In the I sing. pret. the original form of the L with _L

if|

preceding, has not been

T

shown.

But

in the plur.

^ and

^J,

as well as

before the

INFLECTION OF THK TENSES

1 sing,

AND MOODS.

J before the 1 plur. tut. refer us the

and

more

~>

defi-

and ^J**. Here too it should be noticed

nitely back to
that the 1 plur. tut. is distinguished from the 3 sing. masc.

which has the same form, by Ribui.

The prefbrmatives of the fut. uniformly take

except in
Pael and Shaphel, where (with the exception of the 1. sing.)
they are vacant, and in Aphel, where they take _.
The imperative coincides with the future in respect to
formatives at the end, except that the paragogic ^ in the 2
sing. fern, and 2 plur. masc. falls away, the former person
ending in the feminine sign -, and the latter in the plural

sign

In.

both cases in Peal,

is

retained as the vowel

of the radical syllable. Finally the fern. plur. ends with

and the vowel of the final syllable is retained.

B. Inflection of the Tenses and Moods (comp. Table

With the

1.

more

preterit

specifically

characteristics

(the

^*

11).

of which

are

given in Table 11. and the section following),

The imperat. IV-il

Verbs Med. A, between the second and thinl
but in Yerbs Med. E. and 3
Q quiescing in

the imperative most nearly coincides.

receives, in
radicals,

middle radical takes

All the remaining

imperatives are like preterits, except that in Ethpe. and
Ethpa., Linea occultans stands under the middle radical

Gutt. the

with
REM.
and

Eshta.,

2.
J.

preceding.
The same holds good
if

in respect to the imperatives Ethta.

Linea occultaus be admitted in them

The future is formed from the imperative by prefixing

In Aphel the characteristic falls away, and in passives

In Ethpe. and Ethpa. after

of the formative syllable 2]
the rejection of Linea occultans, the vowels of the preterite
re-appear.
3. The infinitives (of which the simple form denotes the

in do or the absolute state, but with \ pivtixed denotes the construct state) are formed from tin- preterites by
prefixing Lo. They end (excepting in the Peal, \vlu-iv they

gerund

coincide precisely with the preterit)

in

Q and
,

in the apoco-

THE GROUND FORM PEAL.

56

pate feminine form, in

2a

changing the vowel of the

last

syllable of the preterit

into

4. The participles are formed from the preterit

as folin peal, active form, the first radical takes -2-, and
lows
in the passive form *..*_ is inserted between
the second _L
the last two radicals. In the other conjugations So is prefixed, and _L, in the second syllable of the active form, is
But this distinction appears
changed, in passives, into _L
only in the absolute state of the masc., and even here is lost
in verbs 3 Gutt., >, and oi, the active form of which like;

wise takes

_!_

The preformatives of the fut, infin., and part, mostly

take JL. but in Aphel they take _L. rejecting the ] accor5.

ding to No. 2
a vowel.

and in Pael and Shaphel they are without

REM. For the reciprocal use of these twoTables, which suffice for
the complete formation of the regular verb, it is to be remarked ;
The forms in
that Table I. contains the personal inflection of Peal.
Table II. in the inflection according to Table I., retain their characteristic vowels,

and merely take from Table

I.

the aftbrrnatives with

the vowels thereto belonging. Where, in pret. Peal, the vowel of the
stem falls away, the remaining preterits also lose the vowel of the
but Ethpe. takes 7 over the first radical,where
last radical syllable
;

this

has _L in Peal.*

In the

fut.

the vowel of the last radical

9,

lost
syllable is uniformly

where

Q falls

away

this case also in Ethpe.the first radical takes

in Peal, except that in

_L

In imperatives the
X

vowel of the
imperat.

last radical syllable is retained, as

is

retained in the

Peal.

20.

A.

THE GROUND FORM PEAL

ITS

FORMATION AND

SIGNIFICATION.
1. The usual form of Peal is *\&O (transitive verb mcd. A).
Besides this the form with _i (med. E) is always used

*Tho
in

inflection of the different persons in the preterit

order to perceive the verification of this remark. TR.

should be noticed

FORMATION AND SIGNIFICATION.

ITS
for intransitives

class also
first

e. g.

to *//,

J3\&

to be

To

near.

which throw back

to feel

>)a

zfy

e. g.

*\y

*oAft

g.

belong Verbs ],

radical

Verbs

e.

57

upon the

pain, or derivatives of

= m't>

Tne form Med.

O.

Hebrew
still

pears in the Verb >Q2iO to shudder.

REM. With the inflection of Verbs Med.A. agree those with 3
T

Ol

OliO

e. g.

to

ap-

rad.

OlioZ

name,

this

Verbs Med. E. retain

admire.

to

when

iv- >rrt
1

Verbs Med. A.

in

stands in the radical syllable.

to the forms of the 3 plur. fern. pret.

adduced by Buxtorf, the

^5

first is

r>

^&

^5*"*

found only in Verbs

In
;U|

''

and

(J

ik

_O1.

the second seems to have originated from crasis with the alHx

There are instances to be found, though

rare, in

which

is

placed

^\^Q The apocopate form of

sometimes found in Peal
e.g. Luke ix.

over the third radical in the 1 plur.

*

Q is

the infinitive with

*

33.

***>.
dAd^O.
;

In the imperat.plur.masc. with

Q;2lklJi.

quiesces in
(p.

also

1>

Besides the 2 plur.fera.with

^k,

e.g.

300) adduces another form,viz

instead of

final

Amira

.iSQ^D* The imperat.ofVerbs

Med. E.takes

paragogic,

though the

form with

transitive

is

also

found

QfDO^O from JD^O* Sometimes another form with

More rarely the vowel of the
g. Rom. xiii. 3. r^l*

e.g.

tk

occurs

e.

imperat. differs from that of the

fut.

as in the

Verb

imperat.^1* Not only the imperat. but the fut

of those having the third rad. a guttural, take
3 sing. fern, the form with - attached is

fut.

a form of the

fat.

with

e.

.n.Sl

g.

emphatic

state

|J-x>,

and the

is

often used.

if
form

^*x

(Mark

xiv. 67),

in

^M*U.

In th-

frequent.

Also

e.g.

more

together will:

In the part. act.

absol. fern, are alike

e.

iinincilialf

g.
(

|J

^f)

tin-

emphatic

The

active
*

..niiccticn

\\ith

^>xB
transcribing. The

(verse 54), is ji.'rhajis to be regarded as an error in

in intransitive \.rl-s
passive form is always fully written
;

^1 P,

noun of the

Instead of the part. act. vt^O, the participial

state masc.

^tyj, fut.

of Verbs Med.E. and

tin' first

radical

sometimes takes

Passsive intransitives occasionally occur in

DERIVATIVE CONJUGATIONS.

58
an active

sense,

sometimes derived from transitives

I .V

bearing,

H-^|

e.

g.

holding.

To the inflection of the participle belongs also the idiom

by which the present tense is expressed by abbreviated personal pronouns, appended, like afformatives, to the particiBut this formation occurs only in the 2 sing, and the
1 and 2. plur. masc. and fern., and is as follows :

ple.

Participle Passive.

Participle Active.

2. From the preceding remarks it appears that the signifi

cation of Peal may be transitive or intransitive.
Sometimes
we find both forms in the same verb. In some cases there

ms\ and rf>S\ to

e. g.
no difference of signification
chew ; and in other cases there is a difference in signification;

is

e.g.

to divide,

*y*^>

B.

*Mt2>

to be

DERIVATIVE CONJUGATIONS.
21.

1.

The

divided.

Ethpeel

characteristic of this conjugation,

?v*

as in the other
*

the formative syllable \ and the vowel

or in
passives,
Verbs 3 Rad. Gutt. _L, in the last syllable
(vid. Amira,
The passive conjugations are distinguished from
p. 278).
each other generally by the vowels over the radical letters,
or by the addition of 2. (Ethta.) or by the insertion of *
is

(Eshta.}.

REM.

The

first

Upon the transposition of the sibilants with Z see 12. 2.

radical takes y in the 3 sing. fern, and 1 siug. pret., in all

of the imperat., in the 2 sing. fern, and 2 and 3 plur. masc. and fern.

DERIVATIVE

CONJUGATIONS.

of the future, and finally in the part,

masc.

According

to others

is

59

excepting the absolute state

used,

but only in Verbs

A|^1

Pk even

e.
when 1 falls away
ASA*|. This
g. Acts. xx. 27.
usage however is confirmed neither by examples nor by Amira. The
3 sing. tern, and 1 sing. pret. the imperatives, 2 sing. fern, and 2 and
3 plur. masc. and fern, of the fut. and the part, excepting the absolute
masc. cannot be distinguished, according to Lud. de Dieu p. 217,
from llif same persons of Ethpa. excepting when the first radical is
an aspirate, which, in Ethpa. becomes hardened. The passive form
;

^4>o2l
JL_

is

'

inserted

however

is

The

2.

not mentioned by Amira.

^\4o|

excepted

x
* l

e.g. pret.

e. g.

b) reflexive;

= Peal

c)

Verb

ff\ lf

.m*^^Zj
;

infinit.

in Ethpe.,

ib

The

final radical letters.

signification of Ethpe. is

ones self;
*

between the two

In the

infinitive

orozi^AiD.

a] jiassive of Peal;

iD>Z|

to

reflect

in intransitive verbs

by or

e. g.

e.g.

upon
and

..*

<fiL\ to

return ;

^o_..A|

e.g.

d)

to be

sometimes Ethpe.

is

passive of Aph.

embarrassed, from

22.

Pael and Ethpaal

1. Both of these conjugations are characterized

by _1 in
the penultimate, and _^_, in Pa., in the ultimate syllable.
The vowel is changed into _L, in Verbs 3 Rad. Gutt. or >,
as it is in the
The preformative 1 of the 1 sing.fut.
passive.
Pa. alone takes _l (comp.
19. A. and B. 5). The imperat.
Ethpa. with Linea. occultans and the part. fern. Ethpa. are
like the same forms in
Ethpe.

REM.

The

4o|

passive form

does not occur in Amira.

It is
f r

rejected also

by Euxtorf.

the second radical takes

Amira remarks,
only in

p.

19. B.4.

*.*

i>O-*J >Z|.

the imperat. (vid. Matt.

Concerning the part. act. and pass, in Pa. vid.

I

339, that in

ix.

27).

The form

^*-'r^ (Mark.

x.

1C

in pret.

Pa. must be considered as an incorrect

x r

Diode of writing, since ^CLtfO (verse 32)

is

a participial noun.

APHEL AND ETHTAPHAL.

60

The

2.

^\li>

to

cause

Ma^

e.g.

of Pa.

signification

to

to be

is

from ^**>

afraid,

overwhelm from ^li

to

causative

a)

to

fear ;

press;

<;)

b)

e.

g.

intensive ;

Pe.; e.g.

and nal
to

Hss

to

The

pronounce just.

of Pael

to

o>2]
to be

e. g.

to

murdered ;

to be

one's self;

e. to

i.

blush,

to

declare

signification of Ethpa. is

^&o2]

wonder within

made

AotoJ forth,

to

rf)

g.

a) passive

b) reciprocal; e. g.

= Peal;

c)

e.

e. g.

blush

Aphel and Ethtaphal.

23.

1. Aphel is characterized by } placed before the stem,

After the preformatives of the fut.,
which quiesces in _L
infinit. and part., ] falls away, and its vowel falls back
upon

the preformative.
occurs in the second syllable, and, only
is _L found in that
in Verbs 3 Bad. Gutt. and J
syllable.
,

In the passive, to compensate for the loss of the characteristic ] of Aph., L mit _L is inserted between the stem and the

The

formative syllable of the passive Z]

7

able takes

The

REM.

.>
xy^oZZf*

..
;

e.g.

characteristic

final radical syll-

7j

of

Aph.

is

retained after the prefor7

Tl

mative, in verbs, which lose a radical letter

Under the same

&

t\

rule should be placed

e.g.

Verbs |l

_*~K(^
;

e.

g.

T*

But the Verbs o*.2s|

k*^iJ

to be able,

and

from

(^M

*A2p

or

is

v*A|

to drink,

do

not belong here, since _2_ already re-appears over ( They are rather
forms of Pe. with | prosthetic, as is also shown by their further for7

mation

e.g. fut.

-"^*

-n

*O.J,

4k

infinit.

Qn^aV)

(comp.

20.Rem.), part.

and the passive ..**^A"j. In respect to the participles of

22. 1. Rem. compared with
Aphel the same rule holds good as in
19. B. 4.
Buxtorf and others do not recognize the passive. Lud.
de Dieu p. 238, approves of the abridged imperat. with Lin. occult.
P.

SHAPHEL AND ESHTAPHAL.

61

Later Grammarians however doubt the correctness of

form (Comp.

this

The

2.

Rem.).

signification

wi A^l

e. g.

8.

to

of Aphel

briny forward ;

two accusatives

*Q^

e. g.

is

a) causative as in Pael

and then
cause

to

it

to

frequently takes

put on (something*
*

b) imperative or permissive ; e. g. %1D>

upon some one)
to suffer to mount a horse ;
c) intransitive ; e. g. ^oJ*10} to be
Pael ; e. g. ^**> and ^I*>] to frighten. The
weak ; d)
;

Aphel or

passive has either the passive signification of

* x

incides with Pe.; e.g.

Shaphel

is

*oA*

*oZoZZ|

keep house.

to

one of the conjugations, admitted into the

at a later period

paradigm

to dwell,

co-

Shaphel and Eshlaphal.

24.
1.

*.

Its characteristic is

18. 3).

with _L prefixed to the stem, and

inflection it coincides with Aphel.

_ZL

in the last syllable. In

In the passive (Eshtaphal) occurs the transposition of * and L and _L appears

The preformative of Shaphel, like that

of Pael, takes _L only in the 1 sing. fut.
REM. In verbs which lose a radical letter, this conjugation somein the last syllable.

new stem

times furnishes a

e.

Shaph. of i>o!U. The same

new

furnishes the

The

2.

that of
still

is

true in Eshtaphal.

causative

.^Sn.,*

to

Sliaphel

e.g. ^\ir*

exchange, from

is,

similar to

in the

examples

to let

.^Sn

signification
sin.

or

it

forms iutransitives

is

fall

6)

to cJt(in<j>.

phal has sometimes a passive and sometimes

to

Thus

wT^A*).
two conjugations

Aph. and Ethtaphal.

e. g.

from

to be black,

signification of these

extant;

sive;

quadriliteral

Xlu.*

g.

inten-

Kshta-

a reciprocal

%t
;

e.g.

^..jAsf

to err,

OTHER CONJUGATIONS AND QUADRILITERALS.

62

Conjugations occasionally used and Quadriliteral Verbs.

The occasional conjugations (vid. Agrell in Otiolis Syr. p.
28 sq.) are similar to Pa. and Aph. and take, for the most
25.

part, their signification.

quadriliterals.

Lo

letters

CO

are also to be considered as

They

To

verbs, which take the

and are,

2,

prosthetic

initial,
*

A. similar to Aphel, belong

permit

and

hasten

to

persecute

hasten

to

c] Thaphel, ,^f)\L

1*

REM.

become poor ;

to

^QCQksZ]

poor, pass.

For ^.LOiOl

b)

*S01 i)

=====

^mV)

Maphel,

a)

pass.

make

JDOl^fi

to

^^oAco')

to

Saphel,

to

to teach.

^""

(wA|

Rem.) no

23.

vid.

form can

special

be assumed, as similar examples do not occur.

B. Similar to Pael are those conjugations which insert

'
==
*, So, r Q, after the first radical viz.; a) Pauel
Poel,
,

.77

usually transitive

e.

g. J *

Q yt

to

chew

the cud,

vk

to

become divided

c)

Pamel

Not very

C.
iteral

to

different

d) Parel

from the

to

domesticate,
1>

one ;

b)

final

^,

wAxa

Pael; e.g.

to suffer ;

^ir^

to

dance,

pass.

Palen, ^*-o

the quadril=====
;
a) Pali

last are also

verbs with prosthetic j and

X

wifJi

remain

viz.
I

j*<

*jA^OI| to converse
77
.

to be

master,

^a iZ]

pass,

to

malce

one a master.

D. Here belong quadriliterals with a radical doubled

Pilel

and Pilpel

slavery
finally

b)

c)

^iiZfto
RKM.
also

}*">m

e. g.

be cut off.

to

pass. iOj;.iZ|

b) Paiel, transitive

^mVu

e.g.

jjOoZ]

pass.

a) Palel

Pealel with

Palpel (in

= Pael

e. g.

j^Cll

its pass. S>Q>>to>>.*2] to

Verbs Mi);

e.

g.

1>

Xu&Sooo

to

reduce

to

dream,

and

to heal,

pass.

be broken.

Those verbs, which are compounded of two ground forms,

belong here

quadriliterals

77^

e.

g.

;Wl(^|

to blush,

formed from the Greek

(e.g.

from

MSo^

Q^A)

and fi*.

to elect

In

a Bishop).

VERBS WITH GUTTURALS.

63

a letter of the ground form frequently

to

falls

away

e. g.

appoint as Patriarch.

Verbs with Gutturals.

26.

Since the peculiarities of Guttural Verbs, are not marked

in Syriac, as in Hebrew, either by Daghesh forte or Sheva,
the irregularities in verbs of which the first and second radicals are gutturals are entirely

wanting

and those only, of

a guttural or >, deviate, and those

in but very few cases from the regular verb, in connection
with which these deviations have already been cited. (Con-

which the third

radical

is

For
28, 30, 32).
cerning Verbs Ja, K, and 11* compare
more convenient reference, these cases of deviation are here
These verbs take

brought together.

instead of

perat.Peal,

in like

manner

act. Peal,
e. g.

part

e. g., fut.

1) inthefut.

>r*J

they exchange the _i of the

act. Peal, jiol;

rr
T.

.*

Pret. ^l>f,

*^

^l*p,

_L

fat-

o)2ti

imperat. >,, part.act.

r

fut.

imperat. >,; 2)
in the part

last syllable for

Ethpe.

pret.

* T

and im-

and

in the other conjugations,

Pa. pret. >,*, fut. >r*J,

Aph.

& pass.

>

imperat. ^i>|,

part. act.

and

pass.

RKM.
following
to be

In the same manner in

;

1*2

to console,

adorned (comp.
II.

{iQ

13. 1.

Pa. and Ethpa. are formed the

to soil,

1 1

to defile,

and

Rem).

IRREGULAR VERBS.
27.

General

View.

Irregular Verbs, are to be comprehended, those

in which there is a change in respect to one of the three letters
1.

Under

of the ground form.

(

Quiescent

and

Such

letter either quiesces or falls

Defective Verbs).

verb

in,

away

which two

let-

IRREGULAR VERBS.

64:

ground form are changed is said

omalous ( Verbum dupliciter imperfectum).
ters of the

The

2.

rad.

(k),

Olaph

^l;

and 3

rad.

To

Quiescent Verbs
(]a),

^D^

are the following

1. rad.

Jud

(**2>\

med. rad.Vauand Jud (oL,^)

Olaph

to

be doubly an-

verbs with

1.

*\ med.rad. Olaph
A.VQ.
5>oo

(^ono)

(B) B'yi*

defective verbs

belong

those

with

1.

rad.

Nun

and med. rad. doubled (Ul); e.g.

(^a); e.g. .o^n,
Here, and frequently in subsequent sections, the designations of classes of verbs are taken from the position of the radicals,

REM.

of the

Verb ^\12)

^3)

^7 which the

variations affecting the

radical letters of irregular verbs are kept in view.

TABLE OF IKREG
VERBS

fi

|L .

32.

VERBS |i

ULAB VERBS
f

*la.

30.

Vid. pp. 51, 63.

VERBS.

67

QUIESCENT VERBS.

A.

^af

Verbs 1 rod. Olaph quiescent (Ja)

28.

to eat.

The

following are the irregularities of these verbs.

1. In the Pret. Peal, where, in the regular verb, the first
radical has no vowel, ] takes _L
but in the imperat. and
,

it

part, pass.,

takes

^QD| ^xDJ.

e. g.

If the preform-

ative or characteristic consonant of the conjugation be with-

out a vowel, the vowel of

^tf;

Pa.

RKM.
verbs

Ethpe.

pret.

In the

fut.

and

H^ ^Of, UV

e.

1>

,0]*

1.

;io|" y\]~

fut.

of

it is

Q, excepthem like

Lud. de Dieu (p. 265), rightly doubts the

double form of the infinit. and fut. Pe. with *
,

and _L, although the form

the

It

of verbs mentioned

first class

_!_

correctness of the

IiQ-^

not found with Q.

in 1 Cor. x. 28,

in the

forms are found in ^Z|

of these

above, form the fut. and imperat. Pe. like transitives with
ting Verbs 3 rad. Gutt. or >, and the second class form

with

.."*,

f>

^ft .S&T, ^lo

should further be remarked that the

intransitives

fut.

g.

"

Both

o)lD

e.

rl>>E rT'r V(K-g. ^obft^fco.

used in the verbs

g. ;!D|J.

^ftf.

is

it

infinit.Pe. the preformative takes

But --

back upon

1 falls

is

r -*
(>?
V>( and ^i V">(

suspected.

is

found in I Cor.

x.

Also the correctness of

The forms

of the

3 plur.

...7

27

but

^Q^OJZ

fern, pret,

are not approved.

The vowel

is sometimes
found in the part. pass. Pe. of the regular verb (20.1. Rein.). In
i

the passives Ethpe. and Ethpa. of the

the preceding Z;

e.

other verbs varying

2.

away

little

from regular verbs

cat,

0"!

away

the

back

upon

is

assimilated to

also found in

some

^oZZ)

and

e.

is

g.

"\

does not so often

peculiarity ex-

The same

and part Pa., and the vowel is thrown

*Al and
e. g.
preformative

infinit. fut.

the

in the 1 sing. fut. Pe.;

/ will speak.

in the other persons.

ists in

,-M|,

This formation

radical } usually falls

^oa] / ic ill

e. g.

fall

The

g. pjstZZl*

Verb

68

QUIESCENT VERBS.

REM.
imperat.,

The Verbs ^J|

and form

to

go away and

|Z| to come,

lose

in the

^f

Qlf, *Af,

f,

oZ, JZ, 12.

In Aphel and Shaphel with their passives, 1 is changwith the preceding _L

forms au ; e. g.
O, and,

3.

ed into

REM.

In two verbs 1

imperat. l^uf,
*

fut.

}XJ

is

changed into w

*CL*!LlO

infinit.

viz

]Z*)

part.

Aph. w A*},

]L**>.
lT^*

For this reason *L^t and

Aph. ^SQ^OI
"li^^n )*
are sometimes found together.
,

General ^Remarks.

The Verb
ticed in the

Alf A^lf;

(according, to

following persons

fat.

larly.

sigriification,

pret.

and plur.masc. and

to be

of

iise,

to

profit,

Verbs which commence with on,

sume the vowel and throw

those, reject or

15.2) should

and

fern,

be no1 sing.

2 fem.sing. and 2 and 3 plur.

etc.; part. fern. sing. \t]]

In the

12.1

change

it,

it

fern.

formed regu-

it is

like

Verbs )a,

back upon 1 but do

,

as-

not, like

although this latter occurs in

the Galilean dialect, which had but a single character for

the two gutturals (comp.
1. Rem. 1).
29.

Verbs ivith 1 Rad.

In respect to these verbs

1.

.1. in

Yud
it

(+*&)

to

bring forth.

should be observed

in the pret. Pe. even when transitive, they take

the ultimate syllable (excepting Verbs 3 Rad. Gutt.) ;

That

VERBS
JD/U

1 RAD. JUD, ETC.

radical, be without a vowel,

the
case
(in pret., imperat., part. pass. Pe.), it
usually
In
the
fut. and infinit. Pe. the vowel _L falls
quiesces in JL
e. g.

as

If

(^r*)*

the

*>

"

fi 1 8 *

is

back upon the vowelless preformative

falls back upon L
So too in Ethpe.,

e. g.

A)io.

But

^2).

e. g.

where, in the regular verb, the first radical takes a vowel,

these verbs are regularly inflected

REM.

e.g.

L^*.

In the part. pass. Pe., besides the regular form, one with
x r

appears

e.

g.

-*>>-

2OLi

Only

takes

but where the

over the

regular verb takes

under

Ol, falls

away

e.g.

first radical,

and

she hay given

him (OOLi)

with Linea occultans

*

A)GLi

in the 3 fern,

Lin. occultans with

with a

1 sing. pret.
*
*

suffix

attached

appears
*
f

e.g.

OlAoou
"*

In 3 plur. inasc. and

fern,

under simT

ilar

circumstances, Lin. occult,

have given him

falls

away

e.

wiGlQOGLi

g.

they

(QQOU).

In the fut.and imperat.Pe.the second syllable takes .!_.

In the fut. and infinit. Pe. this class of verbs is similar to
2.

Verbs

and changes .t into

But in the 1 sing.

above).

The

^1 and

^> and

3.

into

falls

imperat.

*32.,

fut.

In

like

2O1

manner

in

away

(vid. 1.

,SV

e. g.

e. g.

inflection of
F*

fi

^)Ak3.

same

fut.

S2\I follow the

g.

which quiesces

imperat. on the contrary retains *

REM.
e.

J2>,

^-J and SAJ,

Verbs ^2)
infinit.

(
T

^> r

33)

LD and

imperat. from

>OL* follows the

rule.

In Aph. and Shaph. with their passives a

(vid.

Verbs ]a,

28. 3)
tit*

REM.

is

retained in

changed

jSof, ^?di.

e.g.
*

"i

is

\*

m*| and ni*|

still

it

should scarcelj

be considered as an irregularity, since from JLi appear Pa.

'
'

Etbpa.

VERBS 3 RAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT.

72
3.

In Aph. the preformatives of the fut.,infinit.,and

characteristic _L excepting the 1 sing. fut.

lose the
X

e. g.

The

V>if)(.

part, passives,
it

part.,
;

changes

into

.*.

No

example

^oaSo, to distinguish

e.g.

from the active form ^o^oLo

REM.

found of Shaphel.

is

Verbs 3 rod. Olaph Quiescent

32.

analogy of other

part, pass., contrary to the

to disclose.
(]3) 13-..

These verbs, which include the Hebrew j$^ and ni> Verbs,
are different from the regular verbs in the following cases.

The

1.

Here

wi

third radical

should be remarked that the

it

e. g. )]-..

either quiesces or

"j

the other preterits

in

**.

changed into
ends in

pret. Pe.

e. g.

is

Ethpe.

^\
e. g. Pe.

The

end in |_

futures of all the conjugations

V-.-J the imperat. Pe.

*
T

in

>

^^

in

-!._

e.g. *xJk..Zf

e.g.

-^Xt

imperat. Ethpe.
.

the other conjugations in j

/^

The termination

]]....

of the

Pe.

infinit.

is

e.g.

the same

Pa.
e.g

^\

The

(J.^-So*

other conjugations in the

V>,

e. g.

e. g.

-i._

)1;

*jL^.i2]

ma

Aph. cuA.^_lo
Pe.

Omy

W-y-

infinit.

end with <L_;

*

the participles generally with |_

the part. pass, of Pa., Aph., and Shaph.,

ends with

--

Some

REM.

e. g.

Pa.

verbs with

e.

Verbs

g.

-^.^
^> I I
and - >^>'

|Su

verbs, take

.-__

(-)

in the pret. Pe. are inflected

Here belong mostly

like the other preterits.

Med. E.

to

swear.

at the end.

Some

e.g.

OlSQs

Verbs

are found in the

The imperatives of

this

verbs with 3 rad. He.,

kind of

seem

to

XT

belong here

intransitives, or

Both forms

to be great.

to

name, Pa.

>*fl

Some grammarians,

VERBS 3 RAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT.

78

without proof, derive from the imperat. Ethpe. the forms U-tt^i and

Verb fOOl has two forms of the future

The

(J_..Z(.

e.

and |OOU.

In the formation of the present tense in connection with

-

1<

the part, takes

the pronoun,
for

A^IOjliO

form of the

more

part. pass.

When

2.

JL

or

"jl

e.

of

all

J1CD and

and the

A^..Z]

e. g.

e. g.

imperatives;

the futures

is

] is

added,

Pa. ^i

PC. AS..
l.x

in the second form of

and 3

in the 2
f

Ethpe. rr*-\VAJ
e. g.

^..So)

b)

is

.*.

j.

A*-^l,

Ethpe.

B.

M-X
e. g.

the preterits,

and

AftS^T,
1 falls

In other cases

plur. fern, of

and

finally

o^^lo
^^

Aph.

in such a

manner

.f

oAj^...

quiesces in

in the

e. g.

^\t

masc. and fem. pret. Pe., and in the 3

in the 3 plur.

plur. fem. (in the

*

.,

3 plur. masc. Pe. of Verbs

all

throughout
is

e.g.

3 sing. fem. pret. Pe. of Verbs

ending in |^ with -1 retained

in

quiesces in

(OAJi^

away

remains) of

the

and 2 masc. and fem.

in Pe. (excepting the 1 sing. A*-Xi

-7

e.g.

all

all

-9 .0

Pe.

quiescent in the 1

of

the fem. sing.

in

of both numbers of
that

changed

\^

\t

plur. of all the participles

(Pe.

either

in the 2 plur. fern,

*t^

Pe. ^i

e. g.

V.

in all the infinitives except that of Pe.

JJ

refers

latter to persons.

^\^k

The former

(jJLffi*

g.

appears a double

the conjugations excepting Pe. of verbs ending in

3 plur.fem.

and

e.

a) movable in the pret. 3 sing.

is

first case, JL

V^

all

]lfiD to hate

{_

entirely away.

Ethpe.

e.g.

From

g.

instead of

quiescent,

a letter or syllable

falls

A. In the
fern,

**_

AJ| Ifojlio.

particularly to things,

into

(OOU

g.

>

^*

-A and of

other preterits,

**_

in the fut.
the preterits ; e. g. Pe. oXt
the 2 sing, fem., while the regular form

changed into

^-.

e. g.

Pa.

^..,

and

in

the 2

VERBS 3 BAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT.

74

f>

-X

and 3

plur. masc.

Pe.

e.g.

tOX,_J

"^

also in the 2 sing. fern.

"*.

T-.

2 plur.

where - quiesces
e.g. Pa. --\t
masc. imperat., where Q quiesces in

olk.il

finally in the plur. masc. of the part.,

imperat,,

REM.

is

exchanged with <-_

e. g.

*e
;

Aph.

where the

g. Pe.

e.

reg-

^Xt*

Instead of Pa. and Ethpa.,sometimes the quadriliteral form

-OA.

also in the

ular form
^*
I

7
.

The

appears.

3 plur. masc. pret.

'

sometimes with

occurs,

Q-Xt (with paragog. Nun

retained

e.

Acts

g.

xxviii. 2.

i*

But the form

&Xt

which Buxtorf adduces,

is

neither

confirmed by examples nor found in Amira. In all the conjugations

excepting Pe., the 3 plur. fern. pret. differs from the 3 sing. masc.
only by taking Ribui (vid.
1

6), for

which Amira

(p.

266) in verbs
i

ending with wk.-, and in Pa. of verbs ending with l_, writes a
I

a~ I n ^he imperat. Ethpe., besides the form

1
X
^\
j*^
in
the
paradigm, occurs the 2 plur. fern, ^i > .^..Z(
given
double u

e.

g.

GENERAL REMARK.
]L (comp.
Alfl,
etc.,

oi]]]

M),

Verbs

|J

or w^A,

30. 1), are inflected like

^A^tf, plur. 0lJ,

fut. l]]j,
X

and **X|,

etc.,

plur. tO(Jj, etc.,

* it *
infinit.

which are

Verbs

|J

e.

infinit. itfk),

part. act. 1|J,

*f 7

CUjJlD, imperat. **Ul,

APPENDIX TO

Pe.

g. pret.

imperat.

pass. }]],
if*
fut.

same time

at the

tjiy.

vB, J$,

Aph.

pret.

^(JJ, part. ^

8 32.

Inflection of the Verb

U-M

to live.

In the Verb |JUM with j. movable, j. is rejected when the

e. g.
first radical and the preformative are without a vowel
;

infinit.

Pe.

V*^

f r

]*Vf

Sometimes

between the preformatives and the

this

first

verb takes

radical;

e.

g.

DEFECTIVE

perhaps U*]^)* fut

(better

inserted

.*>'

also

vowel

falls

for Jl**J

pret. **-**), infinit.

*

IA*P,

(Matt. xv. 27)

.,
is

found in the

and

and

precedes,

vacant radical
.C0.ee

part. fern. ]+** for

part. (j*i>O

first

. i

and with

ClJuV) or

^*

imperat. )AJ f,

back upon the

for

U^

76

away when no preformative

falls

Pe.

Aph.

^cu.]j,

IMJ and

fut.

VERBS.

>

imperat.

e.g.

its

The form

part. plur. masc.

B. DEFECTIVE VERBS.

Nun

Verbs with the first radical

33.

The

-<-*

(^2>)

go out.

to

irregularities of these verbs are the following

Tn the

and

imperat.,

fut.,

and

infinit. Pe.,

in all forms

*.

Aph., the

first rad. J falls

The

*Q2>1

fut.

away

of
*

DQ2U, *Doa, -r^Vn

e. g.

and imperat. Pe. sometimes take

and

71.

e.

g.

->",

The exceptions
T

REM.
doubled

\y*u.

34)

e.

g.

,J

to this rule

are

c)

third radical
e.g.

is

e.

35.2).

Comp.,

34.

to

mount

Upon

Verbs Med. Rad.

g.

JOU,

fut.

>QIU.

up, takes

its

tOZAMJ
pret.

and

g.

from

-<">

Hebrew;

TheVerb

ye have descended.
part. Pe.

Those verbs whose

retaining the characteristic 1 in Aph.; e.g.

23. 1.

e.

or 2, are not changed by assimilation, as in

^.liQjGI we have believed,

nmi

a)

b)

Verbs Med. Rad. Ol

Verbs Med. Rad. Quiescent

MT>

]o]2

(vid.

for ]aj.

Rem.

Verbs ivith Med. Rad. doubled

(\lL)

%mflD>

to

In respect to these verbs it should be remarked

1. That the middle radical falls
away in the pret.,

sprinkle.

infinit.,

DOUBLY IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.

76

imperat., and fut. (having

7*

e.

fiD)

g. pret.

over the preformative) Pe.

**

mnnit. *CO;lD

fut. *QDO;J

Also Aph. and Shaph. with their passives;

v
7

)\*

Pe. takes

act.

part.

away again when a

is

syllable

in

middle radical, which has fallen away

falls

*CD>),

g.

The

jao>ZZ|

e.

*
flOO>

imperat.,

e.

place
)>

g.

added

e.

the

of
;

g.

but

plur.

iM.
Those verbs whose 2 and 3 rad. is | are exceptions, and
are inflected
according to the rules for quiescent verbs ( 35. 1. d).
,

77

in the
!

and imperat. Pe. forms with

fut.

The

<-4

Verb ^\i

to

part.

in.

go

act.

appears again, but

it

preformative;

e.

>P> in the

plur.

sometimes remains

from -*^*~*-* (Comp.

JEujaci

* 7

.^

e.

appear;

g.

from the

Q*^*lO

g.

In the part. Aph. sometimes the middle radical

is marked
by Linea occultans e. g. Heb. ix. 5,

The part. pass. Pe.

2.

Pe. has ^-

In Aph. the characteristic

(not)

23.

1.

after the

Rem.).

Ethpe., Pa. and Ethpa.

e. g.

are regularly inflected, with the retention

.rr>frZ] JCQCOJ
of the middle radical.
Instead of the last two forms, however, Palpel. and Ethpalp. ( 25. D) are more in use; e. g.
,

REM. The last remark holds good

more rarely (Comp. 1. above).

also of Shaphel,

Doubly Irregular and Defective

35.

which occurs

Verbs.

Irregular Verbs are understood those in

letters which usually give rise to
In the inflection of these verbs, either one

By Doubly

1.

which occur two of those

irregularities.

or both of those letters may retain their peculiarities. This

class of verbs consists of (vid. Lud. de Dieu, p. 340, sq.); a)

Verbs
Verbs
Pa.

^S

and

]z>

^J1

and

]]

]]

e.

e. g.

1s>] to boil,

g. ICQJ

j2] to

Ethpe.

Aph.

*XQO] to approve ;

come, Aph. **L]

**>]]

c)

b)

]flb} to heal,

Verbs Jia and

U',

DOUBLY IKKEOULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.

UQ*

e. g.

A [li.

f<>

**!*>ol
x

Ifc^O

fut.

iop,

Aph.

\\^

\\ tf

|p

e. g.

*]] to be displeased,

infinit.

sprout, imperat. **L*,

^ "

d) Verbs |i and U

I ;

infinit.

to

]lu

^^

and .j-U
**|a

swear, impcrat. iiV)i,

77

to cAzdk,

imperat.

HL.

Aph.

2.
To Defective verbs (see Lud. de Dieu, p. 344) belong
the following, in so far as they occur in the language, either
in individual forms only, or have borrowed their defective
forms from synonymous verbs, or, finally, vary from the

regular verb in inflection and interpunction.

From

Verbs.
it

o>1

From

befits.

fut. tllojZ
eing. fern.

and 1)1

n\rr>

and from

^&G

to

(see

28. 2. 3.

and

38), fut.

similar

form and

complement

tOOU

imperat. <-iAl

46)

p.
,

as
;

part.

to believe ;
^S>Q*oi

having the signiof the usual future

etc.,

to

1A*
lA

U-~

(see

l^Zl

(1>2),

which merely occur

with

drink,

fut.

]AaJ

App.

Finally, in four verbs 3 rad. Olaph.

f

to

32. 1. Rem.
Rem.); also 16(31 to fo (see
IOCTU and loou also from ]ooi is found a

^>1 Aph.
11

is

inflection are

aw?ay and ]Z|

to ^<?

^l]

(comp. Agrell. Otiola Syr.

to //uc.

29. 1. Rem.), imperat.

wiAl

>

fut. apocopate ICTU

l(Jl2, plur.
fication of the conjunctive as well

part.

from ^Aj, Ethpe. *oau2|l

differ in

run, imperat. ^ioi

lAaLo

mount up,

to

give (see

^A/

fut.

Those which

prosthet.

from

verb are formed from

*V
infinit. Offft ^r> Aph. OCD[

Ethpa. .r>VAcp| T

c)

act.

are completed

..*'*

fut. -^f*) 1
r

found in vOOii
infinit.

pret.

and the 3

appear the

]\*

.n\m

71>
,

-offn^rt

part,

fern.

the other tenses of this

imperat. .OCX)

and

|lo

defective verbs

synonymous

-rtmi

to

appear the 3 sing.

it is suitable.

others which are

act.

The following

b)

Impersonal

disagreeable, the part. act. fern. ]j]lo

it is

part, flo

)&

a)

occurs only the part. act.

to be bit,

to

e.

in Pa.

infinit.

g.

32),

V^

and

its

78

DOUBLY IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.

passive,

the second syllable quiesces in _L, as in Verbs 3

Gutt. (see
tenses

13.

1.

Bern.),

and

and moods, while

its

preceding vacant consonant

The formation
infinit.

oKnV>

part. U>A&

is

imperat.

infinit.

"Ua

retained in all of the

vowel
e. g.

as follows

is

3 sing.

pret. Pa.
fut.

olIoAsi

back upon the

falls

|*a

]*Xj

fut.

fern. pret.

part.

Ethpa.

PARADIGM

80

I.

*^-'

Ethtaphal.
*g

like

Aphel.

3Q

f
<
^

*1
g

,j

i
^
-Q

f<3)

f-^p

r-<3i

r-

'I

&

f_.

81

<
1X1
<

'D

^
y

''

'"a*

-Q *Q

<

Jvj

vj id vq
-Q
.

-Q

<i

<j

^Q

"Q

f-9>

1-3

f-d>

^P'

V
A*

A*

*<j>

^j

i
*^T

-3

r
-3

^si

Cj

-3

^1

-_

*-vi

'-vj

-a

q *Q -q -a .n

X.

^f

'

<

s.

1
j

<s
k

____.

'

^f
*^"

fc

^_4__,^
"51

vg

'

Ji
'Vd.

si

-Q

?=x

^
<

sa

PARADIGM

82

II.

ooo
13 3

'I
tTv|
O
-n
ia

00
<M

fl

."3J

t-Q
jgj

'

-'

if

v "

1
s

Q,,

-X

co

co

Q' CO

CC

Cl

(N

t-i

83

Verbs First Rad.Olaph.

ao

3
O

"

'\

-I 'I :l

1 4 ^ * J.4 1 *
2

33
.Si

PARADICrM

84

O5
<M
093

III.

85

Verbs First Rad. Jud.

A
f

^3

^
y\
_

ii

'o

^ ^ ^ *f ^i
'6

"b

^i ri

" L ^ "v
i

QO

-_

-i
fl

!vj

>.'-l

iT>4

l.

V
^ Vj
^
,H: 4. 4.
i
'

*"^~

.n

O ^^
O

r"

H.

v|

iT*l

-4. sd.
x ^i
-"

'

^.t^.
~

f*^!

x|

"vl

^J

*<
'.

^H-iM.-15-iil"li3:
"^
^
'^
i"

T^'5J
:

^:H:

4. 4. 4. 4. 4.
4. 4. 4. 4.4.

..
,

I-

i.:

i;

^o^

s'L

<o.

PI"'v i.

'

'-^i

-!

/I

'

"<] "<!

1^1.

PARADIGM

86

IV.

8-1

o
CO
f

(.vp

t-'^p

j<3

"d

"-3

<i

t^>i)

9 'd
<j

^i>

tTsj)

i.vD

Q
f

3 ilt <O
<l *3
1>
- V
'

f^.

CO

-c

^_

'

^2
1
1

.<

<S

t*-

Of

<J

_^

.1

*f

f**f

*d
<o

rf 7j T*
d

<j

a ^d
<

'

-<J

-J

^j

^
O

.a
'

1
-

^
'T

'ts
fc

ci

^s

xi

ra

IT

"Q
*

< < ^ <

da*T

cT*
<i

'oi

:t

t"^

JI

*a

:1

*
^
^

T/

*X

a ;t

la

1
.3

^**

3--S3 ^ 4

^1,^.
*
1

V3.

\i_

^ ^^^^

VS.

'^2-5^^3 3-1-S-5*\ 1
'^cj.

t
e a
C^ TO

"

TO

(M

c5
i

TO

TO

Ol

Verls Mill,
*

/i'i'1.

37

Quiescettt,

-4

'.

i a

-a
i

^
.

-\

.^n

*-v

"1

*N

>-

-!

fc

44
t.-

'

t*

81
4,

a' s 3

a
1

'3

'4 '4 '4

'41

'

<3~

-i

a 44'

n
'1

'4 '4
'

44

tfl

"\

r^

II 41

-i
'

"T

"5

-xi

4i

-3
-I

u-

%i

CO

CO

C<

<M

.3-

4i
1-"

-t

r^i

**>!

i 4

CO

CO

O*

<N

'IS

4-jl

r<g -ri

-g

?T*

T3

-3~*

r->

'U
a

0.0,

PARADIGM

88

V.

HQ

T/

! 'J 'I -I

HQ

H<J

HI

|2

HQ

HU

*t

oQ
U
Q
3
^-3

aQ

fa

eo

o<

;Q

Q
'I

"i
J1

<d

I
^

g a

2.,

co

CO

CO

(M

<M

rH

Verbs Mid. Rad.

Vau and Jud.

'3 '3

-C

'\
-

'1-4

*%*J/li 4

13

iii
?
v

'

>!

SI

si

1 -I

'8

'8

^(N(Nrrw

<N

<N

^ a

^ ~

rH

'1

r* CO

IT
%
T/

"s

-1

-i

CO

<N

C^

1-1

PARADIGM

90

VI.

.<w

3^1

*J

'I

7?
f

"1
<=

<=_

<=

*_

<0

<O-

',

n^l-

&

V
I
^

=3

"oj

V*

S3

TTy

91

Verbs TJiird Rod. Olaph.

-a

-a
-

-a
V
-a
a

'

'V'

i-i

eo

'

co
ft, ft,

PARADIGM

92

VII.

-a

r^

-Z

&

-61

.1

-a

-61

161

ll

co
co
61

i
*

*^N|

"~M

'^J

rt

'^

'^

'3

Verbs First Rad.

Nun.

'I

'

,rv|

"t

-r

111.1111111
9 <, >
*<H
q

i,

.8,

'*

PARADIGM

VIII.

-5
-*>
K^
<
J*>

*J

I
Is

SQ

*_
^.^

*s

I I

'I

'1

t*'*

-I

*_
**s

'

'^

,1

fc

f if 1

c_,r\

1
:

V"

't
Q

I l

'I

I
S

*-

y S

*j

.
^S
W
(M

J
s

95

Verbs Middle Bad. Doubled.

11

<

I
a

<

- _

f __^
* -

-*

-n.

.a

-.

.^.a

S|

~
M

n
.

...

'

in

"

H%

^3
M

!*+l

^xJ

eceo

<N

.i

^^

(1

fl

-I

'I -| i, i
f

*v

^i

*M

4<-

96

PARADIGM OF THE VERB WITH DIACRITICAL POINTS.

PARADIGM OF THE VERB WITH DIACRITICAL

POINTS.
(

Compare

3m.

Rem.

).

2 m.

3 /.

^^4^ A^&

Preter. Sing.

4.

Al^4^>

c.

Plur.

Fut. Sing.

Plur.

Imper.Sing. m.

Infin.

^o4^ ^d4o

jPlur.

\>4QiO Xy^QiO \\f\oVo

Part. Act.

m
\\f\oVr. r>\/\oVn e t c

^4^3 m

REM. ^The forms of the verb which are omitted in the foregoing
fable are not marked with diacritical points, since they may easily
De recognized from their formation.

VERBS WITH SUFFIXES.

Verbs with Suffices.

36.

The union of verbal forms with

simple in Syriac than in Hebrew.
in

97

general that the vowel of the

suffixes

be remarked
or second syllable

first

either falls

away

e.

and

in the 3 fern,

g.

much more

is

It should

1 sing. pret.

*.

and Q in the fut. or the vowel of the second syllable

back upon the preceding consonant e. g. in the same
;

falls

per-

sons of pret. Pe. in which

The

verbal endings

forms,

of the

first

and O quiesce

syllable falls

and

in

Gu

they terminate with k*. and

unless

away.
Verbal

remain

"*

4t

unchanged before the suffixes .OS

Also the character-

^2*

syllable of Pa. and Aph. remains

unchanged, and the suffixes of the 3 plur. are attached to
verbs in the form of separate pronouns. In respect to the
istic

vowel of the

first

the following should be remarked (see

particular persons
Table of the pronouns,
16. and table of the verbs, with
suffixes,

36).

WITH SUFFIXES.

PRETERIT

A.

3 sing. masc.
2 plur.
sun. a.

\^o

masc. and

before the suffixes tQO

The

fein.

other

^^2

in the

^^o

persons

with

1.

3 sing.
with suff.

ANfin before ^oo

fern.
a.

Q-

The

others

1.

2 sing. masc.
with sun. c.
2 sing.

fern.

1 sing.

com.

A\^n

unchanged, and by way of exception

iA^n is

A^n

changed

into

forms A\{j>n with

ufto
suff.

3 plur. masc. n ^Q n becomes ci\fln with

with

sufi*.

b.

a. 1.
suff. b.

or with

or with

>

parag., excepting before

3 plur.
parag.

fern.

**^&

^oa

cither

^2*

^^O

with

suff.

c.

FDTUBE WITH SUFFIXES

98

masc. and

2 plur.

and 1 com.

fern,

^Al^ ^4

.oAl&o,

with

retain the forms

suff. c.

masc. and 1 com. sing, in some forms with

only distinguished from each other by the diacritical
point, which, in the first person, stands over the consonant (vid.
Verbs Med. E. with suff. follow the form of Verbs Med. A.,
4).

The

REM.

suffixes

and

3 fern. 2

are

where the

retain

latter retain

g. 3 sing. fern.

e.

suff. OlAl^Q.
Yet the form OlASQ*j> occurs in Ps. cxviii.
167, instead of which, since no similar example occurs, the punctua-

with

The same

tion should perhaps

be

Med. Olaph.

So

Quies.

over

into

Ol^(s

the vowel

but in the 1

is

the case even in Verbs

^J*

belonging to

remains

sing.,

and

jt

e.

OlAoj.

e.

is

changed

g.

quiescent, it should be remarked,

that where, in the regular verb, the first radical is without a vowel, |

In respect to verbs

1 rad.

and a

retains its

its

_;

stands over the

verb,

g.

But where,

radical, this class

first
r

same manner;

the

e.

jiof with

in the regular

of verbs retains

suff.

-i.

Oljlo|

>

with

Defective verbs, or those with Med. Rad. doubled,

in the pret.

*
sing,

'

into

change

e.

g.

Ao>

unchanged

the vowel of the

second

syllable, it

first

with

should

>e

e.

retain

and

fern,

suff. OlAoj
but they remain
V
.Q3Ao>
Pa. and Aph. retain
;

g.

unchanged.

syllable

The 3

suff.

A*

*.

v^O

in

tOO and ^i2

before

form

like the
7 *

unchanged,

it

In respect to

of the

observed that where Pe. retains

Pa.

retains

ble

but where

is lost.

and Pa. with

falls

The 3

suff.,

away

or

falls

back upon the

(from

or

when standing

sylla-

masc. and 3 plur. masc. and fern, in Pe.

are hence all similar, and can only be distinguished
sing.

from each other by their signification in the context

vy^O

first

\^O)
before

But these forms

tQS and

B.

e. g.

are exceptions to this rule

*)

FUTURE WITH SUFFIXES.

Throughout the sing, and in the 1 plur., Q which has been

inserted, remains unchanged before the suffixes tQa and
,

IMPERATIVE WITH SUFFIXES.

Before the other suffixes

99

away, and the form

it falls

takes the suff. a. 1. ; but if the suff. is in the 3

person, only the suffix, a. 2. is used. The other persons
are treated according to the rule laid down. In the plur.
the 2 and 3 masc. and fern, remain unchanged with suff. c.
RKM.
with the

parag. of the 3 sing.

form

after the

suff.

Pa

also true in

of 3 person masc.

^Q2
e.

and

What

is

is

true of

connected

in Pe. is

away of the vowel of the

last

In the 3 sing. masc. with

^>O

^O1Oi\^ni

g.

away, and

falls

\y^oZ.

in respect to the falling

syllable, excepting before

suff.

fern,

appears sometimes

But this form is neither mentioned by Amira nor

by Sionita. The 2 sing, sometimes takes JL before the suff. of the 1
The same is true in respect to the imperat e. g.
sing, and plur.
Q*

over

Z*
01OL

5 ll"
(J

put me not

to

In Verbs Med. E. the middle

shame.

_,

radical retains

and

in

Verbs 3 Gutt.,

are also found in Pe.

ed. Paris.

e.

g. Ps. Ixxi.

iiin*"lZ and
,

in

Pa. Ps.

This peculiarity, Amira,

to Aph.; but examples
f *.
.^
ed. Erpen. -* 1 <"><>*">*/ |]
.

389, refers exclusively to quadriliterals

p.

9.

i.

e.

cxviii.

172,

*\**l\{*

Amira

adds that this form is found particularly in prohibitory negations,

which remark is likewise confirmed by the examples given.
The
But it should be
persons of the fut. with ^ remain unchanged.

remarked that
masc.
25,

e'

g.

if

the form

^oN^OI

takes the suff. of the 3 per. sing,

-*<"n.m\^rM sometimes

falls

away

e.

g.

Matt

viii.

IMPERATIVE WITH SUFFIXES.

C.

The 2

sing. masc.

Q&o

remains unchanged with

suff. a.

of the 1 per. sing, and plur., and of the 3 sing. fern.

"When the suff. is in the 3 sing. masc. the form of suff. c.
is used.
2.

lu the 2 sing.
quiesces in

fern,

of the form

sufl'.

b.

*-

_.

In the 2 plur. masc.

buff. b.

Xofrf) with

a^o&o

passes into

n\^nn

with

INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES.

100

The 2

plur. fern, is rare,

and omits

before the suffix.

The imperative with

HEM.

and

and

in Pe.

vowel unchanged

conjugations, retains its

g.

>i

The forms

him.

receive

suff.

plur.

it

..il

In respect

*^S>I|>

But

vowel

this

is

those

in

radical

first

e.

away;

with

suff.

g.

x^no*

but

with

O^3|

e. g.

in

In Pa. and Aph.

7

its

suff.

e.

i n tlie

tern.

plur. the

in
T

wiOlO*jJQ*

suff.

Verbs

hither.

-JQlD]-4) do me good.

g.
;

_,
*.

with

**")

parag. sometimes occurs

tOSn^n

e. g.

paragogic form

with

is

suff.

the more

Pa. and Aph. both forms occur together.

D.

The

28. 1) loses

*01Q\*">O| lead him

p, are an exception, as they retain

the

does not always take place,

falls

Q\OO|

Also a form with

sometimes occurs.

usual

Q in

transposition of

(> Verbs whose imperat. does not take

this transposition of

w>JQ\O^O

Verbs 3 Gutt.,

rn v io

be reminded,

"

inserted after the

Yet

the form

praise kirn,

J2JM

g.

*.

^CnojLDO|

1^ t

e.

to the

as

-x

unchanged

should be remarked that 1 of Verbs \S)

vowel

of the imperat. pass., with an

7

active signification, also remain

with

the other

in

vVn^ ^ ear me

V">O

>uOli

e.

infinitive

INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES.

Pe.

changed before the

^4^

suff.

with su ff- a ! remains unof the 2 per. plur. The suffixes of

-

the other persons are attached to the form

\4

1^

But
>

the infinitives of the remaining conjugations with d are

treated as feminine substantives, the feminine suffixes of
which (those of the 3 plur. excepted, which are attached

with Q) they take, attached to the

separately to the form
termination Zol (Compare
declension 1).

R EM

In Pe., where

45. 2.

and

insert, in its place,

forms with
yet two other

B. feminines,
some

of the second syllable falls away,

A
"\

grammarians

48.

e.

g.

Ol\ftnV>\

Q a Q inserted after

Buxtorf adds

the third radical

e. g.

PAKTICIPLK8 WITH SUFFIXES.

an j

If the vowel be

^oin\flnV)

Cll

it

remains unchanged

e.

g.

as in

Verbs

i '

OlSOCuQ^*

PARTICIPLE

E.

101

WITH SUFFIXES.

which are considered as nouns, take their

This occurs, however, more rarely in the part, act,

Participles,
suffixes.

where either prepositions are used ; e. g. y\ v '^ who

seek thee, or a noun formed from the participle is joined with
,

' *

the suffix; e. g. >A supporting, oiio^ his helper.

On the
1*. \.
contrary participles with separate pronouns (vid.
Rein.), or with afformatives ( 20) form the present tense.

REGULAR VEKBS WITH SUFFIXES.

102

Proper Form.

Sing.

c.

2m.

^n

Pe.
Sing. 3 m.

Pret.

f.

n VA o

">

3f.
2 m.

2f.
i

c.

Plur. 3 m.

&&0
.

V^ Q

m*"V"\Ap
T

2 m.
2

f.

.1

Infinit.

Imp.

sing.)

2m.
2

>

\r>

f.

Plur. 2

\Ar^

m.

>.

\rA
Fut. sing.)
3 m.

Plur. 3 m.

Pret. Pa.

Infin.Pa.

X^
. .

i\Ao

REGULAR VERBS WITH SUFFIXES.

3 m.

Plur. 1

103

2 m.

c.

f.

*A

^aol^o
*

* *>t

<

V
*

'

^r;sAn

^o

^qii\A^Q

K^^A
^fn
.

\r> Ao

.<nn . \r> Ao

\oAr>

rninV^oi

.nVAo

104 SUFFIXES TO VERBS WITH THIRD RADICAL OLAPH QUIESCENT

37.

Suffixes to

Verbs with third Radical Olaph

Quiescent

Verbs

(]J).

32) differ so widely in their

regular verbs, as to

]] (

suffixes, from
treatment. It

with

may be remarked

mode of connection
demand a separate

in general

as in the 3 sing.
1. That the termination )_ either loses )
masc. pret. Pe., or in the sing. masc. of the imperat. Pa.,
Aph., Shaph. with suff. c or ) is changed into _. movable,
,

with

as in the infinit. Pe.

where the

*>
,

to

according

a.

suff.

1,

excepting before tOa

which has arisen from

*.

also falls

So the termination of the

some.

away,

fut.

\.

is

ft

changed into ._ with

suff. b.

Forms which end

2.

connect the

suff. a. 1,

in

with

JL

.JL eitlier omit

entirely, and
movable, as 3 sing. masc. pret.

Pa. and Aph. (and sometimes Pe. with -i. final), or

remains with suff. b, as 2 sing. masc. imperat. Pe., and,
x

without exception

OD
f

^v

>Q ,

The

remains also in the

are changed into

with

J-i

3.

>

case before

A.

ft

(or .{_)

with

suff.

b,

and

into

suff. c.

The forms which end with Q

*

first

terminations of the imperat. fern. <-i_

otiant, take for

the

>

OQ (and o]_) ; and for Q^_ the form CU unchanged in

the preceding cases with suff. b ; e. g. 3 plur. masc.
Peal.
pret. of all the conjugations excepting
In respect to individual persons of this class of verbs with
suffixes, the following should be remarked
forms

all

A.

PRETER. WITH SUFFIXES.

(Comp. Table of Verbs

The 3
Buff.

sing. masc.

jj.t
'^

loses }

*aLi of the 3 sing. masc. to

|J

with Suffixes.

and appends
the form ^.t

suff

b,

and

FDTDKE WITH SUFFIXES.

The 3

sing. fern.

&..

is

unchanged,

^ takes,

The

suff. a. 1.

same

105

true of the 1 sing. A^-\i

2 sing. masc.
2 sing.

fern.

A^M

takes, unchanged, suff.

oA^V. attaches suff. b. to the form ^A^A...

oXi" is changed into ocA., (and ol^.t) with

3 plur. masc.

euff. b.

*-Xi remains unchanged with

3 plur. fern.
2 masc. and

c.

fern,

and

1 plur. take,

suff. c.

unchanged,

suff. c.

R&m. Verbs 3 rad. j as they are mostly intransitives,

take no suffixes in Peal. But Pa. and Aph. of these verbs
,

with

a. transitive signification, as

same ending, take

excepting before
fern,

suff.

a. 1,

^a

well as of Verbs

the
,

_ remains.

The 3

sing.

A--^ and Aph.

Ax..

The

tOD , where

U with

with the falling away of

remains unchanged in Pa.

same is true also of the 1 sing, in both conjugations. The

3 plur. masc. occurs mostly before the suff., with O doubled
(see Amira, p. 372); e. g. Ps. liv. 3, ed. Erpen.^
they have sought them. Sometimes the original 1 appears

before both OO;

In Pa.

thee.

the

and

suff.,

with

GuJ*I

^M

and Aph.
Q-A^l,
becomes movable but

QJL

Ps. Ixxvii. 16, ^.ooll*. they have seen

e. g.

quiesces in

Vtl*

takes

suff. c.

The paragogic form of

with

sing. masc.
,

masc. and

e. g.

over

wi

e. g.

these two conjugations

given in the table, without change.

B.

The 3

0*M

given in the tab. with the falling away of

**O1

before

The 3
with suff. )Q3CuLJ(.
r&*r ;
Pa. and Aph. in the simple form, takes the suff.

suff.

plur. fern, in

away

falls

affix to
fern,

FUTURE WITH SUFFIXES.

|Lj and

the form

nil
*

the persons which terminate

-\J

suff. b.

The 2 and 3

plur.

remain unchanged, and are connected, as

the regular verb, with

suff. c.

in

IMPERATIVE AND INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES.

106

Rem.

mode

This

Aph.

Sometimes

3 sing.

fern.

e. g.

of formation also occurs in Pa. and

in the suff.

takes the place of

also

Matt.

i.

19,

6u;*J

that he should dismiss

I 7. -K

her, or in Pa.

And

it.

e.

Luke

g.

xiii.

I shall liken
.Q2CU] / will

18, 20, oixLojj

with the falling away of

**

e.

g.

show you, the correctness of which Lud. de Dieu,

p. 398,

doubts.

IMPERATIVE WITH SUFFIXES.

C.

2 sing. masc. --^v

sing. fern.

is

^is

--\
7^

oX."

2 plur. masc.

is

unchanged with
x

suff. b.

l*

changed

into

changed into

with
A^y
*
7^

OQ^ v

fern.

i^S.i affixes suff. c. to

vM

V
i

suff. b.

2 plur.

suff. b.

(and

oJJ..)

with

>

the form J-^Xt*

Rem. The

imperat. Pa. yyt and Aph. jj.il take the suffixes of the pret. in connection with the 3 or 1 person ; e. g.
.

-7

The same is true in the plur. masc. of the

same conjugations. In the fern., the paragogic form with
suff. c. is the usual one.
(Compare 2, above.)
Oicoj heal her.

In the
is

infinit.

D.

INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES.

Pe.

VM^ m place of

inserted with suff.

a. 1.

**

without a vowel

In respect to the falling away

^2

of -. before
1. above,) Lud. de Dieu, p. 395,
, (see
^QO ,
doubts. The infinitives of the other conjugations are treated as in the regular verb. (Compare 36, D.)
B.

PARTICIPLE WITH SUFFIXES.

(Compare

20 and

36. E.)

Passive.
Plur.

Active.

Sing.

Plur.

xj,^

Sing.

^
1.

PARTICIPLE WITH SUFFIXES.

107

The participlevS of the other conjugations are inflected in

a similar manner, retaining the characteristic vowels ; e. g.
*.

Pa. act. .o/uA^lo ye ask, Aph. ^L*>oLo

*
7

we thank, Ethpe.

^i

i I

^ASo

w<? />///* about.

General fiemarfc.

|a

Verbs of the form of

to console, never lose the third
radical letter ] when taking a suffix, but throw back its
vowel upon the middle radical, which, according to 36, usually stands vacant

pi.

e. g.

pret.

masc. *_jjo]^o, ^oV^a,

r
.r

3 sing. masc.
fern.

..

iry

fern.

r r

fern. .il|*-),

ifiQ,
.

^r

2 sing. masc.

TTT

uCTiCLi|jjD

o)_-a

IjUi, aOu|l2,

sing. masc. *jJ|^j3J, ^(i*^i, imperat.

rr
jtOU)^o,

~u)u^

2 plur. masc.

tut.

VERBS

108

]]

WITH SUFFIXES.
Verb

Proper Form.

Sing. 1

Pret. Sing. Pe. j

\O

wQ>j

Pa

3 m.

P..

l
.

c.

m.

j]

f.

2-0

Pa.
i

c.

Pea/.

PZwr. 3 m.

OXQJ
3

/mp.
2 m.

nn ^ en

Pe.

Pa.

P/wr. 2 m,

Futur. 3 m.

..^r>i

VERBS U WITH

3 m.

3f.

Plur. 1

109
2 m.

c.

01*^0
X

fc

Ol7;O

*.

0100*0

rt.mi

.*
.^o'vn

0140

.^rno.

.<">

oiol-o

A
>n.'O

110
38.

Auxiliary Verbs, or Verbs Substantive.

There are in Syriac two auxiliary verbs (verbs sub-

1.

One of these,
Van conversive,

stantive).
exists as

]ooi to be, which, in Hebrew,

used to form the moods and

is

tenses which are wanting (see

which

is

other,

properly a noun, A* being, substance, essence (essen-

with Olaph prosthetic A*]

tia),

The

18. 4. Rem\).

takes the place of the aux. p

verb

iliary

Verbs

The former of

be.

these,

fool

belongs to

like which it is inflected, but in respect to which

be particularly observed, that, when connected with

|J

it is to

to

the participle, preter.or future, the Ol (with Linea occultans)

not pronounced this is also the case when the verb is

i 7
added merely for the sake of emphasis e. g. |ooi -;* he
is

has begun.

Upon

and IOCTU see

the double formation of the

35. 2,

The

c.

inflection of A*)

Plur.

F.

is

fut.

IOGU

as follows

Sing.

M.

C.

F.

**L$

(we are)

M.

C.

1.

(7 am)

>V (thou art)

are)

T
I

2.

(Ae, sAe is)

(&ey are) *OOLiAft|

In connection with p

ed similarly to A"f ;

e. g.

is

formed A.^, which

*jk*.

I am

tion with looi forms the imperfect;

.jOio^uY^ was.

^AjT

The same

tense

is

e.

not.
g.

is inflect-

A*] in connec-

]ooi Ai] or looi

also expressed

looi.

looi doubled marks the pluperfect

/ had

been.

e. g.

by ]ooi

Aooi A*OO1

DERIVATION OF NOUNS.

CHAPTER

Ill

III

THE NOUN.

Derivation of Nouns.

39.

Nouns, as in Hebrew and Chaldee, are primitive,

and sometimes compounded.
To primitives
belong nouns of one and two syllables, which indicate animals, plants, metals, numbers, members of the bodies of
1.

derivative,

animals, etc. (See Gesenius, Lehrgeb. p. 478, sq.). Inasmuch

as they coincide with simple verbal forms, they are always
recognized as nouns by the nature of the object which they

\Sb& flesh,

designate; e.g.

JZOlj

^amo

gold,

The

silver.

which are by far the most numerous, are form

ed partly from verbs (verbals), and partly from nouns
derivatives,

(denominatives).
2.

The

derivation of nouns

change of the original word

,

Vf)

or

counsel

to

effected

is

e.

g.

,i

a) without

\>)\ mourning, from ^\a}

by a mere change of the vowel

e.

any

.\So counsel, from

SSn

..i

g.

mourn

to

king,

f>

;CD| fetter
] AL

heart,

by the

falling

away of the

from <-Ju

1 Aa

from

b)

sleep,

from

>*a*"i\

care,

but especially

e)

radical letter
>

final,

1,

letters,
.*.

and Q

if
;

Several of these formative letters are someX

times found in

e. g.

addition of

by the

formative letters or of entire syllables. Those

So A, L
if medial, they are
initial, are 1

P3-^ the

the

same noun

e.

dominion, 12oiSfii;V) compassion,

g.

f.

A^Q-^Z scholar,

]A^2O1\

jlame.

112

NOUNS DERIVED FROM VERBS.

40.

Nouns

derived

from

Verbal nouns are kindred either to

Verbs.

participles,

and de-

note the subject or object of the action (Concrete Nouns), or

they are kindred to the infinitive, and receive the signification of the action or quality itself (Abstract Nouns).

But

frequently in the formation of these nouns, rare or obsolete

forms of the infinitives and participles arc chosen. The
following tables present a collective view of the
formation.

modes of

TABULAR VIEW

OFDERIVATIVE NOUNS.

118

or

NOUNS DERIVED FROM REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS.

PARTICIPIAL FORMS.

I.

A.
a.

OF PEAL.

The simple but unusual Participial Forms, which are mostly Adjectives.

Absolute

state,

Emphat. state.,
^O..

>;..

V&O

a man.

|JQCD

an

UO12

associate.

leprous.

^iLO

mournful

|,OJ

foolish.

rural, quiet.
cXr.

Ql and
*
i

U and

^>wrc.

-k-^
r

hard.

i'np urc

From

these

are derived

multitude.

Abstract

Nouns

e.

g.

>

t""

^AltAO hardness;

114

Usual Participial Forms of Peal.

b.

Active.

a.

Absolute

Emphat.

/3.

Passive.

state, j
<

state,

JOICD a witness

sound.

>] righteous.

(ft
z

i*

black.

given.

^7

hireling.

rr--y

and ^*A

an inhabitant.

"-

.2)

(>*S.i

^i.\ cursed.
*

a herdsman.

and

(fry.

2)

so/15.

/oft^-SMjfmny.

-A
X

Q^

reviling.

renowned.

>

|*^i*^

y -\*

ree.

beloved.

17

rare.

a herdsman.
# #

(JOl>j a landlord.
13"

and

concealed.

la

0"and

m. "JAjjS

a physician.

f.

beautiful.

|3" and ]l

* beautiful.

Here belong
publication,

13"

r*"n prophet,

and

_a

|A^*-n prophetess.

also AbstractNouns, as *)2cLkQol healing,

|2oLi^

]2o>l* freedom, QCL>1 and IZoCLijl righteousness,

dry ness.

TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS.

With Immutable Vowels,

c.

Ab.

stat., j
^

Emph.

CT

0&>

Q$0

115

O&O

flo&O ]]o4^

ft^xgi a plough-

]Ta&^
5

.0

>

jao

JQil MMMii

OD & with
ffoo
Jl

Q^T)

ry\
'

MM-

^phemer.
T

^ "*.<>

2)

and

<-kA

t J

|*O j] a Aaw- jlooo]

6/acJt.

and i^A

ppMOja
possessor.
*
OL
jkl
and
///''/-.

^A

and

>

.'

a judge. (*CLi) a destroyer. \LQ*l mortal. \1)CL& fortunate.

\L^

IMrih

>

**.
pQ-1 a

oi

dL

^2)

ilQQJ damp.

/7tr//Y.

11"*- A

ft

"

>Q*j a spend-

(2)

lj a carpenter, \\ozi\a preacher.

(color).

^ASQx> a friend.

a ^06, |^O>] a 5ower.

a rabble.

_>

JjQSOQflD

a combatant.

an

l?ryt

U and

V
wA

POT
"'"

''

x
^V

U and

p>7

barber.

Jjioj

|JQA.. a *^y.
^*
IV
U and

a youth. llOUi

11"

MH

>**

,*,

orator.

11*

divorce.

6?7/ o/"

c/e/(f.

'mournful.

MO^ creator.
^*
|OO> a
.

>

U and ]>

!.

From
.

>

these are formed

|IO>Q11

littleness,

-X

Abstract Nouns,
'*

%*''

|QO)|

division,

like

/r> ^

<

jZQJOul giving,

etc.

rejection,

116

TABULAE VIEW OP DERIVATIVE NOUNS.

PARTICIPIAL FORMS,

B.

a.

Of

the other Active

Pael.
It takes

the

Aphel.

Shaphel.

usual ^

form, and the form

Usual

with IL_ and the

form

l>

%.

Conjugations.

-X

^,

V^^

and )
7?"

Usual

form

and

"6 oVn

7_

form

a dwelling.

leader,

an

l^h
[I*

offense.

changing.

o o

7!

pincers.

poor.
A

r/cA.

Vf) a

teacher.

Vn.rn^n

P-^liD

a torturer.

Ql and
LiOliO

a deliverer.

Band
despairing.

*j-L

r^

united.

Vmm

Qi and

rf.

Part. pass.

in>ncm S
high.

]t\M<^ ^rOM

^^SDiSo com^^erf.

wA

and ^-^
SC?i/tOMS.

Vand

(lajGllD a leader.

U and

a watch-tower,

"i^

a physician.
|J

a comforter.

From

and
a confessor.

these are derived Abstract Nouns, as

sf)

doctrine, lZoi*rf)flb healing, &c.

direction,

TABULAR VIEW OF DEBIVATTVE NOUNS.

the Passive

Of

b.

form

Conjugations.

Eshtaphal.

Ethpaal.

Ethpeel.

Usual

Usual form and

and

117

Usual form

and
j

those with T, ]A

01

those with T, ]!'

and

those with

curdled.

U and

pL

%A_^

entreat-

renowned.

eloquent.

PARTICIPIAL FORMS OF LESS FREQUENT CONJUGATIONS.

C:

Usual form and

)
(

\0m

**

church-

Usual form and

"^

(^Q^OOI a

Paiel

Pealel.

Palel.

Usual form and

a farrier.

|V)\V)\0 unhurt,

treasurer.

<m
Parel.

Usual form and

Quadriliterals.

Taphel.

Usual form and

")

Uyir"
+

f^

a pitcher.
r

sudden.

pL.)Z
if
(

a/i interpreter.

\.*1

^Vf>\/ a
pupil.

1*

an accuser.

TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE

118

INFINITIVE FOKMS.
OF PEAL.

A.

Simple Infinitive Forms

a.

Absolute

NOUN'S.

Segholates.

state, j
'

Emphat.

state,

>

(ai

the soul.

> rain.

bread.

>

holiness.

morning.

sea-grass.

a way.

r* herbage.

child.

diligence,

)
a

dl and wiA

Ql

and wiA

13" and

I]

(HOD an end.

a dwelling.

|J^>

-iJL

goodness.

peace.

and

'and

coldness.

treasure.

B'and

|J

and wk2>
anguish.

It is

seldom that
}V

inal

e.

g.

all

three forms are found derived from one orig-

'

\1C1** a rope,

two forms, as

JJl

aw oak,

11'

U^LM

\1\

a pestilence,

\\

"'

ySQ^j

a storm (from ^1).

<7t7^ ;

oftener

TABULAB VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUSB.

b.

Abs.stat.

Em.

forms

Infinitive

119

with Immutable Vowels.

stat. (

|>Ui
o

a-

herd.

Q\~ltt) folly.

seizure.
% 0.

a MOfm

gleaning.
a.girdle.

]e> (and

B)

'

0*

>

p*)OniO

/"/v.

\LQn.) a kiny-

affiance.

^2}

U><^>V

a fetter.

ing.

Ol and -iA
tradition.

a vessel.

Ql and

5 5

~_1

Ql

..

and

talkative-

*^'

ness.
JJ

a question.

nature.
>

UfO*

^ favor.

and

A^

indecency.

a flowing.

1)

|i.CL*OV*j appearance.

Vand

l'l

(LOQJLO possession.

arrival

Ml

U and -*^

dence.

U and _>

a sprout.
^0

fj_Qj

error.

and ]i

]3
,

]NnV> fullness.

IZ,Qal)

orna-

TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS.

120

USUAL INFINITIVE FORMS OF PEAL AND OF THE

OTHER CONJUGATIONS.

B.

Peal

Pael.

ShapM.

Aphel.

Usual form
and

Usual form
and

Usual form and

or

thought.

a
"

]n

led.

desert.

j^plZ
*
^^

QSO a

thrust.

change.

* \ ef)L flattery.

*"

Ae/f/>.

\ODOL

'jZo,'"^* slavery.

fjAoSo a

concussion.

combat.

ijfi

2. mera speech.
"\LyQ.^\

chandise,

struction.

u
-

g*i

Ql

and wkl

bellows.
-i-l

^A*Q^Z
V and *j-^

rubbish.

lAxQ2Z

and

.-i-S

and *j.2

(^lOQji

deliver-

saw.

I^OSO a

Aoe.

U (and ]a)

#0.

ri

a wan- "jZcuAAiD an

in^.
]]

^{/Y.

g>

^.2)

l;rf>V>

departure.

harken-

"\*OLdespair. (A^CTIQiba

insight.

and

^>

|J

as-

sembly.

y and

jh2>

and

fi\Vna

con-

elusion.

U and w^2

a drawing lA^joZ doctrine. ]Zni fc^QSo con- jjjOQ* a joro-

*o/

(of water).

IT and

]a

arrival.

elusion.

misc.

TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS.

C.

121

THE LESS FREQUENT

INFINITIVE FORMS OF

CONJUGATIONS.

Palel and Palpel.

Pavel and Paiel.

Pealel.

)lXo2 a worm.

splendor.
"

i and -iA
..

nocence.

(J

and -iA

(Ali

motion.

b a mystery.

Pali.
\9

fc

contamment.

ination.

Parel.

JQCD

swiftness.

Pamel.

Taphel.

shame.

IjicAoZ

doctrine.

DENOMINATIVE NOUNS.

122

Denominative Nouns.

41.

Here belong
1.

Nouns

a)

without any formative additions, derived

from some other nouns, which

*

e. g.

from

|u>Vf> a seaman,

garden ;

formative syllables

** *

pj.t a gardener, from pQl.t a

be either primitives or

may

D a

derivatives of verbs

U- masc.,
V

V-'A

(\V>

1/L-

salt ;

(Patronymics or

fern.,

_<?

<\

with the

b)

f P

Gentile Nouns) e.g. j^ioocnj Roman, \Lt^fL^\Israditess ;

with the falling away of the syllable *CDQ in names
;

of towns

e. g.

an Ephesian, from *COQQaf

^i.ffl* )]

Feminine Abstract Nouns, terminating in ]2a and }Aj_L

^Zoi\

from

youthfulness,

ness,

from ^idL blind ;

Aeac?,

principal

}A*JQ
from la

fern,

tle

c)

)/cu*l'a

Sometimes we

little

brother,

e.

from

|g)nn\n a young

a manikin,
(CDO^yi
.
pound nouns also occur
formation

fAoJQAjoZ'rQ a very

W;

fr^yt*

e.

little

g.

little

T/uJoZ^

son,

lit-

from |*">V\

dog,

and

]jo^..
-y>^
Diminutives from com-

e. g.

V'^'

7
^.

(JQAJ^ irom paJ^

e. g.

DQ masc. and

fcob

g.

e.g.

blind-

from sa_o

diminutives with .a or

p^'
from

}2o^OL

beginning,

find both forms in use

a double
-*.*

}LLJL*J

attached to the noun

daughter from 12^3

l**

a youth

]]!_

or

|jQCOO*a.. a very

little

also

man,

daughter.

mentions a form with the third radical

(p. 145)
*
*
*
i"i
k
^
a little
doubled, and Q inserted between them
e.g. E4n{)nN

REM.

Amira

<

letter

D.

assembly, from
2.

t&^^*

Adjectives belong here, which are formed

ing the terminations

masc. lAoJUiOj

\3

masc. and 1/UJ

fern., spiritual,

the terminations

!***
masc. (Ax-

fern.

U*>

from

e. g.

affix-

e. g.

U**o>

by*

affixing

b)

fern.

by

a)

fjkSQAQ.i masc.

COMPOSITE AND EXOTIC NOUNS.

..

50. 3)

(see

from JSo^Q..

fern, corporeal
e. g.

l[*LL

ing the terminations

the third,

masc., }AjU

V*->

ordinal numerals

from

123

]^2

c)

by

fern.; e.g. V*-L**O>

affix-

masc^

k.

>.

|AoJU,O>

RKM.
marks

fern.

the cases under

In respect to

(p. 106) that the

latter

is

a.

and

c.

above,

Amira

re-

rather used in metaphorical lan-

guage, yet he also admits the interchange of the two forms.

42.
1.

The formation of words by composition

m Syriac than in the

p.

and Exotic Nouns.

Composite

151

is more
frequent
other Semitic dialects, (see Michaelis,

Lud. de Dieu, pp. 73,

74).

The words most

quently used in forming compounds are

man, UoZjGtwce; ^\1Q

e.

g.

]Ax>
YA

firstling;

*3 y

**j J principal

householder;

e.g.

e. g.

fcia,\V") enemy;

sir; e.g.

(AxO house;

^ son

fre-

"

e. g.

"

L** (mao

corn-house; sometimes

^a]

In changing the
eating ; e. g. 1 ;n\">] adversary.
Concrete idea into the Abstract, either the last part of the

compound word only is regarded

e.g. *|^r>*">*"\VO^ hostility,

or both parts are changed into the feminine

Ao5

house-holding.

Upon

(ZoAAQ

e. g.

the plural inflection see

44.

The Syrians have introduced many Greek words into

and given them either Syriac terminations
permitted them to retain, more or less, the Greek forms.

2.

their language,

or

The

following are examples

.
7.1
IK

M-y!

;
.

7',

-,

'""
t

Q -\^

su

L.J
jxaXXov,

There are some

peculiarities

GENDER OF NOUNS.

124

in the formation of these words, for

Rem.

44.

At

8.

which see

the Syrians

introduced words also from the western languages

ivs 7

7
>

the

Franks,
wt) JG1

Prince,

pO|J

Henry,

Germany,

v1

O*A

and

12. 5.

the time of the Crusades,

e.

g.

England,

y\LL\^\

etc.

Gender of Nouns.

43.

The Syriac language has but two genders, masculine and

The latter is distinguished partly by the signififeminine.
cation and partly by the form.
1. In respect to the signification, the gender is fixed by
the same rules as in Hebrew. Masculines are the names of

men, masculine offices, nations, mountains, 'months and

rivers.
Feminines are the names of female persons and animals, countries, cities, and members of human and animal
bodies, which are found double although they have mascu9*

line endings in the plural

2.

e. g.

In respect to form, the feminine

I
*<?

the terminations

Pj

)>

those final syllables, which

is

^M masc.),

^o... >, etc.

characterized

is

by

But the

first

particularly used for the

mation of feminines from masculines

panion from

< t

^-Xi ' feet from

\?

(e. g.

of

for-

|^M female

com-

must not be confounded with a

similar sounding termination of masculines (the emphatic

state,
45, 3) usually given in the lexicons, as the only mas-

culine form in use.

masculines,
e. g.

it

*|Aa^V)

is

To

distinguish this fern, form from the

usually given with the termination ]2

The forms with ol and

the queen.
-j

arisen

The
e. g.

by apocope from

last

|Z

Os

e. g.

">*^

have

I c/oodness, **;o learn.

of the above mentioned endings L

AjiD part.

*JL-

is

seldom used

GENDEB OF NOUNS.
REM.
lives

The feminine ending \-

1.

*d

e. g.

(L

masc.

is

generally found

in adjeo

word ends with

If the

fern.

125

changed into

letter is

*.

and forms

t-

e.

g.

-,

lU

masc.

this

|>ni

fern.

Gentile nouns and numerals ending with w

change that terminax
x
*
if f
y.
wOCTLi
fern.
masc.
Nouns with
tion into fV*JOCTL
e.g.
|

(A&O

|Ao. ornament,

bow,

REM.

They

pb_&

'_r.

Many nouns

2.

common.
6.

when Z

masculine

final are

is

|A*1

with a masculine ending are feminine or

|>.>0j way,

|JL_^ rib,

(i>*| earth,

|;nO
Icop

r^//<-,

pOICO com. moon,

7

t^O'rL

*.

&/, (MO*

vQj_

ment,

^*^*

MW,

e.

//y,

battle,

tl^QlD burden,
?

(JHCD shield,

Names

heaven,

com. firma-

\ml*

common

coin.

gen-

(J-^.t a

ass,

talent.

] JQJ ^re.

(guv branch,
X

of animals also are of the

?

|^3

\ff^m com. mo/A,

jAxiQs ?/, (jlSAs com.

(l^l com. /tm,

*^- com.
1
tongue, f^*^ A-O/,

45. 3)

P-vil pitcher,
?T
^

"!*'?
)*
com. wmr/, (AjiZ) com. terror, ( v

^'^y-

g. |;Vn

q/"
^ff

sword, com.,

hades,

der

/"

(2^M

leather bottle,

!?^i; ^'we

herd,

e. g.

ofo've.

are usually given in the emphatic state

ship,

we//,

noun

a radical letter of the

ca;?ie/ ;

also the cardinal

num-

\4

bers

from 20 to
O

CO,JQCD

Greek nouns

100^
'

<\

"i

tfuvodoc,

'

end in

"|2

^ia^r)XT].

In general,

e.

g.

those nouns are

which come from the feminine of the He-

brew, ending in H~T, and

state,

their gender

(OjAj)

considered as feminine

retain

'

45. 3).

all

of those nouns which, in the emphatic

NUMBER OF NOUNS.

J26

Number of Nouns.

44.

There are two numbers in Syriac, the singular and plural.

There are, indeed, four dual forms, taken from the Hebrew,
(^-*2 masc. two, ^-i2>2 fern, two, ^-2]lo two

^_

ending in

Tt

Ti

hundred, and ^-> *So Egypt] but they cannot be considered

as a special form of the language.
Pairs are usually expressed by the plural, and duality by the numeral two.
The plural of masculines is formed by annexing the
;

to the

^i_

syllable

noun

sing.

e. g.

mountains, from

^-OCL

"

*"

*f

io

that of the feminine

by ^

(instead of

e.

*"

IjoAo

g.

virgin, plur. ^.XoA^),

Item.

1.

Plural masculines of derivatives from Yerbs U,

ending with J- and

..

^i^>

plur.

-*-.

77

1>

^'fjalo

terminate in ^JL_
*

dwelling,

ending

Q"AV>
V

those ending in

$,,

e.

mvr>

g.

Feminmes

kingdom, plur.
x

i>

take

boy,

]].

g.

^u^So*
7

plur.

take tQ

f>

J^
Q and L

in

e.

+*\> creature,

e. g.

i\

Nouns derived from Yerbs Ml

if the doubled
consonant appear again in the plural, take Linea occultans

plur. ^->'r^

under the
07

lki

of the similar letters

I..7
D7
sea, ^-tV^^S from pni people.

Rem.
manner
"

''V

first

Some masculines form

2.

^ "j" 7
(

"T

.*

'i

.OO3|; (jjo| cno, plur. |Zcujo|

.

7..7

"/l^ 7

-i

"

fco)

1*1 7

>

g.

fj>|

physician, plur.
"

""

night,

,n\ i N

plur.

herdsman,

t>

UQO member,

a part.

P7.-X

.a0>c3

T,p

plur. (as

(loow

\\
;

"

l"?

-,

-7

77

**

plur.

P. 7

same

MOTI, plur.

iO>^| ; JuOM snake, plur.

*0. 07*.
^'".Omwte, plur. fZajjas ; froos throne, plur.
5^1 J9to<?^,

^*SnVu from

the plural in the

Here belong

as feminines.

^'*1

e.

^J>-1')

ifl

IZalao

plur.
7

^Qi>

*Z

Jl>

"

J*

cup-oearer^

&c. (Compare Agrell, Comment, de

plur. ]2on
generis et numerl, p. 68 ; and upon the absolute
" form and
45. 1. 3.)
use, see
phatic states. tli"

varietafo

and em-

NUMBER OF NOUNS.
REM.
lines

3.

form the plural like mascu-

feminities

by rejecting the feminine ending of the emphatic singular

a)

The following

127

45. 3),

t&fell, ^>SfiV;

(1'ZAl)'

woman, ]mj)
Ijioa

coaf,

J^SOJ

j tear,

]Q>

window,

\hsrfiwall, ]a>f

\&>* fig-basket,

}An^

ft'fe,

]lO\

(o/ paper),

seve,

\\OMD

lA^lD

VZ^DD
cluster (of grapes),

1>i^

bridle,

yar, ^JL!*

by retaining Z;

1^25 ^

care,

(see Agrell,

REM.

4.

]*/Sn

SarAr,

]}&

e.g.

ZfA noxious
15\S\

lAoji

}^O

*,

booty,

//'</>.

V^Z

fi}^

]&)

")

l^p..* almond,

means, |Z]\

calling,

UJjl

i/tow.;/,

1'Al* hour,

l^li

ftar/ey, IJl

\l

l^Sn

wore?, ]]io

"jAl^
jZ|

cry,

Some nouns form a double

.7

and iOlo|

ugliness, |Z| .;

"j^Q*

"JA^O*

r?/sf,

(the feminine form

plural

..

\L*M

army,

breast,

^*r+*

father,

"W

^O,-M

>OGU
*D

(/ay,

j'fiD lord,

^V)CU
I

rr

heart,

9OU

stream,

and ^>(1

Hf/;/<c,

p^O

t .

^1

'

iS (t'omiT

.
;

V*

iO*"l \

^>1*S and

^*">n\ and z^OHS

*

\1*
(LQ*

'r^ (corner)

(1 *,S eye,

* '

>

^-)OU and ^O9OU

T

^\*~\\"~ and
1^

(times,

and iOl,-| (gripe of the hand);

1"C

^LoCLi

^i;V> and ^OpO

heel,

<

and

and ^O\i

^2] mni^ ^a1*^l and ^1^1

z
X
' *
V
>

pi Aawc?, ^->r*|

TT

^>\>

tn repetition)

p. 70. sq.)

passim,

<>

lAiy.

IT
x

etc.

/y, tff,

Aor;t,

^_OllQ* and ^OliQ*

etc.

i;r>

and

NUMBER OF NOUNS.

128

masculines as in some of the above examples, take

take

lASl

e.

g.

*i&t.

ZjQOj

5ee,

|AxCDQ0,

jAflOQCO mare,

REM.

**

*>

^Pf

serted

9'*

fASDo") people,

e.g.

^fmother,

l2ol;

offering,

handmaid, (ZoiSo] (compare

Sometimes

49).
*

|U)O2>

6) the

first

REM.

V""l 7
\S5\face,

life,

Some

V.

plural in such a

6)

e.

worth.

singular

names

g.

e.g.

ff

|^i

?an-

i*">

>

tattling.
7

yl..

**><">
;

e.g.

water,

(*2)

take the plural mark,

(collectives)
7

-.7

horses,

|*r

CiO

'

?'

REM.

\J-QL13

M^D)

also places here

(p. 95)

man;

1*'"

g.

part

e.

only occur in the plural

Hibui

e.g.

Some words

6.

REM.

both parts

1^4 ^^^

!>

and |,-AO

Amira

(j-1 sheep.

cattle,
P" X

draft-cattle.

Greek nouns, without regard to gender, take the Syriac

8.

plural ending of masculines in

Lk^2) ^aXayysj, |LQ.iO)

(_

T<

-x

1**

^>QOQ^2>|

e.g.

eifufxotfoi,

Less frequently do they take

^o^jxara.

^"

the plural terminations offeminines in \L

^"*
;

e.g.

(IQIO^O

/u-yj^ava/,

which constitute the Greek singular

|Zo)Aco|
terminations are commonly omitted; but in some instances retained;
Letters

rfra^ia.

e. g.

(CDOSQJ

from
from

vo|aoi

from

vojxoj.

The

plural terminations Sss

-

i?

and

xXsij;

0.5,

are represented

by

]4l^9 r]') av^iavrss from

and J4

av^iaj:.

(first

declension)

by

e.

g.

JQD,

d-kAo

The Syriac

and of the
*

ing the accusative a;

1*

CD|,

and

reg,

v*

yi>

tains the termination of the Greek plural

e.

. J

TV ..(>

c)

in*X

a) the last part of the composite is inflected

-o

or

is

^P. P

etc.

granary, or
?,

a.

(\

A30> p&u*, (A^2O>

The composites (42.1) form the

5.

ner that either

or Ol between

Also some feminities in (Z

and Ol before the plural ending

ZoiiO

1^9

the plural ending and the last radical.

xXsjJej

often re-

cases, represent7

fiDO

and

g.
.

01
;

and

ou

(second declension) by

and

DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN

<">-

e.

g.

n^oo

.nnot^.x.^

Zrwixoi,
T

YlV"

">

neuters of this declension by |; e.g.

by .o)

e.g.

are represented

ft

>n *l

by .m*.,

ax

twv

|JLO x69aXeca

1 .\rn
'EXXr,vaf
DjO-i2)*Xaxaj, tOPQ

is

m>fT|

e.% g.

in a<ra,

ending

|^]iQ..O9
^\

nouns

e.

-r

Some

g.

T
;

e.

>

^SQ..O> and

g.

of these plural endings occur in Latin

annonce

U^*

D(^0(O

The same

castra.

'

]Al

(comp. Agrell OtioL Syr. p.

45.

1.

is

garden, for P-

'.

iff

and the neuters

.7

~*

CDpQJ|

from the singular in

ai^erfeij

%flP^CiD Kaitfa^af,

e.g.

eig

by (4 an d J4l

are represented

(5oy(jiaTa.

the genitive

third declension

I ^**

~X
-***--

represented by

as of the

and .ICO

*CD, .J&1
*
* *

and

<i>/Xjflrirou;

an(l

129

from

4649).

Noun.

Different delations (States) of the

Besides the absolute and construct state of the Hebrew,

of which the latter marks the genitive, there

and Chaldee, an emphatic

noun with the

It

state.

definite article.

marked

the

occurs where

we

originally

It also

in Syriac

is

should not expect to find the definite article.

The

REM.

indefinite article

is

expressed by the

absolute state,

or by ,-w one.

There are many nouns which never, or very seldom,

bull,

2.

differ

The

]2a&

death,

e.

g.

(2Q*

heat,

jlDdO

situatio/i,

sing.,

does not

etc.

construct state

from the absolute

occur in the absolute state

a) of

state

nouns masc.

e. g.

good ;

but in the

130

DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN.

plural, the

ending ^*
* '
from

struct state

Q^ conchanged into -.- e. g.

which
form
the plural
masc.,
;

Nouns

^^L

by

is

44.Rem.l), change that termination into --

*(>

from

fcj-ipD

e.g.

>

^-r;

in the fern, sing., ].

ft)

of the absolute

e.
To the terchanged into L
g. A^2 from \4>*
2nnVn from
minations Q and w_ only 2 is added
e. g.

state is

QnS>V>

from w;o

Aa'pO

The

3.

characteristic of the

ders and numbers,

is

appended

for

both gen-

Ari from

e.g.

is

9 9

instead of

In the plural, 2

emphatic

(=

is final }

|-j

the

state,

Hebrew

.07
pQl from

e.g.

^(XL people.

In the plural the noun masc. takes

7

T*

the termination

(_ with the falling

fi\ithemen, (from the con str.

state

in the emphatic state fern. sing,

6)

away 7 of o^.

In the

to the construct state.

jALoAa from

e. g.

retained before 2;

REM.

1.

The emphatic

A^oAa

which take ^*_ in the

1\..
7

alO

away

7>..

i-.A

state

plur.

i'

masc. ends in

\^
]
-j

.Vn

44.

V* t^

Rem.l)

*f

>

But these forms

-f

ix.

ip** breast,

1 *

M_

Buxtorf

viz.

-^-fo

from the emphat.

sing.

water,

and

yet a third form, with

("!>

(>..

24. ^ifO;

cites

M r *So from

g.

1"

nouns

in

(A.

The emphatic forms |!JL^O

Hr***

heaven, belong here.

(I.; e.g. Rom.

e.

instead of

*>

and

In the plural,

.9 7"

plural,

KO frogmen ts,

before 2

]A^oA^ from A^oAo.

Only three nouns take

attached

is

plur. |I

falls
sing., _!_

constr. state
e. g.

and

g.

fca^yi) from 'r^u;

1.

e.

?..

In..

is

This

article).

a) attached to the sing, of nouns masc. with JL preceding;

26.

are not recognized

l-*ifi);

Ephes. n. 11.

by Amira, and the form

The

should perhaps be restored in these cases, as more correct.

forms
lowing should be noted as irregular emphatic plural

in

fol-

DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN.

.

y0

0.1.

from JOf

from

REM.

.1

|A^2 AOMM,

-.

pUxj) from IMUI)

//'//'/,
.ft
f

l-JOp* from

ocfor.

etc.

Feminines_with masculine endings

2.

131

43. Rem.2), form

the emphatic state like masculines by attaching the termination

*S T

^>

e. g.
> .

earth,

emphat.

Before the ending (. of the

*
e.g.

radical

e.

g.

emphatic form take

from \j3feofood.

change

g.

after

In the

e.

r.

e.g.

e.

g.

state

f"T

/*"/V.

take

Jj

before the last

and especially
the

affixing

masc).

|Ai\4

Adjectives

from |J^ dull.

ff

syllable

|Al^fl;V) from ^^n..;V>

plur.,

(ni

A
Q

some words change

Some

sAeejs.

Othei-s insert

e.

g.

take

(l

i>

JZ-'rCDflD bundle.

REM.
which
(vid.

.i

(ZoiiD from AllD

g.

|Z.OU from

g.
,

emphat.
0l

into

take

compassionate.
before

-i_

r^ii,

by

fern.,

]Ao- (from

this termination into

Those in

e.

inserted and

Feminines which are

from

|Z^l.^

form the emphatic state

(2 to the masc. absol.

from

emphat.
is

Forms with

in the

|A^Q2p0

from (0,^*^0^.

formed from masculines, like

adjectives,

fern, absol.,

\LO r^t

Some words

lA^-.

*.*

quiesces in

e.

/w,

j^O^O

state

pjOO.

in (1

(1;

*O T

state Jl) ]

is

3.

The emphatic form

formed by

Syntax,

73).

is
1

>

e.

g.

found even before the genitive,

V

p>>Sf)>

|p^

servant of the king

TABLE OF RELATIONS OF NOUNS.

132

Table of the Different Relations (States) of the Noun.

(

45 and 48).

MASCULINES.
A. Nouns of one and

two
(Decl.

with

syllables
1.

Singular.
absol.

constr.

-.

constr.

emphat.
}Im

..

vowels.

48).

Plural.
emphat.

immutable

.m

<

and

absol.

Head.

r>

Vessel.

jfcfl

Thief.
>.

"7

-X

Herb.
Nazarite.

Nation.

Nouns

B.

in

which

and

of the ultimate syllable

but the vowel of the penultimate

7"

rOD

-r

-?

(JOTED

is

retained

fall

away,

(Dec!. II).

Talent.

Witness.

w.?01

Hand.
..L0)
'*

DECLENSION OF NOQNS.

133

Nouns

C.

falls

which

in

(in gutturals

away, and the vowel

radical consonant.

of the ultimate syllable

appears over the antepenultimate

(Decl HI).

(One dead).

D. Segholate forms, which begin with

a vacant consonant, over

*.

which the original

assumed in

or

their stead

reappears in

inflection,

or

is

(Decl. IV).

"I
n V.D

t*

<

"i

.\^n

|^\Vn

King.
/:..-/-.

Holiness.
JI/ii*^.
> .0.

(iDCL.

Nouns

E.

^^iDCLi

into

wi

and

(J

pOOi

^OOi

^ *

IV'

derived from Verbs

passes

..

^LOOi

Day.

'

ending with (-,**, *A_, in which

movable as in both the other forms

is

(Decl. V).
t 7

t"

UA 9
~.

Tf-

t"
9

^-

f 7

k-^'

P 7

"P

M^'
.(>

^'
>

Herdsman.
mOr>

. .

VmVn

VmVr)
*

77
Prisoner.

DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF TUB NOUN.

184

FEMINIZES.
A. Nouns with immutable vowels (O, *_,etc.) before the ending

\L

Virgin,

(Decl.

I).

iO

Bride,

Plural.

Singular.

constr.

emphat.

City.

absol.

A^oAa

,oAo

VAloAa

absol.

constr.

emphat.

A^

/ffia
A'"*.
Aiu io

B. Nouns, whose
in the

emphat.

final syllable

state

begins with two consonants, which,

sing, have

_I_ or Jl_ inserted

between them

(Decl. II).

if Widow,

JlLi

Chariot,

.0.

]oy] Alms.

|Aoji

C. Nouns, in whose emphat. state, the vowel of the

moved forward

to the second vacant consonant

^Qjs* Partner,

p.^l

first

Cow.

12'rfiM

iiy

syllable is

Decl. Ill

Ay

).

DECLENSION OP NOUNS.
D. Derivatives of Verbs

in the

emphat.

state sing, quiesce in_i.

ft

/![' i //>',

Ujt>jO

)_ and |O

ending in

|J

^Jsl*

e.

.ft

whose

and __

Decl.

**

IV

and

).

Animal,

135

xAj

,r

^k_Kl

.FT"

/n

|Z.Qj_K

2 ), beginning
|J ending in Q and .(
with two consonants, and having O wnd -i movable in the plural
E. Derivatives of Verbs

Decl.

>

).

Thing,

Q^^>

Plague,

^'r-^ Creature.

AliD Parf,

O^D

ci

Qr3

Request,

.Dominion.

ff

Ct

>

'

Q:>
>

1'2a*lD

iio

ZoiiJD

.aiiD
o-j

>

.0,10

lAilo

Aiio

Aiio

NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES.

136

Nouns with

46.

The noun,
suffixes,

in taking suffixes (see

the emphatic

B. and table of

16. 2.

undergoes the following changes

16),

In masculines

1.

Suffixes.

state,

a) the suff. in the sing., is attached to

with the falling away of ]L

pVf)

e. g.

In decl. I. III. IV. V.

(from V .SV)), with the suffix .inVn
In nouns
48. A) the radical vowels are not changed.
(
of decl. II., the final vowel of the absolute state _JL or r reappears before the suffix of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plural
,

tT

e. g.

XL-AL,

. 7 9

(>

with suffix

emphat. (V)NS,

jOl-CD,

*x

i>

.vn\v

with suffix .OCljOiflD. So also monosyllabic

nouns, which lose _l or _L in the emphatic state, take it
again before the suffix of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plur. e.g.

emphat. fjoico

5>Q

emphat. ]Sn.

emphat. state V

from

2 and
|J.

movable

e.

i).

before the suffix of the 1

Ol^

g. '^iN^
wi is movable
,

The same

e. g.

even

drink,

(*AD)QD

Here belong

all

my

is

^A*LD

^oouA*SD,
These nouns with
e.g.

(.

e. g.

Finally, in emphatic

from jff>9Q2

^^ ^D
,

nouns ending

preceding, the general rule

is

is

followed

.A^^)

oi;io
\+,

e.g.

my

an exception).

having
master, which

]ao
p

in

32.1,

*aA*lD

the emphatic forms ending with V

as follows

suffixes of the 1,

like the absol. state

a vacant consonant preceding, excepting

with a suffix

is

and according

of Verbs fy'
Aph. and Shaph.
x
*

throne

.nn.\^

to Syriac
before the suffix 1 sing ;

pronounced

\^

true also of nouns

ending with

is

48 masculines, Decl.V);

from wA*lD drink.

i
;

but before the other suffixes _

(passive participles of Pa.

sing, are

(**> from

.^^n

emphat. )>\(^

wi

(Decl. V),

3 plur., quiesces in _1

grammarians,
e.g. ii

In nouns, derived from Verbs U ending in ^J

o

jo), etc.

sing.,

with suffix .>V)

.001^0,
V

etc.

having a vowel

KiOi

reflection,

NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES.

.

with suffix

w_i..iOl

fc

..CO*
suit.

But

*^i]liQO

stand for Vi

is

true of nouns with

and 2 and 3

creator,

suff.

plur.

takes Lin.

4lD

e. g.

etc.,

e. g.

]\

*^QQ,

plur.

where the termination

1

T,

^Uoa, wk2(4O2,

in Ceases

]]lD

.0

for

f|

.*

>

J>l>

wi^iQO

as in

with

MO;2

.-

with
f JjQO

ff

or

The same

^O^D.

18'<

does not

occul. in suff. 1 sing.

^oaUa>

In

etc.

the

and in the

suff.,
plur. with suff, the vowel of )
thrown back upon the preceding vacant consonant e.

other

is

g.

etc.

b)

form
e. g.

e. g.

Plural suffixes in the masc. are attached to the construct

which the suff

45. 2. a) with

*Av>

In the

sing, masc., however,

wiCTinnV/) (also ^O1Q_

forms a crasis

1 sing,

= Germ,

aii

**.

passes into

(Engl.

nearly),

oi,

according to Lud. de Dieu, T p. 160, but not according to

Amira)

and

fix to the construct

suff

with

.,.

i.i\..

V-

Plural nouns with

16. B).

before ** passes into

in the 3 fern.

form ending in

So

wiOiCL*^,...

JLJ

^1
;

attach the suf-

e. g.

^*t

emphatic ending
Lud. de Dieu, p. 163).

e.g. >*^yi ^Oio^yji (see

~V* "t?^
-TlP^
"t T
N I and
Also plurals with |A.-; e.g. U-X- with suff.
and those plurals which, with the suffix of 1 sing.,

from the

sing,

with the same

e.g. ]lAjfcLo drink,

..

with

suff.
T

1.

Illwith

o.jj.

e.g.

plur.

'
7

differ
;

emphat.

with suff -lAmio and jjAjtVo

REM.

Tf

-^^

only by taking Ribui

suff.

i^^

with

also in the

e. g.

my

drinks.

Collective nouns sing, with Ribui, take the suff. sing.;

suff.

^OIQAj]*

Olil

j^il.

Amira

suffixes belongs here.

p.

Only

]JLJ]

takes

the

213, supposes that (j'Q-

suff.

'

plur.

tu both

NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES.

188
REM.

JO

2.

father,

The

anomalously.

\*j>]

k0

into

e.

The

wk>|

g.

before the other suffixes

r
1

2.

01

00

7
1

is

T\

into

e.

-^^>r

e.g.

Final

g.

^OQJ

In Feminines

of the 1 sing., change

suff.
*

last takes

changed

are formed

pO** father-in-law,

brother,

two, with the

first

etc.

a)

the suffix in the sing,

is

attached

form of the emphat. state with a union vow el precede.g. oiA^k5>1 from USDS') widow, emphat. state ]A^oV).

to the

ing

The

suffixes of the 1 sing,

and of the 2 and 3 plur. are

attached to the construct state without the union vowel,

to avoid the concurrence of three vacant consonants
*<>

from

From

REM.
p

constr. state

|2jSsD

(emphat. state) mistress,

moves forward from the

state,

first

is

^7

found iO

In \L'f> daughter, constr.

It

e. g.

"

|^U

L'^ with

the

sufF.

of the 1 sing.,_

to the second consonant

e. g.

-iZ;^5

should be remarked that the letter marked with Linea occultans

-a

is to

suff.

be pronounced,

the above suffix occur

if

.obAL^D, T^A

with

suff.

Arnira asserts

wiZ^L

that the laterSyrians have the form.tOCTlAla,iO

b)

In the

In respect to the cardinal numbers

first,

two,

sing,

possessive pronouns,
*

pronouns

(p.

e.g.

iOOL*A_LZ

OlI^CQl

190)

etc.

e. g.

etc.

remarked that they take both the

with the

plural, feminines take singular suffixes

,

REM.

(Al^rSo with

e.g.

his ten,

those three.

and

plur.

and with the

7"

50. 2),

it

should be

forming
demonstrative

suffixes,

last,

^OOU>Z

those two,

'j" J

^_iOUoZ,

those

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.

139

47. Declension of Nouns in General.

Nouns are varied in respect to inflection (44.46) according to their form, either with or without any vowel changes.
Thus they are divided into two principal classes, viz. those
with immutable and with mutable vowels. The latter class,
on account of its diversities, may be arranged under several
paradigms, and together with the former class, takes the place
of the declensions of the western languages (comp.
48).
;

48. Exhibition of Nouns according to Declension.

A. MASCULINES.
Decl.

This includes

I.

more

those having
x

els

(A,

Q, Q,)

T
,

e. g.

immutable vow-

**>

Q.. midst,

monosyllabic nouns as well as

all

syllables than one, with

head,
0%

*,

master,

T.

*2ZoZ native.
4t-Xo2) partition,
Vv

To

*o.^0
^

belong likewise those nouns whose penult, syllable

(=

if

REM.

first

Here

e. g.

the

two

$Qnation,

nouns derived from ^il Verbs with

double the

doubled

plur.

state,

emphut. state

jj>OO.
_f_ falls

away

at ; e. g.

Lin.

which change

is

^OCU

occult.

into

e.

as

transposed

day, emphat.state

do those
;

e. g.

emphat. state (SfliNs

also in

^sOpD

v-1QL
and

inflection
,

etc.

pOCU ^i\
;

which under the same

holiness,

//'./.

g.
X
.. ,

belong to

p_A;

in the

and

and mark the

*

^ i\\ young man,

In

with

letters

IT

segholate forms(Decl.IV); e.g.

circumstances

radical letter,

final

<^nv- But monosyllabic nouns

having Q and

and in the emphat.

eye,

thief.

*^Lyi

also belong

in the plural,

of

Syrians employed duplication of letters

the

Dagh. forte)

which

either

e. g.

-^J

syllable,

is

^CID^ herbage, (gentile nouns with *_

Nazarite), or such as would have a close penult

a close one
e. g.

lean,

the latter class

and

emphat. state

*OL>;) jxtradise,

with _y preceding, forms

_

DECLENSION OF NOUN'S.

140
Decl. II.

This includes nouns, with _L and JL, which have

two consonants

mixed one

the penult, is either a

j.->V> mighty

Aph.),

name, or two syllables, of which

e.g. $OL

77

doubled;

talent ; J2>

sparrow

70

table

vowel

eternity

excepting in the sing, before the

final

^-^..

wheel.

syllable falls

away,

of the 1 sing, and be-

suff.

*i

fore the 2

OlSoll

.
,

and 3

plur.

iVlSy

also

^
7*

etc.

Forms

syllable with. _^_ over

The following

are examples

i^,
here,

the

]l

W)

From

plur. }\

Decl. III.

To

. i

*7

radical letter in

first

\
;

e.

g.

pjJS,So

ojJ,lD morning,

(see

A<y>Vn

etc.

opening,

1^

plur.,

and

tar,

consequence of an accumulation of consonants

15. 4).

suff.

f^>,^b belong

Acme?, emphat.state
7

>^,lO

also like

which take a new

emphat. state fV)\S with

and .OGlSoXl.

Here belongs

REM.

e. g.

JOICD witness

In these nouns, the vowel of the

immu-

or has an

f>

^Q\L

e.g.

(part. pass.

;22 a

e.g.

^^nLo

as in

or whose middle radical must be

v^r>

fountain, appears the

empliat.

state

\V>

this

their inflection, lose

belong those nouns, which, throughout

_1_

(before gutt.

_I_)

of the final syllable

but take _L as a helping vowel over the antepenultimate

radical

consonant,

viz.

^4oASo dea d, emphat.

Decl.

state

in

participles Ethpe.

V4a ^D

e.

g.

IV. Here are to be enumerated

all

nouns which cor-

respond with Hebrew segholate forms (see Gesen. Lehrgeb.

Such for the most part in Syriac, are monosylp. 568 sq).
labic nouns which begin with a vacant consonant, and have
for their characteristic vowel _L or _1, which appears first
In this form the
in the emphat. state over the first radical.
noun remains unchanged throughout its formations. They
** of
verbs
may as in Hebrew, be divided into derivati
with and without gutturals, and derivatives

DECLENSION OF Noi
i

A) To
state

141

belong forms like ^V<^> king, emphat.

\ZXD book, emphat. state )*1CD rV 1 child, em-

the

]n\Sn

first class

^ r l~. To
1'^; with suff QinVf) .ooi;aff>
^
^
Hholem in Hebrew corresponds *O,O holiness,

phat. state

the form with

state

emphat.

!*JOQ; ^iO^D knee, emphat.

The same applies

15. 2. B. b).

(comp.

B) In forms with gutturals

lrH; ^1Q

master, emphat.

emphatforms

state

pioa

,M slave,

e.g.

emphat. state

Here belong

state |Jl3*

like ]i>1 earth, ]\y\ cedar, Jtao] food,

also

l*>o) way.

or
C) Finally, derivatives of Verbs ^A and oi lose
radicals
middle
or
to
the
^
Q*
In
conquiescent
belonging

and Q form the dipthongs ai and au

v r
emphat. state p-iA; JDCU. ^Mi^, emphat.state

nection with _1,

T

^-^ eye,
(AxQ constr.

if

state, Jiouse,

counsel,

words which would

\.\

\ZL^

in

end of

PL

^*
ship, \'^G\

viz.

v\

>

etc.

is

PCX>|)

in Syriac, take _^_

also

empliat.

^?K

e.g.

when

impure, emphat. state |pQ^. plur. absol.

*

wipD^

*<*a,

Some

etc.

considered as a guttural

constr.

e.g.

lamb; from ^\Ol,

Hebrew, take Pattah,

vw..>/oo, emphat.state Wit'

at tho

and the emphat. forms |JS| mourning,

]>jj threshing floor,

emphat.

The following forms take

REM.
yt^^p

..

IPH^

and

in the

^rom the absolute

'

emphat. form (|>Z,

plur.

form f>2 grass.

DecL V. Here belong derivatives (mostly participles and

infinitives) of Verbs

(comp.

40.)

The distinguishing characteristic is,

and

movable

is

ending in
that

1 is

\L,

wkand**.

changed into

*^,

as well as both the other endings in the

emphat. state sing, and before the suffixes with the union
vowel e.g.
emphat. state H^i with sntV. oiL .. But
.

before thcsuff. of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plur.

quiesces

in.

142

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.

The some

true in

the plur. which

g. ^oou-^.i.
ends with
44.
Eem.
with
the
(
1)
falling away of ] e.g.
-i>
e.

The

^*Xt
with

is

suffix is attached to the

emphatic

respect to the changes of the vowels,

\*

ending

ending with **

as well as to the constr. state

)JL

state

it

In

should be remarked

'

that the form with |- takes __ in the emphatic state, if

it

a monosyllable and begin with a vacant consonant

e. g.

be

In words of two or more syllables

V
^
mf
the preceding vowel remains unchanged
e. g. f^VMJk) from

U-Xi from

]].. revealed.

]v*So,
*.

from

UX^ASo

mute likewise

Monosyllabic nouns with

|]..Ak>.

retain their vowels

e.g.

^*^ from

--^^

Finally nouns ending with *j- (part. pass, of Pa. and

wine.

82. 1), lose

see

Aph.

.J

|* \rnVr)

_L in the emphat.

'

t7

from >i\mV) abandoned;

the emphat. state plur.

state sing.

but

appears again in

e. g.

Uwith

e.

g.

vi.

4)

^^

as

though from

>.

>,\ ^

from the obsolete form pQ*, constr.

also

(^>*

The

part Pe. act. differs from the noun

of the

we

find forms

Also from |J^ we

|D2

from

fpft^ (Matt.

have the plur. emphat.

e. g.

state

Here belongs
7
plur. UL^O*.

same form by being

inflected as usual, while thenoun,in the plur.takes the form of feminines

and

of decl. IV.,
.*
.g.

is

changed into
"

(i> pasturing, plur.

Q movable
T

l>^

^-*A'

constr.

with

_!_

~0

S>

preceding
.0 7

emphat. JjA>
p

7"?

r..} .?.

*/
(i>
7

herdsman, on the contrary, becomes in the plur. ^Qi5, ZdL5, |ZQlJ.

*
A

From

|jlb master, both, forms of the plur. cccur

The noun

throne.

and

] into

..,

]*^

17
omphat.

(MfiD

1
;

>*"**
f

plur.

the latter form in

prophet, in the plur., contracts

while the adjective

-1X7
,

.iCP takes yet another},

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.

143

B. FEMININES.
1 )<>!. I. This includes all the Feminines ending with )-,
which have an immutable vowel in the penult syllable. In
this case tin- penult syllable has either a vowel with a letter

Verbs Mi,

noun

e.g. ]]oAoi?i/v/m, or the

in it;

quieting

which case

is

a derivative

the plural, the first of

the (injilicafe radieals reappears, and takes Linea occultans
<>!'

in

in

Ui, (also

The

]\\^ pretense from ^il

sulK of the l.sing.

]ta bride, plur.

^VSn.

to the constr.state with-

is

appended
%^A^oAo. The suff. in other
out the union vowel
e. g.
persons is joined with the form of the emphat. state e. g.
;

j.&LoAo

etc.

46. 2).

(eomp.

From )j-Zo2 icaistcoat, appears

Some forms
from jjuJuZoD or _iJ-2a3
REM.

the plur.

with

^il Zo3

as if

final

city,

emphat. state

take Linea

occult, in the emphat. state

or J

]Al_t,lO;

under J

falls entirely

away

U-i,iO

e.g.

as in

P^M!

another,

emphatic

state

Here belong

Decl. If.

all

nouns

fern,

whose

final syllable

begins with two consonants. They have the peculiarity,

/hat between these two consonants, in the emphat. sing.,
or
is inserted.
This vowel is determined by the vowel
belonging to corresponding masculine terminations; e.g.
irfdow,

(from
rals

is

^O>

(from

^^^

mase.),

emphat. state

masc.), emphat. state

lA^3

before guttu-

always the vowel inserted between the two conso-

nants in the empliat.

e.g. j**;)/ou;?, emphat. state lA^^.
In the reception of suflixes this declension agrees with decl.
;

e.

>;.

^Ab^DiV, OlA^Loi)], **t&&o and OlAS^O.

J
T
11
i ^
Some insert Q; e. g. [iS&Ofall, emphat. jA\f>^^>>

lii:M.

too

"\D"*L

III.

the

first

(M.*^*/

tt'iinder,

love.

Thiri includes those

syllable

is

moved

So

nouns

fern,

whose vowel of

forward, in the emphat. state to

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.

144

the second vacant consonant

emphat.

"\L\zi**

taking a

class,

e. g.

);*^* female companion,

Nouns

cow, emphat. ]A^.Il.

Wi^

in the sing., are treated like

suff.

and II.
REM.
Some nouns have

of this

nouns in

decl. I.

several

has three emphatic forms

j!b>l alms,

}Aojl

g.

.0

In the same manner also are inflected

*.0

]Aoj1

>

p*2>

Thus

forms.

emphatic

e.

,.

offering,

"jAojl.

|Aoi2

terror,

1\

J*"im woman,

The following

etc.

|Jxi> fear,

"

emphat.

VAl^u

for

Dec/.

should be mentioned

state

fro

vine,

Usiyt

}h

TY. This includes

\t- r

9 ^

%Pj

%^A

* for I^I-M wew,

]5\LDl from

for

fern,

contractions in the
**

A^vt

]l^ Jricfc

derivatives of Verbs

end-

|1

It should be remarked in reference to

ing in ]a and ]o
them that the immutable vowel of the penult syllable is
retained, and a. and Q in the emphat. state sing., quiesce

.0*

*"

e. g.

.07
first

$4 masc.).
j.

and

Here belongs

fern, participle

reproach,

e. g.

]/<>.>>

7
*
g. AJLA*O .J

from }*\

lA^!l

and in
7

Zcu^

all
7

girl,

the plurals,

L\
A

also the participle act. of Pa.

pass, in the

masc., with

With

fl*'
.

plur.,

etc.

KEM.
the

away

e.

-X

Ott

\*-**O

in the constr. state,

movable

are

from

If the masc. be monosyllabic the vowel

syllable falls

But

[ZLkxiO

from (QJLM animal.

of the

x *

1*A

and

in

_.

0.

emphat. (A

Decl. V.

of Verbs

|)

a.

To

but

instead

of

7 7

wA..lD.

the

in

forms the dipthong ai

N.i V) from

conjugations, ending, in the

takes

vowel

this

same

and Aph.

e.

emphat.
g.

state.

,\.

AQ

belong mostly monosyllabic derivatives

ending with Q and JL (some end in L ), which
this

begin with two consonants e. g. Ouio calamity, jfi creature.

Also dissyllabic nouns belong here with immutable
;

ANOMALOUS NOUNS.

146
T

>

vowels in the penult syllable

whose o and *
plur.

OS]

e.g.

*>oZ

victory,

t.

T..

in the

movable, some nouns (derivatives

<a are

second radical

after the

take

thanks^

But

quiesce, throughout in the sing.

where o and

of Pa.)

..

f.T

.?

letter

oL.

e.g.

(Zo^.. Nouns ending with

entreaty, plur. iOif ZQJ* .
2 belong here, which in the plur. take Q with the falling
,

ASl

plur.

tQAl ZQA^ iZoSl.

^

Other nouns (derivatives of Pe.) take

after the first rad-

away of L
ical letter

e. g.

oSo> resemblance, plur. tQSo>

e.g.

offering,

or with gutturals following, they take

f

plur.

The same

"T

some nouns which are not

^^
;

blow,

Some nouns

k
if

from

derivatives of

testimony,

.anNV)

ci^qp,

plur.

OOJ

OD.
*k*~

and

(J

e.

So

also in

g.

plur.
,

|^O)GICD,

and some

and even

others.

Anomalous Nouns.

of very frequent occurrence are inflected in

a manner varying more or

(

found also

tOOJ and

11"

besides

49.

is

(*ni

.0. >

O)GIQD

^o r
on^Lo

paradigms

etc.

o*iD

ff

authority, plur. O,lD

'
^"7^^ "
|(lO a hundred, plur. (Zo(S0 as

new vowel

peculiarity of taking a

O^O

plur.

etc.

tOM^o,

t<">

Zoic >. IZoioj;

e. g.

REM.
in

47, 48).

less

from the above mentioned

This arises either from an attempt

to unite different ground-forms, or

form conforming

less closely to

from the simple ground

the general laws of inflection.

These nouns are the following

PARADIGMS OF NOUNS.

146

MASCULINES.
Plural.
emphat.

Singular.

constr.

absol.

constr.

emphat.

*s]
?

absol.

JD) Father.

"

oia|

iOis
I

-.7

y*..x1 *"*
^_iAo
p

0"

.
DO
DOZoiSQ

FEMININES.

>

"7

"%'

ZOM|

tOwf

^p

- -

|Ax
7

Daughter.
Sister.

Ml.
7

.7

Al

pL

Fear.

!>.(>!).

|Aiao>

.O"*
Alaoj

^'i'-

nft

|Aao>

i7 *

ADO>

^* *

po>

Place.

NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES.

148

Paradigms of Nouns
A. MASCULINE NOUNS.
SINGULAR.

Decl.

Decl. V.

JOTCD

J&D

]]^

wA*Lo

Witness.

King.

Boy.

Drink.

Stat. absol.

Suff.Sing. 1

Decl. IV.

II.

c.

2 m.

2f.
3

m.

f.

OljOlCD
dijoico

Suff.plur. 1 c.

.JOICD
-*p

2 m.
2

~_k3>Gl0

f.

OOlJOlCD

3 m.

(To the

suff. 1 sing,

PLURAL.

tOCJLd^lD

ki>G1D
7

2 m.
2

^ .;mm
7

t^k>Gl0
-

f.

OUJOIOD

f.

1 c.

^ n Vn
i

^-ijOlCD

2 m.

.QSU JOICD

tC

2f.
i

ni.tuuujuujj
f.

_iOL5OlCD

<

*i.V^

.nm \ /

and wiAak) add

^in\So
7.
7
t n>V)

^_JOT2D

Suff. sing. 1 c.

nnVAn

of the forms y.

Suflf.plur.

^.AaVn

_Q

i\4 and

NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES.

149

with Suffixes.
B.
Table.

49.

Comp.

FEMININE NOUNS.

1.

Decl. IV.

Decl V.

|JoAs

v \/%

*i
n\.

Virgin.

Maiden.

Petition.

Decl.

IV-A
Father.

Son.

t.

>r

rs
ii.\i

oi'Zol.

01

AGIOS)

oiAloA^

01*2

cnZoX.
^
r, *

Waters.

Flood,

J&a
.

^>

.Vrt

CTUlD

^
.

..

^ooiAiS^
*
rt
*

*i

.ooiZo^*
^

* i

^t?"

ADJECTIVES AND NUMERALS.

150

50. Adjectives

and Numerals.

Adjectives being derivatives of verbs (see 40. and

and having the same form as nouns, are inflected acIn respect to
44, 45, 48).
cording to the same laws (see
1.

tables)

denominative adjectives, see 41. 2.

REM. The Syriac has no special forms for the comparative and
For the manner in which these are expressed, see
superlative.
77.

Syntax

Numerals are either cardinal or ordinal. In the former

should notice the peculiarity, that masculines from 3 to
but feminines, on
10, as in Hebrew, have feminine endings
the contrary, have masculine endings. From 20 to 100
there is only one form for both genders.
2.

we

The numbers from

1 to 10 are the following

CARDINALS.
Masc.

Fern.

Masc.

Fern.

o.

i.

|A

6.

Jloi")

REM.

Upon

46.

see

The

2. b.

4.

\i*Z

\L

5.

'JX&

1-J2O1

the union of these numerical words with suffixes,

the cardinals from 3 to 9

The
the

50,

^-iA* 60,

plural of 10

common

phat.

&

]a!Sv

11&

etc.,

signifies

plur.

e.

^RLl

g.

by
30,

the plural of

^-^aif

40,

^12

90.
^i1^>Z 80,
All plurals are of
represents 20.

^iSn

(,-1,1x11)

gender.

or ")Zo]SD AlkZ 300,

inine.

10.

Rem.

tens from 30 to 90 are expressed

^V^i

9.

70,

signifies 100,

^ZJlD

200,

l]SoA^

with the preceding unit in the fem1000 (instead of a^s. or 2llL, em-

^i^i^ ^a!k )
,

^i^^s. ^->2

signifies

ADJECTIVES AND NUMERALS.

151

A
3000. etc. (with the preceding unit in
2000,
the masculine).
The intermediate numbers from 11 to 19 are formed by
the union of units with 10 in one word, in the following
manner

Masc.

Fern.

Masc.

Fern.

11.

)
"

'

JOHjZ

VA

'

12.

13.

14.

,msn

>

;m\n

17.

',^111^2

r-rr%CiVA;
I

1?

)
I

1 ft

-rmiAisoZ)

>'l 16
T
f
>>.

^>..

1ft

QlZA

..

T .

mva/

rnva/

19^

The

intermediate numbers from 21 to 29, 31 to 39, etc.,

are formed by the numeral representing the number of tens,

followed by the numeral under ten preceded by o

e. g.
*'
x
/t*
t't
fern.
65.
masc.
j^OwO
Sometimes
(AlZo ^-lA^Z
33,
^-A*
_
x
*
^
the units precede e. g. ^s*;mio p^3> 24, etc.
So if the
number of numerical words combined be large, the greater
numerals are always placed before the smaller
e.
g.

rx

]Lno
3.

-^^

1827.
^."rmlo IJSniioZo
ordinal numbers, from 3 to 10, are formed from

The

the cardinal numbers

by adding the terminations V

masc.,

]AA- fern., and inserting A. before the ultimate radical. Foi

a particular word is used, and for the second, a form
tfo,
first,
differing somewhat from the form of the cardinal for 2.

ORDINALS.
Masc.

Fern.

the first.
the second.
the third.
]',

^y

Masc.

Fern.

the fourth.

"|A^uA

]l/uA

]A.v.*^a ]i\in*
]A.i

.0-.7

VZ\iStZ

")'>!

] t'%

jV)Z
i

the sixth.
tin*

seventh.

PARTICLES

152

The
either

tens of ordinals from 20 are expressed, as in Hebrew,

by cardinal numbers or by the addition thereto of the
"f

..

terminations I*- masc.,

_

P
. i .

ADVEEBS.

.0

A*. fern.

.1

e. g.

.;mv

_7

v.oVj

The

etc.

units

are

put after

e. g.

|iii;ms*

The intermediate numbers from 11 to 19, etc., are formed

by uniting the ordinal number 10 with a unit of the cardiinto one word, the unit

nals,

J> >

masc.

preceding
.

fem.,^>;ims,-M masc.

the eleventh,\L*\

the twelfth, etc.

r.

e.

g.

msZ>Z fern.,

Sometimes the ordinal 10

with a cardinal number and the word

is

is

preceded by

united
>

e.g.

etc.

The

REM.

Syrians, like the Hebrews, express the idea of apart,

,

letter

e.g.

l^oZ

other relations of

and the insertion of

by a feminine form
,

JiOOi, ]*SOOM

after

the

third part, etc.

numbers comp. Syntax

first

radical

Upon

the

78.

CHAPTER FOURTH.

PARTICLES.
To

Particles belong adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions

In respect to their origin they may be
considered as primitive, derivative, or transferred from other
The last are by far the most numerous.
parts of speech.

and

interjections.

51. Adverbs.
1.

_]

The

so,

]]

following
,

QUk

not,

may be

^O^

considered as primitive adverbs:

there,

|a

here.

Those derived from nouns and adjectives with the

are the following
characteristic endings A_ Zo. and AJI]
2.

PREPOSITIONS.

2oilj2 again, 4ujOl2L

AAiOjjQ at first,

at last,
)

in short,

A^(;1L

transferred from
considered those :

from substantives

godly,

Ifcbraically,

As

3.

153

other parts of speech are to be

a

with a preposition

e.

g.

]lQ]Q once, <\v-^ inwardly,

T
^
anew
lto
tA> r
; ft) without a preposition;

"\J\M& truly,

finally,

4>

mediately,

-^*"*

e. g.

^aw)

rzo,

(AfioSo enough,

oiXo

^3

wholly, en-

~t. p.. y

ftVeZy,

also in the plural ]Al2] sometimes

numerals and pronouns

.

>CUiAo

e.

".

from
IT

b)

JQ^ >A..m

g.

->T

adjectives,

very,

,"

4jT

r**^!? Ir**^! a ^

o?^<y,

|r*-*0 immediately,

o?icc,

*f

how much ? |jV^ QlSo tf /ty ? c) from verbal

infinitive, *aoZ again ; or participles
.

forms, as the

almost.

Some adverbs

RKM.

nWvn

aaXXov,

is

guage
lowing

^tT>i\V)
in

especially rich
l^jil where ?

wiALo]] ]lbp^

Among

are

/""''

transferred

from the Greek

IQ^]

(AaXitfTa,

e/xrj.

adverbs.

compound

PJ|] ]^b^ wherefore?

long

l*Ol mnr,

compound adverbs

may

|J

g.

^Aa^ not yet,

P5,A ^CTlX

also be placed

e.

The Syriac lanSuch are the fol-

the

n^<7

now,

etc.

circumlocutory

The simple interrogation is either not

r
of wtD
addition
the negative
the
or
at
all,
by
expressed
interrogaand |O1 |J. The syllable -i") prefixed
tion, is expressed by |J
Aj|\ not

to be

(see

38).

"

to pronouns and adverbs expresses an interrogation

whence

e.

g.

|H

^">

52. Prepositions.

To

Prepositions belong the prefixes *S

and ace.) which are always joined with a
noun or pronoun, and are vacant when the noun or pronoun
1.

j (gen.),

the original

(dat.

e. g.
V>**~> ]r>VOr>V
begins with a regular consonant
Prefix prepositions take the vowel, which is usually _1. when
;

154

PREPOSITIONS.

the following consonant is vacant

e.
g.
or when the vowel falls back from the quiescents
;

e.g.

from

l)Sfla

for

v*icooi-

Before words which begin with

which these letters quiesce,

prefix

e. g.

]l>Ja

* or oil

REM.

Before |A

6,

and

^-A, these

prepositions take

bably because they were also written

7

y *

*>

XS^QO

>O>QO

and

which case the

form reappears
tions

may

ZoL

to.

also

_^_

tables

following); e.g.

OlXQQ,n\

etc.

Among

the original preposi-

ZoiX

be reckoned the monosyllables ^CLL with,

constr.state

iOpO

e. g.

Al,*"> between. >,**

'

before,

Aoo>

before

e.g.

c)

compounds

;
"

without, >,**

transin the

instead, **i\t,tfor,

about.

after

iAcQO according

,\^^ ^^>

6y,

and ^>rx

>Ao
^Lo (fromAlLo part) from,
prefixes

falls

ViorinV

Most of the other prepositions are considered as

from other parts of speech
a) substantives

2.

In

* which

suffixes are

ferred

3.

pro-

appended with a union vowel, in

of the second syllable falls
away and the original

e.g.

and the

c.

_iA*f
^

the preposition .1 quiesces in

^OfOClL except when

,

lA1

and

15. 2. B.

back (comp.

and

the vowels, in

back upon the preceding

fjj f.i^SiS* joil^ from

etc.

}1>V,

\\

or oi;

for

fall

\L >o

to,

e. g.

2ox2 and LjL**L

b)

substantives with

^nooL against,

^ I^A

wnfo7
7

^LO around, about,

^0,00^

^i^

to,

over,

-X

x^onN ^O against.

Several of the prepositions seem to have been origion which account they are united with

nally plural nouns,

plural

suffixes.

Here belong Clover, >].,,_.

x

"

\?

*aXk*/or, iO,O before, Zo^iZ under (comp.

and the following paradigms).

gainst,

*Instead of saying that

said that

takes the vowel

quiescent (see

13).

TR.

after, a-

'

quiesces in

with

16. 2. C.

the author should have

quiescing in

it,

as

is

not a

PREPOSITIONS WITH SUFFIXES.

155

Prepositions wit// Suffixes.

(

A.

WITH

and

16. II. C.

52

).

SUFP. OF THE SINO.

OF THE

B.

Masc.

in.

to.

Fern.

on account

over,

against.

after.

PLDR.

of.

Sing.
1

- *

c.

*"*

/o x

-L

11
'*">

wi^oA

Old

OlZo^

2 m.

in.

f.

<A*^

\~ion\

**

uiAo

IP
.\*^no\

1?

\.

. .

\v

_/

Plur.
1

c.

m.

f.

tQQO tdoZo-^ tQ2>Ao f>*^V*~>on\

*
t*t
>n<A~> .^\->
.^^ .^/r>\

,r>n

xv.

.rTrnVoonV ^nm . Kv
^
^OOlZo^ .OOlJAiD
tOLD i"" /O^ .rnCAX .mV^>r^nV ^ ..m . Vv

3 1H..OO1O
3

f.

REM.

The following take no

within,

^iL

except.

o<rr,

suffixes

A*AL

A^3

n</er,

/,

]iD,A

.rn

without,

;*
<<7

/o,

and

CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS.

156

53.

The

1.

and

Conjunctions

Interjections.

original Conjunctions are the copulative

because (^before infinit.),

,2

tl if,

> that,

-i^> hence,

o] or,

05, since,

-7

^oii (for this preposition in questions see

namely. ^O>

O and

REM.

2.

like

*2 and ^,

Compound Conjunctions
and]]a^v

|J]

5w<, .]o

}o

5e

be
e.

>

>

^af

unless,

after prepositions
because,

?e5^,
^So
i
VJLSOI Amce,

g.

it ;

>

From

although.
^

are

a) with

although,

b)

with

po^ ^until;
*

>

c)

>

^-i>
;

ooul and

e.g. 13>

^\4^o

e. g.

lest,

especially

^1 and > >a\j

>

with other conjunctions

\>i^V> now,

.Q..

the Greek are borrowed

(j

n^

,0

aXXa, ^. v^. ya^,

8s

3.

Interjections as primitives are mostly onomatopoetic

x*

g.

They
e.g.

jiO w;o /

<\

ff

|O1 behold !

2)oA*]

^Q^ if yet!

n\*"i*">

I pray you

wicru

7m

Oj ^Of
are sometimes borrowed from other parts of speech
,

therefore,

>

-J>

e.

Hem.)

52. 1).

are prefixed (see

^JL} as,

t>

e. g.

51. 3.

lest.

7*e?/

/
;

PAKT THIRD.
SYNTAX.
CHAPTER

FIRST.

THE PRONOUN.
Use of

54.

the

and

Separable Personal Pronouns

Suffixes.

A. SEPARABLE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

These pronouns

1.

beginning of a sentence, denote

at the

a certain emphasis, and stand in various relations to the verb

which follows in the same person. This relation is not only ;
that of the nominative absolute
e. g. Rom. xiv. 10.
*
*
^V
\
^ * *
*v
^OM]J AJ I . j> pV ^_> AJ| but thou, ivhy judgest tJiou thy

a)

Eph. iv. 20., Acts xix. 15., II Tim. iv. 5

be also represented b) by the oblique cases

brother !
it

may

by

e.g. Matt.

Ephes. *vi. 20

11.,

.T

0-

*j|
7)

by

--B

*O;JD U

11.

r>Vo<^>V

\i\
-

day

time,

not worthy

by

IQ

to unloose,

the dative

e. g.

]3>

John

Kirsh.

ooi
xix.

i>.

2.

1>

p|o

you

I am
j8 )

the accusative

u'hat
the

iii.

ff

wiOlOJEQio whose shoes

e.g. a)

the genitive

but

but no one comes

e.g. Kirsh.iv.7.-9.

seek to find in

and find

it

not.

tfie

to

me,

Luke xxni.41

k.f.

^-^^

night,

ooi
^oAjf> ]k)

I seek

to

find in

THE PRONOUN.

158
REM.

,QM

a)

^1*4

are

They

as accusatives,

also

after the

emphatic

verb;

plSo what then shall we do ?

Rem.

16.

comp.

1.

Luke

e.g.

Upon

^Qj")

and the preceding

14.

iii.

and

* n

table.

United with substantives, adjectives or adverbs they

mark the Present a) of the substantive verb }ooi (see 38);
2.

T 7

verse 23. OOl

in the desert

verb with

its

participle

i7

""

he

p>Ol
e. g.

here

is

'

/ say,

]j] ;io]

is

of the finite

b)

IOM> he

-xr

she is true.- Matt. xxiv. 26. O01

'ri'r*

HhS

AJ]

thou art born

64).
(comp.
and
Ol
see
j
(Upon

REM.

The contraction

12. 1. B).

one word

with the participle or adjective into

pronoun

1 pers. plur.

e.

TI

g.

ive

read

is

of the

found in the

^o

ioe

are holy.

It is
"t v*'

found sometimes in other persons

also

I beseech
3.

Gal.v.3.

is

guilty

may

subject and the

p|

/ am

xxvi. 73

John

xiii.

xiv. 20.

verb

oAj*|

**} . oAj]

Matt.

13

iii.

11.

p| ,V)SV)

Barh. 68, 16

JJ|

105, 14

.>* ^So

iOAj] ][aVn*|

Haran ; Assem.
c

the 1

^Q*j

I.

33

ye are in

ooi pi

if thou art the

Messiah

as

20.

Matt,

is

placed be-

xxvii. 4;

baptize

148, 15.

be contained
e.

g.

whence are ye

Gen.
?

as substantive verb,

subject

lam Jesus; Luke

Barh. 173, 18-20.

me

i.

both

xxix.

4.

we are from

12. 13.

The pronoun OOl

and 2 person

John

e, g.

p**

b) In the simple pronoun may

the subject and substantive verb
1>t

20.and37.E).

(comp.

or the part, present of the finite verb

e.g.

MH*

13.

iii.

latter the substantive

tween

Eph.

g.

iii.ll

the pronoun of the same

be doubled, so that the former will denote the

Farther in these cases

person

\i\

he

**

e.

97

(1O*

e.

xxii. 67.

g.

^]]

follow

xxii.

],V) ooi AJ}

verse 70; xxiv. 18

Also Qjf and

may

Acts

Ephr.

I.

8.
/|

214. B;

follow the 1 and 2

PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES.
pers. as subject

Matt. v. 13.

e. g.

ye are the salt of the earth;

REM.

I.

The pronominal
rarely,

Cor. in. 17; Barh. 133.

1.

SUFFIXES

B.
tive

oiVf)

Instead of the pronouns, thePhiloxenian version of the N.T.

T
T
*
T
A ^ 1*l*
* 4
*A V
with Mill'.; e. g. ^OloAaf p| /am; ^QO^AjJ .oAjfye are.

M
1.

liijj

159

and

suffixes of the

the Hebrew, the dative

hast

verb denote the accusa-

the most part in translations from

for

^jAoou

e. g.

A^xru

for jJ^

tkou

me.

to

given
REM. This imitation of the Heb.

is
neglected in passages of the
Zach. vii. 5. comp. with Ephr. II. 296. B. and'lsa. xxiv.
comp. with II. 65. C.

O. T.
4,

e.

g.

In the relation of genitive, the suffixes are attached to

to the genitive proper; e.g. Ez. xvi. 18.

2.

nomen rectum or

the

1*

4"'*

wfcOAoo p

pio

thine embroidery

Matt.

vi. 11.

thy embroidered garments,

of
literally
or ornament vii. 20; xi. 15 xxvii. 16, 27;
;

|V)\

^iniQCDj

of our need.
REM. The suffix

our necessary bread,

literally

seldom found with the nomen regens

is

; e.g. Ez.

*|2o^Jl> wi^AljJOf ^SsO of thy lewd way*, usually in conX T

<> f
nection with (1 Sf)i the right, and (J2CD the left ; e.g. Acts. iii. 7.
xvi. 27.

Sn.j)

|l

a double

* ^ X

Olpi^

on his right hand; Matt.v.29; Rev.i.I7. Sometimes

suffix occurs

e.g.

Ephr.

I.

204. B. and C.

thy first born.

3.

The noun taking a

suffix

stands before an
>

connected witn

it

e. g.

in his holy mountain'^ Ez.

his

good

4.
e. g.

The

Ps. Ixxxvii.

vi. 9;

suffix to the

20.

noun

is

B)

e.

g.

oi>a&s
*

' f

|n

oii.of

often understood objectively;

OiA!LL>year

wijpo,-^ in remembrance of
love to'him\ Barh. 218, 14.
1.

A.

284.

I.

**

adjective

T 7

i*-r

treasure.

Exod. xx.

REM.

Ephr.

1.

me

before
;

Possessives are also expressed

Barh. 49.

7.

him

John xv.

OliLj ]]^^kAa)

I Cor. xi. 25.

uioo+*

10.

by

^o with

his

commander

suff. (

16.

146, 10.

PLEONASTIC USE OF PRONOUNS.

160

This manner of expression is used particularly when a stronger emphasis is required than is indicated by the mere suffix ; e. g. Matt.
X l^

-X

*'

(ZciQ^lO w01

13.

vi.

thine is the

^-^->>

^** jAoj l^r^ our

^A.2> .
noun be

to the

s^s fo, &c.

possessives
/3w/ji,a

(JLOV

also repeated,

vii.

Barh. 146,

great church in Haran.

John

g.

Rom.

Greek

34. >i\i> *aAXobjl>

The same repetition of the

iv.

3.7.

1*

fyuv

John

TI

(ID

We

2.

-Jjjuiaff

John

firet

g.

what shall we say

e.

g.

person,

Genesis

in

w*a,JQL,

when

the

_;iO
7

^.ALDj

discourse

is

the

(my)

^,jQL,for
addressed

piD

i^DM

*^^^-

Esth.

lord] ?

QQoAo

l^Vf>> ]^>^^>

viii. 8.

write
:

in

*D,
r

ff

_rrSD.A

16.

xliv.

in

(Ol^js* our (thy

(my
^iverse 32.
So kings in speaking of themselves

to thee

servants') iniquity ;

]SL&

suff.

"77

e.

xxi. 22.

should mention the use of the

of the

superiors

use

irpo

pronoun of the second, and

the pronoun
to

^ ^

REM.
for the

ii.

prepositions ; e. g. II Cor. v. 19. - \j> ^-O

2, and in certain forms of expression; e.g. Matt.

in

suffix occurs also

xxvii. 4.

1.

If the sufF.

indicates (emphatically) the

it
e.

xv. 9

kingdom

king's

name; "and

in

to

reference

God,

^t7

<""-

is

used

e.

Gen.

g.

Also

v. 1.

w^O

stands connected with the

f

second and third persons

e.

g.

Mark

xii.

37.
'

him

wi^Lo

"*

*"^

01^ |JO

(my) Lord, and differs from ^jSo in that the former is the common form of salutation, while the latter marks the
pluralis majestatis, and is used of Christ in the version of the New
Rom. xiv. 8.
Testament e. g. Acts i. 1
he calls

his

be considered as an imitation of a Hebrew

idiom, when the suffix relates to a noun which does not occur till
later in the discourse (comp. Gesenius Lehrgeb. p. 739) or when
the noun itself is repeated instead of the pronoun; e.g. Gen. xvi. 16.

REM.

3.

It is rather to

55. Pleonastic Use of Pronouns.

A. SEPARABLE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
*

Here belongs the pronoun of the

(comp.
sing,

and

12. 1.
plur.,

third person

001

(Oi)

B) united with nearly all persons of the

by which an emphasis is denoted, which is

disregarded in the later language.

It is

found

still

in such

PLEONASTIC USE OP PRONOUNS.

John

passages as

that (exactly)

Rom.

31

iii.

verse 28

xv. 16

.-7

.^rrtVo

vn. 19.

001

be considered merely
7
x

to

It is

ix. 17.

Luke

pleonastic in

as

\\Vsn V>

]Sn\sn p]

speak before the world;

Heb.

26.

viii.

161

QOI ^'r^U

^i

of

Rom. xiv. 8 Heb. xiii. 22 I

Tim. i.4; v. 9; Barh. 133, 3 Assem. I. 221, A.5, especially
where it occurs with a feminine noun e. g. Rorn. iii. 2tf.

or shall we wait for anofJicr ?

'*

77

'

f*

is

sometimes connected with a plural

7

Qj>1iO OOl (ZaiSn*aia by faith

*7

_7

1\

-X

OOU.1QO OOl .OOLkJ

is

man justified.

e. g.

I.

Ephr.

OOl

214, D.

-ft

A\^*") on account of his wives

and

children.

REM.
found

Sometimes
e.

Rev.

g.

and I saw

the

also

_cn

fern.

L\+*

xxi. 2.

ai

')Ai-i r

77, A. 20, 21.

OOl and OOl

emphasis

John

e.g.

Also in the plur.

e.g.

in^o

.dJOl Assem.I.
>

are sometimes united together without

7*

(iOQa OOl OO1O and

v.9.

plur.

is

"

and the

3.

TA*Jr

the holy city ; xxii. 19,

(it)
r
k

more emphatic),

(still

Matt.

iii.

1.

tOJOl
^

this

^0

day

Barh. 148,

..7

]A!DQAS ^ij tOOl^

^

but in these days.

The pleonastic use of OOl is confirmed from
the fact that the Philoxenian version omits it altogether.

SUFFIXES.

B.

The

1.

when

the object with

follows;

suffix is often used pleonastically with the verb,

e. g.

Matt.

(it)

Without

^ in

talent

REM.

suffix also

OlS ^lll>

ii.

6,

11

Mark

xiv. 47.

OuJu^ I buried (it

occurs pleonnstically with

<fec.

e.g.

Gen.

xxvii. 43.

therewith he departed; Matt.x.6

fcOoZ CTQk ]Zlo ami

he went out

verse 24;

of motion, going, coming,

viii.37.

though by way of explanation

7
r 7
*
OISQIA ^O1QM,1 ^i... OGlfor he

Matt. xxv. 25.

^jaa
I Tim. vi. 14.
xxvii. 5

The

1.

as

21.

his people

shall bless

thy

i.

lie

186,A.30.

came again

]V]

^ ^|
;

Johu

Asscni. 1.44, A. 17.

after vorbs

go

Luke

xi.31; iv.3.

OlX -0^1 1

Ai*">^ OlS loOl AliJ he had gout

PLEONASTIC USE OF PRONOUNS.

162

Aramaeans

to the

up

Matt.

heaven

is

dead

Mark

^QSO OlS ^QO

226, B.

I.

Ol^ Ao;)

U^*? IZmVf)
same

the

depart from this

is

Eplir.

2.

iii.

near

life) ;

ix.

26

e.

is

true

John

g.

14. Ol.^

xi.

Assem.I. 367, 9

the

M&w ;

Rom.

foolish,

REM.

sometimes

e.

John

22

i.

31

xi.

^L

**"^

g.

.0.

make, Barh. 217, 10

to

'

and even

to

AA!O 5]A^ Lazarus

with verbs which have not the signification of motion

to

Ephr.l.204,A

kingdom of

A.Vn

after

frequently,

Moses stood

be

to

*4*

JOOl John

after

15.

i.

On

the contrary, the suffix in active verbs, sometimes,

falls away when it can either be easily supplied from the context,
or the same object has already preceded ; e. g. Barh. 424. 9.
2.

_ IfoiO
^OlQiO^O |*OO
all

;Lo VlO ^naf

of the silver coin and heaped

(it)
X 7

up

before

he

him ;

out

brought

particularly the

me thereof. In many
neuter;
g. Gen. xxiv. 49. *-ftJO|CUj inform
verbs following each other the suffix which is to be repeated falls
away ; e.g. Matt. xiv. 19 I Cor. xi. 23, 24. Where two follow each
other the suffix is usually added to the latter verb e.g. Barh. 419,5.
e.

71

OlJk

The

2.

1.7

.*>. vno

| t

suffix is also pleonastic in the

precedes^ the genitive with

fupkM^) in the

>

John

e. g.

the feet

REM.

^o

e.g.

name of the only begotten;

of Jesus ; verse 31
Here belongs also

Rem.

54. B. 4.

Matt.

1)

Acts

the

and

Kirsh. 114, 10. lAJL,So

suffix occurs after the

after

^aOl^D

noun

e.g.

^\O
the

Without the

suffix

Matt.

vJ3

vi.

33.

iii.

18.

*x

-R

> is

Ephr.

of

all,

OikiAQ
*

I.

before

suff.

without > following

Sometimes
^>

ii.

3,

^3
*

with
7

Ol-^O ^i> (SQl but

t"

^-uOl^O _iACF1

all these things.

signifies each, every ; e. g. Matt. iv. 4.

is

11

87, B.

the

whole multitude;

Barh. 71,6.

fJSD every word ; Acts xviii. 4.

3. Finally, a pleonastic suffix

thus

all cities.

the whole people

which

regens^

^Q*-i? wOlo.^.. j

xii.3.

repetition

palD OlXo

xiii. 2.

v.

it.

nomen

* p p

it;

and honor

*");QSo we esteem

^\O

attached to prepositions

placed before the accompanying noun and

ia

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

163

considered cither as a sign of the genitive

relative

I Tim.

e. g.

+.

tfie

law

John

Rev.

2ol Luke

oi^S^io for
xiii.6

sin

(it)

(him) Jesus

to

xxiii. 7

^k&Lo

^So Acts

MO^> ^OlO-H

Barh. 74,18.

(if)

". f

42. <iCULij Ol JAs

i.

11

v.

to

)coaSQJ> OlZos] according

8.

i.

or as a

52. 2)

iii.

xviii. 15;

Kom

viii. 3.

^i Rom.

against (him) the tyrant;

^oi

76, 11

y>rO Luke

19

v.

6)

or the preceding preposi-

noun

tion with the suffix is repeated before the

ii.8.

OlL

]\2.]z>

in

29; Ephr.I.87,B

(it)

the fold;

^ John

feast;

^So Acts

ii.

ft

viii.

2.

]2oAaVi\ oil

\i Acts

Luke

to

1,

(it to) the

35

e. g.

Barh.192,7; Assem.l. 27,

ix. 21, etc.

Remark on Personal Pronouns.

General

In Sjriac, we also find in personal pronouns enallage ; a)

of number in A*]
e.g. Barh. 166, 6. ^*rDl tOOLD *jOioA*|
;

yi..

.(>

Y**

|jQlo (AJ ^ere were among

fr^i*

ten children; in

words whose plural only

OlA^So _V>
^

xxiii. 45.

^e

temple

was

true in the dual

rent (in
e. g.

in these
tives

men

Hebrews

9, 10.

e.g.

xi. 26.

^Ae vail

The same

,-? ^lD>
;

is

diAiOjjr

of gender

l2o>2V^OOlLs

Barh. 565, 18, 19.

fAi^^

Luke

e. g.

a!l places

if

by collecnames of countries and cities,

"\n\ ,n o^)j .oai^k a|o

and these also
many men,
2

e.g.

-j

^OlQ

sing. fern, are signified

1,

used;

of gender and number together,

or inhabitants

580,

is

midst) in twain.

Egypt; Barh. 108, 2

the treasures (of it)

Michael. Chr. 20,

its

women and

twenty

a ^tlo

aaOlj

*j

o/

tl>em

591,

]Zaj]

a*n1

]ZV.^cD they found a gnat

led

they
5,

into

captivity

^;2>Vl50,

11, 12.

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

164

Use of the Relative Pronoun

56.
1.

time,

The

Relative

etc.,

a relative signification;

John

where,

there,

John

Barh. 198, 13
wsi!

John

e. g.

ff.s

^lALo} ivhen, as

ing

as

> fe">">

much as

26

33

xiii.

? y Jiu]]

Igo ;

whither

Jiiuf how

V^\

where

fcLT

*uASc| when

shall
^QLSQjUj waALo] w/ien they

much ;

y ]SfiO so

e.g. >2)

cases

case followed by a suffix

the suffix added to the

g.

John

vi. 11.

gives the same mean-

place

e.

>2]

where

e.g.

are formed by some mark of the

a ) the genitive is indicated by

nomen regens ;

e. g.

John

ix. 11.

olLo> whose name

is Jesus ; Assem.I. 165, A. 14

Rom. i.
according to the following example

the dative,
!>

p|
thus

e.

John

g.

The

not.

i.

26.

I serve ;

Ol^ ^oAjf ,-xlj!

accusative
;

verse 31

is

e.g.

^Ol, John

iii.2.

c)

the accusative,

]]'^oAj]j

whom

ye

by the suffix atlouL> whom God hath

also expressed

e. g. iii.34. Ol>,!

d) the ablative by
e.g.
In a similar manner the relative

tion

b)
9.

1>

Olju> w/zora

tached to the verb

sent

*Sa*k)

know

8.

iii.

The oblique

2.

v.

they would,

sometimes to nouns

John

2.3.v.

v. 25.

; e. g.

]V^ how much ?

hear ;

OS

14

iii.

p^V

there,

\LHSwhiiher

36. \i\ \\\y

xiii.

Assem.I. 27;

.^QlSo? fa*1

Barh.82,2

]i] where?

e. g.

^L^CU Tool

John

e. g.

where;

thither,

28.

verse 40

baptized

gives to adverbs of interrogation, place,

>

i.

17. 2).

OliQl

John
is

i.48; by ^So Rom.i.6.

united with the preposi-

1oi^> with whom is God,

etc.

REM.

In connection with the suffix of the 1 and 2

person, added
a preceding
subject of the same person, the oblique cases who, I, whom, me, like
to the verb, it
(the relative) forms, with reference to

the Lai. qui

Joseph
11.88.

whom

E)

e.

g.

Gen.

xlv. 4.

(me) ye have sold

^jLUoAlOlj
;

^.A^Lsjj A/) ^U*mji

Num.
thou

xxii.

firt

*21TDCLi

30

Israel

Isa. xli.

whom

(thee)

I am
(Ephr.

I have

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
made
30.

The same occurs with prepositions;

strong.

she ass

/////

The

>^ Aj|

e.

4,

^^

g.

OLL4>>

which time

to

5.

137,

l'l*
|OO1

<>

'iiV

fi\> which belonged

the Arabians.

to

The Syrians express the

3.

preceding
>

xxii.

upon whom (me) thou hast ridden.

*"1**3>>

12.

Num.

g.

Gen. i. 31. r^>?

* that he mad(,
The re
sometimes used before" the mark of the case e.g. Barh. 43,

the neuter;
is

e.

sometimes marks the accusative, particularl}

relative alone

lativo

165

001

>

plur.

he,

oai

or

t/iis,

> Vioi

^aioAjilj 1>O1

t/iose

who were

and

%QOi~4Aj ot^
v.30

and

plur. >

who

he

Rom.

that,

i.

neut.

170,5

fern.,

Matt.

e. g.

28

25

viii.

e.

is

c) by
Rom.

g.

ix.

>

U-1

ii.29.

Rom.

REM.
live is

one

is

If

who

.l.-monstrative
roj {jSarog

tli.-

g.

sat.

John

ix. 8.

e.

g.

34

iv.

(hat ichich

^o^>

ii.

3
;

|^mnoj

e.g.

]i^\

7 v. 14 ;
Rom.vii.l.

iv.

bo indicated the demonstrar

r
-f
|001 2Aa> OOl QJO1 this very

is to
- f

the

like

Sometimes,

is

-,

..*^*Vn

wanting,

e.

wanting;
lyu Sutfu aoToi

\.'2.

A^j ^Sp\

the law.

a particular emphasis

doubled
he

who know

^Lo masc.

John

OOl

ICOQSQJ wLLpA those

\}]

masc., > 1,^1 fem.

2,
inwardly /John
Barh. 85, 3 (1) frequently by the participle
;

by

oi>A*)> .0101

xiii. 12.

hath, shall be given

16.

vii.

by

b)

a)

in the

5; vii. 6; Phil.

i.24.
;

and

John

e. g.

Mattxiii.17. ^oAlf
^^I|

\} com.

> ]joi

which was; John

him who

18

as follows

etc.,

who has sent me; Rom.iv.

^O^o

j
to

vii.17,

ye see

^Ol

>

sent; Barh. 17, 2

and

fem.,

which,

> <-iJOl fern.

his,

ii.6.

that,

masc.,

^OJOl masc.,

^Jir*) OO1> but

who,

relative with a demonstrative

John

iv.

Greek

or the relative

the

attraction,

Ol.^ \>L\ Pfj jJlLo

14.
is

wanting

e.

g.

Heb.

*.

pufo and he (or

according to

this)

who can;

llebrew usage

e.

g.

loss

Job

frequently arc both

xxiv. 19.

relative occurs pleonastically before participles; e.g.

Finally

Amos

vi. 1.

ff

toot to those

who dtpiseZion

Ephr.II.-J7

1.1>.

DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.

166

Use of Demonstrative

57.

The
does

it

and

Interrogative Pronouns.

demonstrative is neither used for the relative, nor

as in Hebrew, a special emphasis to particles

give,

and numerals (comp. Gesen. Lehrgeb.

It is
p. 750 sq.).
used only in its proper signification.
REM. It is emphatic in connection with OO1 and _O1 ( 17. 1.
\99
Sometimes pOl may be translated by
Rem.) e. g. Matt. v. 47.
hicce ; e. g. John xix. 19.
;

17. 3 ) is united with

2. The interrogative pronoun (
e. g. Matt. xii. 48.
nouns of both genders and numbers
;

..?

II

..>j ,QJ

1>

V> who

_SsDO wkio] *aOl

is

my

mother and who are

The oblique cases are either so

brethren f
that, in the genitive, the noun in the constr. state

my

or so that

uAj) ^Lo L\* whose daughter art thou ?

Gren. xxiv. 23.

e. g.

expressed
precedes

^D follows with

preceding

e. g.

Sam.

xii. 3.

^Lo> |r H ^ofrom whose hand? or QlSoj stands before

the noun
QlLo>
e. g. Matt. xxii. 20.
}L Aao pal
whose linage and writing is this ? The other cases are form-

]&i

ed by the special case-signs preceding, or by prepositions

e.g.

Assem.

xii. 27.

1. 34, 6.

indirect

i"

question,

I give ?

Matt.

relative

in the

*f

vii.

without

|Al*
^*

includes

fOOl

>

following

it

e.

g.

Matt.

xxiv. 42.

\fA\^ at what hour your lord will come ? and

;

e. g.

John

xviii.

38.

"j4'

p^

r7

OlV) what

is

20.

Pronouns for which

58.

shall

Sometimes P-I| occurs instead of the

|Z|

truth ?

whom

llSflQ whereby ?
*

REM.

^^

^1}

to

the

Syrians have no special forms.

A. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
The Syrians express the reflexive pronoun ( 17. 4) as fol.
fows a) by the passive (comp.
22. 2.
24. 2); h)
21. 2.
often, particularly in the third person, by the personal pro;

OTHER PRONOUNS.
noun

e.

]a\Lo <ooll

5.

77,

by

83, 16;

and

prepositions

is

144, 12

Luke

they chose

c)

dla2U

o-A^ ^5o

w AaZ'Zj

divided against

I give

Luke

myself;

a house which
REM.

; e.g.

.51

in

xii. 15.

reflexive

used in reference

is

itself.

occur

frequently

Lukeii

II Cor.

signification,

^m^? head

p^O)

""?

way

of periphrasis for other pronouns;

//e/ Ps.

fj-^j

ff

The pronouns (*^' and

vii. 6.

Dan.

spirit ; e.g.
T

iv. 5,

e. g.

*.AaAsb oiLDQlO

xi. 17.

divided against

is

Less

V C
(O^> heart

e.g.

84,

every kingdom

]k)Qio

itself.

both persons and things

to

Barh. 56, 2

himself-;

in reference to things
*

is

The

Matt, xxiii. 12.

e.g.

*.

pOQlO

by
X

e.

g.

Rom.

|1O(J2

x. 3.

*>

own

their

.OOlmSUj

-.Vr>ftir>

ix. 3.

righteousness

\}\ I myself ;

The other pronouns

1.

This, that,

2.

Each,

Gen.

the latter

21

xi.

xl.

Heb.

are

expressed

Phil.ii.4,5

Rom.

28.

ii.

Luke

88,

xiii. 1

xiv. 33

as substantives,

vii. 2,

45

by

Gal. vi. 4

17

I Cor.

vii.

Sometimes they are

I Thess. iv. 4.

-"" ^o Rom.

**jl ^3

ix.

a)

iii.

doubled in Acts

is

i.

are thus expressed

*aJ] I Cor.

Cor.vi.19

56. 3.

II Cor. v. 10

expressed by
;

see

every,

OTHER PRONOUNS.

B.

33

oiL|o

by \?*i and ]Looio.

who exalteth

^So he

a king

themselves

e.g. Barh. 164,12. tOOijJ^l

less frequently,

xi. 17.

which

OO1 he killed
himself;

Oi

used in reference to persons

OlMZU !>0^>
15

oV^nf

they lead by themselves

former

&

Barh. 54, 15.

g.

167

H" r"

**J;rilo

^^

or

Eph.

**!

v.

by ^O Matt. vii. 17
1 John iv. 3
^) by a re^k> .^Ao Assem. I. 11, A. 19
e.
noun
defined
of
the
;
g. II King?
petition
by each, every

Eom.

xii.

18;
;

l>)

;is

adjrctivcs;

a)

OTHER PRONOUNS.

168

^Ql

xvii. 29.

plural

by

Amos

e.g.

i<ii every nation

pressed by Vo,iD ^\a John

John

i.

John

1 Cor.

iii.

expressed by

13

^S

>

^k) Mark
Acts

> l

198,12.
Matt. x. 27.

is

iii.

>

The neuter by

4.

The neuter

vii.

Matt.

16

iii.22

ufcj]

ditional clauses, are expressed

33.

iv.

brought him aught

Aj

or

Barh. 195. 3

iv.

23

to eat ? vii.

>
;

and con-

**

by AJ| and \r^\\ John

Sak hath any one

dfcj

48

I Tim. vi.3.

S^oy

*j1 A^)

>
if any one teach ; Eev. xxii. 18
b) by
^So Mark
^>
hath any one? c] sometimes by
16. Ol^ Aa]>
v

vii.

Rom.

iii.

3.

'2,

v.

36

vii.

27.
P

vii.4

1*

e't

.(

The neuter

idiom,
is

Mark

TIVS^;

Hebrew

xii.

or

by ]<*" Lev.

expressed

a)

more
iv.

in acv.

X>D

by

1,

Acts

*S> OOl ^jio? ^/ia/I /ie ivas something (great) ; John

I John ii. 15
6) sometimes by ^li) Lev.v.9. ]So> ^i
;

.vowe (of the] blood; or

Nobody, no one

5.

^^

*^

^ooilLo

cordance with the

,.*jl J]

Matt.ix.16;

10 flCor.ii.ll

John

UQO. (= -Q^T

'rO..
;

^J

i.18

e.g.

James i.13

lfNum.xxxi.49

Gen.

xviii.14.

Matt.xix.17.

X>^ ffor iTlx^k)

J]

*jl Acts

A^X John

xv.13;

with an adjective or participle

P

"

|L

Phil.

A^ no one
A

l'

ii.

is good.

Tim.

by

xviii.

j]'jer.li.43;

**l\

sometimes by ,j1j

by Ao^
^

lowing;

a) as substantives, are expressed

John

vii.4

or simply

by

^O

19

io)

ex-

xiii.

(aliquis), in interrogative

Somebody, anybody

is

iv. 25.

Whosoever, (quicunque),

3.

be considered as a distributive

is to

jk>Qj^> each day.

Jer. xxxvii. 21.

e. g.

7 ) by the
sometimes

^ every morning

Ir23

iv. 4.

the singular which

Matt. xx. 10

vi.

fol-

The neuter,
7;

A^

fol-

OTHER PRONOUNS.

169

lowed by 5o) Matt. x. 26 with iO,io preceding, II Cor.

without So^D James iv. 2
vi. 10
b) as adjectives, by U
;

** p.

with the verb, I Cor.

after the noun,

hath seen
creature

before the noun, Horn.

it ;

]>ni

A^

Eph.

v.

39.

viii.

lA^^o

no

11

with the words standing between, John xv. 22.

Zooi A<Ji they would have had no

6.

^ no
eye

by AA\ with the noun following, Luke iv. 24.

wo prophet ; Heb.iv.13 with the noun preceding,

Z!A U p

ii.9.

sin.

Some, any, are expressed

a) by > Li] Matt. xvi. 14.
y
^.
>
with words interposed,
AJ| some say ; John ix. 9
;

vii. 12.

I Cor.
Phil.
cally,

^i^l?
7

viii.

i.

15

>..

OOOl A*f for some said

xv. 34; II Thes.

I Tim. iv. 1

^So fiu]

^k), Matt, xxiii. 34.

by

shall ye kill

Mark

xii.

iii.

11

^pAj")
xvii.

sometimes by the plural of the noun

16

ix.

c)

elipti-

^iS^o .bouSo
32

Eom.

e. g.

iii.

Dan.

some.
;

d)

viii.

27.

""*^

*P.

Jju] A**}

b) by ^j] ~^j]

John

Acts

>

|Ak5CL some days

poll

A*J, Matt.

>

expressed by
verse 8.

The neuter

Gen. xxix. 20.

^2U>

xiii. 4.

L*\ some fell

is

also

in

7.

Some, others, are expressed

xxviii. 24
VSr**l

or

by

repeated, Assem.

Acts

xvii.

32

I.

10.

1,

Barh. 105, 10

hilled, others

Hem.

prefixed, 114,14. ^)aii\*\

some Ihey

"*9^

"1

AJ) ^ml] _

Matt. xvi. 14

? Ajf)

by Pi-**!
^*J( Acts
i.
Phil.
15
^j] au]
b) by
John vii. 12 or with > Auf
a)

c)

by t oouio

.oouSo

with the sign of the case

>Q1 ^oouSolo

he blinded

finally

OL^Q
by

**? .
Mr**]

Barh. 93, 18.

REM.

When

some

signifies tlie

greater part,

it

i-

i-xj.'v^.'

OTHER PRONOUNS.

170

John

Acts

The

8.

by

'r^\\

iii.

t^yt

iii.

fern.,

repeated; or

<V

hand and

it

xiii.

^i ^tf
;

A*f^J*

Phil.

ne

repeated, Rom.xii.10; y**.^ r**

Matt. xxiv. 10
Remark)
;

_ ]AJ!

3,

/ei

One another

interposed between,

by

(=eachother,
35
also by
;

37

iv.

Acts

or by

or ^JOl

,-w

)j,js.

c)

34.

xxi.

Gal.vi.2.

owe bear another's burden.

is

John

represented by ,-M p**, with a preposition

xiii.

34, 36

xxii.

14;

simple preposition with

b)

xiii.

noun,

R EMt

^>>*1 John

one <^w, another that

QH^O

John

same

of the

repetition

ii.

he stretched

one hath an

if

to the other

^^1

vi. 24.

Isa.

the other; I Cor. xiv.7;

by the

1r^*

\^\\

also of inanimate objects,

became sound as

accusation against another

JjpJ} _ pM Matt.

by

;^

11

^f Alo2o ovj\4*2>

13. ISoioi OlJ^uI

comp.

by

a) of persons,

Gen.

oi2;j

13.

xii.

forth his
Col.

'

others that,

this

xix. 32.

masc. "\L\i**

Some

40.

one, the other, (alter) are expressed

\^

Matt.

vii.

suffix,

Rom.i.24.

sometimes by the

^OOIQ among

one another

feltM*

manner by

or in like

9.

The same,

(Jr**

John

xvi.

himself, herself,

19

Barh. 41, 18.

are expressed

itself,

a personal pronoun doubled, with

p placed between

by

a)

e. g.

a ? iCUOl P
7T>**^

tQJCn /Ae same sacrifice ; Phil.iii.l.

7
\
the same; also without
e.g. Assem.I.44,13.
^A-JOl
.01(712 jOOlQ at the same time ; b ) by a compound-

Heb.x.ll.

ing of the demonstrative pronoun

Rem.)

42.

17.

1.

57.

Rem.;

1.

by the pleonastic suffix before the noun; e.g.Mark

&
lAlaC) oia at the same hour ; Heb. ii. 14 ix. 24.
c)

v%9

i.

>

OlS

into heaven itself; Matt. xxvi.

44; Heb.

ix.

21.

OTHER PRONOUNS.
same blood

)lo> ^io Oilio with the

following;

Assem.

e.g.

416,

</)

A), Matt.

iv.

John

10.

46.

r**

/John

sawe year

*.

suffix

(58.

19

OO1 QJG1

definite are

^niie

tin-

J/te

v. 26, 43.
T

exactly

and the noun

^>-i>

sometimes by f^on and JLOOLO with

More

REM.

with

1.415,3. ]Al*> oilnj

*

171

15

i.

vii.

25

equivalent to just the same,

Barh. 26,

'

certain (one)

a) by

k*

HS*

(rAk) a certain king;

2.

masc.

v. 2.

fem.

],**
],-**

John

iv.

]ADOJ a certain

^i

place
I.

Barh.l 16,10

33; 22, 27

117,3

Barh. 93, 6

with ^So following; e.g.Assem.

b

Xf>

Barh. 170, 3.
f2>
into a house; 178, 2; 194, 3.

e.g.

HEM.
tion,

In proper nouns

by OlSo*j aufje.

11.

As

threat

g.

it is

by

o& relating to things

^1 p

when he had entered

sometimes expressed, by circumlocu-

Assem. 350, 18

as (tantus quantus)

is

351,

2.

expressed

^V

OVM \[ they saw

e.g. Barh. 190, 16. OO1 llDOi'j ]j^lo]
no need so great as on this day.
Of which nature of such,
or so

(ix

(tails

(jualis),

are expressed

by

pbd

>

1^3 )

e.g.

Assem. 1.39 17,18. ~iOloA*f ]i3Ol - IjoSoil AjVliil' ]ioa1

This latter idea
f/.v /An .v^////r w;AfcA <AOM Afl^ seen, so is he.
;

alone

John

is

also expressed

iv. 23;

by

^1

and a pronoun

^Ol >**1j such;

folio wing;

Barh. 55, 13

70, 18.

e.g.

THE VERB.
General View.

59.

The

and of the Future, as iii the Heso comprehensive, that by them almost all tne other
relations of time are designated, in accordance with definite
rules (comp.
65).
This, however, is usually in such a
manner that the preterite designates those tenses which
stand in connection with past time, while the future has the
same influence upon future time.
use of the Preterit

is

brew,

Use of the Preterit

60.
1.

In the Past

it

designates

a) the absolutely past tense

toe

have seen his star;

ship
ft)

e.g.

Mattii.2.

oiX3Q2

w are came

_^ms2A ^L\

iii. 16; Assem. L 361, 26, 27

the Narrative tense (Aarisf) ; a) mostly before

him; John

ject; e.g.

Mark

xi. 11.

5aS*lol]

,O,

Bark

wor-

68,12.

\f

to

Je-

his disciples remem-

(when something actual

Q\r>n

the sub-

Qaa/^I Jesus came

^010,1 Vl\/ Opj2^

) after particles

bered;

to

rusalem ; John ii.22.

e, g.

Ol!^

is

denoted),

since they did not receive;

"

line 4.

Matt i

> "jSoi until that;

brought forth ; Barh. 24, 6

18; 21T, 3; Assem.

25.

/L^OJ fcoi

31,17; Ephr.

"w<i7 Ae died

196,

213,

USE OF THE PRETERIT.

172

the Pluperfect ; a) in relative clauses which define the

in point of time, precede it ; e.g. Matt.
principal action, and
he did as the angd
lliif
i 24. ]l$a* OKjffifi OlX
c)

yQi
Mark xL 6 b)
$Qa* ,S*2]
1.

jQ2>

of the Lord had commanded ;

e-g.

Matt iL
John ii 22
;

,0 ichen, after ;
verse 9

was 'born ;

&4, B. 6.

Assem.

CDCU>^

213, A.

More

RE*.

>Aa

q/2er tfa/;

>

25;

Vr**>

;"

Barh. 90, 9

Barh. 39,7.

a*

*> **>

W^Q;

>Ao

form of the preterite with lOOi

denotes the Present Tense ;
condition ;
a) in verbs of quality and

65

>2kd

^So, ibid;

Barh. 79. 12.

for the
pluperfect,
frequently, however,

periphrastic
I

,0 trfon Jesus

24

vi. 23,

he hadslainDarius; 164,8. j
after that

Assem.

>

after particles;

stands the

).

It

red ;

is

John

e.

g.

Matt

xvi, 2, 3.

O>a*> ]&i\

iv. 35.

the

which are white; Isa, L 3 ; Ephr. IL 117, A;

6 ) in
general designations of time, denoting simply what is usual

jields

and customary ;
db^cn

Gen.
3.

xxv. 2

iv. 6.

It

^JL

e. g.

c)

*n** M^O
Zorrf
denotes a state or condition

Ps. xiv. 2.

when

it

lVn^
(

*li^l

why

marks the Future Tense

art thou

e.g.

angry ?

asseverations, and the like, (for the

most part, however, only in translations from the Hebrew),
which are viewed as already fulfilled and accomplished ; e.g.
a) in

prophecies,

Isa. ix. 2.
xvii.

20

they shall see

lo> 1>O1QJ OV*

a great

sometimes after verbs in which

idea of a future action

promised that he would give

is

Gen.

light :

involved the

ou> ;iof

e. g.

Barh. 80,

; b)

the completedfuture (futurum

1.

;
e.g. Mark xii.25. ]Alio
exactum) after >
tchen they shall rise from the dead; John iv. 25.

KD

he

oiocj ]lo

4. In exhortations, and in clauses which contain conditions or conclusions, the preterite also expresses the rela-

tion of the subjunctive

participle or adjective)

us be vxttch/ul; Terse 8

a) of the present tense, (]oci with

XX

e.

g. I Thess. v.

ii.

Eph.

11

6.

Tit

^-'H-^
ii.

9,

^-COI

10;

let.

of

USE OF THE PRETERIT.

174
the imperfect

John

A \T
AA^

ix. 41.

"i'

"

'

^oA^OOl (.>Wx)
would ye have had
then
tO^\
Zooi
were
blind,
lAjt^M
if ye
no sin

e. g.

\v. 19;

of the pluperfect

John

xi.

21.

wi_jl fool 2p> ]} AjOOl ^jZ O-L. hadst thou been here
brother had not died ; Barh. 93, 10
Ephr. I. 225, E.

my

e. g.

10OO1
-

ing; e. g. Matt. ix. 17.

burst ; xxv. 24

subjunctive

Mark

poi

ii.

65);

cold

e.g.

Rev.

under

5.

Luke

36

v.

do not thereby
the imperfect

wtdA

61)

and

oA, that, denotes the optative

that thou wert

oh,

B^ol would that I

This idea seems also involved in the

c.

also stands

the preterit

Finally,

and the

Oil ,\I ^SD AiOOl

284.

were not of her children.

cases

(J) *Ae bottles

21,22

AaOOl l^JO *J<lL

15.

iii.

III.

Ephr.

sometimes want-

more frequently expressed by the future

is

sometimes the preterite with

(

is

^-i^^So

44

i.

..

for

the Imperative

Infinitive ;

looi occurs as an Imperative in connece. g. Mark v. 34.

tion with an adjective or participle
the preterit

a)

jA*OOl

]Vn.V

nn.
iv.

..jl

I Pet.
b)

ing

iii.

15

II

love

Tim.

iv.

your brethren

preceding imperatives

e. g.

Rom.

I Pet.

9, 10.

xii.

Luke

ii.

13

37.

x.

stands as an Infinitive after verbs signifyto go, to send, etc., without the copula
e. g.

the preterit
to

come,

Barh. 415,2.

8;

uyirjff

.oA^OOl

^^n...y

after

itf&i

QOL

^A ]{m ]2T he

came

with the copula, Barh. 403,

they sent to entreat

.T

**A2>

to besiege

16,

especially after **\

17.
;

e. g.

Acco

402,

o&oo.o>|
Barh. 68,

1.

If
.-I'P*

Ae

be^-f/n to

open

a/jrf /o offer

up.

USB OF THE FUTURE.

REM.
Assem.

But
I.

union frequently denotes merely the aorist

this

288,

o2) OVlf)

2.

The Future
the

a) for

they arose to go

g.

they went.

e.

\.

e.

Use of the Future.

61.
1.

175

stands

Future

Absolute,

e.

xxiv. 35.

Matt.

g.

^au tf.i\V)0 ^o;}U ]Ly]o jlio* Heaven and earth shall

pass away, but my ward shall not pass away; i. 21, 23
;

Luke

xviii.

John

xiv. 13

b) for the Complete Future in conditional clauses, (with

the future in the conclusion of the sentence) John v. 43.
;

y>*^

Z ooiL oiaaj

own name, him

have come in his

xv. 7, 10.

.f ?/ another shall

r >-}

]2p*

will ye receive ;

viii.

28.

Furthermore, it denotes, the following relations of time;

a) the Present although more rarely than in Hebrew e.g.
2.

John

iv.

xa$

iflvuv Ix

>

after

<^e cock
X

13.

]oi
TOU

*ooZ

^J

ZSaros TOUTOU, S^qtfet

^o^o Luke

xxii. 61.

crows

the Imperfect

b)

j tVr*

^Ani ^o

]"<^

Asscm.

27, 20.

I.

CTI^

before ; e. g.

/3 )

Luke

was conceived in

more

T*

>

e. g.

Isa. xliii. 17,

5*0,0 before

>

e. g.

Jud.

i.

the

Subjunctive

to
>

po,l tm!0;
>

io^o

him

Barh.

v. 8.

xi.

^)pD

before he

15

loi& l^iH

d) the Pluperfect;

19;
Jer.

apace

<"

after

5.

It serves to express the following

3.

mothers tvomb

his

^o^a fr^re

^^ Ae

>

)m;22 ^^Aj

21.

rarely the Perfect

hath chosen;
,

ii.

after particles

>

^3

>

tf verse 48,

such verbs as

after

'

*i

^op

(oegfan to spea&) ;

*)AaJ

with

\L ti-J>2' IJQJ
t*

-jraXiv

of the Present

Moods
;

in general

USE OF THE FUTURE.

176

John

1AJO ^Lo^

37.

vii.

drink; Barh. 79,

>

2oSoi

1.

>

him come

let

]L\3

nV) now

j^ *&*^ "ffit

^QQjTZj

j^ST'fl

should'st carry thy bed;

jAart

gather
11,13

nothing be

vi. 12.

lost

b) of the Imperfect
*
i
\ *t
<f

is

John

e. g.

])>
!>O^2) ,0)]
;

nf*)

-_

Assem.I.377.10,

a) in conditional clauses

after

/3)

not lawful that thou

Matt.xxvi.41

me and

him die;

let

U> with a preceding present or imperative

v. 10.

to

John

OLD IjQJ *J \\ if any man should confess concerning him ; /3) after a preceding imperfect e. g. John ii. 25.
*
*
7
T
**P
JOICQJ k*J|> (OO1 .Oiiro (J zV tGS not needful that any one
-

ix. 22.

should testify; after a preterite; v.27. U-? i*"^ ]oou> CTl^S*!

he gave him authority that he should execute judgment ;
Barh. 80, 3 ; Assem. I. 359, 5 ;
i. 31
after the pluper;

fect

John

e. g.

iv. 8.

OOOl oLl they were gone

^Qirspj
7) sometimes with (OO1 appended; e.g.
(7

that they

Ephr.
sem.

I.

might buy
223, C.

297, B.

I.

3. v.

51

Ephr.

I.

oo

It001

\\

237, B. and

\\]

(in case that)

.*

.i>.. K

REM.

May,

e.

g.

Ephr.

it

B.

1"."

>

p'rCDdM (Ik)

had brought forth

203, F.

I.
,

they entreated
;

John

I. 40,

.00

|OOU

(001

(?O12

Ephr.

might, can, should, must, and the

he might go and see

Rom.

e.g.

pressed by the future

1-1

e. g.

what harm would have arisen because

good ears

^^? U^?

|AjkJ

As-

d) of the Pluperfect, more

and only with ]ooi appended

rarely,

he would do

of the Perfect sometimes, in con-

c)

^ and

ditional clauses, after

vii.

Ol^J U=uf how

looi

him

John

that he

^QQJ

vi. 1.

continue? Gen.

ii.

iv.

40.

are

like,

that

IVwJO ^lV?
"
*

Of

.OG\LCL

also ex-

OOU>

OllSO "^*^>

would remain with them ; verse 47

o)j

16, 30, 31

P^O what shall we

Luke

xviii. 7

John

say, shall
vi.

28

v.

we

Heb.

USE OF THE FUTURE.

6

i.

fered
^f.

should

not

\Vn7Z

die

\^f>">

|*.

Mark

tiki can say?

^3

jSop

and should are expressed by

may

by

Tim.

B) The Imperative
tf /ear not

sm

J]

*")i

with salt

of circumlocution,
e.

e.

John

wo

in Prohibitions

a)

6)

iii.

20

vi.

after a

^opaZo o2

g. I Cor. xi. 7

g.

John

24

iv.

e.g.

Matt.

i.

20.

I Cor. xv. 33, 34.

preceding imperative

e. g.

verse 47; viii. 11.

The third person of the imperative, which is wanting, is

40.

i.

REM.

xai iSsrs,
*px;e<r&6

always expressed by the future

there

]2u*O>

2.

iii.

John

By way
>

a future following

with

JJO

of-

^3

11

twus<

49.

should be salted

sacrifice

who

every one

ix.

'

18

08,

every

Prov. xx. 9

^3

ZoiQJ ww^D,J V>

Barh. 63, 19.

177

be

Gen.

e. g.

i.

3.

]>O1QJ

]oGU

let

light.

C) The future marks the Infinitive after verbs which involve the intention of some action
e. g. Barh. 34, 4, 5.
;

Jla he sought
he thought

go ;
and

Assem.
to

verses

pray
4,

him

to kill

Matt.

M-r

33, 25.

1.

John

to kill ; 90,7,8.

(J

^JO

3.

iii.

>

**>.^^f>

)ZJ Matt, v.17

viii.

55

and many

REM.
pare
4.

about

The
63.

infinitive

iV

U he cannot
viii. 28).

^r-I xvi. 3

see

In

rQa Luke

others.
also

follows

these verbs.

Com-

the future

is also expressed by r-iAl ready,

and
a following infinitive e.g.Matt.
(
12|k2L rAl> he who is to come ; John iii. 14.

to be

= ^XXeiv
*(>*.

with

to

he began to fast

B.

Finally,

xi. 14.

i.

Uj> he feared

following, Matt.

manner occur
Acts

x r

5>OO ^J> +*\

like

|V"J>

xv. 4 (without

1J>

22.

ii.
f

oijri

to be lifted

*T

QLoiZASo^ ^Al (1201 even

up

vi.

vii.

35

so

^e Son

in the plural

q/"

Luke

3/an
xxi.

USE OF THE IMPERATIVE.

178

fooiSo^ ^-lAoi ,_j| ^r"A^ <At* tezV? cowze to pass; verse36.

idea of the imperfect is expressed
by IOOT ap-

9.

The implied

pended; e.g. John

which they were

the spirit

REM.

I.

is

purposing,

lowing;

whoso

in the plural

also expressed

me
v

13.

xviii.

Js

with an infinitive following

John

11'

JO

e.

The idea

with

>

37,17;

of willing,

?.<)

^fl\ \3t

C\ e

e.

up

lift

fol-

^O

H^t?

or without >

Ae would not

i.44.

Assem.

g.

and a future

_}Arb |2pj

40; Barh. 68,6

l

24.

xvi.
v.

|OO1

J>Q-;J

shall begin;

bv

Matt.

-especially

will follow after

1

Luke

with a following future

/Alj the priest

John vi. 15.

f;AJ> JjOia

197,

\Lo'j

to receive.

^Al

Also occurs >

1.481,22.
Ephr.

oVoo*r>V oooi
^j^Alj

39.

vii.

g.

b)

he

would

e.g.

John

forth.

ffo

Use of the Imperative.

62.

The Imperative
7
?

1.

expresses either a

\\

j^cno siCO^

v. 8.

walk

^QQ X>QO

of

]2f

28. l.Rem.; 2.

(vid.

-Z

|Z and

up thy bed and

Mark

g.

xix.

John

xi. 7.

32

and

oZ

^1^1 o2

Rem.) to the future of the

*

i.

38.

in the plural,
let

after

times acquires a future signification;

0X00)0

^Q2^ ^2} /

us make a

several are. meant

us go.

The imperative standing

two, are in-

let

\L

when

finite

when

V>

|VU(") >O*r>1

Gen. xxxi. 44.

e.

covenant

2.

take

in the singular,

\m'

e.g.

arise,

In the same signification the Syriac appends the impera-

verb, especially of

tended

command ;

or encouragement and permission ; e. g.

r>n\rn O i n to the
city ; John xi. 15.
g

REM.
tive

will give to

the

future,

e. g.

you

some-

Gen. xlv. 18.

and ye

shall eat;

USE OF THE INFINITIVE.

179

or the latter of two imperatives, following each other with-

out a copula, denotes the infinitive

*;o

^] go

to call

John

iv. 16.

to see ;

Ephr.

g.

201, E; or with the copula they stand in the relation of

cause and

and

this

REM.

i.

/iue,

Gen.

e. g.

effect

e.,

OtAo o,Al

xlii. 18.

if ye would

-*n.A/V

g. Isa. viii.10.

it

shall not be fulfilled.

]ALs2>

]]'o

n\Sv

speak a

successive imperatives, when one

e. g.
expressed by the future ( 61. 3. B)
3.

Of two

,_x4*s.Z

more

ao2 ]O1

)J

Eom.

REM.

xi.

20

61.

person,

see

3.

On

B. Rem.
60. 5.

Syriac,

infinitive

like the

not,

a)

and

Hebrew, a double

construct, denotes the

its

mostly used adverbially,

is

finite

verb,

a strentheninp of the action

.^D^f QO^aSo
;

which
;

e. g.

it

precedes,
Hebr.vi. 14.

7 will bless thee exceed-

Sam. xx. 6;

xxiii.

22;

OlX

thii

designate

19. B. 3).

inly and multiply th> ^nntly

*
ix. 9.

to

INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE.

without

yut^-CoV cL^lmSoo

John

viii. 11.

the Infinitive.

(compare

in connection with

denotes

John

it

go find henceforth sin no

the use of JOO1

Use of

which has

A.

The

negative,

iv. 26.

for the infinitive absolute

latter by ^ prefixed

and

w^l

word,

a.

63.

The

^.Soo

Eph.

is

Concerning the third person of the imperative, com-

pare

form

]>ai do

live.

In this latter case the future also follows the imperative

e.

is

e.

OVM o2 come

verse 29.

p^)j

>

po^o

he

is

very like him

Acts

v.

USE OF THE INFINITIVE.

180
28

Pkilem. verse 9
71.
<!>>/

15, 13.

atively with

^,io

no means

e.g.

John

went in

Rom.

ix. 6.

e.g. Isa.

xxx. 19.

REM.
ever

Barh.

g.

Neg-

certainty.

it is

equivalent to, by
U ^\iiO he by no means
sometimes denotes continuance ;

c) it

e.

^1

xx. 5.

]n*"W? ye shall not always weep

^oaoZ U

7.

the infinitive absolute

By

confirmation

know with

before the finite verb

]]

Exod. xxxiv.

b) certainty,

thou shah

how-

are also expressed, rather

idiom of the Hebrew,

after the

other minute

points of the
*?

ft

f> ^*">
^""Ao
language; e.g. much, much more; Jer. xxii. 10.
indeed
Germ,
etwa
much
Gen.
xxxvii.
8.
;
somewhat,
weep
(
),
7

>

^^ AJ

mj

*.

*4\SnVf)

O^l ^flV>

wilt

xliii.7.

then, truly;

haps, indeed ; Acts

frequently

Acts
7

vii.

45

know

? per-

indeed seen.

More

^r^ could we

A^pa |U*iO / have

34.

vii.

merely pleonastic;

and

Luke

e. g.

i.

Q^Q
Gen.

e.g.

The case

22; John

appended to the imperative

it is

4.

I.

FnfaFl

which

24, A),

mode

of expression ;
67. 1.
ingly ; see

B.

g.

of passages from theOldTestament,is also

is

Infinitive

capacity,

e.

g.

thou shalt surely die

fllfa

Gen.

ii.17.

(compare

closely connected with the ordinary Syriac

as

\ "k

Xg

I*^S>

1'y

!^r*

i'

Ir**

rejoice

exceed-

c.

INFINITIVE WITH

a) after verbs
tion^

29

Isa. vi. 9.

ye.

a, in translations

ZoSoZ 12oSD

The

e.

xiii.

The negative sometimes stands before

^oLo^oL ASnSo U ye surely shall not die.

hear

iii.

expressed by the noun formed from the finite verb

Ephr.

then

i>

MSDa^O
it

it is

^^r*

^_OCT1

thou indeed rule over us ?

with

OR THE CONSTRUCT FORM.

stands

which denote a purpose,

command,

etc.

e. g.

wish,

Luke

determina-

xi. 54.

they sought to catch something; Matt. xxi.

-*^*")

46

THE INFINITIVE.
John

v.

vii.

16;

oaloiSo^ looi

1.

Barh.

Matt. xiv. 5;

go;

AJJ
iii.

21

x.

no

\\

he sent him to feed

brought
sAa// take

John

to kindle

Luke xv.

Matt

xvi. 21

Barh.

5,

i.

customed

to

weep; Barh. 12,20;

to be

b)

accustomed

he began to preach ;
Assem. I. 5 13, B. 20 Acts
-;ji

M^//

(WsnaSfA

5. 10.

V}]'

*P

16; Barh.

ii.

15.

to cease,

Q^NSnN OOO1 ^>\s U

v. 42.

Eph.

1,

I,

<k

OlpVlS

17.

iv.

24.

vi.

Mark

]nnV&

xi. 31.

after verbs signifying to begin,

g.

Matt.

^apo

iv. 38.

John

that she goeth unto the grave to

e.

83,

can serve

230, D. oJOUiol

I.

Ephr.

tiiftn

Barh. 192,20.

Aere #foo could he not remain

to eat

]T he would not

}z>^

i*

John

18;

14,

181

censed not to teach

^-iJlSo

Mey were

ac-

changes.

1.

The

e.g.

Gen.

with
(which can sometimes, viz. in
from
the
Ilehrew, be rendered by while, or
passages translated

REM.

wlten

when he made
cumlocution

infinitive

3.

ii.

it);

forms, after

the future

for

1^?

,*"1SV)S loilL

rtAl

e.g.

which

God

created,

61. 4) and after looi, a cir-

Gen. xv.12.

*");SV>\

^aSQ

]6oi

sun shall go down. But of the llebrew idiom, by which the

infinitive, joined with a preposition or conjunction, is explained by
the

there occurs in Syriac,

the finite verb,

before

>

^lO
and he
t

ceased
*

"

\\

<

vVr>\^

^.Vo

who should not

e.g.

Assem.

not

to

1.

42,8.

teach ;

the construction with

only

O^shS)
negatively,

^Lo ]oOl ]]* \\O

in

ll-br.

iv.

1.

"

"v

*(>>

who should

refrain

T
7*1.
wZ.O N^CO wiOl

from

without

enter ; or comparatively,

>

entering,

i.

e^

Gen.

iv.

13.

'

(2>

in

i/

crime

is greater,

than

can be forgiven me.

REM.

2.

Tn the poets

we sometimes meet with a

Iran-it ion

USE OF THE PARTICIPLE.

182
from the

the

to

infinitive

o.

i>

finite

v* .

ff

verb

e.

^P

g.

>o

129, F.

III.

Ephr.

*,

*si 001
|Jo jAaioi> ]liD
Ucn^
.^i yap footer t's i, t <me of thirst to drink
water,
instead of drinking to measure fountains (literally, and we
.

vi

than,

will not measure) ; and likewise conversely ; which seems to be

done for the sake of the metre (compare Hahn et Sieff. Chr. p. 7
.

Anm.). The Syriac also expresses the infinitive by the future,

61. 3. C ) or by the participle
with or without * prefixed (
64. 3.

).

Use of

64.

1.

A) As

be considered either as Adjectives or

may

Participles

as Substantives

the Participle.

they assume the number and gender

Adjectives,

of their subject; and take their object in the case or

with the preposition of the verb from which they are

formed
..

UaO
i>

and

thus

the Active Participle

(OrLO pOZ

doves

'

^il*")lV>> ^iNCJl

verse 16

viii.

44

John

e. g.

ii.

14.

those

who

sold oxen, sheep,

Barh. 52,

4,

74, 20.

Ibil^v ^I*> InVf) a king who fears God; Assem.

I.

270,

V'*r&? oiLoi ^ t Sv> full of the

Holy Ghost ; Horn. i. 29 John iii.15. Oio ^LOiOiSoj .aiSn
him ; b) the Passive Participle,
every one who believes on

A. Eem. 9

Acts

vi. 3.

with the case or the preposition of its active

Vt QQ ---^V clothed in Syssus ; Barh. 32, 14

e. g.

19.

^' i
Ir*!

108, 6

ix. 2.

170,

.jL*z>
>

maimed

in

the

hand

Lev.

ii.

4.

xi

O^i rv\^

cakes anointed with oil

blessed of the

B) As

Ez.

Substantives

Sam.

ii.18.

Lord.

participles

stand,

lation, in the construct state, before the

in a genitive re-

noun

thus

a) the

USE OP THE PARTICIPLE.

Active Participle

e.g.

Gen.

xxiii. 10.
*

went in at

tiie

know

the laio

11.

]"l

|AS>OQii>

(i.

^\l

*-*r^>>

breaker

Participle] Gen. xxiv. 31.

xxvi. 29.

mark

2. Participles

A) The present,
noun denoting the
AJ I

^|i

84, 9.

tfie

of

Jj]

IZn^aft*")

l*o? Oia*jO

subject

the Passive

blessed

of God;

art

,**">g>

praying )

]]

with the separable pro-

54. 2

^r2^

favors; I Tim. i.10.

oath

their

in connection

who

214, 1

the following relations of time

thou prayest

^io ^io

those

sword;

2.

iii.

re/wse to acknowledge)

e.

who

knowers of the law}; Barh. 195,

even before prepositions; II Tim.

who deny

those

..rt

who had drawn

^Vn

*\li

]i>2

jfnnVn ^xl^

vii. 1.

the

(literally,

Rom.

gate;

183

e.

g.

John

xv. 15

iv. 9.

Assem.

I.

commandfrom our

have no

Lord.

REM.
definite

omitted
theep)

In the third person which is usually already rendered

by a preceding noun or pronoun, the separable pronoun ia
e.

g.

verse 6.

and

into his house

rii.

17

xv. 5.
Ol^ ^\QO and he beareth it (the
.*mr>Vn..\ l^DO ^iA.*->\ 1^|o and cometh

Luke

viii.

47

B) The past
looi

c. g.

John.

65)

ried ivith

iv.

/3)

calleth

23.

his friends

]!Zf

]A

a) the Imperfect

without

John

11'}

a
;

"JOOI after a

oTZoX

20;

18,

iv.

36;

in connection with

preceding imperfect;

.ioliDO ^oblSfil looi ^oriAi he tarthem and baptized ; iv. 27, 31 vi. 2
y) after the
iii.

22.

preterite in a relative parenthetical clause

pany

iii.

but the time cometh.

)Z)i

e.

g.

John

vi. 5.

1U-V&0 \*ia li^o unJ he saw a great comto him ; verse 11

Assem. I 75, A.36

who came

joined with o copulative

e. g.

Barh.

4, 3.

THE PARTICIPLE.

184

>j> they went up on Mount Herman and abode

the Perfect

i* *

John

11*

Soja

and

search

(J

l^ ^ ^> U^?

52.

vii.

-V"O ***>

that out of Galilee hath

see,

no

arisen

prophet.

REM.

It

is

is

when

of the language,

or tne participle

pin
verb,

be regarded as a mere imitation, and not as a

to

constant idiom

0*7 which, coming before the

^n,

^ffiLo oboi ^Aff U^oo

the

waters,

finite

of

U^o

^1 1

and

more

ateiT bim
T

grew from day

g.

Gen.

Sam.

viii. 5.

26.

ii.

tibn "i53m

rf

to

e.

liom spbn vn tr^m

more

decreased

JD-IO ^iT

the boy

infinitive

indicated the continuance or gradual progress of an action),

is

expressed in Syriac by the participle

and

Hebrew

the

day.

The Future ; a) the Absolute Future ;

^
e. g. John xi. 23.
jJDQjsj| y>(o
propositions
)

in general

thy brother

shall

rise

^OD)

again
V^r*

\3\

(3) after

-^

/^wo?<;

^7iai

a
lie

present

John

shall rise again

24.

xi.

25

iv.

7) after a preterite, Barh. 80, 20; 81, 1. >Ao> OlS ;ij

lAl_i^S& OlS )J1 JXl^iiD ^lk)O- "JALZ he said to him, that in
three

days he would surrender

a future

my

John

Father will love

me

shall

lie

after

an imperative
that

believe
"
"A

|Al

granted

""

1"?

]^Z|

xlviii.4

U-i^^P - ?
then will

that
;

Mark

iv.

25

-rnr>.*r>..'i
to

"

I become

xi. 24.

ye shall receive
1

John

^1^2] OlZoLo
him, and we will come

V) IOGI

362, 5, 8.

the city ;

xiv. 23.

him

after

^^^f

Assem.

souAj

/)*

I.
it

if

a Christian ;

^xJQOUj coicuoi
loi, John xvi. 32.

^oAj*}

after

'

01 behold

Exod.

ix.

18

the

hour shall come

^ ) in direct

Gen.

vi.

17

and indirect questions ;

USE OF THE PARTICIPLE.

.John

e. g.

M<

ftf

fl^yt
31

Jiol? shall

22

viii.

27.

xiii.

the

<

AJ] rilj iOjio

won

tkefuturum exactum
12]>

81. Barh. 133, 2.

^ASo) w/ien fo

U^o?

*^Aj|

Jio

in conditional clauses

/3 )

f^o ^poil

218, F.

I.

27.

vii.

as tliou shall have heard

Ephr.

e.g.

John

e. g.

come; verse

sh<ttl/i(n;e

tfio?* tw'ft ofo ;

?/.'7*ff

) after particles;

as

l>l^n

41.

vii.

come out of Galilee ? verse

i^inli.

185

]J1

water.

In like manner, participles indicate various Moods

8.

The

}ooi

65

compare

joZALo
the

Subjunctive

]3

//-:

after

^)ZASo IOJ-M ^|
would not break

"jiZ")

ground

,s7/o//A/

viz.

Zi'ye,

should die

i/??o/, 7ie

(=

clauses

relative

that If dtniild be given

ask

e.

Barh.

g.

with

38,

10.

Assem.

after >
that

I.

II ),

they

379,

would not

depending
e.
g. Assem.

I.

^OOll ^odu2J> ,03

them as Bishop,

2.

Barh. 56, 12.

upon a

imperfect subjunctive);

^-^U? ^D |annm^)V

of the Imperfect

even though the vessel broke,

besides

in

?///''? ;

whom

sac-

future

362,

19.

he ordered

they should

of the Pluperfect, with }ooi in conditional clauses

Q^

60. 4. c)
e. g. Gal. iv. 15.
Zooi ]^0->
(compare
"
T
Iff
+." T
**
V
*A
*n\ ^.*^m.r> .oA^OGI _ ^AJ GlLJ-iA had it been possible
;

.TC

ye

irniilil

Beb.

x.

have plucked out your

2;

xi. 15;

IJohn

ii.

own

eyes,

and given them to me;

19.

B
to

The

per in

it,

Infinitive,
in

after verbs signifying to begin, to cease,

command,

;* they began

to be able,
to pluck;

etc.;

e.g.

Mark

i.

Matt.

45; Luke

xii. 1.

v.

21

USE OF THE PARTICIPLE.

186
xv. 14

the light

John

Assem.

Barh. 96, 7

}Lr*

^>in
ff

30.
xi.

help

REM.

to

suffer to

grow; Luke

build churches

Luke

Mark
15

vii.

x. 40.

John

Sometimes 9

Matt, xxiv.30.

ft.^"

Matt.

xiii.

v.

19

viii.

43

19

v.

Acts

John

^o\ bid her

them

to eat.

such a participle

VZ]? ]**]* OTpTQ^ ^OV**J they shall

man coming ; John

P it could not
Acts x.47 Mark

will give

stands before

also

16

xviii.

CJiS

.n]

jCJJ ,*!

2.

ii.

^L

^*fttvV .OOl^ ^Aj we

vi. 37.

of

*;* he began to call ; 50,

160, 7
180, 5
83, 12 ;

he ceased

nonn*

hold them

108,

\&

37,15.

19

to see

>

xviii.

me

I.

^& ^4r>

^-t

44

lv**Ao **;* lioidl they began

8.

ii.

>>^r>%

xxi. 32.

see the
0->

e.

g.

Son

r>\r

OOO1
4.

The

Absolute Participle

is

distinguished

ceding

it

Matt.xiv.25.

e.g.

]lv>

^l /e5MS

John

ix. 7.

A.<r>

1>

l^o

*>

pre-

Ae came seeing

xv. 32;

Barh. 62,

6.

disquieted by war he died ; 73,4.

|Q;.QQ ^.^ASo
l3Ty>lrJ r3 B not standing^but bowed to the earth;

]Lo>
6

'i.

<Aem walking upon the sea

to

lu*
v

came

by

3*1*rX a) %Cb !>**

y^oiSo ,3 ^ou ^oaiZaL 12]
*

**

by

>

preceding

sitting at the

e. g.

Mark

ii.

receipt of custom

14.

]frnV>

xi. 2,

A^o o2uj

Matt. xiv. 26

xxvi. 64.

REM.
struction

a participle, a noun be appended, this consometimes expresses the Latin ablative absolute ; e. g.

If to such

..7

-\%P

P **

unwashed hands ;
wOlOjj| ^Mr*^3 V
Mark vii. 2, 5 John xi. 44. **Ol(Ay^O ^cncy")
bound hand and foot. In the translation of the New Testament,
Matt. xv. 20.

^D\ p

the participle
finite

is

sometimes to be understood as in the person of the

verb following

* r

it

c. g.

Matt.

verses 9, 10, 11, 13.

ii.

8.

O*~lflS

USE OF THE PARTICIPLE.

The

6.

187

passive participles frequently have an

signification

those from transitive verbs

active

e. g.

Matt

Oil ^AfAfM} those surrounding him ; Luke vii.

r
i
7
Ol^ OOOl ^\in> those bearing him ; John v. 4.

18.

viii.

14.

~*
v* ? ^ "
].^n\ |OO1 MilLo troubling
t.

I.

"U^^-^ P

30, 4.

hand
**

Acts xxi.16

Assem.

bearing the child; 34,9

37,8;

air*]& oil Zooi ]A.^>V she drew him by the

b ) those from intransitive verbs
e. g. Matt. v. 4.

2.

377,

the water

\\ 7

"A

,ooujJO-

lJ.-otJ

who mourn

blessed are those

^x

Mark

vii.

.r

30
John
OOOl ^-4-*M they were come ; xii. 15.
*lxD> rirfm^r M/JOW a/oa/ ; Barh. 170, 2 223, 1.
tfxL
;

xi. 19.

ff.7
^\1

T.I

^SuiU ,2

(CC)|

REM.

Participles

sitting

also

belong

e.

g. Barh. 128,

compare No. 5

signification

ji^O I deny

Finally participles are also used impersonally thus

.

a) the Masculine; Eom.

becomcth saints

wi^

)>!

30.

iii.

ix. 4.

TTiy

iv.

a-iroXXufjisSa
;

densome

e. g.

to

viii.
it

son,
]3

xvi. 2.

i/

must

38.

x
the

Gal. vi.9.

;
<

Philem. 8

behoveth

Assem.

thee

I.

455, A.

behoveth not a servant of the

OOll

Acts xxv. 27
'.^1?

Feminine

us: Barh. 45,

Vj]io

13.

it

33,20.
24, 41.

Lord;

he must increase

xxvi.

^^u^S U

<>y

itp

i,n\ *Ojl> j^| as

V"^*^>V "jooi ]]o OOl

flo

4; Mark

neuter

Heb.

IrOll l]a

loiiLj

John

as

constructions

^L

^*2

the

of

timendut.

I will.
-

^1

^AA*>

2.

such

have forsaken all

as

6.

bed.

have the

sometimes

Latin participle in -ndus

Here

upon a

Rom.

H./XSI

xiv.

tfoi,

Sri

especially to denote the

Zo'oi \f let

U^>

1?0l

'Aw

it

is

not be bur-

probable

MOODS AND TENSES.

188

Assem.

1.1

79,3.22. 2ooi

it was
necessary;
1^!&
honorable and right ; 519, A. 4.

it is

lo>1O ]lo

Here belongs

hands

into his

i.

also

Rom.

he can

e.

^OlO^po ^lo ^

xiv. 4.

and

482,24.

comes

in the feminine, Acts v.

39.

designating all the Tenses

and

ye cannot.

|J

65.

$e manner of

Fz'eitf q/"

Moods

of the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Optative in

particular.

The

1.

A
2)

of the Present

b)

Indicative

expressed

54. 2. b,

of the Imperfect

a)

by the

and

(60,

preterit
c)

by

usually

64. 2. A);

by

a) usually

2. a)

the participle joined

with |OO1

64. 2.B.
P

verse 20.
child's life

out; John

J3 )

'

38

iii.

5.

e.g.
??
;

xvii. 12.

>OOU
A^OOl

also without the substan-

Matt.

ii.9.

1'ocn
*K~

-0

\fa Olmsu 0001 v

60. 1. b),

and

18.4. Kern.,

tive verb,

rite

is

sometimes by the future (61.

the participle

^ff he went ;

-*~'j

^QJOI

wAo sought

CTlSo Zooi

fn^l

all

i I kept;

and rarely

l>

by

the

Judca went

by

the prete-

the future

61.

2.b);

C)

of the Perfect,

by the future
(64.2."B.b);

a) rarely

besides cases noted in

(61.

2.

c);

&)by

60.

1 )

the participle

ooi in the same

10
person and

number added

to the preterit

e.

g.

Luke

v.

MOODS AND TENSES.

j

|OO1

*.

had

terror

|OliO

OlrMl

189

him

seized

OOO1 QA1 they had gone

into

hidden himself;

x. 22.

\9
|OO1 |OO1

the preterit

60.

John

2.

Arf

ta

ftee/i ;

c) rarely by the future

6)

by
61.

d);

of the Future besides cases noted in

times
(

3. b),

by

62. 2)

c)

by

c)

The

participle

the participle

Subjunctive

of the

looi

61.

1.,

some-

6) by the impera-

64. 2. C);

is

),

b)

by the preterit
by the future (

a)

of
61.

the same tense,

clauses

given

very often

of the Imperfect

64. 2. C. b).

Present

60. 4. a

A. a

*A

by the

60. 3. a)

of the Futurum exactum ; a) by the preterit ( 60.

the future ( 61. 1. b), somemore frequently
ft) by

//.

the Preterit

times

a)

tive

3.

8.

N^

1.

iv.

}ooi wiJ...2j he had

v. 13.

e. g.
X

by the

John
*

a) usually like the indicative of

with looi in conditional

participle

ra&Ji
-^1

2>f .oA*ool

viii. 19.
11*

o!&

jOAjOOl ^-^r -->U if ye knew me, ye would also know my

xxi. 25
xviii. 30, 36
b) by the
father ; verses 39, 42
future ( 61. 8. A. b), sometimes c) by the participle alone
1

64. 3.

A.

a)

of the Perfect; sometimes

by the

future (

61. 8.

A.c);

D
6)

of the Pluperfect

by the future

61. 3.

participle with ]ocn

///.

The

Optative

is

a)

A.

d),

64. 3.

by the preterit (60. 4. c)

more frequently c) by the

A.

expressed

b).

by

the interrogative

THE PERSONS OF THE VERB.

190

pronoun with a
29.

,ix.

lv.7; b)
* ^

by
*

to

may

ye yet hear with

REM

The

hearken

me ;

to

il\V>

e.g.

When
Luke,

xvi. 3.

r
.

/} or

Q_x\

|Ol_i(J

that

my people would

Job

e.g.

1^3

1JT|1

xxiii.

would that we were dead!

^iO

verb denotes a wish,

Zu*Q^*2 glory

it

is

omitted

e.

it is

literally

oh that that wert

translated

my

V. The
expressed
ture
ple

Infinitive, finally, besides

;

a)

the preterit

62, is ex;

b)

the cases under

60. 5. b)

1.

by the

B).

(
by
and more frequently

61. 3. C)

c)

b)

by

by

63, is

the fu-

the partici-

64. 3. B).

66.
1.

3.

viii.

brother.

(61.

,11 ^Lo

Cant.

in

IV. The Imperative, besides the cases under

pressed a) by the preterit of looi ( 60. 5. a)
future, especially negatively

g.

toGod. Sometimes instead of

occurs the almost correspondent J

but

3;

Hebrew

the

*tf T1

V>\ O-SX would

iA*iOj ^_iOOl

the substantive
ii.14.

by verbs that denote a wish with a following >

7

Exod.

aoA|

^-ijnimV)

sometimes also expressed by

is

optative

Fs.lxxxi.13.

me !

e.g.

17

*jA ^oA^ooi

II Cor. xi.l.

(001

g.

or the participle with

live ;

**

e.

I had

I Ps. iv.

that, with a pre60. 4.Rem.);the Future; e.g. Gen. xvii.18.

oh that he might

Judges

>oA*] oh

VMM aoA
.

JVnS OlV7\l ^j
me) this people, in my power

the particles widL and

following

e. g.

,-i oh that

it-itta IJOI

{who will give over

terit

or future following

preterit

The

The Persons of the Verb.

third singular masc.

passive conjugations

is

and

fern,

of the active and

sometimes used impersonally thus

THE PERSONS OF THE VERB.

a

the masculine;

.aaL ^oja

^k a|j
it

pained you

it

him

cured for

he

it

9.

Ol

Ixix. 20.
2.

01^

xviii. 23.

Au'pO

tV^ll B

Ip2>

^4oZ|
24.

vi.

^QStL aipoj
of
the
a)
preterit

shames me, (I

t'J

wiA

Am

am

asham-

?7

grieves

me ;

34.

Jer. vii.6.

Ps. xxxi.9.

x.

l>.

Deut.

future,

A* 1

t*

Mw generation

Gal. vi.

of the

1I<

e.g.

^CTIOAI Ol^

x.34.

the feminine

b)

Luke

ft )

OOl {>,> JL* Ajpo

Ps. xcv.10.

of

Luke

would be good for us

would harm you

erf)

of the preterit;

191

pained him

it

/3)

will not be grievous to us

ft

whom

^V>!^

of the future,

it

Ps.

grieved.

In like manner in Syriac, the neuter

by

pressed ; a)
verb, thus ;

was

it

ZoiyJ
^\

is
usually exthe third person singular feminine of the

in

light

impersonal phrases, as

John

Assem.

I.

i*

AlLoA| Me

sively, Barh. 84,14.

298. A.ll.

Aaa.

vi. 17.

.?

it

Luke

vi. 13.

was dark

pas-

was spread abroad;

was revealed to him ;

report

Ol

it

Ajbyi
with the demonstrative proin
connection
7
ft
)
481,
e. g. John L 28.
noun or with adjectives as subjects
;

came

this

Zooi
JjiOiO

Assem.

we

i .

I.

there

IJa]

]f**

^">

ii'as

]ya\ L\Zi

380, 4.

^S

it

e.g. Isa. xxiii. 12.

pass at Bethany

any thing

6)
.

it

Ephr.

I.

i.

3.

240, F.

Moses passively,
seemed just to us. Yet

seemed good

A*iIZl \o>)

also find for the neuter

culine

not

to

to

the third person singular mas-

i^S .vull

]3

there will be no

OlS jiUI it VHIS said to him;

for thee Barh. -T133, 8.
_*
*
T
--^2OuAj ^| it shall be permitted to me.
Assem. I. 362, 5.

rest

3.

nite,

When
it is

English,

the subject of the verb is general or indefiexpressed, in Syriac, in various ways, as in the

thus

a ) by the third person singular

e.

g.

THE PERSONS OF THE VERB.

192
Gen.

l^b he

xi. 9.

which

xvi. 10.

e. g. Isa.

is called) ;

it

calls,

jo,J

j*Q-i?

the

wine Ireaders shall

*0

tread

no more wine

IrQy,

I Sam.

e.g.

one be born when he

shall be told

it

e.,

^OOl

xi. 3.

any one

what

sees,

by

c)

w^en ^AoM
ferest

(i.

plural
itive

made ; Barh.

o2 .

Jl

Dan.

they

12

i.

they see

xxiv. 16.

Tim.

24

vi.

r
i

o^oZ

4.

ii.

parti-

%**?*

Ucil they fail-

d ) sometimes by the

>Q;nV> looiZj that thou ofsometimes the verb is in

1.

ii.

Luke

e. g.

Qi^M

what

e.
(i.

with an explanatory

also

e.g. Isa.

Mark vii.27.

58, 13, 15

-^ nfl what
v

that there be offered

e.g.

one)

L^ ]ooi liwASo ^L

13.

to be

the second singular

e.

any

if

XaAj> itf."^^ tluf how can

the second plural, Matt.

or passively Matt. xxvi. 13.

^VAS0>

bringest; I

old?

is seen )

e.

(i.

ciple or adjective

ed

\*

Acts xvi.

9"

Heb.

]^Q

the third person plural ; e.g. Isa. Ixiv. 3.

men in general ) have not heard ; xlvii. 1

by

i.

is

prayer was wont

there
b)

Ij^.t looi jSof he

ix. 9.

or Jkjf and

no one shall tread);

i. e.

1
\*^rt\

John iu.4.

said ;

to

appended by way of explanation, after the

idiom, the participle or participial noun of the same

Hebrew
verb

one

calls; (i.e.

also

is

*QQJj

J&JJO

(or

by

first

the infin-

with ^, Matt. xv. 26. GuS0;Sa^o __ -^foVr>V xxii.17),

that ive

(i.

e.

any

quently by
do men gather ?
they say

v.
;

and

one) should take

the participle alone;

15

ix.17

cast

e.g. Matt.vii.16.

x.

29

e)

more

^>^o\

I Cor. iv.12

fre-

]vn\

Barh.6-2.

58, 9.
A

REM.

Here belongs

also

|^O|ASo

they say,

infinitive following
personal phrases with an

^vVnV ,^X

one

we (any one) must

obey.

may do

Acts

v.

29.

it is
e.

said

g. Matt.

nrftk

and imxii.

^AVn\

12.

]]Q

VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.

193

When

the Deity or those in high stations (e.g. Kings),

the first person plural denotes the
of
themselves
speak
]*j] ,}U lei us
pluralis eaxellentice; e. g. Gen. i. 26.
4.

>

I will} make man;

e.

(i.

hold we

(i.e. I,

Justinian), have written

us (me)
REM. Sometimes though

to

7; Barh. 90,

xi.

11.

^inAo 101 be^DoAs ivrile

9.

translated from

the most part only in

for

New

Old and

the

changes from one person to the other,

to the second, or vice versa

,^1

AJ]
there

Micah

18.

vii.

from the third

|O

^*Zo2|

Uo orZoZ;^
God

no

is

viz.

passage*

the construction

Testaments,

who forgive th

as thou,

and

sins,

remitteth

the

remnant of his heritage, and retainest not

IL
Mai. ii. 15; Gal. iv. 21.
284, A. B )
(compare Ephr.
transgressions of the

.OOOU9
\sysre
6

ol

fioi,

from the

Vr

'

OOLkJA f\
him,

uiro

vo'fxov

first

to

^eXovrgg g/vai
the

_ CJLaV

third
r

Rom.

person

\.\

ii. 1

e.

^i(j>> ^oA because we have sinned against

hath he poured out upon them (us).
Here also belong the

what they declare of

-

Matt, xxiii.37

Isa. xlii. 24, 25.

g.

instances where writers include themselves, in the

in

OlO IpwJ

their

e.

ancestors;

first

g.

person plural,

Psalm

Ixvi.

6.

9 Ym

^D^

then did

we

When

rejoice in him.

several verba

having different subjects follow each other in the same person, it

appears to be rather according to the Syriac idiom, not to indicate

more

particularly the difference of the subject

67.

Construction of

the

Verb

e.g. II

Sam.

xi.13.

Cases

and

^oiQoAp

ooi}

with various

Prepositions.
I.

1.

With an

Transitive

VERIJS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.

Accusative are construed

Verbs

e. g.

Matt

ii.

6.

VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.

194

who

at the

having

V ?

2.

214,

same time a

Here

also

16

; iv.

even

intransitives,

transitive signification

an

fo rode upon

ass

215, 11.

belong such verbs as in other languages govern

7

other cases

e.

John

believe ;

xii.

1>

og>
t

g.

Barh.

e.g.

^3>

lOO

rriQ**

REM.

my people

shall feed

command

to

SdiOl

Matt, xxviii. 20.

38; Romans

x. 16,
(

III.

;*"><**

*2 John

with

23

ii.

to

\0

|ll

answer

to

Ephr.

285;

announce; Acts

to

xvi.

10. etc.

Here belong the following

put on or put

signifying to

with anything

cover

ments

Col.

iii.

that he

7.

;0| I Sam.

l1

11

vi.

Eph.

those

to gird, to
;

put on our gar-

ii.

adorn,

I Cor. xv. 53

.*Vsi>

^'nnX

Barh. 223, 12.

to

off clothing,

-*^V

classes of verbs

Acts

xii.

lV*

even passive verbs e.g. ja&lZ] Acts xii. 8

-'**/} Ps.
and /3) those denoting a ivant or excess ; e. g. Acts
civ. 2
;

.!>

P-

--

<s

(Zoni JOO1 ySD

er ; xiii. 10
Eom. i. 29 Mark
he
harm
as to his soul.
if
suffer
vi. 8.

iJjk.*jO

(^

was full offaith and pow-

he

;rn*i Olma/

36.

viii.

7) verbs of remembering

Luke

72

i.

finally

'O teoQxA!^

Mark

v.

John

vi. 1;

38

Heb.

]l

Luke

]2.}o he

51

ii.

came

c)

vi.

John

ii.

Luke

iv.

^jl

yS>O\

12

aaj

%
ii.

i.44

39

iv.

14

.nSrr> v. 1

a) in

connection with a noun,

;

e. g.

as

and

e.g. Matt.

Tyre;

Luke

iv.

|k> Acts

42

ix.

^1 xviii.33

their object,

Judg. xiv. 12.

'

several neuters also take an accusative, viz

from the same verb

10

into the region of

'

John

John xv. 20

>OIL

forgetting,

17, 22

ii.

T>

verbs of coming and going to a place

xv.21.

and

pj2f John

Furthermore here belong

IZ^o)

formed
,**]

to

VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.

195
.

propose a riddk

]wi>, y>V
I.

Ephr.

Acts

253,

when

more' accurately defined by an adjective;

CU^

]Aa> l^OpM
Assera.

I.

362, 18

lamented sorely

OO1
10
**

W*

The

to

to befall,

of the

accusative

John

object

happen
e.

10.

ii.

29

iii.

to

any one,

Luke

g.

because this has befallen them

Acts

xiii. 2,

vii.

40.

plo what
2

Matt

ia

112O1>

JOO1
~

tdj|

P 7

noun

14.

i.

ia the sense of

governs the

also

24

xiii-

the

]W> I^S^V^S-V^

Gen. xxvii. 34.

Zach.

e. g.

exceedingly;

they rejoiced

* f

MOV**

Matt

f3 )

especially

17.

ii.

dreams

have visions

to

251,

E/. xvii. 2

has happened

him

to

Acts

xxviii. 5, 6.

following govern a double accusative ;

Pe. of which takes an

verbs in Pa., 4p^- and /S'Aa.,
of
verbs
accusative, viz.;
putting on or off" clothing,
a)

adorning,

Mark

covering

with anything;

xv. 17,20; Ephr.

I.

239,

A.

he clothed them with garments

.? YV

pa..9|>

527,

ft]

A.

\L*>
loith

or showing ;
/eacA

fri'ii
II. 178,

John

all things ; I
;

John

xix. 2.

they put upon him a purple robe;

;

e. g.

Ephr.

CfcoL A.'\V>
Luke i. 53.

good things

e. g.

yow
show us the Father

g.

verbs of filling up, satisfying

<Ae vessels with oil;

gry he fills

^oldjkCQOO

|A*jJ

Ez. xvi. 10
I.

e.

y) those

xiv. 26.

Tim.

iv.

verses 10, 32

which denote

^Q,SnV)

teaching,

6; .John xiv. 8.

s]

tC

verbs in Peal with a double accusative signification.

of
a) verbs of clothing, covering (also with

Here belong
the thing)

e.

g.

Ephr.

1.

239, A.

Jil^OT ^djf

\a?\

he

VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.

196

^">

girded them with girdles ;

Lev. xix. 19

John

e. g.

/3)

ii.

7.

pofe wi^A i^ater

&

{l'.?)]*

verse 9

to

^jfoSLo /K

Barh. 212, 2

the person and thing)

had commanded

e.g.

they

him',

any thing to any body,

thus and so e. g. Gen.
;

a Father

est

John

formed

i.

e.

I Kings

g.

joined with
especially

mind

in, on,

and ^loi

ft *

<y> *

AJJ

Assem.

I.

Ja]

>

7iave ?nade

jr

r^^ Olio

346,

A.

t^/Aa<

mak-

E.

Al-

4. v.

viii.

V*a,So Ja pi ^jjl

32.

an

altar

s) verbs of

naming,

VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.

which

-JD

are

in English

upon, about, concerning, etc. Here belong

which denote some state or emotion of

Luke

e.g.

is

a) verbs

at his birth

thing

Verbs are construed with

^Sr>

A.

332,

an accusative of the material of which anything

IT.

the

water

<

^A^OU

xvii. 5.

he built of (them) the stones

Isa. Ix. 18 ; I John iii. 1.

1.

with

I.

viii.53.

thou thyself? Heb.

so with

5) verbs of showing or doing

or making a person or thing to be

/Aee

sow

oipQSj \o all that

"jZ] OlS OOOl r*-M*

Gen. vi.22.

Mark viii.ll.

demanded of him a sign

(tfiem) ZAe

Assem.

12; y)verbs of commanding, ordering, (also

he

*&)] to

anoint, Ps.xlv.7;

verbs ofJilting up (also with *o and^-So);

Matt.

oi^QSoo OrMj

i.14.

Barh.90,20;

17

iii.

Heb.

they shall rejoice

*s pD

have pleasure in some-

to

*Q OlLo22f to wonder

x. 38;

at;

Matt. xxii. 33

Luke

ii.
it

21
ii.

John v.45

11;

Assem.

*a
I.

*rJ

89,

io

47

/oo^ at

A. 17

Q \>& to hope

in

Matt.

xii.

*Q ^0*01
;

to believe

John

*Q Zois

i.

on

36, 43

io 6e

Mark
;

i.

15

John

Barh. 190, 13

ashamed of ; Rom.

i.

VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.

16

JD ;..

Matt.
at

26; Luke

viii.

Tim.

v.

or threaten

ibid,

]]s

Matt, xx.19

13

rebuke

to

197

41

iv.

Barh. 53, 10; *Q o*VS

nV)

*O

xxvii. 31;

laugh at

to

mock

to

Acts

ii.

verbs that denote acknowledging, denying, swearing

-.-*"> 1?QJ> -ViV5
by, calling upon ; e. g. Matt. x. 32, 33.
whosoever shall confess me ; Mark i. 5
Acts xxiii. 8 ;
6)

Rom.
shall

23

x.

372,

10

9,

deny me
9

8,

Matt. x. 33.

xxvi. 34

call

to

v. viii

\LL 1'oCLfi ^S )j| kooLo

God ; Mark v. 7 I Thess. v.27;

Matt. xxvi. 63.

/ at/jure thee by the living

a ]p

>aa2J> ^So whosoever

Assem. I. 341, A.

*JL>

Tim.

upon

Gen.

Here

iv. 26.

also belong

c)

some verbs which denote a doing something for or against

"
x T
x ir
j
3 t^H, ^>| and *uOw to
some one e. g.
prove against
;

some one

16;

Acts xxiv. 27

JOICD (also with

28.

Of verbs

ter

Luke

viii.

Here
* %^A

^A)

27

xxii.

10

Psalms

also belongs

Rom.

to testify

of motion, here belong

bring) something

REM.

xxv. 9

and *>

17

ix.

against
iV
to

\L\

Tim.

i.

Deut. xxxi.

*Q VLjS

d)
\

to

encoun-

come with

(i.

e.

Ixvi. 13.

]A*

drink from

to

Gen.

xliv. 5.

j;iO O1Q |A> 1^*^ the cup from which my Lord drinks. Some
times J2 denotes a part of the object
e.g. II Sam. xxiii. 10.
T
r
P Aa\^~>
I..*.B
ajA* Ae marfe an overthrow among the Philistines ;
;

and here are to be placed

I

Kings

ix.

The following verbs

2.

the dative
e. g.

John

gt'ye

MS

?o
;

^*. and x^Soi

to 7a6or at

something;

23.

a) those of giving, permitting,

xiv.27.

you

are construed with

Mark

as a sign of

commending;

^orA p] OCTL-mT wtlto lV)X

Matt, viii.21,31.
v.

13

Luke

viii.

32

C*

^A

my

peace

*^ T
Q2>| permit

Acts xx. 32,

me

VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.

198

tCioL pi / commend you

God ;

to

I Peter iv. 19

and displeasing ; e. g. John viii. 29.

b) those of pleasing
rnV r2iy VOfLo that which pleases him ; Rom. xv. 2, 3

Heb.

xiii.

Luke

e.g.

or

Ol

137, 12.

Luke

xvi.

relation

28,29

to

verses

Aave

to

occurs also

equivalent to

A*|

John

sx siv

Matt.

Heb.

ii.

loOl

Jotn 9

21
e.g.

17

what

is

Barh.

have

to

e.

it is

|]O

g. Matt.

iii.

(with the accusative of the object in

x. 16.

xiii.

to

thou art like him.

xai rdv irars'pa xa< TOV uiov

ouVo

20

9,

]*&\

also belong impersonal phrases, such as

/or, and

fitting

those that denote likeness, similarity;

like ?

Alt IQ

Here

REM.

loi-^? IZaolk) Uio>

xiii. 18.

Kingdom of God

the

no<

16

e'^si),

V^Uo Voi
equivalent to

In the same signification

Johnxiv.30.

Barh. 66,

15^
^ AA^

^*V
and

JllO OlS OOO1 1'ASZ

4.

he had three sons.

3.

"With ^So are connected

fear, Jlee,
e.g.

Luke

guarding
xxiii. 40.

verbs which denote

oneself, refraining, ceasing, releasing

Aj| ^\**> ]oi!$L

^3 tf af fearest

God? John ix.22; Barh. 94,9; Rom.

#p7x*
^OL^J OU^>
not

oo^2

ii.3.

i/a< thou shall escape the judgment

^SsD

I Cor.

vi.

^>

ftf".i">

46

18

John

14

x.

Barh. 170, 4

beware of men

xvii. 15.

xvi. 6, 12

]!") ^So

jOl")

I Peter

11.

Luke

abstain
t,

iv.l.

"

|C3l4**

Assem.

I.

eu?7

from

lusts
-I

-1>

^O

42, 8

ii.

xii.

thou
All>

of God;

Matt. x. 17.

O>OT>l|

15; xx.

j^2> that thou shouldst

It

m yrom

to

of the flesh

01

*
.

A.^_..

^Lo QO^)Z]

Acts xv. 29

I Pet.

OlA i\

he ceasethfrom sin; Barh.102,9;

II Thess.

iii.

3.

}i*">

^D

oaoicuaj he

VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.

will keep

failing

evil

you from

Luke

&L& they came

Barh. 69,1

besought him

REM.

^Lo

short of the faith

beseeching; John

asking,

OlflDp yV)Sn\ to Jill hit

Tim.

vi.10.

II Tim.

18

,-io

c) those of

vo

they

11.

ii.

A^lO

to die

are construed verbs, which, in English,

may

also expresses the Latin prce ;

With

fZoiSOiOT

ii.

OllLo OOO1

iv. 31.

verse 40; I Peter

vA

before ; or per, with

4.

lao^ ^Lo

xv. 16.

belly with husks

those of filling up, lacking, ami

b)

199

e.

and -^\**> John

x.

>

_l

g.

1,2.

be followed by about, concerning, viz.

a ) some which ex-Ai XLM>A|
an
the
Matt.xv.22.
mind; e.g.
press
affection of
;

be merciful to

28.

it

r^s*

^oAjj

raiment
r

me ;

Luke

T r

xii.

15

U^>

laol V>A why

over

to rejoice

^A

26.

if

^OA 5<imoZ|

32

xi.

Matt.vi.

take ye thought for

anxious
it

^oA

xviii.20.

Matt.v.22.

*f

pa to iveep

.i>

vA ^AloZl

take counsel concern-

to

Matt. xxvi. 4; b) those which denote power or authori-

e. g. Luke xix. 14.

ty over something
that this person should rule over us
;

Barh. 40, 6

you

15

ix.

to be

J...J

Rev.

_.f

over; Lukexxiii.27,28.

ing

Rom.

xvii.

Matt, xxiii. 35.

Luke

* %^

A\u

woia\l

34

xxi.

l*

poi ^i\S ^AlQj>

Rom. vi. 14 ; vii. 1 ;

,OTL.S^

John

shall come

]*Z]j

xviii.

Luke

vpon
J

|A^A> fear fell upon him ; c ) those which

denote a doing for or against, or an occupation with someV

thing

testified

Acts

e. g.

against
tJiat

concerning,

^OlQAl

vii. 58.

him ; Matt.

xxvi. 62

he might bear witness of

to

accuse

John

i.

46

John
;

v.

viii.

46

46

t>

Ojoifloj
;

John

tJte

light

v i\i|
i.

iii.

^A >QAs

Acts xxi. 25.

who

^A joimjj

8.

those

26

v. 31.

in icrile

^A

>]

of,

and

VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.

200

speak of, about; John i. 22, 30; xiii. 22;

d) verbs of covering, protecting, or burdening ; e.
to

.7

xvii. 5.

//em

.7

Luke

i.

g.

13

Matt.

IZj^ou Jill a 6ri^ cloud covered

-.*>.

35.

J>.

oouAl A\l

vii.

* 7 _

\A
\T

p.ff

\v; Ol\i*

the

power of

Most High shall cover thee ; ^A \& and ]iQD have the
II Sam. xiii. 25.
same signification
Jer. xviii. 23
the

-^.

e)

.\v jo]j

shall not burden thee.

several verbs that denote a charge,

e.

^\i r^21

g.

^JL *aAo
to

we

J]> 50 that

to

pray for

I.

50,

charge one

to

prescribe for one

John

^J*

REM.

Here

also

Chron. xxxvi. 23

^i

to

ash after

\1O

Assem.

belong phrases compounded with nouns derived

-tf 7

e. g.

yowr cares upon

the

Peter

Lord

Barh. 77,

J/n\.
]Z;n

they are a burden to

*

King

me

vii.

i.

xv OOO1

14.

20.

A '

and Al iO between, are construed

I >.*">

5.

; Isa.

Job

'*" *

With AxO

|O1_^

v. 7.

j^^ they took care for the

5.

***'*

verbs which denote dividing, separating, distinguishing

*
e.g.

Gen.

pnt>\

i.4.

Mai.

iii.

6.

perceive a

to

A^jQ

17.

an(i lv**

^>r

II Sam. xix. 35

18.

"With

>Aa

after, are

him ;

/Aey followed

wjAo oZ follow
Tim.

i.

^) Ae separated be-

difference between

(equivalent to to follow

Ruth

'

Zu)

fioiOJ

tween light and darkness

<o see,

6.

from these verbs

cosi

finally

or petition

II Kings xxii. 13.

^1

xvii. 9.

command

II

And

vi.

1 1

after

me

ii.

Matt.

e. g.
;

xix.

22.

Mark
2

iv. 25.

x.

32

John viii. 12

to

go
r
GliAo o^i|
*

15

xii.

II Tim.

joined verbs which signify

o

"*

Matt. iv. 19.

;

>Aa

AND THEIR CONSTRUCTION.

PASSIVES
More

RKM.

>Ao
xiv.

accordance

in

with verbs signifying

10

to

with

to appear,

seem,

- * ' ^*~>

longing to the person

Kings

REMARKS.
as in

are expressed,

Gen.

e. g.

wolQjA** he seemed

v>

the adjectives

;2i

and

vi.

by

Hebrew,

or with the suffix be

xix. 14.

\Q

]ooi

sons-in-law;

When

to thee.

or

xv. 2. 3

vlo2) without

Gen.

xxi. 11

"

connection with
. i .

^o

lation of the

Luke

x. 36.

To

suffer,

^*"*

- -

*3

would

e. g.

this

V)

3.

x.

I.

SoxsT

is

Acts

e. g.

Matt. xxi. 15

Ephr.

ill

or in

looi ;-*>

240,F.

In the trans-

seem good toGod f

New Testament,

e. g.

Sam.

II

rendered more definite

good or bad, they are expressed either by

''

\*~i

Rom.

his

to

(he) seems

by

]l;So

find

put away, destroy: e.g.

relation of genitive

in the

-L

- * -

Hebrew idiom we

the

xxi. 21.

GENERAL

To

201

usually expressed

by

Matt. xvii. 25; xviii. 12; xxi. 28; xxii.17:

permit, are expressed either

by

Off)

com-

to

to cause (without the

e.g.
copula following)
or they are expressed in such a manner that
Barh. 72, 12
the thing to be done is implied in the imperative itself ;
Barh. 27, 2; 114, 14.

mand, or j,*

III.

The

1.

^;

e.g.

seen by

active cause

Matt.

men

PASSIVES AND THEIR CONSTRUCTION.

vi. 16.

Luke

viii.

in passives

I* "">V
1

29.

is

usually expressed

that
t oV"Aj?

Ol^ }ooi ]^

they

may

by
be

he was caught by

VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.

202

him; Assem.

1.

voice heard ly

him

Yet we

REM.

also

sometimes

tive,

40

Barh. 32, 14.

clad in Byssus

of

^oA**)

^S0, Matt.
13

govern

of them

one

was

she

90, 14

01

thee ; v.

actives

retain

l7QjO> ]1*0> A.VrtZ^

ii.

find

frequently

be baptized

whose

Passives

2.

16.

there

was a

14.

j*1^0>

Barb. 152, 11.

I should

,iQl2] that

and

39,14,

QQ ,in\>
108, 6

double

41.

i.

Holy Ghost

the

li^Ui o wa?i w/io w;<w

Assem.

223, 15;

accusa-

Luke

e. g.

with

filled

iii.

xx. 23.

I.

86,

A. 27, 28.

When

3.

especially in verbs

passives,

mind, have an active

signification,
"

accusative

e.g. I Thess.

''

remember you in our prayers

xv. 5

Eph.

Col.

Here

REM.
cud, Lev.

xi.

3,5

22

f 1*^*

to ^Ain^,

Rom.

MioA*]

I Tim.

to t^wA,

ii.

twe

to obey,

vi. 10.

belong such passives as >>Q..Z]

chew the

to

may be explained why participles

64. 5) take the accusative of the
object.

also

Passives have also frequently a reflective signification

24.2;
(21,2; 7 22.2;
*
*
Jesus
^CLM-I
AxA^
tOl.*Z|

Mark

58.

i.

I Tim. v. 14.

are young shall

marry ;

xix. 16

11

to

^aa.^ ^L*p>ALo

Acts xix. 15

^.J^f

and hence

'

.*"lnZ]

recognize,

iii.

also

passive of the Pe.

4.

to

^joA*]

vi. 1

they are joined with the

tZa^^a

2.

i.

the

to

relating

xxiii.

^yiO?P o'^fo
7 7
iv.

13

i^Zl

turn around, Matt. ix. 22.,

REM.

Many

A.a);

John

e.g.

bowed himself down

>
;

verse 8

J-^-if

those

who

.V>

\x**Z|

to Ai'cfe,

viii. 6.

to

John

wax

strong,

59

viii.

Acts

etc.

neuters take a passive signification

e.

g.

PL

to

MODE OP EXPRESSING GREEK COMPOSITES.

Luke

r,

])QL2 v/.

Matt.xiii.40.

w irXav^rs

iQ

|OX

xxi. 8.

<

"

*'

'

xalsrai
rupi

^J

ouf,

to

,O_i

203
burn,

to fall, iii.10.

12.

viii.

etc.

the use of verbs for adverbs, see

Upon

67.

to

Appendix

MODE OF EXPRESSING GREEK

To

belongs also the manner of rendering Greek Composites,

which

in the Syriac translation of the

as

follows

Greek

the

* t

-i -'

Q2o2

AyapcMvofMv

e.

vin. 1.

n ^t

xvi. 5.

Testament, are express-

Rom.

AuJ

,2 xarapavn

Rom.
2.

e.g.

By

HUM

14. 9.

avrorapjjXSiv

*oAaZ(

verbs

Luke

- -

ava/SX&rourfi
avt^rtfiv;

Acts

Luke

xxiii.

XV. 24,

33.

32

avr<

auru

Acts xxvi.

5.

^-^H

*poyivw<fxovrff

with a preposition answering to the Greek

Luke

xiii.lY.

Acts vi.10
CTlL

Rom.xiii.2.

^4^21

ai\non\ 0001 ^kli^bj

xai

^oA

=
T

xaTafxaprupouO'/v

^*i'

andxara;

tirsps\i)i\ aurou

^ v _i)OUQLO

^r

-Trposypa^Tj.

uO1OAl

x. 34.

xxvi.C2.

^xoaL =

e} avnxsijxsvoi

in. 2.

if

J^l

xv. 4.

18.

by verbs which

or

x.31,32.

Matt. xx.

g.

JireXa^ovro

^M

g. Matt. xi. 5.

avaovr

e.

a) the idea

Greek preposition, answer to the simplo

to the

b ) without respect

Greek verb

included

is

preposition

oxcft

fi<ravoM-

Q2GU

New

simple verbs, in the signification of which

By

1.

of

COMPOSITES.

the subject of the construction of verbs with cases and prepo-

sitions,

ed

82. 1.

tfou

^Ql

a'Cv

Matt.

Rom.

PECULIARITIES OF VERBS.

204
OliQl M*J

vi.8.

aura),

tfu^rjo'ofxsv

irpo

Matt.

Acts

ii.

or

JLO> ^LD

stands

Rom.

i.

4.

verb,

tfpo
iii.

|2>

If the
it is

I Peter

Mark
35.

xi.

i.3;

-irpo

Col.

xiii.

8.

II Cor.

e.

g.

iA
2

xiii.

5.

i.

verb

finite

23.

is

\*

e.

same

in the

^OpO

g.

to

tense,

come

o| ASOpO

irpos/p]xa,
e.

Acts

g.

vii.

John

is

into its

components

e.

xaprfoipopouo'iv

translated

by

The Substantive
chiefly relating

A.

iii.

4.

g.

iO) O|

Matt. xix. 18.

Mark

iv.

Verb,

to the

to be

20.

2L&> ,*^\^\

ZojOlCD jOlCoZ ]T

ir. 4.

USE OF looi

Instead of }ooi

52;

xx. 4.

seems to be merely pleonastic, where in John

It

be-

formed from a noun or adjective and a

68.

i.

Trpotfopsuo'ov'r

This verb sometimes follows

usually resolved

^jkOOLi

REM.

JU9> ^LO

J*

composite

***1V c

o'

without any connective particle,

first,

Rom.

Tim.

II

15

by an adverb of similar signification

number, and gender with the

fore

iv.
I

another verb representing the preposition, which usually

By

3.

*V.

^iV)^ ^Q^lp>

=
iOipo ^So

vi. 6.

"poi'pT]xa

40.

= ava,

Heb.

vii.

Heb.

and some

other

Peculiarities

Construction of the Verb.

A*f AND AjjS

38).

(with which, according to

65. B.

and D, the imperfect and pluperfect are formed), the Syriac

INDIRECT
also uses A*)

DISCOURSE.

A^X

and in negative phrases

205
with suffixes,

and with them also in connection with the former

forms the imperfect

e.g.

Loci ouA_i] they

1-i.

(]ooi),

]ooi ^Oio/u] he was;

ix.24.

**

verse

John

were, etc.

REM.

|OOI sometimes stands pleonastically with the preterit

without giving

IfOO1

it

the signification of the pluperfect

Mark

e.g.

i.45.

'

fie

**'f*

began

Luke

i.

John

iii.

25.

It

is

sometimes omitted as present or imperfect, according to

54.
a mere copula between the sub2 ;
or when it would be
e. g.
Matt, xxvii. 29
and object
65. III. Rem.)
(
ject
;

Luke

It

i.27.

seems

Q\ nowise);

version

to

e.g.

mark emphasis
John

vi.

in

with

interrogations

JjOl looi
17.

Concerning ]ooi

have,

compare

67.

indirect

t7

jj]
(

IOCTI

I will)
REM.

|J

be

j
l

(
7

vi.

ii.5,16

Matt.

g.
;

Luke

to

xi.

11

xiii.

40

have

55.
xvii.

not to

T r

thou hast riijhtly said,

17

ii.

I (he)

]g>i>A ]nVvr>^ fo.

no King of
>

e.

]oO1

Heb.

usually expressed directly,

on ), e. g. John iv. 17.

'r^Si

vi.

31

Barh. 51,

have heard; 135,10

^j

I have

11.

69,7.

ooi he swore, he would

the heathen ; 223, 11, 12.

is

wanting

discourse (especially before 61

443, 8

is

= 15

p as he said;

Sometimes

11, 18

INDIRECT DISCOURSE.

VfiT3 taJal AjAj <->^'r^O(

no husband ; verse 53
AlSoij ^o]"

Mark

|J

Rem.

discourse

commencing with

A*| and A*_^ with

2.

II.

B.

The

xx. 13

not ?

is this

]]

xiii.

= nonne

Jj

(in the Philoxenian

^QH\ *)OU )*OlO

32.

Moses has not given you; verses 38, 58

or

after

more frequently jioV

at the

e.g.
e.

beginning of the direct

Barh. 131, 11, 12

g. Barh. 106,3

183,9

374, 13
;

219,6 ;

206
243, 10

486, 5

24, with 480,

]2l^

79, 19.

543, 19

The

1.

ETC.

ZEUGMA,

ELLIPSIS,

Compare Assem.

596, 11.

indirect discourse also occurs;

]aaCD

^OCJl^

tribute is not sufficient

Ol^ O'^sfthey

J]>

thee ;

for

94, 1

direct discourse passes over into the indirect;

vice versa

C.
1.
it is

166, 19,

20

e. g.

Matt.i.22.

JJjsoAjj

xxi. 4;
i

*>

John xx. 31;

10 and

John

iii.

6.

the context

who run (run)

Heb.

vii.

19

Sometimes the verb

Matt. 27,25.
T

fulfil-

I Cor. ix. 25.

'

i*

obtain ; II Cor. v. 13

might be

it

Horn. v. 20

tn*"imi> ,_k_oi>>
^jkAOl those

us;

Sometimes the

g. 276, 8

Zooij oils ,_> ]>oi

but what has happened (has happened) that

said to him, the

"When a verb has previously been used in the protasis,

usually omitted in the apodosis, where it would proper-

ly be repeated

led;

Barh.

PARONOMASIA, AND PUNS.

ZEUGMA

ELLIPSIS

e.

g.

5, 6.

513,

97, 1.

479, A.

I.

e.

^i^\
T

Acts xxiv.6. ^cnnVHQ*

yL>|

viii.

is

to

that they

I Peter

may

iv. 11;

be supplied from

OlSo> his blood (come) upon

as

it

(is written

in our

law.

The

REM.

riac language,

ellipsis

must be considered

where the Philoxenian

as a peculiarity of the Sy-

translation, omitting the > in

the apodosis, adheres strictly to the Greek words ; e. g. Matt i. 22.

*
*
IP *
1
^* *
fy
*) (jOI TOUTO 5s bXov y^yovev ; John xx. 31.
&OOI
Con'

QUO

iteming the omission of

Y*

^D|

see

die elliptical use of |OO1 see A.

B. Bern, above

and concerning

Rom.

Sometimes a verb, by its signification, can belong to

only one of two connected nouns (Zeugma), so that to the
other noun another verb must be mentally supplied;
2.

USE OF THE NOUN IN GENERAL.

T

Job

e. g.

iv. 10.

the lion (is

stilled)

of

_^*

and

%*****

|io

V>|> |AiooU

the teeth are

broken

ike

roaring

x. 12.

Paronomasia and puns occur but rarely in Syriac.

3.

The former
Ps.

f_

**^>ZZ|

207

3.

xl.

that

is

many

a mere imitation of the

^pfMJb
see it

original in

1T)

(iBT'n D^ai
Puns occur mostly in names

<OU*J>

1U^

and

Hebrew

rejoice.

where the language does not require any such alteration to

be assumed e.g. Gen. xlix. 8. fOjcu ^L ]>OOU Judah (thy
;

brethren) shall praise thee. verses 16, 19.

CHAPTER

THIRD.

THE NOUN.

Use of

69.
1.

Noun

in General.

Abstract nouns not unfrcquently in Syriac take the

place of adjectives
to

genitive
*

the

t?OO>

**

the

and then they stand in the

noun,

with

e. g.

Matt.

V**o;o with

the

relation of

HolyGhost; John xv.l.

iii.
11.
%/ * * % f *
]>;*> I^vi

Especially does this union, as

the true vine ; I Cor. xv. 44.

in Hebrew, occur with adjectives which denote the material

or substance of which a thing

ff

ap>

*-0

**

p..J stone

water-pots

is

composed
Heb. ix. 4.

e. g.

John

ii.

6.

USE OF THE NOUN IN GENERAL.

208

a golden box ; II Cor.

20, 10

88, 2

x.

172, 8

II Tim.

228,

20

ii.

Barh. 11,

7,

1>O1QJ> fjoSoi a

7.

fiery

pillar.

REM.
.Am.,

Adjectives of material, however, do occur

i

jj_i_2i0| a brazen celestial sphere

and

Barh. 59,4.

e.g.

same con-

in the

struction adjectives of quality with J prefixed, used for substantives

(>CU> |Aa week of the white (clothes).

e.g.
Abstract nouns with J in connection with a pronoun, supply the
Michael. Chr. 85.

77

*P*

of the

place

but

I am

predicate

carnal

e.

Rom.

g.

vii.

place of an adjective to which a

ii.

]oi_-:L r 2 in divine

17.
*

one of the

jisvoff.

>

household

Some

things
;

Luke

) ;

even

<\*

with

49.

viii.

suffixes,

e.

Barh.

g.

178, 5

20.

170,

195,16.

^^

>

*> in the

according to

remaining fortresses ; 198,13. Here also belongs

55. B. 2. Rem.

Especially are adjectives or concrete substantives de-

2.

noting possession, custom, similarity,

etc.,

expressed by

of circumlocution, by means oi the nouns ^O eon

*

daughter
ruler

AA>

Vo

12.

]>Z1 +jji>
91, 2

/3)
3

IjLo lord, master

way
2;rj

>i

and A*> prince,

In respect to the use of these nouns

house.

be observed

}> designates
i.

\*>

^\1O and

and

to

a)
Tit.

pj

abstract nouns, in the relation of genitive with

DJ iVuCUDO many writings; 172, 4

it is

*l

precede as nomen regens

following,

_>

pf JdO>

14.

with a preposition prefixed they supply the

noun is to be supplied e. g. Heb.

or

a)

-"^

01 ^vToirioi

Gentile names, inhalitants, etc.

Cretans; Barh. 167,1

the idea of race,

a kinsman

species,

kindred

Deut. xxiii.2

Acts xxi. 12;

]^J-,io %^J>

Barh. 80, 17.

e. g.

e.g.

citizens

Rom.

I Cor. vii.22.

xi.14.
'
%*% X

p|**

USE OF THE NOUN IN GENERAL

209

a freeman

Rev.

y) participation,
.p. * * f

ii.

14,

likeness,

xix. 24.

)Zoiioo} ;o

temporaries

Phil. iv. 3

and other circumstances

Psalms cxxxii.

2.

1O

(Here also belongs

tfuv

(==
;

Gal.

14

i.

e.g. Isa.

;a a

e.

ii.

14

Dan.

OJJLO'TC^VOS
;

ofAog)

mi
I Thess.

<"
tfuyxXr]p(5vofi,oi

Assem. 11.248.

20.

'
-

Michael.

ClxCD9Ol \z* a heretic

courtier

|ZoZ^i

]iOL -**"> heathen

xviii. 35.

Chr. 5.

John

g.

Eph.

Acts

xviii.

10.

i.

5) locality,

xxvi.

And

necA; chain.

jo

6.

con-

situation,

^ a moat;

]>a*

1.

iii.

finally

the adverbial phrase olAl* \szfortliwi1h, immediately ; Matt.

xiii. 5, 20
John v. 9 xiii. 30 Acts x. 33 xxi. 32.
;

Z^D

b)

AlQ forms

plur.

circumcision;

a) rarely abstracts ; e.g. ]sD>]

more frequently

I Mace. xi.

e. g.

7.

!>]**

]ASQjk

Z;a ^um on sea-weed

Rom.

x. 16,

22

rm<7

18

Gal. iv. 20

salem, or

its

Z^

^AQ denotes
]^V^> ^AS counselor
xiv. 5.
|LDQ**Z ^AO
;

voice

Acts

plural,
;

*J

*>

Matt. xxi.

o.

mostly concretes
Matt. v. 25

neighbor

an Ethiopian.

V^D Luke

grapes',

po Z^3

tropically

and in the

denotes;

xii.

^r
16.

T
e/er?^

Z^i

^CLiOl.

inhabitants.

c)

e)

g.

lAl_o^

A^3

feminine;
it

]Ali3 L\& napkin 1> ***

Luke xiii.
nations, etc.; e. g.

5)

the

360,

or

y) implements, clothing,

descendants,
*'/'
Hebrews-,
yxjljnj Zja

(I)

e.

and

in the

concretes

one born free

2;o

the product of anything

/3)

vii.

41.

/3)

e. g.

xiii.

28,

39

xi. 34.

II Chron.

sometimes nations

In like manner

Rom.

;io

e. g.

debtor

Ephr.

II.

*o> forms

concretes of
a) principally

masculine

offices

GENDER OF NOUNS.

210
II Sam. xviii.

e. g.
r

ft

*o> a chiliarch

(AjuO

ojxovojuios

I Pet. v.

Luke

|2oA*r3 Aoj

/)

afcjij
- t

Hub.

xix. 2

14.

iv.

masculine

*.

**-> ap^itfuva/wyoff

I Thess. iv. 16

**"

/3)

Js/Qio *A-O

more

stomach

Aa2

#)

Matt

prison;

Heb.

cense);
I.

ix. 4.

II Tim.

UCD^

rarely

f -

..;>

A*d

we

Of

er.

the

g.

Luke

hall;

ii.

viii.

29;

Matt, xxiii.
7)

orifice

of

the

Finally

xii.

xix. 29.

WiraV A*o

17.

Acts

]Aii

which a

in

A*>

xvii. 19.

oZwe ^ar-

(Snmo A^Ti censer (literally, house of in13

/3) countries, cities, etc.
e.g. Assem.
;

A*o

A*Jb

the

Roman

dominions

Michael.

Persia.
^

AxS

where

forehead,

(JLO)

'A

^_DGU AxS Mesopotamia,

find similar compositions with

Luke

denotes

it

AaI3 grave;

"(Alk)

the latter only occur

-

g.

***}

mouth.

Acts.

Here, however, do not belong

REM.
and

iv.

e.

_-*..-*

ll!&ooi>

169,B.7,

Chr. 10.

e.

<*

pSOQ^flD

g.

signifies between.

*2>"\

|So"| ^Ae

More

father, and Vo} moth-

crown of

the head,

and

The Syriac also, though more rarely than

the names of countries and cities for nations and

|^k)> P>D( hydraulics.

the Hebrew, uses
inhabitants
.

e.

g.

I I

Barh. 150, 12.

248, 6.

Tagritians.

70.
1.

.7

*1*\2)\ Africans

?.

A*ry*|

xvi. 2.

Acts

8, 9;
;

the place or receptacle,

a)

xiv. 2.

A*> judgment

"fcLij

efen

denotes

found or kept;

is

thing

ap^iepguj

|l^l ^au) aperture of

ii.

Sometimes
\

1.

rarely abstracts

e.

xvi.

Luke

offices; e.g.

John

tfpwroxaSsfyi'a.

the extremity of a thing

/
2D>

pLoOD

In like manner

o/xovofjLia.

Luke

abstracts ; e. g.

/3)

a) concretes of

|AO13

41.

6.

1.

Nouns which

Gender of Nouns.

in the plural

take the

termination of

GENDER OF NOUNS.
another gender

and

44. Kern. 2

retain the gender of

3),

the singular, and in this case respect

Here belong

termination.

nine

termination

*'

(j^0>

I Cor. x. 9.

]2oOM

%'"

the

in

1
tOOlS A.\

"r

t^

is

had

rarely

to the

masculines with a femi-

plural

Matt.

e. g.

7-17

place in which there

fZo>M

xii.

43.

no water;

is

the serpents destroyed them;

OfSo]

jQj|

211

f&ool ( from fcocu )

]2ollL from 1LJ) Luke ii. 13
Matt, xxviii. 20;
l2oaS (from laS) Luke xxi. 34;
;

}2b>ou (from 1>OU) Matt.

vii. 25, 26.,

with a masculine termination

wOlQlk)>

x.

(from }AliD)

2.

(from

When

came

jiOO1 tears

(from ]LbL) Matt.

i%

xiii.

30

30;

^xi

cases,

is

]A^o

(literally, beast

it

of'tooth]

was

Rev.

men)

Ua/,

395, 19.
;

to the lat-

John
;

i.

or Jl

xiii. 1

4.

2cLi^I

xvi. 2,13;

Acts xxi. 20

Barh.

= inhabi-

548, 20., etc,

66. 2

axov

Concern-

in the plural,

In Syriac the neuter of nouns,

nated by the feminine

g.

word; verse 14

(of

80.

e.

ovn'^pitfToj:,

tants; Barh. 159, 10; 236, 8

3.

when

or

the sense.

by

compare
Christ

the

oai a myriad
334, 6

xxiv.35;

proper signification, the

its

regulated

=
Xoyos

)ALk> IOOT ^oioAu)

65, 9, 10

}2^b)

the abstract stands for the concrete,

ing the former of these cases,

xvii. 7, 8.

flic (from

xix. 34., etc.

]Al)

gender in both

^iZf

into the eyes of Jesus

(from }ta) Acts xxiv. 17

the noun takes another than

ter belongs

xi. 35.

..

feminines

b)

John

e. g.

etc.

as of verbs,
e.

g.

in the plural,

is

Rom.
Assem.

desig-

vii.
I.

18.

218.

NUMBEK.

212

B. 11. \LLfLo ]AcLiAl^ r A'tWf they despised

ike new.

71.

Some

1.

when they may

-

Number.

and the

like),

form a plural only

be conceived of as consisting of several

^0

<>-

parts; e.g. (Z^LOD barley, plur.

*..

(,100 barley-corns

|4** from

I Cor. xv. 37

|A&* wheat

and

Some nouns
44. Eem.

1>

..

"

Matt.

iii.

12

I Cor.

ZiVft&er ;

7),

and then they take Ribui

QQ2UO

(JL)|

John

e. g.

verses 4

REM.
occur,

1.

As

<Aere

came out people.

2.

p|

collective

e. g.

As

As

John

iv.

the following

Aear

Aw

63,11

79, 6.

sometimes

l&lio (proper-

; 102, 5, 8.

*.

-iJ>{ or wiJOjj

AJ09|O /

A noun

or with the singu-

pluralis excellentice, the Syriac has, merely by im-

Hebrew
T^

|il ^Ae sAeep

plural forms,

members

szi'ore

72. Apposition
1.

(col-

6. 2.

01X0 fvvn*

x. 3.

7ff7

itation of the

locust ; Michael. Chr.

l^tQO

\ 0% % < ^f

8.

ly part) remainder,

REM.

13

lar

vi.

12.

iii.

such they are joined either with the plural

.<>?

John

singular have a plural signification

lectives

30.

in like

2.

and

nouns, particularly those which denote cohesive

materials (liquids, metals

manner

the old

6y

the

15^^

Michael. Chr. 30.

Lord.

and Duplication of Nouns.

in apposition, usually includes a

more

accu-

rate definition or explanation of the previous noun, as for

APPOSITION AND DUPLICATION.

213

At
example in the names of cities }A*^O, lAo>,
-.V^
Assem. I. 349, 3. "jAoi lAi^^ UDQA^J] Antioch, a great
(

The noun

city.

number and

in apposition takes the

f

its

subject

lican

Matt

e. g.

Barh. 32,

of Baal (of

]lMn

.)>]

x. 3.

y^Vo ^Aio

Matthew

]\*>~> 1ov& \\~> IpAa

7.

case of

a) god of the Babylonians ; 11, 8

nSv> ^.k) from Mekhisedeck (from

Pub-

the

the

image

12,

2.

Ca-

the)

naanite.

REM.

Sometimes the noun in apposition stands before the

noun;

principal

e.

Barh.

g.

he took for wife Roxane

JOLBO^

11.

39,

so too with nouns of weight, measure,

i

>

and
*(>
I

time, in the genitive

.^mi

VZAjj

e.

Rev.

g.

^'iVf 9

Jx>QLftJQ2 \L\\L

vi. 6.

The

2.

measures (of)

three

ACD?

duplication of the

ber or quantity

e. g.

Ephr.

^iJOJ ^ere are many

tip*

numbers

a penny each
424,

;
;

e. g.

10

Mark

JaO^

]OO>
iroXiv

.^

AV^

Assem.

by

b)

^iO OlO A^l

the distributive
Matt. xx.

e. g.

a great num.-

a)

^jJQJ

by

each,

1.

Barh. 85,

vi. 7.

all,

xara

To-roug

58. B. 2)
Tit.

a diversity, variety
;

John

with different tongues

A.

6.

v.

two each

II Cor. xi. 24

every

^in

^i*>

^_>Z ^->

various diseases

13,

6.

9, 10.

l>

Especially in respect to

circumlocution for

III. 154.

165, 19.

l]So }]io a hundred each

7.

x>

;JL>

by heaps

noun denotes

fish in the sea

sense expressed in English

^>

barley.

E.

discourses having various contents

i.

*>Jk>
;

g.

xxi.

191,

pLir^^

P-ij^

e.

v.

forms a

Matt. xxiv.

e. g.

5.

it

c)

verse 40.

Mark

ii.

17

Acts

x.

46.

34

xxv. 19

*>>o ^1?
A.

7. v.

l;So]io
;

280.

THE EMPHATIC STATE.

214

B. 13. v.
e.g.

John

e )

a strengthening of the sense

The Emphatic
with

article

nouns

this

which

is

also

from the

noun with the

that in

fact,

in use

Matt. x.

e. g.

iv. 7.

Vr>

^^>;^>^
1

; ix.

Acts

appended

fern,

37

vii.

1),

John

e. g.

came a woman of /Sar

even with H* masc.
24

xi.

e.

there

22]

"jZAjj
-

many
45.

Sometimes

9.

supplies the place of the indefinite article

it

maria

iState.

also denotes the absolute state

no longer

II Thess. iiL6.

State expresses the

less definiteness,

form

little

The Emphatic

73.
1.

^*o very

VuXo

vi. 7.

77. B. b)

Luke

g.

xix.

12.

yt

a man.
From

REM.
which

r+*

is

this should

perhaps be distinguished the cases in

used numerically

e. g.

iv. 6.

Eph.
r

Hence

2.

any ambiguity OO1

to avoid

is

sometimes

also

joined with the emphatic state in order to designate

-

noun

It stands either before the

such.
r

\*'r**

OO1

.||*

vlLo

the

dumb

spake

;
7

lows

it

e.

as

Matt. ix. 33.

e. g.

it

g.

John

v.

9.

OOl

John

xviii.

16

or

?
the

f^yi ^Q-lMZj

fol-

man

became whole.
REM.

when
the

In the

first
T

case

follows

OOl

e.

the

absolute

state

usually
* j

g.

Luke

27.

xxii.

occurs,
r

.V)V)>

OOl

servant.

3.

Hence

also the

emphatic state with

used in the relation of genitive

e.

g.

> following is

Eev.

xviii.

2.

THE CONSTRUCT STATE AND THE GENITIVE.

Uo> Voj IZjo&lo 1o->? l'io a

and a hold of all unclean spirits.

devils

and

Tlie Construct /State

74.

In the Syriac also the Construct

1.

215

habitation of

the Genitive.

serves to denote

state

the relation of genitive,

more frequently, however,

plural of the masculine

and the singular of the feminine,

where

can at once be recognized by

*

it

xiii.

Assem.
yirsZ

fo

48.

I. 2,

year

cZerws

tlio

the shore

in

the

and

miitst,

IJarh.255.il.

e.g.

days of John ;
Acts xxiv. 16

2o^^!D

that is the thirty-

rmcfe/ q/" /fe

//ie

deficient

i/iez'r

faith,

their faith.

of

of

participles

04.

^.

the

e.g.

iii.

tin

followed

'js.

" fi

41.
T

tt

^IfiD >\1

xiii. 1

of

occurs

CJal.

the jmlace.

tlie

by which
r

is

noun

in

19

iii.

Here

construct state in adjectives

l.y

and

\vith a preposition or

denoted either

tlie

genitive

]m An^^
.

also

it

in the interior

Q^2
f

69. 2

e.g. Matt.

>

pL

xiii. 2.

* r

lAyi'A -.*"^*^"

fl.

\\

Prophet

etc.

& * *

i.

also

x.

adjectives

particle belonging to both,

Luke

g. Matt.

c.

In addition to the nouns which

.ffi*

1. 1>),

state

verse 50.

h<nnl,

construct

tlic

belongs moreover the use

Tim.

name of

of the *ea

the place

supply

II

of the sea

t*
.mo'-Ao Av.^no

.ooiZaiifluOl

gonitive

f*^< UlAO

relation

form

Yet the masculine singular of the noun occurs

<'

Q..

special

since the

A^Z Ala wOl

IrMO
*

1.

its

the shores

the deficiency

REM.

on

B.

37, 3, 4.

literally,

before

-.^m

40, 4.

^JLuCLt wLiOO* ^So

Matt. xi. 12.

in the

Messed of (among) women

shires of jxtssion

Tim.

i.

10.

\yA <-*r^^

violator of

an oath

or

a more accurate

THE CONSTRUCT STATE AND THE GENITIVE.

216

of the

definition

ornAVo^.o
^

'

*k

r^n

|i)|

state as

nomen

regens,
-

e. g.

Matt. x.

verse 15.
42.

xii.

5.

t> ..

is

at the

]LOQ^JD

into the

^oc?

35

xxiv. 3

John

xiv. 4.

viii.

47.

verse 42;

xiii. 11,

** *

|Ol-^> (Jk) <Ae

b) with a pleonastic suffix

e.
55. B. 2 )
following, (

45;

w;orc?

Matt.

g.

o^

the

referring to

of the Gentiks ;

way

or

genitive

Rev.

before the genitive

day of Judgment
0*m

xxiii.

18.

7,

Acts, xxiii. 23.

queen of the south

the

IA^VV>

jiiQaZj

kjo|>

>

i.

the connection of the emphatic

a)

with a following

fol

fcjjj

in their years ;

redeemed from the earth

*">!

Luke

e.g.

participle;

far advanced

tjJj..|ID
^*
x

<

Far more usual

2.

or

adjective

"7 I '

xii.

8.

}AQ> OTjSo Lord of the Sabbath; xi.2. f IMUL*LO>

^oiOpdl
*
f
t*
^
i
the work of the Messiah
xii. 40.
Pk>|> Oli^2 in the
'

'

heart of the

REM.

earth.

Rarely, and chiefly in foreign words,

construct
-x
*f

before

state
y

genitive

e.

>

stands after the

Matt.

g.

xiii.

22.

x.

23.

>

^e

-* Vft

(>Zoi>

the

John

riches ;

of

deceitfulness

.nV)>\> l<l&fiol the porch of Solomon. But it is commonly

used when one or more words are interposed between the nomen
regens and the genitive
the

that

region,

itives

each

follow

the convent

is

e.g.

Barh. 421.13,20.

of Jerusalem
other

e.

g.

^aL>o]?
when

or

Assem.

I.

OO1 1>2j

several

83,

gen-

B.

21.

of the Mother of God, of the Syrians in the Scythian

The nomen regens is sometimes wanting, and

desert ; Barh. 81, 2.

the genitive
J
<

is

then to be distinguished by

v t^Dj

the

Lords are we

Matt.

wanting when the noun forms an

i
genitive

>

e.

g.

Rom.

xiv. 8.

e.

the propJiet.

g. Matt. xii. 39.

>

xxii. 21.

Sometimes

with
apposition
"
f
"tV

is

a preceding

|*">1 ^JCLa? OIL] the sign of Jonah

stands before proper nouns, especially

the

names

THE CONSTRUCT STATE A$D THE GENITIVE.

of countries and

cities,

definite designation

"t

l'

HH-^

some Psalms

%** *
pLO>Q2)

cated

e.

Ps.

g.

of the

A^*~>

(^ auctoris) supBarh. 17, 4.

e.g.

by

(i.e.

^O, when

So too with

iv, v, vi,

very rarely elsewhere

the deliverance

346, A. 25, 26.

more de

f>OOL> ^QjjJL

1, 0.

ii.

acquire a

In some instances, especially in the super-

the place of j;

plies

Matt.

e.g.

Bethlehem in Judea.
scriptions of

when they thereby

217

Lord ; Assem.

the)

origin or descent

is

1.

indi-

JjJvJ^S ^So lAj_^ib ^.**n/ .^rni

Franks ; or when there is indicati-1

Barh. 372, 16.

e.g.

he took fifty

of the

cities

:i

choice or selection from several;

one of his slaves ;

271,

e.g.

i*29O

270,18.

1.

^lo

many of

IM-\*ffi

tin

Turks.

The

3.

e.g.

Markxi.

22.

loi^j* ]AoiScuoi

John
vii.

ii.

13

Christ

Hebr.

xi.

e.

faith of(\.

God

in)

^Ajui? OUl^

17.

(i.e.

sometimes to be understood objectively;

is

genitive

the zeal
T

of

t/iine

e.for)

(i.

house;

|i,V)>

26.

the

01,01*4

reproach of

that attached to him).

Other turns of expression imitating the Hebrew are

REM.

k
-j

Isa. xvii. 2.

i-kAO;!)

(j)OO

cities

an oath of
iniquity of

unfrequently

is

this

of (about) Aroer

(by)

(at) their

genitive

the

Lord

downfall

of the

Exod.xxii.il.

Ez.

Isa.liv.9., etc.

Barh. 53,

Assem.

1.

1&.

^SOD> ]2aiiaoi

5.

Not

connected with the

object

of the verb, from which the nomen regens

preposition
e. g.

xxxv.

is

the faith in

derived

our Lord

347,20.

4. Sometimes, especially when geographical references are

made, the genitive occurs (as in English) where apposition
e. g.
Acts vii. 40.
would be more strictly correct
;

i*

ft

_9

.7

li^-Loj |l>| ^S>o

Barh. 114, 13.

of Lebanon.

from

die

land of E<jypt

^JnK? ]yQ^

o&al

xx. 6

the

Rom.

xi.

whole mountain

DESIGNATION AND USE OF THE OTHER CASES.

218

Standing after adjectives, the genitive

5.

merely
*
p

to define
*

(L >j,n

them more
*

>O

S>

(1

+ \PP

Acts

UrO

vii. 51.

]Akl*ji

2oL^D

accurately; e.g.
7

an

O|

54.

iv.

John,

2.

y'.\?

xviii. 10.

Rem.)
%'

and

Ais

nomen

it

e.

12.

In the

follows

|2>OOCQu)|>
B.

with

prepositions

g.

'

^p

ai

John

and wOl, equivalent to that is, namely ;

. ^n.
^01 and > is to be understood as a

&**.*

ri^^ eor;

regens ;
ii.

the explana-

>,

tory 0(71

|A.

5.

ii.

>

vice versa the

|A^:sD>| *^<\tCD *oXXa

25.

Vn% OU>|^>

|*

case the Philoxenian translation uses, instead of

first

Cant.

sick for love.

e.g.

adjective;

Luke

necked

?/e stiff

Sometimes a noun in the genitive takes the place of an

REM.

xxi. 6

and slow of heart

/oofo

_P

xxiv. 25.

-*P

.m*. o|

-.

often used

is

Luke

suflSxes

e.

e.

Assem.

g.

OU/}
when

g.

relative,
I.

30,

17.

^OOlSfll

wtM

(them) the bishops.

Compare

55.

3.

Designation and Use oftiie other Cases.

75.
1.

sign,

The

dative and accusative have

common

4.

^iSSflV) A^Z

.^*

let

e. g.

us make three taberna-

Barh. 60, 9.NQ i n] \>i V*jZ>o>9 he raised a great perse-

cution.

the

for their

which may be omitted before the accusative

Matt. xvii.
cles ;

No

two

difficulty

cases

is

stand

thereby occasioned even

together

e.

Acts

g.

V^Q]A^ .OO& *20U he gave them Saul

ceding pleonastic

to

the verb

xiii.

21.

falls

xx. 32.

REM. With verbs having a double accusative ( 67. I.

away in both cases. The same is also to be recognized
suffix

when

55.

B.

I)

2)

in the pre-

Usually

DESIGNATION AND USE OF THE OTHER CASES.

fiia

noun

before the

stands

the emphatic state

in

g. Barh. 14, 9

For

17

iii.

The

2.

notes
vii.

3,

accusative

17

Cant.

iii.

denotes

it

_A|

^-kiocu

,_*J-

24, 7,

When

/3)

and then de-

b)

e.

John

g.

long ? e.g. Barh.7,5,

i.

they

20

85, 19,

Luke

I.

59.

195,

6,

Assem.I.

jioll

jliiZ?

pass on

day and

How

night

it

O>|

high f etc.

ivas

day

three
* X

- f .

aAa

cubits
t

was

to,

the

as

I.

REM.
T

;>

A. 30

77,

A. 22

How

^jf

179,

form

17.

and a small mouth ;

86,

old ?

6;

}ooi

Barh. 37,16.

to

A.

is

13.

Barh.

^^
iaij
38, 4;

25.

commonly expressed by
e.
g. John viii. 57.

with the addition of the years

fifty years old

3.

e. g.

L\Z

20,

5y

and weight

snow lay four fingers deep;

beautiful as

In indicating time,
.

or

74,

long;

to ;

he had small eyes

Assem.

2.

i.

'

Barh. 38, 19.

e. g.

h>-^^-

d) concerning, in relation

he

Ps.

.Wr> ]wr>*
|

in reference to measure

c)

How

long ?

the eighth

it

]o<JI

"

to

mourned for him

came

ii.

rain continued forty days

l]k> ^oio!Ll O^a|2l

a hundred years
A.1

67.

How

the

l^lo fool

3, 15, 16.

Eccl.

viii. 4.

Al

Barh.58, 18,19; b) in indicating

a) the question,

the Peshito has

also used adverbially,

is

a) direction towards a place

18,

viii. 9,

116, D), which moreover occurs in

14,35; viii.14; xviii.3

time
6.

iv. 1

Gen.i.

this, in

I.

(compare Ephr.

F)j$

|QJ-_lA OILS

or before proper names, 11, 20.

he built Nineveh.

-,

e.

219

3, 20.

Derivative nouns also take the accusative instead of

the genitive of their verbs, viz.

a) participial forms;

Heb.

THE CASE ABSOLUTE.

220
xii. 2.

iv.6

^mVft.rriV iJoSo.. the finisher of our faith; James

b) infinitive forms ; e.g. Kirsch.Chr.136,1. Bl
the conquest

4.

The vocative is distinguishable in part by its connection

]-^*^>

Matt. xxvi. 39, 42.

e.g.

of Constantinople.

possibk

Eom.

fJ^D

1.

11.

15

partly

-J

99

viii.

man

of

by

verse 3

my

+*>]

/|

Father

O*),

prefixed

e.

I Tim. vi. 11

if it be

g.

Eom.

James

v. 1.

The Philoxenian

EEM.

vocative termination

and Acts
5.

i.

translation

]llaof2 o]' w

1.

Finally the ablative

etc..

tions, *o, ^Lo, ^Ql,

REM.

When

Time,

e.

g.

Assem.

I.

Gen.

is

viii.

e.

Tim.

distinguishable

i.

3,

vi.20.

by the

preposi-

frequently expressed in a similar

j t*
[m^Dy \*-^ a ^ eventide

11.

Luke

g.

prefixed.
is

ner

0so'<piXs

Greek nouns the

imitates in

belonging to that language

man-

Prov.

vii.

37, A. 11.

76.

The Case

Absolute.

By the case absolute is meant a noun, which, at the beginning of a sentence, by itself and without connection
with what follows, forms a clause, and is usually to be explained

belong
1.

by supplying,
especially

as

to,

concerning,

7
>(

the following clause

Lj^jkO

like.

Here

the Nominative absolute, which

subject of

and the

*,

a)

e.

either forms the

g.

Gen.

xxii. 24.

_ OlAoojjO

and

his concubine

she also bore ;

THE CASE ABSOLUTE.

or

be rendered by an oblique

6) is to

242, E.

I.

Ephr.

e.g.

(At^Nn
blemish

a gen-

a)

p ]ju]

or,a>> ]*^<jv> ]ocnZ

I.

110,

Matt.

God

gift from

tilo

e.

.?.

.x

'lV
(J

each one

to

* *

UoSD

__

is

e. g.

vii. 7.

given a

Ephr.I.

ibuno not

tt-e

Rem.) Ps. Ixxiv. 17;

and ^SD) e.g. Heb. x. 1.

67. 1.

I Cor.

g.

an accusative ;

y)

ablative (with a following

r

or the suffix to the prepo-

_LM
,-iA
^
^ r-

Moses

befallen

wtouooi

what has

an

/3)

a dative

Acts xv. 21

223, F.

iii.

OlA |^<TL_ jAaoiQiD .^iVn

,-lo

"joi-ls,

man a

found on the skin of the body of a

sition indicates it as

to be

suffix

if there be

*)

which a

case,

noun in the clause following shows

to the
itive

221

c.

0.

oio (001 A^| jAiiN^ jcooSoj m

gate} |Aa4>
shadow of the good things to come ; Ephr.

//

//"

I.

237, A.

is

the

oiilb
anything leavened and of honey,
Lord.

The

2.

|;al
he

if)

"\\Q

accusative

from one

3.

o/" <^e

/ree

thou not

REM.

of

Gen.

g.

the people led

to

xlvii.

prepositions

e.

knowledge of good and

the

Gen.

g.

evil

ii.

17.

(of it) shaft

eat.

Sometimes, instead of the

is

>

repeated
.

e.

g.

suffix,

wth

Esth.

vi.

preceding noun

the
7

9.

(;*^.i.^ fcjtOIQa i*">\1O as for the

likewise

21.

he (literally led

absolute

the

city to the other.

with

Cfases

e.

absolute;

^Lo <0)f ^jai ]Soilo

no gift

briny ye

o/"

the pronoun

e.

man

thus

g. Jer. xxvii. 8.

let

him

1 m

K*"\t^
^\
be clothed ;

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.

222

77.

Comparison of

The Comparative.

A.

The comparative
*
pared

e. g.

John

372,

;
7

i
|

(Ju|
3

iii.

3.

e.

added

cubit taller than

loQ^l^O

]A.^rA

and

the

from the context

for

e.

thee ; or before

g.

an

Lam.

iv. 7.

Job

17;

is

sisters,

after the

Rarely

more frequent
"\\

*" the

greater than that

is

^Lo

He-

U^2
The

is too

great

that ;

e. g.

Gen.

it

can be forgiven.

^So QjO>

adverbial

^D

too ;

way

occurs also with verbs of quality

oio^O

3.

have received thy

with ^ = than

expressed by

Assem. L 414,

A^ifiQJ)

61.

Kz. xvi.

g.

6, 7.

JOI

1<s

-/

|o5

^So

]*"^T VSP

respect to numbers,
;

i^A* more,

xi.

than snow and whiter than milk.

156, 2

or

supply the comparative adjective

to

infinitive
*
p 7

^Lo

This construction with

e.

Barh. 27,

V'1

innV>\

13.

any

JDOT-J p-^U *JiO1CLDa^

wiS^CLMJ] since

younger

Deut. xiv. 24.

iv.

the

.6ob
^man.

Q4 very,

J-iA^

age of two persons

brew idiom, are we obliged

e. g.

me than

to the adjective in order to strengthen

Acts xx. 35.

g.

to

f^a.I

sometimes also

^Lo,
is

82, 20.

^of

378, 19.

I.

dearer

is

vii.

^Ghappier by far is he who gives than he who receives;

iv. 12.
The simple adjective is used as a comparative

in stating the

the elder

Abraham

>

*Ofni>

fcol
Ajf a> Ajf
"

Assem.

mother

by far,

the meaning

Heb.

JL my
v. E
Barh.

Besides

equivalent to

11

xix.

J"
V Y she was a
LOOl
PLI)}

REM.

.obV
^

53.

]An\So ^Lo w_l

queen

the simple ad-

by

following and before the object com-

viii.

16; xiv. 12

xiii.

usually expressed

art thou, then, greater than our father

iOOl^j
31

is

=prce

jective,with^Lo

Adjectives.

e.

g.

they are purer

more or

J^A*andJu^S;

less,

in

Barh.

COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.

223

The Superlative.

The Superlative is expressed ; a) by the positive, with

the noun following in the genitive plural ; e.g. I Cor. xv.9.

]>*\>

.OOlidll

the least

stead of the genitive;

the least

among

of Italy

Assem.

1.

plural, ICor.vi.2.

when a

%* *

Ir**

the k<*st

J&Q'J fame,

A. 20;

323,

or

LL&

or with *Q

A.

335,

14. v.

in the

\OfQy

II Pet.i.4. (2>O> ntyitfragiven to one individual over a

;

eXa^irfTa
is

^a

^k> and a following plural

Ephr.I. 204, C. ^0*^5 ^\3 ,-& lo> the greatest of all
b) by doubling the adjective or noun, so that the

whole

species,

by

Barh.

the greatest
city

..-

preference

in-

}>oou> ]^V<^>"> 1r*^

Judah ; or simply by

Matt. v.19.

e.g.

llS^il? lta>
;

g. Matt.ii.6.

e.

(princes) towns in

tiie

the emphatic state

85, 7.

the Apostles

of

e. g.

evils ;

latter

stands in the relation of genitive in the plural e.g.Gen.ix.25.

*
*
.*...
?
*
_ ,
*"* v
r
,^1 /A-- meanest slave ; Exod.xxvi.33. M->ao
;

^*

the holy of holies,

530,

^To

denote the superlative, use

*u> and l;ib;

e.g.

Assem.

more

}(3l-^v the

like the

1.

335,

B. 4,

5.

.*

wwJi>Z] -'
(3)

^o^o

32

the might-

is

i.e.

denoted by

he was

5
e.g. Barh. 6,
,

literally,

e. g.

most precious wood

the

also

is

Bar h.

made

of the words

(Sa*9> j^O

much
135,

most

'

Ps. xxxvi. 6.

g.

the greatest mountains.

Z

* .1

CD

much
;

or,

To be noted

whose wisdom

mem^

e.

disquieted
1.

the

tt

Hebrew, by J01_^\

mountains of God,

a strengthening

c.

iii.

Barh. 170, 13. ^Loso}' *m^9 the most excellent

-,

Num.

i.e.

|;nV> ^AJt ]m*n

Rev. xviii. 12.

Barh. 87, 3.

ful

place

].3-\to yi.A-V)
king of kings,
*L
and
before the adjective
juA*
c)
by

iest king',

physician

the holiest
the

3, 4.

REM.

e.

i.

(is

e.g.

by

(JQ^

In verbs,

Barh. 56, 11.

2> many

67.1.

also are such forms ju

known) for

the ivisest.

CONSTRUCTION OF NUMERALS.

224

Construction of Numerals

78.

A.

50).

Cardinal Numbers.

The cardinals from three upwards, are connected with

nouns in the following manner
a) the object numbered pre;

cedes the emphatic state plural

three

months

years
or
b}

6.

e.g.

^*Z>2o

Luke

^,m\

follows in the absolute state

it

\LL

e.

\+*r-*

twenty-two
years;

Matt. x. 29.

g.

ii*.

-h

}A^Z

i.56.

V>mO ^_2p>D f^l* two hundred and five

4, 5.

T..

Barh. 133,

r,

^*r2)*^*LjL two /sparrows; xiv. 20.

^1^200 ;&!>
twelve baskets ; John v. 5
Acts xx. 3 Barh. 135, 10.
REM. Exceptions to this rule, however, occur, the object numbered standing after the number in the emphatic state
e. g. Barh.
;

160,17.

Ir^l v '^^

164, 4

or

*.!

V)Z

ei(jht

thousand slaves

121,8;

the cardinal, though rarely, stands as nomen regens in

i

|V)

;fflS ten

Some nouns, such

as pCQ-i,

the construct state

e.

g.

Matt.

25.

iv.

jAl

>

(literally,

^e

also follow

22.

]Vnn

few

o/ the

cities).

the numeral in the singular

^Vf>

,^^0

r^?

^7^

e.

g.

when

Assem.

fifty-one

sed; Barh. 10,16. Concerning the designation of age

Rem.; Assem.I. 31,21

comp.

75.2.

50,13

179,4; with the omission of

mSQj^O

_AO

377, 1

^1

I.

213, A. 21,

days had pas-

by pD and Z^Q

Ephr.I.195,D

Barh.

5, 12.

Barh.

^)

]]&}

For the
one hundred and sixty-five years old.
combination of numerals without any numbered object, compare
50; in respect to which it is to be noticed that, contrary to the He
brew usage the smaller numbers follow the larger ; e. g. Num. iv.
43 1 Kings v. 11. Concerning suffixes to cardinal numbers, see
;

46. 2. b.

Rem.

B.
1.

Ordinal Numbers.

Ordinals are connected like adjectives with their nouns

,..

in the

same number and case

e. g.

Matt. xiv. 25.

CONSTRUCTION OK NUMERALS.

]A.v.A; i n

watch of the night

the fourth

]IatV)>. ]L^4

vi. 9.

225

the fifth seal

verse 12

Rev.

iv.

xvii. 11.

2. The cardinal numbers also

supply the place of ordinals
as follows ; a) the units, especially in designating time ; a)
with the noun standing before the numeral in the emphatic

hour

/3)

state

hour

numbers above ten with the noun preceding

in

b)

p*

e.
g. John xix. 14. A*
^*\ about the sixt/i
with the noun after the numeral, in the absolute
^ v * A*
e. g. John iv. 6.
woolAa| it was the sixth
v
verse 52 Acts iii. 1
x. 9, 30
but more especially ;

state plural

construct state

e.g.

Luke

Assem. I.
one hundred and

iii.

A.

^,mv<^. Aj^o

1.

2,

in the

seventeenth year

388, 3

389,

emphatic

1, 3, 5;

state

e.g.

1. 2,

407, 10

Barh.

|ioikib

v.E.

teenth year ;

or with

4, 16.

VAlZj

the third

e.

AlAO

17. B. 19 ;
p. 3,
> following in the

in the

>

prefixed raises the

g. Matt. xxii. 26.

^-o^? tM second;

c)

the

"j^D

A.

]vAs> ]a&> "jAris

year of t/ie world one thousand ; or

cardinals to ordinals

in the

in the fif-

verse 39

Luke

xii.

AX2

38.

of ^LiL*

second or the third ; especially in designating the years

of the reign of a sovereign; e. g. Barh. 10, 14; 11, 1
the

11.

86,

REM. Sometimes also, in accordance with Hebrew usage, the

numbered is repeated after the numeral in the absolute state

object

..x

Gen.

fii.ll.

. .

'A****
A AlAO m

i^*** |(SO

plural

i/car;

and the years of the reign are given with

.-.

%.

Barh. 19,

<>0, 8.
i

e.g.

9.

rftCAi^> i n
Ol^jj

In giving the days of the month,

either

name

ji

hundredth

with a suffix

^-J

the tenth

r'j)oated after the numeral, before the

the six

year of hit reign ;

>

without

of the

month

e. g.

A.s -m. I. .2, B. 12. v. E.

]|m \ASAa on the 13th of Ni^"^
mn(Aprii); 272,15.31 399,19,20; 407,8,9; or, reversely, after the
name of the month, before the numeral following it; e. g. 397, 13.
(

Oio

)iAo

-VM ^t>2

on the 9th of June

or

with

KELATIONS OF NUMBERS.

226

the numeral and the

before
>

repeated

e.

stands after the

7.

398,

g.

on the 27th of December

name

name

^Qi> oJ^>.2 ^JfOllO

or

274,30;

y>Ox2

follows with

]->
that

reversely, so

of the month, before the numeral

Oia ^-V&LO

e.

399,

g.

++*Z}

cm the 22nd of Au<-->

This takes place even in designating the days of the week ;

14.

gust.

e.g.

month which

of the

Matt, xxviii.

19; A.ssem.

B. 12.

I. 2,

the first

day of

are formed

72. 2. b)

e.

xx.

^yl two each ;

the cardinal

by doubling

a)

Mark

g.

vi.

40

Barh. 19, 14

^3

sometimes by circumlocution by means of

41, 16. yl* ^-i>Z

John

the weelc ;

E!

v.

Other Relations of Numbers.

1. Distributives
(

,-**

C.

numbers

*">*">

1.

v^)

e.

b)

Barh.

g.

17.

answer to the question, How

many times f (Multiplicatives) a) by ,-** and 2 before a
cardinal number following, which more 'clearly defines it
Numerical adverbs ; a)

2.

in

Gen.

e.g.
),

iv. 15.

j\*^n
*

Jer. xvii.18.

^L

,-M seven-fold;
/3)

(i.e.

lish

II Cor.

e. g.

five times

Matt,

by

the simple numeral

]ail) fourfold; b) in answer

)with the signification of a cardi-

How often ?

by means of ^QJ

nal,

viii.8;

without

r** twofold ;

with JO, Luke xix.8. |Loi^i

to the question

Luke

plural ^il**>1 times,

time,

xi. 24, 25.

xviii.

22

^}
Luke

Vr** once ;

xvii.

as in

^-ii
John

Eng.</>!

xiii

38

by I^ISI plural fAiai, Assscm. 1. 484, 27, 30; sometimes

more rarely by
time, plural ^*J A, Barh. 10, 19
by

li)ol
ber

ivay,

e. g."

or merely

Gen.

such a manner
with

>,

and

is

iv.

24

by the feminine of the ordinal numin an ordinal signification, in

ft)

that either

U^l

of the cardinal

repeated after it in the plural

e.g.

precedes

A\Z>

CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH ADJECTIVES.

iai' (also elliptically

third time

verse 12.

AlZ> U^>1 or

by adverbs of the ordinals

or

2.QL*lifor

the

from the cardinal numbers

cution

e.g.

Ez. v.

xi.

one-

by circumloEphr. 1.204,

1^.

Noun

follows the

noun

noun
poi

1.

urith Adjectives.

either as epithet or

in the

same gender and

]ia/m

high mountain

..

participles
xix. 1

The same

miracles.

wowy

peopk ; verse 12

e. g.

Rev.

JJoi fo>^ this

V*-^2>

8.

iii.

K'2 an

are followed

Assem.

e. g.

true in respect

is

Matt. xv. 8.

Collectives in the singular

jective in the plural

P

b)

]ALoZ

7.

a wicked and adulterous gener*..r

r
I
y,
PLI^I |A**J soft raiment ; John xi. 47.

pronouns and

door.

Jude,

lAaO
lAo;*
*

8.

1&*_IcD l2oZ|
to

it

Matt. xvii.

e. g.

xvi. 4. iZj^ytO
\
ation

,-So

related to the

is

e. g.

special forms derived

Rev. via.

e. g.

Connection of the

adjective

AlZ

<OD

predicate.
I. As epithet

number

by

a)

Rev. xi.13. IJmL ^So H* one-tenth

2.

79.

The

in 2o,

)l2O> one fourth; Heb. vii.2

third; vi. 8.

AJiZj) for the

second time.

Fractions are represented

3.

^laf

227

I.

78,

A.

open

by the

*^J

4.

ad-

ILQI

*.

jcboSOJ the people who hold to the law ; so also with nouns
in the plural having a singular signification
e. g. John vii.
;

38.

**

1*^

living water

ad sensura ; e. g. Num.
which was spread out.
REM.

The pronoun
I

////.

man

Heb.

iv. 5.

frequently

Matt,

xviii. 1

x.

24

or in the singular
.

CLa^)> (iiZ *xaf

rnmcs
:

first

xvii. 18.

e. g.

//*

John

veu/

xi.

47.

Adjectives arc also used

CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH ADJECTIVES.

228

emphatically ,especially in

w;iD

Assem.l.25,A.l4.

titles; e.g.

^Oa;/) the pious Ephraem; 117,B.23.^.1**O w;SD l-pO the holy

John; 286, A. 1. If an adjective is appended to the demonstrative
pronoun for the sake of more particular designation, the pronoun
e. g.
usually stands between the noun and the adjective
Ephr. 1.
;

124,E.

UiDpOO

^a occurs

er.

1,-ftJBJ

xv. 13.

(as a
* *

*y*/>.

1,-if

0"

this great teach-

Matt.

e.g.

whole planting, (with suffix, compare

word, generally a particle, sometimes stands bethis

* IT*

tween the noun and the adjective

.

light first spread abroad]

noun) exclusively before the noun

|A)^J ^\D

55.B. 2.Rem.).

this

]s& ]l^\Sn OO1

or before both, 132, F.

D;

12V,

OO1 }JO1OJ

e.

g.

Acts

xvii. 20.

;_*...

|J_Lo

\^

But very rarely the adjective follA-ifDQJ strange words indeed.

lows in a gender different from that required by the noun ; e. g.
Barh. 454, 18.

}*JrO ]^> (fern. ^AajfO) the

common gender, the gender of

holy

with nouns of the

following one after the other,

61. 1, 2.
2.

As

is

interchanged

e.

Or

cloister.

several adjectives

Michael. Chr.

g.

predicate (with the substantive verb expressed or to

be supplied) the adjective precedes the noun, which follows

in the absolute state, or with a suffix
e. g.
Mark xv. 23.
"A

pQSo

**\!c7
OLD -'A*f*
s

King of

the

e. g.

wine with which myrrh was mingled

^uAo

ff

*A3^.QlSaol ^oi

the pronoun
the

I'riQj^

]A^1 Zooi"

verse 26.
28.

'i'

as reason

was written

^'
great

Mark

is

Matt.xv.

In like manner

thy faith.

xv. 26. ]I>6ou> ]n\V> aiCT thai

Jews; Luke

ii.

12. 12]

o:A

is

1>OT that shall fa

for you the sign.

Sometimes the

REM.
viz.:

when

several

adjective, as

predicate, follows
%

fication of the adjective

O;SV)^> i^OI

^oAL
bial idea
T

is
e

the noun,

words follow which define more closely the

embraced

e.

g.

Gen.

this city is

xix. 20.

nigh

in the preposition

to flee
e.

g.

Of

(*"^;Q |>O1
unto

Gen

signi-

*P.
1

A^jo

or an adver-

xxix. 7.

v^

*">

.V

OCU

it is

yet high day,

i.

e.

high in the day.

Sometimes

CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB.

the adjective
e.g.

e.g.

.Win.

hymns

I.

noun

singular, as predicate, stands before the plural

Barb. 542, 14, 15.

words written

229

or

it

OlO *CuLD

]]Lo

same were

that

follow* a plural, being

itself in

n\

l^U.'

OlL

21,5, G.

e.

a great multitude, who said

;

g.
;

ye are the body of Christ

Rev.

Eph.

the

the singular

.ODD songs and

especially the adjective in the

xix. 1.

Barh. 88,
Cor.

e. g. I

f^i-JkioiO

But

were composed by him.

plural follows collectives

expressed by a noun

to

4.

27.

xii.

^to]>

]^*^

]^*>.^CD

The predicate

is

also

|..^r>% tOAj] O1^2>

30.

v.

3. When several nouns of different genders are connected,

the adjective as epithet and predicate, usually conforms to

Mcia vs. cn ZAj1o VP1

e.g. Luke i. 5, 6.
xxrfc ..r
f
and his wife ElizZachanas
OOO1
.O(7L)Z.
_kU>1
zOfO
Barh. 106,9.
both feared God ; verses 6,7

the masculine

'
* f
(CTlJ^v

abeth

REM.
2,

and

Concerning the neuter the same rules prevail as

70. 3

e.g.

Assem.

been written; 372, 19

he did that which was

I.

Ephr.

I.

241,B

The Verb conforms

but to this there are

in

et

that which hat

Barh.24, 18.

Noun

with the Verb.

number and gender

to the subject;

many exceptions, which may be

numeriin LL.OO. Lundce, 1815,

A.

refer-

Compare Agrell Comment, de

red to the following cases.

varielate generis

66.

evil.

Connection of the

80.

^uta> ^Ol

36, 6.

in

In regard

to

4.

Number.

Here it should be remarked

That collectives or those nouns which are regarded as
such,are connected with plural verbs. Here belong, U^M; e.g.
:

1.

Barh. 94, 10.

o!iaV JX>z&

]Iio6>j

]]^.>1 the

Roman army

CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB.

230

proceeded towards Persia

OO01

^a

>V)S

96, 9

vJD

who were with me ; Michael. Chr. 15,5

all
,

wrote

who

said

^VlSo

**]

all

**.

iP

^VlVa

e.g.Barh.277,6. oioiZ .alSo* that every

^O;

""

e.g.Michael.Chr.14,15. OjSo|>

5. ooAo) *Ao

and its compounds, u So; e.g. Assem.I.39,3

all

Acts xxvi. 13.

e. g.

one wondered; alsojAia; e.g.Lukexxiii.l.^ooialS Olio nVnr>

whole multitude arose;

the

great multitude came

3.

v.

loupj 1T-y^ Uo^ OOO1

fay a great multitude of invalids

227,8; 312,7;

95,6,7;

o2j

ft.. aa>;e.g.Bajh.422,10.]),iaco
. o y ^\
\^

Assem.I. 386,15,16; (iQl;

^_fciO>
;

Assem.

I.

483, 19

(pools)

Barh.

o^i ]L^

Barh.211,8.

la-,*'; e.g.

e.g.

in these

^k^O12

John

;
According to the same
342, 19.
names of places put for their inhabitants
VrSooi cloister; Assem.1.411, Note B. 4 6.
];

the others fled

>p;\Sn^

construction are
e.g.

when

The same nouns

REM.

ILj^, Barh.551, 13
309,14;

monks saw him.

the

kV)S^;

e.g.Acts xiv.4

^iT, 288,12, and

e.g.

also are found with the verb singular

314,2

Ju]* ^!b or

.." .

"

tf

Ao^l (QJU| Ol^D

490, A. 31

compounds,
'l

lAl^fSo

e. g.

e.g.

e.g.

In like manner,

]2ciaj), Barh. 490, 18.

^"4

all

,\n

V);e.g.373,l;alsofrid3;

pill; e.g.Acts v.26;Barh. 301,9,10.

abstract feminines occur for concretes;

.

its

men fled ; (AjL^l*

for prisoner;

for inhabitants] e.g.Acts xiii.44

Assem.

1.

}2.fL for con-

gregation; e.g.ICor.xiv.23. Still more remarkable is the construction

of these nouns in one and the same period with a singular and plural verb

e.g.

]L-M, Barh.212,1.

aOIO^ilo

)]JUM
."

an army conquered him and

took

Barh. 371,

]iQl;
2.

tion

e.g.

Acts

xxi.

36

him

^OldSl
.

^.ii

*."

captive ; *JLJ( ^oJD e.g. 388,3,

8.

Nouns with a plural form having

44. Eem. 6 ), are either
(
a)
;

a singular significain respect to form

CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB.

231

'

connected with the plural verb;

e.

IA*^,I ^240 with uncovered face

^
T

18.

v.26; Barh.219,12

life ;

John

Q^fZZf

v.7.

]l^(o when the water was troubled; Barh. 194, 3

-

12; and]

_0

p..

iV);e.g.Mark
%

James

more

'

vai'i

<7i

Num.

e.

was rent

^Ar

t^ater

xxxiii. 14.

Luke

i)<fo.v

cupavoi

xxiii. 45.

or b)

iii.

sWaXai

rr _

Sr>
r

21. |^SQ
iii.

5.

Am ^OA

A^ iAere teas

^.AaZ|

Ja-rD

i?i

.f

.7

^..SoZ |ooi
*"
f f

**ia1

4.

].i

ed; as feminine, II Petr.

A*)

Luke

g.

i.

*p

3.

7, 8,

typ*Mi

oupavo^ Cerov g&jxev

Tl'^*^
John
looi PA>* OlO
;

lar

o-Jpavoj

**
J

268,

*** '

i>Z

|itf

to signification, they are connected

rarely, in respect

*l

Zt^

f^io* ao>Aco|

>.

CIQOL* l^io*

with the singular verb

*

P.

1^^

v. 18.

\^'t',

+.

JliD; e.g.

Barh. 201, 1

iii.

O" ^OOOU he shall have eternal

John iii. 15. ^Q\i^> PLM

e.g.

II Cor.

|2>|,

g.

^Ae

^Lc>

TU>

heaven was open-

Zooi ouAit V*^2*

Barh. 228, 10.

With the noun plural also is connected the verb singua)

a) when the verb preceding is use I impersonally
rnr \v ^\
and Ax^; c. g. John vi. 9. t^ru -^r> ;

Y"'

|,-\CO>

^_iJQJ ^iJLO

25 I Cor. xv. 40
1 i
"?}
* r>
rr>

xxi.

he has five barley-looses

;

Barh. 144, 8

A^ T Men

in the

Luke

e. g.

peared

U-^*

ii.

many

^-e

13.

of

M^O>

the

%<** T '

heavenly host

Arabians made peace

there died

four thousand;

%*

iM-vt00

e.g.

had

five walls

10.
;

/3)

Jishts ;

same

five porches ;

relating to

t*

**

'

2.

persons

%j:

n ^- - ^*U*M ^lcre aP'

Barh. 124, 11.

a^

133, 12.

177, 14;

339,9; or

the verb follows though more rarely

Barh. 148,

and two

with looi, John v.

were
(AiQxi OIQ (OOI AJI|
v ^
Assem. I. 352, 13
/3) other verbs

>

o)

*>nn\ "|ooi Ai ]>a

when

6)

A*) and

A\;

|aSaL Chisum

other verbs relating to persons

e.

g.

IN RESPECT TO GENDER.

232
Barh.
t*

1-.',

7 ^'" *

>,>>V)( {--

^? p
513, 3

\
the

many were slain

125, 14, 15.

*

Arabians chose for king

fALk^o since

532,

l^^

^k&o

iO.

the inhabitants

wk.12

190, 9.

feared

298, 17

9.

Some have attempted to explain this singular of the verb

as the third
plural prat, defectively written ( 6 ; comp. Agrell a. a.
O.p. 12,13) ; still it is remarkable that one and the same author, as
REM.

Barhebraeus, should employ interchangeably both ways of writing.

the contrary this construction is found in Hebrew and more

On

the Arabic
form of the 3

frequently in
defective

and

to both of these languages, such

When

unknown.

pret. plur. is

a plural

be considered as distributive (one of them, or each one of them),

the Syriac uses not only the singular but the plural also, and marks
1>7
7
N-"> tOOliiO
*
this construction more
r** or ^lO
accurately by ,

is to

s-Aoi;

e.g.

Olj7lT r*xLs ^fT.QJCn each one of

Barh. 434, 12.

them went into his country

*.

101, 14, 15.

,-M

Xf
v) Qil*7)

*.

.OOlllO each one of them had answered.

4.

The

dual,

which

used in four words only,

is

connected with the plural verb

,_i)2 two shall be
V*

singular

Sometimes,
is

Ol^l ^k)

xviii.

19

e.

Matt.

g.

xix. 5

44), is

xxiv. 40.

Barh. 165, 19.

r^LtO and

REM.

also,

found with
that it

they both brought forth.

according to the sense, the verb in the

^*>t^>

',

e.g. Barh.396,12.

should be called Egypt

^>*^3 Ao2U>

433,20.

Similar

is

Barh. 121, 11.

^'paio ^-^'^ Z?> there departed two armies.

B.

In

respect to Gender.

1
Nouns masculine, singular and plural, sometimes take
the verb, whether it precede or follow, in the feminine
when they are masculine in respect to the termination, but
.

not as to signification
l.b).

(compare

43.

Rem.

2,

and

70.

CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB.

233

REM.

must be considered as a solecism or a designation of

the neuter when the verb feminine is found with a noun masculine ;
It

e.g.

Zod

Barh.527,10. (^iO)

with Matt.

viii.

arose

there

16

xiv.

a quarrel

15

,2 when

wot evening

it

or Barh. 152, 14.

compared

compared with Matt. xxvi. 5

" ^

ll*<\t*

CT

Acts

xxiii. 10.

Feminines take a verb in the masculine; a) when they

2.

are feminine merely in respect to termination (compare

70. l.a); 6) when abstracts stand for concretes (compare
70. 2)

oA-kiO

men
*

A*2U

548, 20

l^2& ^'^Wi
585, 14.

there died about fifty

.Nrn

for soldiers ;

-s

these

armies were assembled

naioZf
I

'

; or |/n^.\g> milita-

607, 20.

These nouns are also found with the verb feminine

REM.

>**f

thousand

12.

\L\zsoL army; 581,

I'

|/'^m^
ry

^aaJ, }hmsufor mankind; Barh.236,8.

e. g.

Barh. 341, 10, 11.

^*2U Jla^L

'jto>L

yui]'

^/Uio

e.

g.

there died

about twelve thousand men

masculine

is

to

~<>.

But the preceding verb

; 348, 15, 16.
be considered as impersonal in such cases as Barh.
T V*

kOOU^I

there

612, 14.

|A2)|

579, 14.

Zooi lAo> lAa]

20.

^A^isjj

Ol2oA ]oOl

was occasion given

there

he

had fear

Sometimes the noun

is

compared with
; or

606, 19,

compared with 136,

6.

the king.

fear fell upon

3.

was much occasion

connected,in the same sentence,

not only, a)
;

with the masculine and feminine of the verb

nouns of the common gender e.g. Mark v.

.Vrn these unclean spirits went
pVCr> }Aai_
;

13.

such also as have a determinate gender

but

6)

268,

10.

OnLaZlo iv^*" ,_ou2>2

daughter) fell and were su/ocated

they

260, 11, 12.

Uoi

QQSJJ

out and entered

;

e. g.

Barh.

both (mother

and

CONSTRUCTION" OF SENTENCES.

234

In

O.

respect to both

Gender and Number.

Collectives feminine often take, in accordance with the

1.

meaning, the plural masc. of the verb e. g. Barh. 561, 6,

oocn ^iPi*!
7.
T^cuu] the inhabitants had fled ; Gen.
;

o2] }*A} CTlLa the whole people (country) came

57.

xli.

Matt.

nVn _ *OT 1;na Olio

32.

viii.

perished; Assem.

I.

whole city) assembled and wept.

all the inhabitants (the

.Q^juOAj> AO2L1 wiCDOf

Barh. 248,

580,

1, 2.

whole herd

^QO plAi^^ CJlLo AiMoZl

53, 17.

too the names of cities

**%
*\ r A* A' *
slain

this

6, 7.

Assem.

e. g.

*)Zn

for

51,

So

Note B.

of JZdessa went out

the inhabitants
i . i

I.

1.

to be

Mohammedans; Barh.

With nouns

plural feminine, sometimes occur verbs

e. g.
singular masculine, as well before as after the noun
2.

**

Isa.

1Q.

iii.

* 01

Ala

Barh. 215,

^QjtJZZ] the daughters of Zion are

7.

a// of his
cnfZor^ ^ailo liaZ]
II.
A.
been
had
"JOO1 *l*a
plundered; Ephr.
145,
goods
ji01i\S there were ivritings composed concerning

haughty

Jer. xiv.5.

.nnO

yX.>

-.

ff

|AXi| ^Ae Aznc?* calved and

7

forsook

Barh. 368, 11, 12

were three

10, 9.

woioLl\iiA AlZ ^^r

eyes.

Seldom are cases found, where the verb singular feminine

stands with the noun plural masculine ; e. g. Job xxxix.13, 14.

REM.

t.ff

'

OlAlQ (*^*

X-

t 1

"*~>* the ostrich leave th her

eggs.

D. Construction of sentences when

there is

or where Hie subject

l.When
inative

is

more than one subject,

compound.

the subject of ai sentence is compounded of a noma) usually to the

genitive, the verb conforms

and

NOUN WITH THE

CONNECTION" OF THE

nominative

e g. Barh. 228, 7. ]>QSoL 2ak>>

AJv^Zf

* *

was seen

form of a

the

pillar

the cry of the poor was heard ;

verb conforms to the genitive, when the

principal idea

e. g.

Job

there

pJimLo>

613, 14.

235

VERB.

20

348,

b) the

latter contains the

v a\Sfl I*JL> iKiQLOD

xxxii. 7.

the

multitude of years shall leach; Barh 96,8,9. |Aju.,So> cnff.ntn

~ *
*
^\
t*
A\2U a great part of the city wan destroyed ; 141, 10; 241,
10, 11

188, 7, 8.

oooi

^^at&o _. jA^lo ^laj

multi-

tude of the dead were buried.

REM.
Matt.

In the last connection ^\O, almost always

viii.

34

Acts

30

xxi.

Cor. xiv. 23

is

found

Ol/Jio2 <-Ol^D lEo^Aj

rarely relates, as Barh.61 1,3.

e.

g.

to which the verb

all

of his

petitions should be granted.

When

2.

has several subjects connected by and, the

A) when they are of the same gen-

it

verb stands as follows

der

John

e. g.

^pAjO
Barh. 19,
slain

thus

a.

there

rfk

7.
;

'

it

t*

Saul and Jonathan ivere

^AjOiO \>o\* oNftnZ]
Assem. I. 30, A. 1, 2. ,.!->
193, 17

were assembled ;

Exod. xvii. 10.

and Hur, went up.
in the singular

1.

Ephr.

the clergy

223,

160, 13.
ilence

the

and
/3)

>cL*o t ojOilo

But the verb

a) before the subjects

loSo

,;

272,

A.

Moses,

35,

Aaron
;

6)
1.

came Mary Magda-

121, 19

looi there arose

I.

the subjects

e.g. Matt, xxviii.

then

ilZoSoo ]iaa
Assem.

whole congregation

after

VAAS_^0 ^ol'rSo Z2^

Barh. 106, 4,
other Mary

193, 19

the

frequently found

is also

V4**l ^tal'riOO

and

lLoo}2o la|r> ^QlSoi )^s|'o6oi t OOUA*f

were together Simon Peter, Thomas and
Nathaniel;

]*i? OlSso *DO',-kXo when

lene

before the subjects

xxi. 2.

78, 8

the plural

in

36

159, 9

famine and
;

Ephr.

I.

pest-

216,B;

CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB.

236
230,D
i

after the subjects

j8)

e.g.

fejOiOr^So^Zo Jesws ano?

*'r&L\

Barh. Ill, 10

Assem.

I.

234, A.

/its

6. v.

gender of that standing nearest to

7

"j

*"

N^r> l*jo

conforms

a) to the

Barh. 106,

e. g.

9.

.0.8. .

192, 10.

if

ferred, especially

195,

the masculine

or b)

.1>

n> Vtfc| mountains

(>CL

the verb follow the subjects

*

oocn

y>>...

(OJ...O

and

it

the sub-

a * in r^ when men, women and youth had

r^vt v

islands appeared

74, 12, 13.

B) when

assembled together

and

V*>

were invited

disciples

jects are of different genders, the verb

^**
_

&

^QJU obi

Johnii.2.

^G>Aio oiA*o

his sister were educated

77, 7

finally, when there are several

tion commence with the singular

C)

is

e.g.

pre-

Barh.

-ex

ff

^flooticojolZ Theodotiu*
78, 2

Ephr.I. 253, A;
the construc-

subjects, if

of the verb, in the con-

tinuation of the sentence, the plural of the verb

is

used

e.g.

Barh. 137, 14. QDjlo' ^Oio'^ulo flrLI J*lo Gabala and his
>^

* 7

QO^OO
REM.

and

arose

confederates
p

yc?^

<^e

The verb
"Hf>

>

k> P 7

is

7ic?

the elders

e.g.

Barh. 197,5,6.

when

When

a pronoun of the

there
first

two

are

with

much sorrow

when

the subjects are in the

Assem.

person singular

land

the

e.g.

T.

173, B. 23

first

subjects,

-x

*,

> 7

1,

^^O

^O2|O p]

(we) have sought thee

25.

Yet sometimes

and third persons, the verb

Assem.

Roman army

different

J2O^

*-.\

first

the

person, the verb follows in the

several subjects

XlL jQ2uLiJ

r.f

the

-<-"*>*

P* 7

e.
g. Luke ii. 48.
person plural
^ P
*% P T ^
7
CQ I and thy
^*^ It
_iOOl
father

yjs.

OlZo_!k

went out and brought.

|ZoXkAj w^ew Nicephorus with

returned; 72,2; 85,9.

first

"**

pu >

1 6.

in the plural also follows,

pu^DOJj

of which one

155,

r..

PJLI>O

are united by ^CtL with

fii^

fled

347, 28, 29.

]iiV>0

Messiah are (am) one nature.

is

in

|j]

PECULIARITIES RELATING TO NOUNS.

Nouns.

Peculiarities relating to

81.

A.

237

Ellipsis.

the subject of a sentence would be repeated in the

predicate, before a genitive for the purpose of defining it
If

1.

more

accurately, that subject

is

and only the geni-

omitted,

oiorA

tive is used ; e. g. Matt iii. 4. I'A00 ?

looi
_iOio/u|
~"
"
" f
John
(Jia..> his clothing was ( a clothing of) earners hair ;

11*

9 7

\^

'

]Alka2O

]Z'r r

strong meat

REM.

Col.

e. g.

1.

(viz

(j^>
\ z
-V ^
t

when

the

to

those

to cast

Heb.

who

iii.

3;

great14.

v.

are of full age belongs

]Al> Ol>Ao

Mark

CIO Zboij

394, 6, 7.

I.

12

xiv. 9.

my

/Ae

year thereafter,

**L\ZXX) lpZ*2>

1>OI

for
for

|Ali,

lo*V

^^

gospel shall be preached.

is

wanting with the active

the object can be easily supplied from the sig-

yoke

verb

e. g.

;>>

to

plough,

i*^<T>1 to

(in full,

(]ma a

literally to drive

-plough), I Sam.viii.12. (in full,Luke xvii.7)

bring forth,

V
Aph. r-^o|

^ *"

lot)

Barh. 39, 11)

;

to

beget

marry, literally
;

in the Heart) ;

^QD

Piio), Gen. xvi.

to cast lots,

(in
to

take (]2Aj)); Ezra.

to

**&>!'

I Sam. xiv. 42

nouns with prepositions

(V^^

"jAi

a year before the Nicene council,

"1

to

xxx. 1;

ix. 2,

lay

xi.

21;

is

22.

Assem.

11.

nification of the

also

Sometimes the accusative

verb,

x.

r^Gyt?

this
>2l) where-ever

2.

iii.

A .in >CDO>OUQCD

fc

This Ellipsis also occurs in designations of time and place,

with 1'Ali
1

^'l

of John;

er than that

>

^J-MQ^J ^lo (O>> (ZojOUCD a witness which

v. 36.

full,

literally

Ps. xxii. 19);

consider, literally

Job xxxiv. 23 (in

full,

to

Acts y.

ZEUGMA AND HENDIADYS.

238

4)

Luke

like

viii.

Here

REM.
^

ship, literally to go, (]V>i*">

to

}j>

48

AA^S

seem

also

AJ pD

V*O9
it is

or

k>l

may

is

forced

and

or

(*><

t*

To ^GVt-1

be supplied (*^\

if ts c?ar&, it

unnecessary to

Zeugma and Hendiadys.

noun

occurs with the

heavens and

Gen.

earth

the.

1.

ii.

and
y

e.g.

66. 1, 2)

]AiOCL.

68. C. 2); e.g.

Gen.

Mark vi.

which may be supplied

to

'

B.

Zeugma

the sea)

belong impersonal phrases

which

to

A^>

and

clear,

supply

^ S(2

and

to

ft

*"

upon

23.

as with

the verb

^ooil^l oilao ]Ly]o Jlso

all their host

7i

.i^tl^OO w^Hx^p

16.

iii.

as well

the

or Hendiadys

thy sorrow and thy

sorrow of thy conception ; Job iv. 16.

Cases of Paronomasia are merely imitations of the Hebrew;
conception,
e.g. Isa.

i.

the

e.

xx viii.

and passages of accidental asson-

13;

10,

Barh. 102, 18. Hifinn

persuasion but by the sword.

ance

e.g.

BY

]n>

'<*>

not

ff

by

APPENDIX.
The Rendering of Composite Greek nouns.

The Syrians render the Greek composite noun as well as

the verb (compare Appendix to
67) into their language,
in the following manner
1) by simple Syriac words of
;

like

e.

signification;

g-

I Tim. iv.
"*

y**"
fl-apaxXritfif

(ZOIQ

i.
;

9.

%0

xviii. 28.

one

<f(ivSo\j\os

WS/Offt

l1

U-^;

13. .avayvwo^

x "7

^ *"*?
;

avotfioi

U-^-w

Matt.

(Aia

or 2)

by

writing two words for

Acts ii.23.
a) in the relation of genitive; e.g.

lALp-I ZoSOfQSO; II Tim. iii.2. dxapirfToi IZdSu^a

or 6) by two nouns, of which the latter stands in apposi-

THE RENDERING OP GREEK COMPOSITE NOUN8.

T"

tion

John

e.g.

by a

c)

verb
or

by

><>

ftpjM&irai

+*a\OfL+

g.

or

rf)

16.

iii.

iuftfqnc

and verb

the pronoun

by

and adjectives and the noun with

II Pet.

e. g.

r - T

.^n\/

and noun which correspond with the

*
-0
10 ..
Acts iv. 13. aypa/jL/xaroi |^U& ^tArt |J

participles

fixed

-*

participle

e.

xi.16.

239

Zu^>

I Cor.

g.

8.

vii.

If the composites are form-

|mj ^o<jk
^>\i]>
ed 'from adjectives and nouns
a/afAoi

iLaafiOA -o.mv

e.

pre-

;
3) they are frequently resolved into their component parts, and rendered in the same
manner as in cases mentioned above
a) in the relation of
;

e.

genitive;

Mark

g.

xvi. 14.

Col.

ii.

14.

tive

Phil.

]i^

'

13.

4/u <k'r&

<'''

roXo '

P-yi?

trace definite laws of rendering

adverbs compounded with

OlSs

wavoirXi'a ]L*1

xviii. 15.

a
pounded with

U'and
i.

4.

J]j

e. g.

6t(jLW(xos

Finally, in

IA^SD

*Sa> ]>^

e.

g.

6)

Luke

Aaavatf.'a

xvi.

when they

latter

iii.

9.

is

and

22.

Sap.

are com-

U';

by

Eph.

atfatros ]aij ]Jj.

tfuv
,

xi.

represented

]2oZallO

12.

Philem. verse

Kom.

e. g.

XL

we can

sometimes

fa^fX^si 1*13 OlSa

Matt.

adjec-

II Cor.

a) nouns, adjectives,

composites formed with

;

Vxaa*

take ^ta

^3j

I Cor. xv. 53.

privative, the

y>c^o V>

dered by >Qi
ou

iras,

xxiii. 18.

ira.vToSiva.pos

xxiv. 24.

noun and

the

by

6)

xsvofogia ]a^*r co

3.

ii.

Matt.

|ZaOrO> f^*^*

^sufoirptxpijTai

e. g.

^jk2OM i&*

xsipo'/paipov
.

ZCUAO;

]">^

rfxXripoxap&'a

this

23.

is

often ren-

CHAPTER FOURTH.
PARTICLES.
82.

by

and union of Adverbs.

Besides the formation of adverbs described in

1.

to

Construction

51, is

be noticed as a special peculiarity the expressing of them

certain verbs, which, either stand in the

and gender, with the

ber,

finite verb,

same

copula, or the infinitive of the verb follows with

*
r

this connection stand

a)

^Ol

tinuefoi once more, farther, again

to

return,
e. g.

num-

tense,

with or without the

^.

V
and 2iQDO]

Gen.

In
con-

to

viii. 10.

again he sent her

thou shall bring

out

me again

they shall no more see

>ro

he sent again

Assem.

r^lio^ Aacoo] she bare again

I.
;

Ps.

Ixxi.

Job

vii.7.

Luke xx.
203, A.

7,

Barh. 152, 3

20.

^DQ2)CnZ JT

11, 12.

also

ding pleonastically
fo\\r\
to

JDoZ again ;

QoZ /

make much,

will

Gen.

viii.

no more curse

*acoo")

Gen.

21.
the

iv.

by
*

ij

aflDO|
earth

for very ; e. g. Barh. 92, 14.

2.

ad**
(J

fy

CONSTRUCTION AND UNION OF ADVERBS.

much

he esteemed very

-">;

6.

,*"1SV&

<M

II Cor. viii.15

SVCD 1

much

did

II Kings xxi.

evil

241

^oS

c)

to
'

Ae Aarf no

cfon

y<tf

speaking

without the copula) for before

Acts

6e/ore;

35

xii. 1 1

31

ii.

ii.

More according

REM.
in Hos.

vi.

;*O

52

vii.

I Cor.

7;

; e. g.

Born.

Gal.

to the

to
^0,0
precede (always
*
i*
^ A * '
L'^o] AlD^O / Aaue saztf

d)

iii.

iii.

25; viiu 28,30; xi.

9,

8.

Hebrew, seems

^oJoSOj $]
Gen.

(tjj'n
xxxvii. 7

to he the expression

&5Vft

^fc) <A

rfw,

which early

is

A^l*

(^ISb tl" 'ppn) thou askest too great a thing;com519, D. E

fcO^Sn n HChron.xxvi.l5,is expressed

or

II

Kings

ii.

10.

Ajky-Qol
I.

pare Ephr.
X

precede,

it

compare Jer.iv.5,and onward. If the

finite

be omitted in adverbial usage

g. I

may
XT

*A-JQD]

'

-T

wi_fcQD|

by

scattered ;

riOj

mn

e.

verb already

Sam.

xx. 41.

>O^O

mourned

they

but

David

the

most.
2.

Adverbs

and stand
]2\^S>1

like adjectives, are

before

a)

them

e.

many widows ; John

ii.

connected with nouns

g.

12.

Luke

iv. 25.

lAl0a-_i

Assem. I. 30, 15, 21

Barh. 78, 1
105, 3; 106, 8
E
with
words
A.
6.
v.
270,
standing between; 284, A. 10.
more
seldom
after
the noun ; e. g. I Cor. v. 6.
v. E.
/)
days

JiVUt a

little

much wood

leaven

Barh. 80, 16.

II

Chron.

A**Al

ii.

^s2>

9.

]tf>

1>QJ

i'

the fire

placed under.

REM.
tive
%

e.

Sometimes nouns represent the adverb by a following genig.

Ephr.

I.

219, A.

ISA? l^JUioT

.CXJl^

(>aSflSO they had continually the cloud and the pillar.

JoOlA*V
Purlieu-

INTERROGATION, AFFIRMATION AND NEGATION.

242

larly

should be noticed

\\iSn

>Z1

The

3.

^O^D

\*

^3, i^fO partly,

>\n*"> almost

etc.

adverb indicates

repetition of the

ening or increase of the meaning

+L& *al quite ready ; Matt.

Barh. 65, 14.
John vi. 7
degrees ; b

by adverbs of place
and there.

19.

vii.

.iO very bad ;

iv. 24.

^So

^iSrv~> and

sometimes a diversity

e. g.

a strength-

Gen.

I Kings xx. 40.

is

84, 17.

expressed

\& here

]ZLO

Use of the Interrogation, Affirmation, and Negation.

83.

A. Upon the
be remarked

construction of the interrogation,

should

it

That the simple

1.

e. g.

-*">

>Ao 5Ao by

So v^_XD

or

direct question is distinguished

a)

by being preceded by an interrogatory pronoun or

S> Olio who is the greatest 1
e.g. Luke xxii.27.
particle
either

John

r^

y^

ix. 26.

..T

10.

--.

- * -

verse 19

i>

^>*Aa2]

vii.

.Vrn oooi
position

35

.00

M^O what has

he done

1l*i t\

Assem. 1.

how were
33, 15

thine eyes

179, B. 25.

whence know they thisl

opened ?

tasLiV^

by the
in
word
of the words employed, the prominent
r-*^i-*

or

forming the question being generally placed

Matt, xxvii. ll.
the

? verse

to thee

By

Jews?

t?OOU> ]n\V>

Assem.

I.

33,

17.

6)

first

e.

g.

OOlAj] art thou the king of

U-^^

A*l

is

it

thy

wish ?

A question with

2.

John

iv. 35.

ye

1?'^*

|j

ftf

wo<, that after

usually contains an affirmation

^i-^ Uo>V

Ao?

e.g.

^&i \Aif

four months cometh the harvest

tf

INTERROGATION', AFFIRMATION
xviii.'Ji;

45.

but with

I shall

accuse you

so

also

18

John

131, 12
3.

ISo

The

xviii.33

e. g.

Ephr.

this please

I.

question

U^

-O

Luke

Matt.

e.g.

ix. 27;

240, F,

God

xviii.25;

;-**

]ooi

xviii.

Wi*

xxiv.

indicated

e.g. Matt. xxvi. 63.

1ouL> Ol;a

thott art the Christ the

son of God.

an)

found with

by ^

]iaV>

marked by oj

is

(apa), Barb.

f>|

119, 10.

febl

for

also

is

indirect question is

or (utrum

or a doubt

I? John

is it

35.

direct

with

Lord

'

vii.

The

REM.

Xv 21

withwkS;
would

"T
'^*">

l-;io

it

+*o

xxvi. 22.

243

embraces a negation; e.g.John v.

>..;^nSl) }$]* ^pAj] ^^CO ]iol Mieve ye thai

ftl

^dol

AND NEGATION.

The

= whether

ooi AJ]

whether

disjunctive (whether

in the

second part

e. g.

nfhV> 001 r> *MQ'oVl2)> OC31 OOl^Aj] art thou

^1
he who should come or shall u>e look for another ? John ix.
Matt.

2;

xi. 3.

Assem.

1.

The

REM.

87, B. 12, 13; 377, 20, 21.

affirmation or negation of a question

is

usually expres-

sed by a repetition of the leading verb with the personal pronoun

e.g.

Assem.

I.

T <k*

Z;io|>

375,

* t

7.

V^^xn

oo]o

2ji0T>

*i>

and

fM'fy

have you htard, my brethren, what

^.lSQ

they answered, yes, all

is it

true or

not ?

sometimes by another verb;

said

it,

i.

Assem.

I.

Assem.

I.

e.

yes

378,

10.

-t>|

The negative

distinguished from

(J

same

particles

said,

]T and

this latter

o^

(J

it is true,

0|

r*r*

i.

e.

not,

No,

yes

Aj| thou hast

repetition

^O|O and he

A^S by

LO\

e.g. Matt.xxvii.il.

%>

Q1OO

and they answered

Sometimes only
?^*0

B.

in the negative with the

7, 11.

33,19.

J^J[ ^oAliQ*
I have

said ?

appears

e. g.

e,

g.

my father.

(and nonne?

are

forming the negation

244

PREPOSITIONS.

A ), and with nouns, adjectives, and participles ( 58.

B. 5) or with suffixes ( 38. 2), it includes the substantive
to

verb.

REM.

JJ is

repeated in the latter of two negative clauses ; e. g.

when the parti-

I Cor. xi. 11, 16 (but the

negative sense is lost
cle is to be taken affirmatively ; as in Matt. v. 25

To

adjectives

cation

Rom.

(
i.

nothing

my

and

= un,

participles

than

(God's) people.

*!>

^OQlO

4.

spotless ;

(J

Before nouns

imperishable.

|]

f
<^^ IV
(J

it

nothing

signifies

less

than

Before the future (equivalent to an imper;

led(jJo _ |Jb or JJo _

ix.

i.

Eph.

g.

Deut. xxxii.21.

e.g.

ative) it is prohibitory

19;

e.

in, -less) ;
f

less

vio Avn

23.

Luke xxi. 34).

gives a negative or privative signifi-

it

61. 3. B,

compare
(J

),

it

and

signifies neither

Doub-

62. 3.

nor

John

viii.

3.

84.

Prepositions.

"When prepositions come together, in many instances ;

the
a)
signification of one of them is only apparently lost.
1.

Thus

for example,

^Lo

before

a)

denotes

prepositions,

the direction from a place whose position is more closely

e. g.
defined by those which follow
Assem. I. 46, 21.
;

]f^t

|ap A^xZ

out from under a rock, 1. 37,19

^.So

/3)

after

prepositions it denotes a removal from the place more closely

e. g. Assem. 1. 64, 7.
defined by those which precede
;

^> Aj^A^ wiOiaSdCD they buried him under

"{LjL

Barh. 200,
66, 13.

16.

fio*

1'Au^O ^b -^ before

^&

^.lik

figuratively, 31, 17.

celknce
e. g.

from

beloiv,

U^'O' 001^3
t

one of the prepositions

Eccl. x. 14.

01>Aa ^ib

is

after

the city;

(i.

e.

him

Churth

aoove

Assem.

I.

M ex

merely pleonastic
;

72, 19, 20;

above) the walls

^ ^^
b)

the

36, 22.

I'KEPOSITIONS.

ttee

^ofrom
fore

him

37,

Dan.v. 24.

feV*n\ Zol

9.

wiOIQlo,0 ^lo

to the

be-

King.

Several of the prepositions have a peculiar consecu-

2.

tion

Barh. 65,

246

and

e.g. betwixt

*.

^O

between,

**!*>; e.g. Mattxx. 17.

between him and them ;

^OCTL^O wiOiQlA^
frequently with-

out the copula, xix. 10

15

rarely ^

David ;

to

out fcOrL;

e. g.

in

e.

g.

e. g.

Barh. 60, 13.

75, 17,18

Barh. 60,8

from

more general designations

Barh. 99, 17; 105,

83,

-0^1 t^l *Om\$ ^O

]iOA-^D;e.g.Matt.i.l7.

Abraham

AxO

Haran and Edessa;

~Ol>o|] ,jl AJJO between

146, 13

to,

from

also with-

7.

55. B. 3. b) preposi3. Besides the cases mentioned in

tions are repeated with several nouns which follow after one
another, and depend upon one and the same preposition ;
but the preposition is quite
e. g. Barh. 82, 10; 104, 11, 13
as frequently omitted after the first noun ; e. g. Barh. 6, 1 ;
;

40, 12

REM.

66, 6.

As

*O sometimes

stands for

^*^^

Ol2lJj^iCt2
16, 17

^ (v =

each went

Barh. 64,

hundred and

feoA

149,

8,

towards a place

= about

preceding

14;

rf)

anybody

g.

Luke

own

city ;

e.

xv. 9.

^ZcUi ]ooi

adverbs
^Lo forms

some

rection to a place

|J

^tVu.O
9

to ; c)

and

times a possession in a physical

e.g.

to his

k i\V>

6.

fifty oboli ;

denotes direction

Job

sis)

the following
ii.

iii.

a)

looi ^1 f

3.

Barh. 66,

or serves to designate the value or price of a thing, equiva-

lent to for

with

to be regarded

are
special idioms,

191,

1,

and

193, 19

67. 1. b. 5)

Zo\

b)

show, some-

frfl.S

intellectual sense

51. 3. a)

with numerals,

= penes)

which stands not in our power

two

^-TZJiflQ for
2

expresses

the

23.

pronouns

58. B. 4, 6,7), and sometimes indicates the diT

e.

g.

Assem.

I.

485, 28.

|1,V> ^io

toward*

246

CONJUNCTIONS.

morning
(

67.

1.

II. 4.

29

b)

e)

^\i

Ezra

x. 4.

often occurs before a duty or obligation

It

may

also in respect to signification,

(>

be considered as a preposition
f ) (J > without ; e. g. Barh. 227,5.
*T>
r
p..y * i %?
without hands and without feet.
Vy.j tJ>O Mr* I W?
;

85.

Conjunctions.

in common with the other Semitic

but affluence of
very deficient in conjunctions
periodic diction in all languages arises from this class of
words. Hence in syriac, upon the one hand, the periods
are wanting in variety and continuance and on the other
hand the connective particles which do exist have many
In general the following may be observsignifications.

The Syriac language,

dialects, is

1.

Those conjunctions

(e. g.

when,

then)

are frequently

omitted, which, in the protasis indicate the relation to the

and the two members are united by and ; e. g.

*&* ]*Q* when the Sun had

apodosis,

Gen.

^ 4^

xix. 23,

arisen,

Lot came

REM.

xliv. 4.

Moreover the following

fall

away

II 'V*

verbs of motion

Barh. 25,
xv. 6

1;

b)

e.

g. Matt. ix. 7.

197, 19

of or

^1 1

a)

(asyndeton) after

^OO

he arose and went

especially in earnest discourse

e.g. II

ix.

32.

more

in

Kings

^ 1 JV> icnSo

g. I

e.

1^2

Sam.
^_i>2

<hfk

two or three eunuchs

usage

came, (when

c)

2.

**J]

I came),

no one

e. g. Isa.

1.

^\

AJLAO AjZ|
there.

On

Hebrew

accordance with
1
f

^^ wherefore was, J

the other hand

7

}*

O
*

is

often
*

;-^oZ|O A^iOO
repeated (polysyndeton) ; e. g. Barh. 51, 20.
7
9
7
*
ff7
t
.rs\cnr> ^ooo he
was
died,
buried, arose, and went to
"*>

].Cn\
heaven
2.

As

82, 17; 38, 5, 6.

correlatives, conjunctions

are used doubled in a

CONJUNCTIONS.
sentence
as well

a) the

as, both

of of either

or

247

same word e. g. o -. O and 2>|

aaY
and ; e. g. Assem. I. 291, A. 10, ll,v.E;
;

Barb. 112, 4; 223,

4,

fA

5;

- 9 *

er

o>v

M;-as;
> ]i*Lil

217,13; or 6)different words ; e.g. (1301

Assem. I. 75, B. ll, 13, v. E 374, 23, 24;

'-o-

with

preceding; Ephr.I. 214, E;

J]

^DJ although

yet;

e.g. Barh. 91, 12, 13.

3.

The

>

conjunctions

= /Aa,

thereby, or

(J>

= *Aa<

wo<,

e. g. Asare usually connected with the future ( 61.3.A)

sem. I. 515, B.32 ; Barh. 213, 6 but in as far as they have
the signification of since, because, (quod), they are connected
;

with the preterite

e.g.

Matt.

2OU>

ix. 8.

God, because he had given

they praised
Barh. 24, 9.

12,

'*

n^^

|oi\y

41

13, 11

4. Concerning the use of particular conjunctions, the

low ing may be noted

fol-

sometimes used in comparisons (

e. g.
^io)
and
xix.24
likewise
in
Matt, xi.22
b) ^*1
comparing
one thing with another of the same species; e. g. Isa. i. 7
a) o]

is

Job

xxiv. 14;

Assem.

I.

75,

A.

numerals it signifies really, about

==
av ) denotes, in doubtful
(

subjunctive

v=

||

QJ^

1.

v.

168, B. 29

Barh.104,13

c)

with

ajL

if,

cases, the relation of the

in cases of certainty,

el

denotes

the indicative, and also occurs in indirect questions ( 83.3);

it is
negative in those passages containing asseverations

under oath, yet only

according to the

with a negative U
0!$

and go

Q,

in those

Hebrew
^|,

which are translated,and which,

idiom, are without any negation;

]]for^l Uf,

Gesenius Lehrg.

it is

p.

afnrmative(compare

844)

e. g.

Cant

2. 7.

CONJUNCTIONS.

248

wake
56

use of which see

from

a)

>

e. g.

>

r*]just

as,

it

Assem.

John

as,

69.1

which

particles

^n^f just

not, rouse not

78.B. 2)

follows, forms conjunctions

I.

17

34,

28

viii.

73. 3

7,

160, 12

74. 2.;

so

I.

Ephr.

(of time) 05, when, Assem.I. 485, 15

Barh. 112,

d) J (for the further

and

> ifco, 39,7,

I.

27

>

and

>

213,

A.

25, afterwards

fco (of time) wfon, 1.485,20

^i,

158,12, since,because

the terminus ad quern),

>

**cril so

much

that,

Ephr.

e.g.

John

> is

xxi. 3.

fcoA

1.218,

wnfe7,

i!7ia<,

242,

(including

UD"^

come
]Ajb2
vi.

13,

or

when

John

viii.

20

e)

the house is

worthy

36; after ^af, Matt.

the copula o also

Assem.

I.

77, 23, 24

221,2;

it

forms

is

e. g.

p| ,1 w?i^

^Aa^
*

Mark

ix.

21

denotes

viii.

7)

/3)

Barh. 11, 18

the apodosis

equivalent to but

e. g.

e.g.

v. 7.

Also the Hebrew

T

quently occurring ^o^JD

db^
T

is

/)

Luke

a) that, especially

97, 8; 105,

Barh.

]3'c& Mark

e.

g.

152, 5;

Barh. 39, 7.8; and

11, 16; 16,

sometimes supplies the place of the comparative

Job

OOl

Matt. x. 13.

verbs of sending, entreating, commanding, etc

after

^S)

p|~ ]Z|

v. 7.

pleonastic after ^j

ld>

^f
**

it is

16,

M ^l] /^o thall may

tfaJ JO.l

John

as,

!>O^o 6e/ore,150,l3

As-

,_k>,

sometimes omitted before the

catch fish; after ,i,

since, because,

>hL

^&, Barh.160,

>

II. 125,

Barh.193,2

in the signification of that,

future

>

>

^A&f

>

olAl*'^ as soon

>

13

ii.

<>

sem.

that,

214,

-OlQ

>
;

Matt.

translated

yet, nevertheless.

9;
yuJ\

S)

it

e. g.

by the fre-

INTERJECTIONS.

86.

The

1.

Interjection

distress, is

x.

6.

Interjections.

which denotes an imprecation or cry of

usually connected with

v
n\

_iO woe
xxiii.

to thee !

13-16

following ; e. g. Eccl.
* \
*
%*O woe to you I
^n*l\
xxiv. 19
Ephr. II. 135, E.

Matt, xviii. 7

249

ii.

(>.

*o WOK to the king of Judah I 274, D.

j ]n\VlS
*
x
*
'
A * tT
Al v **~mALD rjj ^iO woe to fAose wAo meditate deceit ! 351, C.
r
*
?0
jQ; or with E appended; e.g. fco +**woe to me!

1>OO1_
f

"

Ez. xxx.

^L

JiooiA oio| woe for

2.

e. g.

Jer.

t ool

27.

1.

Amira

the

day! sometimes with

\S -O woe

to

you

or

_l2>,

>

fjoi
^So oioj woe to this generation.
Without an intervening preposition, they are the usual expressions of grief and mourning, and the noun is then to be

(Ao^

p. 449.

taken in the accusative

alas,

my

e. g.

Judges

^2^a

xi. 35.

oio]

daughter ! Kev.xviii.10,16,19.

REM.

Sometimes O| occurs as an ordinary exclamation, with

as a sign of the accusative

e.

g.

Barb. 333,

3, 4.

As a

particle of

IX, properly, verily, truly ;

compare Amira
2.

p.

436.

Concerning the construction of particular

may be observed

the following

interjections,

a) ]oi lo ! behold, is frequently pleonastic; e.g.

Ephr. in.

la^in jTZ loi VZokiij 001 ^y-ASOl }\^ the mortal

149, B.
body is thus dependent upon the soul ; or at the beginning of
a period it serves to give animation to the discourse ; e. g.
lo ! our brother (member)
^f)?O1 uu;> }oi
in designations of time,- like the Greek >?], it

Ephr. 111.247,0.
is

separated

now, already;

signifies

'V i
|1\i|>

\'r&

e.

g. Matt.

iii.

10.

^">>f" )..;j ]ai

v\

\&

the axe is already laid at the roots of the tree ;

"*
17 % *
|O1 already the (Jiird time ; As1

Num.
sem.

I.

^IQ] B&L
*

xxii. 28.

369, 30

with

^io following,

since tiat

e.g.

Acts

PECULIARITIES IN THE POSITION OF WORDS,

250

x. 30.

* %

\**0

p| iof

11'

ii' ^

preceded

by

(J

|O1

^io
"

(01

(J

smce

I have fasted;
V

that

from which comes Q.^)

Col.

ou^i,

i.

nonne ?

*O1 ]^>^^> .jsf ]oi |Tdo not even the

e.g.Matt.v.46. ^-r^
publicans the same? verse 47; xiii. 27 ;
1?01

jBX**/ar 6e

b)

tY,

^ of the person and

with

before thefu*p

ture of the finite verb

"

e.g.

Matt. xvi. 22.

(JOT ^*-^ |OOlZ> /ar 6e

it

from

thee,

my

^J^ JH**

*;_Lo

lord, that this

should hap-

Assem

1. 341, A. 30. IbllL^) joaajj

^r>>i
us
that
we
should
God
13.
Some;
375,
far
from
deny
times the participle follows
Assem. I. 51, 12, 13.
e. g.

to

pen

be

thee;

it

07

.7

J-i'r^Oj

_^

ffU

/ar

^Lj

6e it

from us

85. 4. c)

pare

with

e. g.

Gen.

hail /

xliv. 7

Matt. v.3.

95, A.

I.

thee,

E.

E.

/Simon Peter

to

or in the infinitive

with suflix plural, and the

which the preceding suffix relates;

^S 2>V r*>&4 hail also to

B. 3. v.
frequently absolute without

2*012* of .iniOa^

Kings

la]a <QlSn
;

The Hebrew ^5
I

^f

***o^i ]innr>Vt\ ^OQliOn^ hail to the poor

with a word interposed; e.g.Assem.

in spirit; verses 4-11

3, 6, v.

= iTE'ia

c) o.QQ^
(
noun following with ^,

e.g.

we should deny

preceding (=Ej$ com-

I Sam. xxiv. 7

e. g.

that

-IV

the verb follows in the future, with

is,

hail to thee

Sichem

in the Peshito, expressed

96, A. 17, 19.

by

Jjf

e. g.

xxii. 12.

APPENDIX.
Peculiarities in the Position of Words.

In the position of words, which, as in the Hebrew, is very

easy and natural, besides the peculiarities referred to in the
preceding chapters, the following deviations from the usual
^

collocations, occur

"

)the verbs (001

and

V*

;Sb| are interposed

PECULIARITIES IN THE POSITION OF WORDS.

251

between words, which,according to their grammatical connecT

*.

cannot be separated e. g. Exod. vii. 7. j_O i*o-Lo

'** ]6oi
Moses wag eighty years old; Luke v. 3
^-fcJLLoZ

tion,

QD)}
The same is

Exod.v.lG.
ye.

n^ bricks,say they

^-'Ao] ]l*"iSO

true

b)

of personal pronouns, having the

are Abraham's seed

X

. .

TT>

e.g.John viii.33.iOOl^i|>
*

verse

37

men ;

xvi.
g. Matt.

besought

him

more

vii.

28.

|i

'

.i~>

oil>1
S

?'<

rarely the

//te

law which makes priest* of

same occurs with the noun

^Qjf )OMJ> |IiO <_k> }'L]

^H]
would give them a sign from heaven

VAljifiQ^

^OU>

Compare

and

occurs with particles

e. g.

Al|l^.. he should go openly

"JOT

|ft^r>Vr>i

that he
it

we

^ *"

OlS

1.

more frequently

1(71

Heb.

^<>

**X

'
-.

fiOQD ?>O>nSO |OU ,2 OO1

feeble
e.

*y

e>9^*7

~ p

signification of looi

to u-s,make

IT

86. 2. a).

Mark

they
;
i.

45.

into the city.

EXERCISES

SYRIAC GRAMMAR,
AND

CHRESTOMATHY,
rBKFARED WITH REFERENCE TO

THE TRANSLATION OP

UHLEMANN'S SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

BY ENOCH HUTCHINSON.

NEW YORK:
1855.

Entered according to Act of Congiv 'ss,

By

E.

in tho

year 1865,

HUTCII1NSON.

in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for thu Southe n District

of

New

York.

INTRODUCTORY REMARKS.

The

following Exercises are designed for beginners,

who

need something simple, and at the same time, something

which will lead them into a thorough knowledge of the

grammar.

A small portion of Syriac,

lected

perhaps a page, should be seand carefully analyzed in reference to all the import-

phenomena of the language. Every peculiarity in respect to each word should be critically examined.
Perhaps
the best course would be to trace one peculiarity throughout
the page, searching the grammar and other helps
then
ant

and so on, until every peculiarity shall have

been examined. Thus the most important facts will be
trace another,

strongly impressed upon the

memory.

The

great difficulty, especially with beginners, is. that

they often attempt to investigate too many subjects at once
and thus do not obtain clear ideas of any. There is fre-

quently a great inclination to press forward and translate

Hence, many important subjects of investigation
rapidly.
are entirely neglected,

Superficial scholarship,

is

the un-

avoidable result of such a course.

That nothing may escape observation, a few general

rections

are

presented

to

aid

the

learner in

making

di-

his

In mentioning those points, which are to be exanalysis.

exact order in which they occur in the gramthe
amined,

INTRODUCTORY REMARKS.

25i

mar, has not been followed, but they have been so arranged,
hoped, as best to facilitate the progress of the student ;

it is

and they are intended to embrace the most important phennomena necessary to be attended to by the learner.
Before commencing the examination the pupil should be
that he may

directed to the Introduction of the grammar,

become somewhat acquainted with the history and literature

of the Syriac Language.
The grammar should be studied
rather as a book of reference than as one, which must be
committed

to

memory. The

student, at

first,

should consult

an aid in analyzing. At the commencement of the analysis, he will feel the need of assistance, and that assistance

it

as

he must find in the grammar. When he there discovers a

principle of the language and perceives its application in
By the
parsing, he can easily retain it in his memory.
time that he has carefully studied the Exercises and Chrestomathy through, he will not only have a considerable

but will have most of the grammemory, with but very little effort, and

knowledge of the language

mar committed

to

time in learning rules and principles, whose apdoes not perceive, and which consequently are
he
plication
After the pupil, in the course
apt to escape from the mind.

no

loss of

of his analysis, shall have become somewhat familiar with

the grammar, he may recite it regularly through, and it will
not be an unmeaning nor an uninteresting exercise.
general divisions, in the Exercises, are marked by
the character ^[, to distinguish them from similar divisions

The

in the

grammar marked

Smaller divisions are inserted

under Remarks and Explanations.

GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR ANALYZING.

I.

Find the Guttural Letters on page

Vid. Gram.

II.

1.

3, 4.

"

"

"

" Diacritical
Points, for which the vowels are de-

what

Aspirates, or on

letters

Vid. Gram.

are found.
III.

Rem.

of the Chrestomathy.

first

Kushoi and Rukok

1.

Rem. 4

5.

signed to compensate, formerly used instead of

vowels and for other purposes.

Vid.

2,3,4,

and Rem.

IV.

"

"

Long and Short

V.

"

"

Simple and Mixed

VI.

"

" Pure and

Impure, Mutable and Immutable vowels.

"

"

"

"

"

"

Vid.

VII.

45.

IX.

48.

Line/at

13

3.

A.
letters.

Vid.

3.

Vid.

9.

14.

Vid.

syllables the Tone

8.
is

to be found.

XI. Examine the Marks of Punctuation.

XII. Find Ribui.

Rem.

Marhdono, Mehagyono and Sheva.

Linea Oocultans.

X. Find on what

3.

syllables.

Dipthongs, Quiescent and Otiant

Rem. 4
VIII.

Vid.

Vowels.

Vid.

Vid.

10.

6.

XIII. Read the Syriac.

XIV.

Translate.

XV. Examine

the

Changes of Consonants

posed
12.

dropped

assimilated

added and exchanged.

trans-

Vid.

GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR ANALYZING.

256

XVI. Find

dropped and added.

transposed

XVII. Find

exchanged
Vid.

15.

the Suffixes and Prefixes, Sufformatives and Prefer

16

Vid.

natives.

XVIII.

thrown back

Vowels

the Changes of

36

In respect to Verbs

Parse.

Simple or

46.

ascertain whether they are

Their Conjugation

Compound

lar or Irregular

Active, Passive or

Person

Mood

them

Gender

to the Case,

found

Rule.

Nouns

Number

Gender

10;

44;

71

48;

50;

77.,

What

Pronouns,

Case

Suffix

59., etc.

Formation

State

45;

Case.

73;

or

Adjective

Declension

Vid.

43;

46;

74;

47;

etc.

Number

Person

kind

Vid.

Rule.

16

17

Gen der
54., etc.

Active or Passive

Derivation

Participles

where they are

Suffix or Prejix

Derivation and

Substantive

Person

etc.,

19., etc.;

Signification

Regu-

Number

Neuter

Conjugate and Inflect

Tense

Mood, Tense,

Vid.

Voice

Conjugation

Rule.

Adverbs

51

What they qualify.

Primitive or Derivative
;

Numerals

Vid.

82.

or

Cardinal

Ordinal

Gender

Decline

To

what they belong.

Prepositions

Conjunctions
connect.
Interjections

Suffixes

What
Vid.

What they govern. Vid

kind

53. 1, 2

Suffix or Prefix
;

52;

84.

What

they

85.

Primitive or Derivative.

Vid.

53. 3;

86.

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR

EXERCISE FIRST.
VID. GRAM.

IF

Find

Gutturals on

the

3, 4.

1.

the first

Select all those letters

1.

REM.

1.

page of the Chrestomathy.

which are EVER used as

Gutturals; thus:

loioilloilloioilloilloilloioiloiloi
I 1

01 01

t'Cn 1

Ol 1 I Ol Ol 1

Ol 1 I j

1 1 01 01 1 I 01 01 1 A* )

01 A*

1 Ol 01 Ol ] Ot J
1

01 01

)oi]oijsoi)}1 oiloiioiloiloiloioiloil

Hoiioi11oioi1cn1]oi]]i|i)oilin
01 1

1 1

01

1 01.

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

The above

are

all

guttural letters, but not all used as such

in the text from which they are taken.

6)

The

guttural

resembles the Spiritus lenis of the Greeks,

EXERCISES IN SYBIAC GRAMMAR.

258

i has always

being a scarcely audible breathing from the lungs,

a feeble sound.
the Hebrews.

sound like

It is

a.

Usually

7.

Ol before a vowel

a vowel,

it

express *>*

sounded like hh with a rolling of the palate.

is

our h (Spiritus asper); but when uttered after

oh !

sounds of these letters

fix

The Greeks

6).

has nearly the sound of h in Korah, perhaps a

as in ah

softer,

sort of vowel

by Spiritus asper, and sometimes by

well as i, sometimes
** is

of

fc<

a kind of soft breathing (comp. Gesenius'

Hebrew Grammar, by Conant,

as

M like

The Galileans pronounced i and

An Arabian would pronounce i as a

It is difficult
still it is

to

little

ascertain exactly the

important that the learner should

upon a definite pronunciation of each.

2.

Find those

letters

which are here used as gutturals.

oi^jkAOioioioioioioioioioioioi

01*

EXPLANATIONS.
Verse

a)

3.

word

3., Ol is

take a composite sheva, and

a guttural, as

has no vowel of

it

prefer to call Ol

would perhaps

it

would in Hebrew
its

consider 1 at the end of the word as otiant, and

in

own.

(Some

a regular movable consonant, and

as quiescing

6)

Verse 3. word

4.,

c)

Verse

word

6.,

** is a guttural for the

d)

Verse 4. word

3.

is

6., Ol

a guttural for the same reasons.

is

same reasons.

a guttural being movable.

It

longs to the second syllable of the word, being preceded

vowel

HEM.
letters

15. 4. d).

The

first

may be

by a

similarly explained.

remarked that there are some other guttural

page of the chrestomathy, which should be con-

It should be

on the

other cases

be-

KXK.RCISE FIRST

GUTTURAL LETTERS.

merely as movable consonants.

259

It is true that all

gutturals

arc sounded, and might be said to bo movable consonants

(coraStill we
Ian> (irscn. Hub. (THUM., transl. by Conant, 23.2).
prefer
to make a difference between gutturals and regular movable consonants.
The latter,
letters on
are the

though guttural

following

page

first,

Find those guttural

movable consonants
.'$.

which are regular

letters

01^1101^1 01.
EXPLANATIONS.

Verse

a)

1.

word 2.,

} is

a regular movable consonant,

sounded nearly like the vowel

is

in

vowel

to the

&

far

melts into

eons*

and does not quiesce

In dialects kindred to thellebrew,

vowel.

its

its

melts in-

more readily than the sound of the Hebrew

vowel.

It is

)ii;int.

and

Still ] retains its

very

common

power

as a

movable

in Syriae for a guttural let-

ter to take a long vowel, where in Hebrew, it would have a

(vid.GesComposite She va. This seldom occurs in Hebrew
cii ins'

6)

II

eb.

V.

1.

Gram, by Conant.
w.

Ol

5.,

is

23. 2.

movable, as

Rem.

2).

it

does not quiesce and

is

movable, as the pre-

not otiant.

is

c)

V.

ceding

w.

8.,

letter

is

1.

(not a guttural)

not sounded,

and the following one

is

quiescent.
d)
its

V.

sound

that

it

1.

be considered as movable though

melts into the vowel, we can scarcely perceive

w.lO., 1 should

has the

power of

consonant.

EXERCISES IN SYEIAC GRAMMAR.

260
V.

e)

w. 11.,

1.

seldom, in

/) V.

11.,

others above.
ble (comp.

g) V.

w.

the

3.

Hebrew

h)

V.

9.
it

though

w.

not movable, as

it

quiesces,

though

13. 1.

w.

1.

1 is

Rem).
Ol is movable

preceding

same reasons as

belongs to the previous sylla-

15. 4. d).

5. 1. f;
2.,

it,

for the

movable as

Ol is

it is

a suffix, and

ft

of

13. Rem.).
9.,

is

movable

as

it

has a vowel of its own,

so flows into the sound of the vowel that

scarcely perceptible

(T

it is

1. 1. b).

should be remarked that t\ro of the guttural letters |

REM.
and 01 are sometimes used as quiescents and sometimes as otiant
12. A. B. and Rem.;
letters (
13;
14).
It

EXERCISE SECOND.
f

2.
9

Find

the

Aspirates or in what

letters

*i

Kushoi (*A*OO a hard-

*.

ening,
\.

&

and Rukok (^3O>) a

softening are found.

Those which are ever aspirated

A A A A A 2 A A A

o4

2a

(
.

\.

Rem. 3).

a .o

Find those, which are aspirated on page

and
Rem. by Tr.).
(5.
2.

fc

A AA A 2 A A A

2)3>>

>

aA

>

>

>

>A

z>

first

^ ^D

Oir3

rr

EXERCISE SECOND

ASPIRATES.

261

EXPLANATIONS.
word

a) Versel.
r

Rem.

2.

).

($.

V.I. w.2.,

h)

ple syllable

1.,

is

aspirated as

it

closes the syllable

c. a).

aspirated as

is

Rem.

5. 2.

c. c.,

it

and

follows an open or sim$ 15. 4. d).

A is aspirated, because a letter, which would

take
a vocal Sheva, precedes it ( 5. 2. Rem.
Hebrew,

O
in

V.I. w.4.,

c. b).

V. 2. w.

'/)

with

(5.

2.

4.,

is

e) V.3. w.2., . is
5. 2. Rem. c. c).

/) V.3.

aspirated as the preceding

word ends

Rem.a).
aspirated as

A is

w.4.,

follows an open syllable

it

aspirated because

it

follows a letter

which would in Hebrew take a vocal Sheva, (

5. 2.

Rem.

preceded by a

letter

c. b).

g) V.3. w.4.,

aspirated as

is

it is

which would in Hebrew take a composite Sheva and would

of course be vocal (5.
h) V.3. w.5., 2>

(5.

2.

Rem.

k) V.4. w.7.,

Rem.

m
ble

b).
it

follows an open syllable

is

aspirated as the preceding

word ends

a).

is

aspirated as

it

closes a syllable

5. 2.

> is

aspirated as

it

closes a syllable

5. 2.

c. a).

V. 1 0. w.

c.

c. a).

V.7. w.4.,

1)

Rem.

Rem.

c. c).

V.4. w.7., >

i)

in

Rem.

5. 2.

2.

aspirated as

is

5. 2.

4., r is

Rem.

aspirated as

it

follows an open sylla-

c. *c).

Find those which are not aspirated'

3.

EXPLANATIONS.
a) Verse

word

5.

1.
>.

word 1.,
Rem. a).

is

not aspirated as

it

begins a

GRAMMAR

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC

262

I) V.4. w.l.,
($5. 2. Rem.a),

is not aspirated though

because it begins a verse.

it is

preceded byl

Y.6 w.3., A is not aspirated as it is preceded by a letwhich, in Hebrew, would not take a vocal Sheva, and
which has no vowel ( 5.2. Note by Tr.).
c)

ter,

d)
abet,

For the pronunciation of these

and 1. Rem. 3, 4.

aspirates see the Alph-

REM.
when aspirated is sounded like v, and when not aspirated like b ; r like th in that, when aspirated, but otherwise like d ;
)
when aspirated is sounded like pk or /, aud otherwise like p ;
A when aspirated like th in thin, in other situations like t ;
.

is

sounded

like

g hard whether

it

be

aspirated

or

not *

when

aspirated is sounded like hk or Ik with a rolling of the

in other situations like k.
In general the aspirates are
palate
pronounced like the corresponding letters in Hebrew (vid. references above and Gesenius' Hebrew Grammar by Conant,
6. 2. 3. and
;

Note by

Tr.).

EXERCISE THIRD.
1
(

3.

4 and Hem.).

Find the diacritical points for which the vowels

are designed to compensate, formerly used instead of
vowels and for other purposes
:

OCTIO

IOCTI

12] u>]L

001

* The
aspiration of
palate.

1^ ^1^ ^ 01 'Zooi

]A\ ocn

TOCTI ] 2]> IOCFI

1ooi> ]ooi 0010

4d> fooi.

would be indicated by the

rolling of the

EXEKCISE THIRD

DIACRITICAL POINTS.

263

EXPLANATIONS.
REM.

Diacritical points sometimes

1.

persons of verbs

RKM.

4.

mark

particular tenses

and

Rem.).

The vowel system of the Syrians began to be introduced

Mohammed. Then and even after the system was

2.

in the time of

completed by introducing characters from the Greek vowels, the

ancient diacritical points were used to some extent by many writers.

They

are

now

seen in the more ancient writings.

The diacritical points here presented and others, appear

Syriac writings, perhaps from the fact that they have
been copied from more ancient editions, and in some cases doubtThe several
less, directly from the oldest editions of the Peshito.
editions have been copied with so much care, that even after the
vowel system came into use, the diacritical points, which had been
REM.

3.

in ancient

used long before, were copied as well as the more recent vowels.
Thus appear sometimes two characters to represent one vowel sound.
As later editions have appeared, however, those points have graduvowels substituted, though, some remnants of
ally been omitted and
the old system are

a)

Verse

1.

(2;

3;

4).

]A. The diacritical point under \

4.,
principles laid down byLudov. deDieu,indi-

word

according to the
catcs the

still left

vowel

H
.

We have then here the

vowel and the

ancient diacritical point for which the vowel compensates

(4. Rem.).
b)

V.I. w.

5.,

ooio.

The

point under

Ol,

according to

Amira, indicates
c)

V.3. w.

2.,

(4.Rem.).

^to.

The

point under -i indicates, ac-

cording to Ludov. de Dieu, the vowel

<[)

V.3. w.

3.,

looi.

(4. Rem.).

Diacritical points are often placed

under and over the radical letters of verbs,sometimes to distinguish particular persons and sometimes to indicate vowels
In the imperative and infinitive it may
3. Item. 1).
(vid. T
be wholly omitted or inserted underneath (vid. 4.Rem.; also compare Hoffmann's Syriac Gram.

14).

264

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

EXERCISE FOURTH.
1 4
Find

the

Long and Short vowels

Find the Long ones

I.

3.

Hem.

3).

EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 1., JL _I are both long as they are
lowed by - quiescent ( 3. Rem. 3. b).
b)

Y.l. w.5., _l

c)

Y.

1.

w.

11.,

is

_L

long because o quiesces in

is

long as

it

2.

other instances need no explanation.

Find the Short vowels

it.

has a quiescent (13.

Rem.).

The

fol-

1.

EXERCISE FIFTH

WIMPLE SYLLABLES.

265

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse

word

1.

2.,

_L

is

short as

it is

a regular short

vowel.
b)

V.

w.

1.

^L

10.,

is

short as Olaph

movable, not

is

quiescing.
c)

V.

3.

w.

1.,

JL

is

short as

it

has not O quiescing in

it

(3. Rem.3).
REM.

In v.l. w.2., ... and several other short vowels on page

form dipthongs with O and
These quiescent letters do not
but melt into them to
fully coalesce with their respective vowels
a greater extent than they would do in Hebrew, under similar circumstances. They can scarcely, therefore, be considered as raorable consonants, as they would be in Hebrew.
Still the vowels in
these cases are heterogeneous and the quiescents do not sufficiently
coalesce, in our estimation, to make the vowels long (vid. Gesen.
Heb. Gram, by Conant, 8. 4 ; Uhlemann 1. Rem.4).
first,

EXERCISE FIFTH.
f
Find

the

Simple and Mixed

JC

;J3 *A|

OA

oA IOGI 001
'

*A

*".

aA OJ

|i01

&o

Lo

*'W

i o.|

Us

]Al

01 ]j

**

|.*
*

]>

V ^

Icn

cL

*V

U*
fc

QA
en

**1*

^J. 1 Ut O01O QJ (901 Ar>

r

|O01

1 *

|O

**\oh ]ooi ^\^>

Lc |o A*
/

1 ^'

OA

IOT tjf

4).

* ^*t
K
W*
Vl* *>
|001 SO |AA 0010 LO A-^ *j|

ooi

(15. 8 and

/Syllables

Find the Simple Syllables

I.

5.

(001

V"*

MO|A
*.

AjO

QA

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

266
*

0>0l
**1

VA

10

*>

OJ |J01

(Z

IV

JO

Q-J T>oi

I'ooi

&

w.01

ft

1J

'A

001 ]OG1 QJ

1> 12

JJC7I

?
|

W GU)
*

(J

n?

])O1

loOl 10

|_T3

EXPLANATIONS.
REM. A simple syllable terminates in a vowel sound, and that
vowel sometimes has a vowel letter quiescing in it. A mixed syllable terminates in one or more movable consonants.
Every vowel
stands in a simple syllable when the following consonant takes a
vowel.

u^

is a simple syllable as it ends in a

a) Verse 1. word 1.,
vowel sound, although it has a quiescent * has a vowel of
its own and is of course sounded with the following syllable
15. 4. d).
(vid. 1" 5. 1. Bern., and
;

b) V.I. w.2.,
jl is simple for the same reason as last,
the syllable ending with ** and not with A (vid. 15. 4.d).

Y.I. w.2., oA is a dipthong and should be considered,

think, as a simple syllable because o coalesces in the
vowel to such an extent that the syllable ends in a vowel
sound, though the coalescence is not so perfect as in a reguc)

we

Some may regard o as a movable

consonant as it would be in Hebrew, under similar circumstances, but we incline to the former opinion (vid. ^[4. 2.
Rem. Gesen. Heb.Gram. by Oonant, 8.4).
lar case of quiescence.

d) V.I. w.4.,
e)

JsO is

V.l.w. 4., lA!^

simple (vid. reference above).

is

/)

V.I. w.5., ooio

g) V.I. w.10., 1

a vowel of

its

is

simple, 1 quiescing in
is

o quiescing.
which follows Olaph has

simple, the last

simple as

own.

it

h) V.I. w.ll., lo is simple, Olaph quiescing in

seldom quiesces in that vowel (vid 13.1 Rem.

1. 3. e).
i)

V.

otiant

3. w.2.,

IQ

is

simple, 1 quiescing in

though
compare
,

and

^ being

Tt

EXERCISE FIFTH

MIXED SYLLABLES.

is simple as
longs to the next syllable (15.

is

267

a long vowel and

2> be-

4. d).

V.4. w.5., aA is a dipthong

1)
as _* melts into the vowel to such
!><

ly

and ends in a vowel sound

an extent that it can harda movable consonant as it would be in

considered as
choose then to place the syllable

Hi -brew.

We

among

simple ones ; wU. in verse 4. word 7., and %*Ol in verse

word 8, are similar instances (vid.^[4.2.Rem. ; ^[5.1.c).

7.

m) V.4. w.6., cu is simple as O quiesces in

making it
a long vowel, and 01 belongs to the next syllable (15.4.d).
ri)

V.7. w.3., ccA is simple as Ol belongs to the penult

and follows a long vowel (15.4. d. : compare IT I.

syllable
2. d).

Find the Mixed Syllables

2.

* ZoL

A^-m

ZoL

y>* oi>

'Zooi

01%

^SJD

01
*

01
?

501

Nn\

ut_L

oi r ,-

EXPLANATIONS.
Verse 1. word 1., /u is mixed as
</)
sonant sound (vid. 1" 5.1. It-em.).
b)

(vid.

V.I. w.

9.,

Zo

is

c] V.3. w.2., oi r is mixed as Ol

course movable ( 13. Rem.).

rf)

V.7. w.7.,

(vid.

15.4,

it,

and

ends with a con-

mixed, ending in a consonant sound

5,l.Rem.).

not quie.sce in

it

pj

in

Hebrew and

is

of

is short when O does

kO> is mixed as
and the following consonant has no vowel

3.

Rem.3).

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

268

EXEECISE SIXTH.
1
Find

the

Pure, Impure,
45.

6.
vowels

48. A).

Find the Pure vowels

1.

and Immutable

Mutable

EXPLANATIONS.
REM.

An

is one with which no consonant

one with which a consonant coalesces.

pure vowel,

impure vowel

is

colesces.

is pure* as the syllable oA is a

a) Verse 1. word 2.,
o
3. Rem. 4
also Palfrey's Gram.
2), and
dipthong (vid.
does not fully quiesce in _!_, though it so far coalesces that
it can hardly be considered as a movable consonant.
Still
as the vowel is a heterogeneous one and O does not fully
coalesce in it, we scarcely feel authorized to place the vowel
among the impure ones, though some may prefer to do so,
1"5. 1. c. and 1 ; Gesenius' Heb. Gram(vid. T 4 2. Rem.
mar by Conant, 8.4 compare 15. 4. d; also ^[ 6.2. Rem.,
:

and
1}

6.1. Rem.).

V.I. w.9.,

pure as O does not quiesce in it, being

^ preceding being pronounced

is

movable consonant and

with a vocal sheva.

It is also

mutable

^[ 6. 4. b

).

IMPURE VOWELS.

EXERCISE SIXTH

269

is pure as
c) V.I. w. 10.,
Olaph does not quiesce in
that vowel.
Olaph is here a movable consonant according
to the analogy of the Hebrew (vid.l. Rem.4.;also Geseniusr

Heb. Gram, by Conant,

V.3. w.5.,

<l)

(the

23.2).
first

one)

movable consonant does not quiesce

is

in

pure f as 1 being a
_L (vid. last referen-

ces).

V.3. w. 7.,

e)

pure as O

is

is

movable, Ol being sound-

had Sbeva, and forming a part of the syllable.

T
is pure and immutable as Ol does not
V.3.
w.9.,
f)

ed as

if it

quiesce in

it,

being a guttural (comp.

g) V.4. w.5.,
above).

is

h) V.7. w.3.,

is

pure as _iA

pure as Ol

is

^f

! 2.

a).

a dipthong (vid. a

is

a guttural.

is pure as Ol is
fi in Hebrew and is of
t) V.7. w.9.,
course a movable consonant (vid. 13.Rem. _i. is also mutable according to the general rule (^[6. 2. Rem.).

Find the Impure voxels

2.

EXPLANATIONS.
and
are both impure vowels
a) Verse 1. word 1.,
as they have -i quiescing in them.
f

__

is

also

immutable

^[ 6. 4

).

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

270

b) V.I. w.3.,
6. 1. e).

is

impure

as 1 quiesces in

it

(compare

is impure asOlapli quiesces in it,

c) Y.I. w.ll.,
though
does not often quiesce in that vowel ( 13. 1 and Eem.).
The other cases are similarly explained.

it

REM. As a general thing, those vowels, which are pure are mutahle and those which are impure are immutable ; hut there are as
in Hebrew many exceptions (vid. ^[ 6. 1. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i).

Find the Mutable vowels (compare

3.

Rem.)

1f 6. 2

EXPLANATIONS.
)

Verse

1.

word

ble (compare ^[

is

10.,

to the general rule (vid.

*|[

mutable

6. 1.

as

(also pure, according

it is

in a simple sylla-

6. 4. d).
41

b)

V.3. w.2.,

is

mutable as

it

has no quiescent and

is

long.
c)

V.4. w.2.,

is

mutable as

it

is

in a simple sylla-

ble.

4.

Find the Immutable vowels

EXEKCISE SEVENTH

DIPTHONGS.

271

EXPL AN ATION8.
Those vowels are immutable,a8 in Hebrew ; in which either
from which a vowel letter has fallen away;

REM.
a vowel

letter quieeces; or

short vowels in mixed syllables which would inllebrew takeDaghesh

and vowels immutable by nature.

forte;

o)

Verse

1.

word

are both immutable as well as

1.,

impure, having quiesccnts.

is in a
b) V.I. w.2.,
simple syllable, is pure, and cannot
properly be considered as immutable though O coalesces
will it to some extent (vid. ^[4.2. Hem.
^[5.1.c T6.1.a).
i

c)

over So

V.l.w.4.,

lA^SiD

is

derived from

^o

is

immutable by position as
Ml verb, and the L is in

reality doubled and the first would, if expressed, take Linea

This is similar to Daghesh forte in Hebrew, and
occultans.
inn !<-, us in that language, the
preceding vowel impure and

immutable (compare
<l)

l.g)

48.B.Feminines).

V.I. w. 10.,

is

short but in a simple syllable

1"5.

and consequently not immutable.

V.I. w.10.,
(the first one) is immutable by nature
A. Masculines)
it is sometimes,
however, like all the
other vowds, mutable (vid. Ifnl.b;
45.2.b) as in "Hebrew
(vid. Stuarts' Ileb. Gram. 127).
e)

(48.

/) V.I. w.ll,

is

immutable as

quiescesin

it

6.

2. c).
</)

V.3. w.l.,

syllable.

is

immutable as

it is

in a short

mixed

272

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GBAMMAK.

EXEECISE SEVENTH.
1
Find

the J)ipthongs, Quiescents

7.

and

13;

Find the Dipihongs

I.

Gram.

2)

o_

Otiant Letters

14).

3.

Eem. 4

Palfrey's

o__ o

o_ o_

o_

EXPLANATIONS:
o_

is a dipthong as o is in the same

<z) Verse 1. word 2.,
syllable with _!_ without fully quiescing in it, though
O so melts into the vowel that the syllable may be considered as ending in a vowel sound (vid. T"4.2.Rem.; *J"5. 1. c and
1

Gesen.Heb.Gram. by Conant,
b) V-3. w.4.,

is

8. 4).

a dipthong for the same reason as

last.

c) Y.4. w.5., .__ is a dipthong as a unites with

does not fully quiesce in it (vid. references above).

but

REM. It will be observed that dipthongs in Syriac as well as in

Hebrew, are quiescent letters with heterogeneous vowels but in
Hebrew the quiescent letters are movable while the reverse is true in
;

Syriac.

2.

Find the

Qwiescents

- ^ -llol -1 111 -T ol J - 1- * 1 ]
- o all o ol ol oil 111 a
Ul

UU

EXERCISE SEVENTH

ioi

nin

273

OTIANT8.

u oinnn

oiui-

EXPLANATIONS:

a) Verse 1. word 1., ^ is a quiescent as

sound of the preceding vowel (13.3).

it

unites with the

a regular quiescent letter

but does not
it
forms
a
though
dipthong and
so melts into the vowel that the syllable may be considered
as ending with a vowel sound (via. *|7.1.a).
b)

V.I. w.2 M

is

iv fully quiesce,

c)

O is not quiescent as it is a movable consonnot being sounded. The following } however qui-

V.I. w.3.,

ant, 01

esces in the preceding vowel.

d) V-l. w.5., O (the first one) is
in Uebrew take a vocal Sheva
in JL

movable as
the

e)

(vid.

V.I. w.9 M

does not

it

would

second O quiesces

quiesce in

as

it is

movable

16. l.b).

/) V.I. w.ll., 1 quiesces in

usual (13. l.Rem.).

IX

though

it is

rather un-

quiesces in

Find the

3.

Otiant Letters

~i.~i<~i._<_iwj._>_.t
a)

fix

Verse

and

is

1.

word

2., ** is

otiant as

not followed by OOl (vid.

b) V.3. w.2., t

is

otiant because

it is

a part of the suf-

14. 2. b).
it

follows a quiescent.

74

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

EXEKCISE EIGHTH.
1
P P

87

FindLinece, Marhetono (jl^Ol^D),

Sheva, where there

is

\9

Mehagyono

(p-..,iOlk>),

no accumulation of consonants.
i

Find instances of Marhetono and Mehagyono

1.

EXPLANATIONS:
a) Verse 5. word 7., >> Here is an accumulation of consonants,and to indicate that they could not all be sounded conveniently, Marhet<5no (or a horizontal line) would regularly
be placed over >
In this case the > would in Hebrew take
silent Sheva.
> must of course be pronounced with a vocal

Sheva (vid.7).
REM.
first

1.

There seems to be no instance of Mehagyono on the

page. A.T.Hoffmann in his

instance.

is

to be

SyriacGrammar gives (A^**)

sounded as though a short

as

an

e followed it

7).

(vid.

REM.
there

The x

is

2.
It appears that Marhetono indicates silent Sheva when
an accumulation of vowelless consonants, but under no other

silent Sheva, in reality, frequently occurs as

circumstances, though
*
^

in
is

is

Hebrew.

So Mehagyono represents vocal Sheva only when there

a similar accumulation of vowelless consonants,though

no accumulation vocal Sheva often occurs.

2.

Find instances of Simple vocal Sheva

when

there

EXERCISE EIGHTH

VOCAL SHEVA.

275

EXPL AN ATION8.
Q

would, in Hebrew, take a vocal

a) Verse 1. word 1.,
Shcva, and as it cannot well be pronounced without the aid
This canof a vowel or half vowel we must use the Sheva.
not be considered as an instance of Mehagydno, for there is
no accumulation of consonants which are destitute of vowels
According to Lud. de Dieu and Norberg, the
(vid. $ 7).
Syrians <//</ use the Sheva and pronounced consonants accordingly, as in Ilebrew (vid. 5.1).
6)

va

V.

like

RKM.

1.

w.4., i* should

a under a
We

be pronounced with a vocal She-

(vid. references above).

no characters to indicate Sheva and seldom any

find

Marhetono and Mehagyouo, still we are to pronounce

the consonants where those characters would regularly occur, as we
should if they had actually appeared.
indicate

to

a is pronounced with a Sheva. The prec) V.3. w.5.,

en ling syllable being simple,
belongs to the final syll>

able.

makes a part of the

d) V.3. w.9., 01

syllable of the

first

word and should not be pronounced with vocal Sheva.

is pronounced with a vocal Sheva as
e) V.6. w.3.,

it

constitutes a part of the penultimate syllable, being preceded

by a long vowel ( 15.4).

should
/) V.9. w.9.,
(vid. last reference).

be pronounced with a vocal Sheva

3.
Find the silent Shevas, where there is no
cumulation of consonants destitute of vowels

ac.

.* r 01 ca

>

01

01

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse

1.

word

1.,

A would

reguhirly in

Hebrew take a

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

276

Shcva (vid. Conants' Gesen. Ileb.Gram.

b and Bern.).

silent
2. a.

10; also

*[8.

b) V.I. w/2., o would in Hebrew take a silent Sheva, being a movable consonant at the end of a syllable but in
Syriac it so melts into its vowel,that the syllable may be coneidered as terminating in a vowel sound, and O does not
take silent Sheva (vid. ^[ 4. 2. Kem. ; comp. references
;

above).
c) V.3. w.l.,

^ takes

silent

Sheva

as

it

closes a sylla-

ble.

Ol

d) V.3. w.2.,

is

a movable consonant at the end of a

fl in Hebrew and takes silent

syllable being equivalent to

Sheva.
OT is at the end of a mixed
e) V.3. w.9.,
syllable with a
short vowel, and takes silent Sheva though a guttural (vid.

^[8.4.d; l"6.1.f

comp. Gesen. Heb. Gram, by Conant,

22.

3).

a dipthong. It
/) V.4. w.5., A forms with the vowel
would in Hebrew be pronounced as a movable consonant
and take a silent Sheva
but in Syriac it so melts into its
vowel that it can hardly be considered as a movable consonant and does not take a silent Sheva (vid. ^[4. 2. Rem.;
;

18.3.b).
g) V.9.W.5., * takes a silent Sheva as it is preceded
short vowel and ends the antepenultimate syllable.

4.

Find instances of Composite Sheva

by a

GiAcnoicnoioioioioioioioioioi*
Verse 3. word.3., Ol would in Hebrew take a compoSheva and is pronounced as though it did here (vid.
Gesen. Heb. Grammar by Oonant, 22. 3 ^[1.2.a).
a)

site

b) Verse 3. w.6., ** takes composite sheva for similar reasons as in the case above.

EXERCISE NINTH

LINEA OCCULTANS,

277

Ol does not take composite Sheva but silent

c) V.3.W.9.,
Sheva simple as in Hebrew. The Gutturals take simple
Sheva where other consonants would take silent Sheva
(Gesen.Heb.Gram. by Conant,22.3).

Ol takes composite

.4. w.6.,

Sheva

(vid.

a above).

EXERCISE NINTH.
1

9.

Find instances of Linea Occultans

(8)

O1O1O1O1O1O1O1O1O1O1OI*
EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse

1.

word

2.,

indicating that the Ol

is

is an instance of Linea occultans,

not sounded (vid. 8
12.1. A. aud

OJ

B., also Rem.).

V.I. w.3., OJ is another instance of Linea occultans.

horizontal line under Ol shows that the letter is not to
be pronounced. In this case o begins the syllable. The
othe cases are similarly explained.
b)

The

EXERCISES IN SYBIAC GRAMMAR.

278

EXBECISE TENTH.
1

10.

Find on what Syllables the Tone

x

V*

u]

"

>

ZOOI

LO,.

a*

Ol->

O1)

A*

(001 J

oul

'

K0

501 tA_l

|>

\O

C*
M ^001

* *t

^So

i" v
ZoA

*v

9)
i

''v

-^

O1 r

x n

0*P0

(OO1 1

|,-M

fcS*.

fc*.
QJ 1 0010 QJ OA >Ol

.*

cnSn* ^_i 01

V
|

(OO1

10

*l

%a]

*^'
01,.

tf '

o> JOT \VL

*.**.
7*
>O1 \SA O-J

1^ ii

^1 jooi

l*t.tt*'

OOl (OO1 QJ

(J

"

CUJ

O1 r

,_.!D

'

|ocn

*,

[>

'r*.^

')

?>

*i

Zo^ ^

(001
7

"*

y1
w.j

oi_o

QJ ^al

1>

(J

AA.A

JOOI

%A]

'

OOI SO Ol
f *

fooi Lo 0010 Lo

rests (

|OO1

]OO1

10

II*
|J

EXPLANATIONS.
Yerse

a)

1.

word

the tone because

and

it

1.,

Ala

is

the final syllable and takes

ends with a movable consonant

9.1

2).
_T

b)

oA
Ol

is

V.I. w.2.,

a| takes the tone, as

not movable (vid. ^[4. 2. Rem.;

wa are not sounded.

in the final syllable

*|"8. 3.

9.1

and

2).

and

c) Y.I. w.4., l> is the penultimate syllable and has the

tone according to the general rule (9.1).
*

d) Y.S. w.2., oi r is the final syllable

because Ol is movable.

and takes the tone

MARKS OP PUNCTUATION. 279

EXERCISE ELEVENTH

V.3. w.5., 1 is the penultimate and takes the tone.

belongs to the last syllable (15. 4. d).

e)
>

/) V.4. w.5., tOOl takes the tone because

movable consonant.

it

ends with a

Qa

is inserted above as receiving the tone

w.3.,
to
the
general rule, though it is somewhat doubtaccording
ful whether, in such cases the tone was on the penultimate or

g) V.5.

ultimate syllable ( 9. 1. Bern.).

favor the former opinion; there

same kind

Euphony would seem

is

to

another instance of the

in v.7. w.3.

EXERCISE ELEVENTH.
f

11.

Find the Marks of Punctuation (10)

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse

1.

word

4.,

is

mark of punctuation more gen-

erally used to denote the end of a period, but sometimes

used in the middle to denote a slight pause similar perhaps
to our comma.
It is used so here (l0.d).
6)

V.I. w.l5.,

c) V.5. w.4.,

denotes the
indicates the

full close

of the period.

end of the protasis (10.a).

d) V.5. w.7 M * is supposed to indicate the longest pause

of any mark of punctuation. It is sometimes written tnus :i
(10.c).
*
indicates the end of the apodosis(vid.10.c).
e} V.6. w.5.,

280

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

EXEKOISB TWELFTH.
f

12.

Find instances of Ribui (6)

*

r >

..rnn v\^rt

1M> |^MO

EXPLANATIONS.
over the word is an instance of
a) Verse 3. word 4.,
Ribui indicating that the preposition has a plural suffix (
16.0).
6.1.Rem.;
b) V.4. w.2., here Ribui indicates that the noun over
which it is placed is in the plural number though it is rendered as if it were in the singular. This word occurs only
in the plural form (44.Rem.6). The same is true in respect
to v.4. w.4.
c) V.4.W.7., Ribui indicates simply the plural form of the
noun as above.

EXERCISE THIRTEENTH.
f
Read the Syriac

13.

:
r

Verse
aithau

//

vo

1.,

B erish'ith
/

aithau
/

vo meletho
v*hu mel'tho
~
t

>

voth aloho. valoho aithau vo hu meletho.

EXERCISES IN 8TRIAG GRAMMAR,

V.

2.,

hono aithau vo

3.,

* .'" .
:
_'
kul bidheh hhe vo v'vel'odhau ophelo hh'dho hhvoth
;

V.

281

v*rishith

voth aloho.

.'

medh6m dahhvo.
V.

hhaye hh*vo. v*hhaye aithayhun nuhro

b6h

4.,

dhavnaynosho.
V.

5.,

v ehu nuhero v'hheshuko man hurt v*hheshuko lo

V.

6.,

hhe vo varnosho dheshtadhar me"n aloho * shem6h

yuhhanon.
V.

7.,

hono etho

sohedhutho dh'nashedh al nuh*ro.

d'kulnosh n'haymen bidheh.

/

V.

9.,

'

e
V. 8., lohu he vonuh ro.

elo dh'nashedh al nuh'ro.

nuhero dhashroro-.dh'manhar lekulnosh

aithau vo ger

detho rol*mo.

__
mo h

V.

10.,b ol

vo. v*olemo v'idheh h*vo. v'ol'mo lo yadheh.

EXPLANATIONS.
X

a)

Verse

1.

word

ing a syllable of

brew, and
b)

V.

1.

is

1.,

itself.

*r

The

is
e

the

first syllable,

pronounced like a very short

w.

2.,

*1

is

O not mak-

answers to the Sheva in Hee,

perhaps best pronounced like

ai,

In oA, o havthough the a sound is scarcely perceivable.

ing a heterogeneous vowel, does not fully quiesce, still it so
melts into the vowel that it can hardly be considered as a

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAifMAR.

282

movable consonant (vid T4.2. Rem.).

it takes Linea occultans (8) and the
c)

Ol

is

not sounded as

** is otiant

14. 2).

is not sounded on account of Linea

and o becomes vocal by beginning a syllable.

V.I. w.3., IOOT. OJ

occultans,

d) Y.I. w.10., 1 is
sound that it

the a

a.

pronounced

Olaph so unites

with.

scarcely "perceivable in pronunciation, though being at the beginning of a syllable it is a

It is at the same time a gutregular movable consonant.
tural letter and must have the sound of the Spiritus lenis of
is

the Greeks (vid. 11.2.Rem.).

is pronounced broad and long as
e) Y.I. w.ll., }o. _L
has a quiescent (13.1. Rem.).

it

3 is pronounced thus kul, u taking the

/) Y.3. w.l.,
broad and short sound. The -L. is short here as it has no
quiescent (vid. 3. Rem. 3).
:

g) Y.3.W.2., oi,-4s bi'dheh.

otiant.

quiesces in JL, and

movable consonant though a guttural

/

Ol is a

v"veleothau.

h) Y.3.W.4.,

vocal Sheva (vid. 1"8.2).

* as well as OJ

pirated.

-i

is

letter.

must be sounded with a

being preceded by a vowel

is as-

is otiant.

. a

i)

"

movable and pronoun_L has a broad and short

Y.3. w.9., fOOflj dahhvo.

ced with the

sound.

first

syllable.

is

5>.

j ) Y.4.

Ol

w.5., **A thay.

is

short and broad as

it

has

no quiescent though -

so melts into the vowel that it

can hardly be considered as a movable consonant (vid. ^f 4.
2. Rem.).
/

k) Y.6.W.I.,
is

vocal and

]ooi hhe vo.

]

Ol is

quiesce? in J_

pronounced with Sheva.

EXERCISE FOURTEENTH

TRANSLATION.

283

EXERCISE FOURTEENTH.
1 14
Translate

Verse

1.

lie

(or it the)

or

it (the)

Literally

In (the) beginning was (the) Word and

Word was with God and God was he

Word.

2.

This was in (the) beginning with God.

3.

Every

(thing)

by

(the)

hand of him was

and

without him also not anything was which was.

4.

lives

/>.

eth
;ui(l

In him life (lit. lives) was, and life was

were) (the) light of (the) sons of man.

And

he

(lit_

it) light, into (the) darkness, shinor

(lit. causing
permitting to shine
23.2.a.#),
did
not comprehend it.
darkness
(the)

6.

(There)

(or

was a son of man, who was sent from

God, whose name

(lit.

the

name of him)

(was) John.

This (man) came for a witness, who shall

(should) bear witness concerning (the) light, that every man might believe through (the) hand of him.
7.

8.

(came

He

was not

(lit.

tor a witness)

ing (the) light.

not he was) (the) light

but

who might bear witness concern-

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

284

For

9.

was (the) light of truth, which

who cometh into (the)
man,
every

(that light)

shineth 'upon
world.

(He) was in (the) world

10.

(lit.

world was)
(the) world did

in the

world was by his hand and

and

(the)

not

know

him.

EXPLANATIONS:
Yerse

a)

word

1.

A^JU^.

1.,

In translating

this

word,

no distinct character in Syriac for

It was originally expressed by the
the definite article.
noun in the emphatic state but this is by no means uniThere are many cases, as in tlebrew.
versal in laterSyriac.
in which the definite and indefinite articles have no word
nor character to represent them, and they must be supplied
the is

There

supplied.

is

in translating

V-1. w.2

b)

(45.1).

and 3., TOOI ^oioAaf was.

The

substan-

tive

verb ]ooi

to

be,iu connection

with the other substantive

to be, (third person masculine

imperfect tense, was (38.1,2).

verb A^l

.-iCnoA*])

forms the

001 is a pronoun of the masculine

c) V.I. w.5., OO1O
gender. It is pleonastic md need not be rendered (55). As
the neuter gender in Syriac is included in the masculine

and feminine oqi might be considered

masculine and may mean he or it (43).
_

d) V.3. w.3., |ooi is rendered was,

without wOioZu]
e)

V.3. w.7.,

(vid.

opi

is

is

and

is

in the imperfect

65.B.a).

rendered was, same as

\t>

same

either as neuter or

last.

The

true in respect to fooij (v.3. w.9).

/) V.3.
together.

w.6.,

The

fU* and
first

should be taken
J>ojLk5 (v.3. w.8)
'any and the second something or

means

EXERCISE riFTKKNTH

Taken

limit/.

toiretln-r

ril.\.N;KS

OF CONSONANTS. 285

they should be rendered any thing.

The noun always

is rendered life.
form though it usually takes a singular
iiii-anin^ and has sometimes a singular and sometimes a pluHere it takes a verb singular and in v.4. w.4., a
ral verb.
verb plural.
Y.-l.

<!)

i-i-M

w.2.,

the plural

t:iki's

of

tin-

jouio

is a
participle but
tense
of
the
verb (64.2.A.
present

h) V.5. w.4.,

it

is

used instead

andRem.;

also ^f

18.5).
t)

V.6. w.3.,

>>A}> means

(lit.)

is

sent;

but with ]oOl

it

forms the imperfect tense.

EXERCISE FIFTEENTH.
1
Find

the

Changes of Consonants

Added

Dropped

Assimilated

Transposed

Exchanged (12).

Find those which are changed by assimila-

1.

tion

15.

All of those letters which take Linea occultans, are in reality assimilated (vid.

Find those which are changed by transposi-

2.

tion

12.

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse

6.

word

3.,

i?A*|>

is

in

the Ethpa. conjugation

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

286

and A are transposed, the appropriate place

and

ing before

for

A be

(12.2).

Find those
dropped :

been

which have

Consonants

3.

nnnnnnn

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse

1.

word

4.,

]t&&

from

is

A\V>>

flic, const.

1 is

dropped.
b)

V.3. w.2., O1,

fc>. 1 final is

dropped to give place

for

the suffix.
c)

(37

V.3, w.7., 2ooi

dropped to form the feminine

is

Table).

d) V.4. w.7., l*-L*-iDj. 1 is

e)

Y.5. W.4., >OUio*

is

dropped before the second

dropped

J.

after the preforma-

tive So*

/) V.7.

w.7.,

and

v.9.

w.

^Ailoj.

7.,

is

dropped be-

fore l.
.

g) V.7. w.8.,

SfiiOlJ*

] is

dropped before S0

Find consonants which are added

4.

1A o 1A

-iOio

^010

wiOio

]A

o
s 1 -D 1 01 o wcno 1 Z > 01 o 1 ] ^oou
'|o'|Sool1oi]> |Aloil1jj1> ^ou a
1

? 1

<

01

01

-010

l;ioi?ilolol>

01

EXPL AN ATIONS.
a) Yerse

1.

word

1.,

A^i_j>.

is

added as a

prefix.

CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 287

EXERCISE FIFTEENTH
V.I. w.2., ^oioA^f.

1)

is

is

added from the construct

prosthetic (38.1). **C3lo

is

suffix.

and

V.I. w.4., ]A\k).

c)

added because the word

1 is

is

state

in the emphatic state.

.,

d) V.I. w.10., (OL^.

state (^[18. y).

added

is

at the

end

to

form the

emphatic

%9

&

V.2. w.l., poi. Perhaps

<

ded here because poi seems

of

iOi,

should be considered as adbe a kind of emphatic state

to

though we have omitted

above as the word usual-

ly appears in the emphatic form.

V.3.W.6 ,1,^.

f)

Zooi. L

<7)V.3. w.7.,

V.4. w.2.,

//)

added

] is

>

is

to

added

form the feminine.

to

form the feminine.

added to form the emphatic

1 is

state

(11 8.v).

and

*|

jOOLAj). ^oou
at tin- beginning

V.4.W.6., ]joiOJ.

k)

(118.
1)

r
\v.. >.,

V.4.

i)

inflection

in

the course of

prosthetic (38).

added to form the emphaticstate

is

added

is
is

y).

V.5.

tr.3.,

PQA**S.

is

added

is

a preformative occurring in

to

form the emphatic

state.
7

joilio. LD
w.4.,
the course of inflection.

m) V.5.

ri)

V.5. w.7., OL-DJjj.

is

added

in the

Aphel conjuga-

tion.
o) V.6. w.3., ??A*1>. A
inflection (coinp. 1"15.2 a).

j>)

V.7. w.l., >OI

i>.

and

are added in the course of

J is a j>re formative.

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

288

q) V.7. w.8.,
flection.

^-kuou

is

added in the course of

in-

**

V.8. w.6., >Ql-m J>

r)

^OU

added in the course of inflec-

J is

tion.

V.9. w.9., ]Vo

s)

\\S

is

added to form the emphatic

state.

5.

Find Consonants exchanged

for each other

There are no cases on page first. 1 is often exchanged

and vice versa. Other letters also exchange

for } before Ol

with each other (12.4).

EXEKCISE SIXTEENTH.
1
Find

1.

the

16.

changes of vowels thrown back

posed dropped and added (

trans-

exchanged
15).

Find those which are thrown back

EXPLANATIONS:
a)
i

Verse 1. word

tol(!5.2.A.b;
b)

2.,

^OT^U

'|*

_L

is

thrown back from

13,1.3).

Y.I. w.7., -oioA*1

same

as above.

KXKl,

*)

_L

d) V.3. w.2., Oir4^

account, of the suffi'x.
>')

\' .").

ioulo.

w.4.,
its

v)\vcl

participle k>

thrown back from

is

thrown back from

is

f*

to

1).
**

on

>>A|>

thrown back from

__i is

to

to j.

18.37), as the vowel -I. of the original form VJ,^ is

tuid ;i suffix appended (116.2. e, and4.Z ; ^[18.37).

Find those which are exchanged

*

to O.

the characteristic of Aphel is dropback upon the preformative of the

V.10. w.8., Ol-ir-l. _L falls back from

2.

28*>

falls

(23.

/) V.6. w.3.,
;/)

_L

V.I. w.ll., loi-^o.

ped and

CHANGES OF VOWELS.

IV.KNTII

for

for

(36;

dropped

for

EXPLANATIONS:
is
3. word 2., cn,-^ is derived from ,.
of
in
the
course
inflection
and
is
added
JL
and
JL
droj>ped
a
the
word
to
here
in
from
thrown back
1
(T"16.1.rf)
being

a)

Verse

the suffix state.

ed into
b)

Some would

JL, (T16.4.

V.4. w.7.,

and

]! i"m>

struct plural (45.2.a

T

c) V.5. w.4.,

prefer to say that

is

changed into

derived,

iouio. In the second

as the third radical of the

is

Resh (23

is

changed
verb from which iouio is
syllable,

T
,

and

IVal to Aphel.

v* V)iOU

is

derived from

it

^o|
*

ischang-

in the last part, into

But

1).
f

d) V.7. w.8.,
c ,l ij^o

in the con-

chang-

118.1).

into

is

5. d).

is

in

better to say that

passing from
*

is

dropped

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

290

added in one case,

the other (116.4.h 5.r).

and

and

dropped and

added in

xx

derived from ^r, and

has
the appearance of being changed into _L on "account of the
suffix (36.A.Rem.) but J_ is dropped and _L thrown back

V. 10.

e)

w.8.,

Ol.V,.

is

upon

(116.1.0 and 4.6; 118.37).

Find those vowels, which are transposed

3.

EXPLANATIONS.
with O is
a) Terse 4. w.6., IJOIQJ from >OU or >OOU.
transposed in the emphatic state from the last to the first
part of the word (vid-llS.y).

The other

cases are all similarly explained.

Find those vowels which are dropped

4.

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Yerse

word

1.

2.,

nOloA*} -has an additional

X

wiO!O__

but the original vowel

quiesces in
b)
_!_ is

V.I

it

making

w.4.,

]A^SP

it

is

immutable (vid.!5.3
derived from

dropped to form the construct

struct state

is

dropped

syllable

not dropped as w*

is

|)lO,

state

48. A).

construct Al^So.

and JL of the con-

in the emphatic state because the ad-

CHANGES OF VOWELS.

EXERCISE SIXTEENTH

291

dftional syllabi-;

V.3. w.2.,

c)

ami from
the

si

f/)

ped
e)

ili

tin;

added (vid.15.3; compare

is

emphatic

(compare

is

state,

dropped

is

dropped

to give place to

^[ 16.5.d).

V.3. w.6., }r** is the

feminine form of -*

is

drop-

16.5.7).

(vi.l.

I* !*)>

V.4. w.7., )

solute of

derived from H*

is

Ol,-*V-^

^[16.5.6).

Aia

is

dropped from the plural

in passing into the construct state (vid.

ab-

15.3,

"

and Rem.;

/)

V.5. w.7., Oiaijl

Aphel of ^o> with a

is

suffix pro-

of the verb is dropped and

noun. In taking the suffix,
of the suffix added (vid. Il6.5.?rc; 118.7).
g) V.7. w.3.,

AOJOIO&
"*

from the noun

is

in the feminine emphatic state,

*

>OICD, and, in

the course of inflection

is

dropped (vid.li6.5.^; 118.17).

*

h) V.7. w.8.,

is

^.SQ*OU

Aphel conjugation. In the course of

part of the word is dropped and

first

other vowels added (vid.^[16.5. r;

i)

V.9. w.5.,

!>;>

is

a verb from ^lof, and

inflection,

is

in the

in the

in the last part,

and

J[18.22).

compounded of > and f>^

The latter

a noun in the emphatic state from \

falls away in
taking an additional syllable (15. 3) to form the emphatic
state (vid. ^[ 16. 5. *
[ 18 32).
is

A-)

V.9.W.9.,

phatic

state

]Sn\v\

is

compounded of

and ]V>\%, em-

from 2oAi.
is
dropped in forming the em($lf>.31 as an additional syllable is received (^f

phatic. state
16.5.<; 118.36).

Z)

V.10. w.8.,

on,

is

a verb with a

suffix,

derived from

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

292

In taking the

upon the

radical

first

is

suffix,

(36

dropped and

falls

^[18. 37).

Find those vowels which are added

5.

back

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse

word

1.

is

^afloA*).

2.,

added in the course

of inflection as a part of the sufformative of the verb.

b) V.I. w.4.,

IA^D

is

struct state AALo.

16.4.6

c)

11^.

in the emphatic state

dropped and

is

from the con-

added (compare ^[

d).

V.I. w.10., ^OlSL

is

in the emphatic state, but as

it al-

ways appears in this state it is perhaps better not to place

(at the end of the word) among the vowels added.
-

..

and a new vowel,

is

Ir*].

_L

is

added

d) V.3. w.2., oi,_tt>

derived from

is

added.

is

dropped

Then from the emphatic

dropped to give place to the suffix with

46. 1. a ;
(via.
compare ^[16. 4. c

state

which
*|f

18.

ra).
__

e)

V.

3.

with the

f)

w.

4.j

T Om

*uQlo,S\)0

is

from

\AO

added

is

suffix.

V.3. w.6., lr** is the feminine

ped and -1 added.

form for H*

is

drop

CHANGES OP VOWELS.

EXERCISE SIXTEENTH
*

y) V.3. w.9.,

pronunciation

293

is

focnj.

assumed over

j to aid in the

(vid.^[18.i).

1} V.4. w.fl., IJOIQJ is derived from >OU or

in the emphatic state (vid.^flS.y).

joou.

is

added

V.4. w.7.,

i)
is

l*i^ia>.
.

at the

beginning of the word

is com-

The remainder of the word

Mssiunod (vid. 15.4.6).

0P"V

The former

pounded of JJJD and Uu|.

in the construct

is

and,in passing from the absolute to the construct plural,

plural,
X
7

added

dopped and

is

(vid.

15.3 and 4;

^fl'6. 4. e\

18.1).

pQ*a

k) V.5. w.3.,
emphatic state is the

V.5. w.4., iouio.

I)

This

is

from

more usual form.

This

is

^O.
JL

though the
added.

is

a participle active, Aphel,

The

from >ou.

first

assumed, forming a part of the

is

preforrnative (vid.^[l8.5).
*

V.5. w.7., OlO>> I

m)

is

a verb in the Aphel conjugation

assumed
from ^i>.
assumed with the suffix (vid.^16.4/; 118.7).

in the preformative.

is

n) V.(\ w.2.,

ded

pai-pO

T 7

emphatic state and

in the

is

also

ad-

(vid.l"l8.9).
7 f

o)

is

is

V.6. w.3.,

^*

>>A|>

is

^H

of
compounded
*

and the verb

is added as a
>>A], Ethpaal from >,**
part of the preThe first JL is assumed in the course of inflection

formative.
in Ethpaal.

p) V.7.

w.3.,

lAojOim.^

is

in the feminine emphatic state

from joico. In the course of inflection

and JL is dropped (vid.^[ 1 6.4#
([18.17).

and

are addrd

q) V.7. w.4., JOICQJJ is

compounded of the

relative >

and

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

294
*

the verb jcnmj,

Aphel of

in the course of inflection (vid.

*

r) Y.7.W.8.,

is

JOICD,

a verb in the Aphel conjugation

is

^SOiOU

from

In the course of inflection,

^StO|

of the

assumed in Aphel

18.18).

word

is

dropped and

in the first part

added, and in the latter part

ti

of the word,

is

dropped and

added

(^[16.4.

^[18.

22).
7

1 9'r9

latter is a

noun

compounded of

is

in the

emphatic

>

from

state

The

and ]>;*
\

If

or >;*.

considered as derived from the former, Z_ is dropped on account of the additional syllable (l5.3),and, in consequence,
>

_!_

having no vowels, > takes the new vowel _I_ (15. 4. 6).
also added to form the emphatic state (vid. ^[ 1 6.4. i

is

118.32).
V.9. w.9., ]SQ^>sL

is

compounded of

phatic state from SQAl*

phatic state as a syllable is

.4. A;

and ]V)\\, em-

is
dropped in forming the emadded (15.3), and _L is assumed

118.36).

EXERCISE SEVENTEENTH.
1
Find

the

Suffixes

and
lives

1.

17.

Prefixes, Sufformatives

(16;

77
Q

Find the Prefixes

7

Q ,Q & O A

36;

and Preforma-

46).

} A,

fi

f f

SUFFIXES AND PREFIXES. 295

EXERCISE SEVENTEENTH

>

1 a

EXPLANATIONS.
a)

Verse

b)

V.3. w.2.,

1.

word

JD is

thrown back upon

O is a prefix preposition.

1.,

a prefix preposition with the vowel

it.

> is a relative pronoun prefixed to the

V.3. w.9., >.
two rowelless consonants occurring together, _L is
assumed to aid in pronunciation. The other instances need

c)

verb, and,

no explanation

Find the Suffixes

2.

Ol_ wOlO_ Ol_ Ol_

Ol

Cl_ Gl_ Ol_

EXPLANATIONS:
n

a)

Verse

3.

word

is

2., (71

a suffix pronoun with

its

union vowel.
$)

V.3. w.4., wiOio..,

sition,

is

a suffix pronoun added to a prepo-

though the same form when attached

to AJ]

is

a suf-

formative.

REM.

We

use the terms sufformative and preformative to indi-

cate those letters which

sary appendages

in order

are suffixed or prefixed to words as neces-

form

to

moods, persons, numbers, gender* or

of inflection.

Such are

tute a part of the

word

men
to

particular

conjugations, tenses,

according to the course

formative letters and properly constistates,

which they are attached, while

suffixes

and prefixes are appendages which have more distinct significations

of themselves and do not necessarily compose a part of the word to
which they am attached.

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

296

Find the Preformatives

3.

So

V A T

-J

-tfu

-J

Lo

EXPLANATIONS.
a) Verse 1. word 2., } is, strictly speaking,a preformative
but the letter seems to constitute a part of the word through
all of its changes and does not so
properly come under this
head as it does under "consonants added"
;

6)

Y.5. w.4.,

So

a preformative added in the course of

is

inflection.
c)

V.5. w.7.,

a preformative added in the Aphel con-

} is

jugation.
d] V.6. w.3.,

are preformative letters

added in the

Ethpaal conjugation.
V.7. w.8.,

e)

JOU

is

a preformative added in the Aphel

future.

4.

Find the Sufformatives

7

no_ _cnc_

0.

|t\

?.

jicno_-.

L ^OCTL_"V
\

EXPLANATIONS:
a)

Verse

1.

word

^qio_

2.,

is

a sufformative as

it

forms,

according to the inflection, the third person singular masculine preterite, though it is in reality a noun suffix attached
.

to the original
b)

noun A*

V.I. w.4., VA

is

being.

the sufformative ending of the emphap

tic

state,

or rather 1

is

the ending of the emphatic state

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH

and A

ot

PARSE.

297

the construct from which the

emphatic

is

formed.
V.3. w.6.,

c)

the emphatic ending.

is

d) V.3. w.7., L takes the place of } and is a

letter in constituting the feminine gender.

of

e) V.4. w.f>.,
inflection.

is

^oou

formative

a sufformative found in the course

/) V.4.

w.7.,

the ending of the emphatic state.

is

g) V.6. w.2., | is an emphatic ending.

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH.
1

18.

Parse
Verse

position

word

1.

a w and

the

position governing
x

84).
a-i)

is

>

ja

compounded of the pre-

noun AjuJto beginning.

AA^O in

the ablative case

is

75.5

a pre;

52

is

13.3). Ajjfcai

a denominative noun (41) from the root

head (Hebrew EJ8H Chaldee

chief,

by adding

The vowel

to

its

addt^d

is

(se<- its

and aids to form the syllable AJ (15.4;

of the

plural)

ijijjo )

root the formative letters AA, (>39.2).

first

declension as

its

vowels are im-

it is somewhat irregular in its inthird person, singular number(44).

mutable (48. A) tliough

flection

AJL*J>

/irincipal,

form(Ml

A.

1.,

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GBAMMAR.

298

if

.<

..i

The two

points over > in the plural

point belonging to > still belongs to >
time is part of Ribui (6.2.Rem.) feminine

UO, plural ]AxJLi>.

The

compose Ribui.
and

same

at the

gender as

the same as in Hebrew and

it is

that language (43.2.Rem.2).

It

is

transferred from

ends also in (A a feminine

termination in the emphatic state, ) being the regular emIn the

phatic termination (vid. last reference and 45.3.5).
absolute state the form

Axi^i, emphatic 1 AjuLj

is

it

45;

and governed by

in the ablative case after the preposition 23

(75.5).
b)

Y.I. w.2.,

is

L-^\

(vid.Lexicon).

a prosthetic

is

^OloAa]

formed from the noun

is

-iOloA^|

an auxiliary verb from

irregular

takes the

jj\

being,

to be

with

noun suffix

derived from a noun, though that suffix is

here to be considered as a sufformative (*[ 17.4. a; ^j" 17.2.
j(Jlo_, as

it is

Rem.)

neuter

digm)

third person

66.2

(vid.last reference)

singular

19)

(38.

1.

number (38.1. Para-

Paradigm)

indicative

masculine gender

mood(65.1 compare (18.4)

;

preterite imperfect tense,as*|oOl immediately follows(18.4.

38.2;68. A). Inflect to the person where

Rem.;

First person

^Aa]

common gender

(thou art), second feminine

masculine ^OloAj) (he

with

** A/)

its

is)

it is

found.

/ am), second masculine

(
*

T iAj|

(thou

(vid. 38-1. Inflection).

third

art),

It agrees

nominative lA^So, though of a different gender (80.

B.2).
c)

V.I. w.3., loOl

(38.1)

it

a substantive verb signifying

V verb (38. 1)

third person

verb

is

effect

of

be

(32) neuter ( 19)

"When used with another

irregular

singular number.

has the

to

Vau

conversive in Hebre

38. 1)

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH

PAUSING.

299

masculine gender and used here merely as a helping verb

to the preceding, in forming the imperfect tense($38.2).

d)

1.

w.4.,

VnLo

from

39. 2.

b.

to

}A\LD ivord

speak,

third

is

a substantive noun, derived

forming in the absolute state ]^Lo

example

),

declension (45. feminines

first

A; 48.B. feminines;

Decline. Singular (vid.above)

6. 4. c).

construct AKVo emphatic

son singular

feminine

(vid.

construct state A\lo, emphatic

\k&D

emphatic

state

plural absolute,

45. 3)

third

per-

nominative cose to

looi uiOloLf(80.B.2).

0010

compounded of the conjunction

and tho pronoun OCT. O is a copulative conjunction (53.
It connects the two nouns,
a prefix (53. 1. Hern.).
1)
V.l. w.5.,

e)

ocn

may

Syriac

is

is

")

be translated by he or i', as the neuter gender in

included in the masculine and feminine (^[ 14. c:

pronoun separate (16) third person singpleonastic and need not be rendered in transla-

a personal

43)
ular.

It is

For explanations of the next three words

ting (55).

vid.

supra.

f) V.I.

(52

w.9.,

2o^

with,

a preposition governing

84).

g) V.I. w.l

0.,

}CT_^ (iod

taken from the Hebrew

VI

God.
and that probably derived from
nibjfc is a denominative noun taking the Syriac emphatic terminal on
*)

is

the ending of a large

number of Syriac nouns,

-\\\^-

timcs indicating the feminine and sometimes the emphatic

state (43.2;

45.3).

Some nouns always appear

1 *

plmtic or suffix state

45.1. Hem.).

in the

em-

It

|oi-^ has the form ot

EXERCISES IX SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

300
the

It is a substantive

state.

emphatic

45.masculines

1.

singular-masculine-emphatic state

erned by

|oC^o. O and, is a

^OToA^

]oilL

ablative case

and gov-

V.I. w.l 4., O01

is

-p

k) V.2. w.l.,

phatic state

is

in the nominative to
vid. supra.

a pleonastic pronoun (vid. supra).

|A^Lo

^cnoLf (80;

God,

prefix conjunction con-

For further explanations

(80).

/) V.I. w.l 5.,

IOOT

third person

tinuing the sense.

i)

A)

2oL (75.5).

h) V.I. w.ll.,

)oOT

noun and may be

declined like -*"".. (Decl.

in

wore?, is

the nominative after

7\l8.b).

pOl

this,

though

it

It has the

same.

form of the em-

should be considered as one of the

9

The forms

original forms of the word.

(17)

a demonstrative pronoun

singular-masculine-nomi.

native case to }oqi _cnoZLi] (80)

it

are ^Oi and poi

used as a noun.

Decline

(vid.17).
1)

V.3. w.l.,

^3

all,

every, each, (58.B.2.#,6)

a pronoun

used as an adjective (58.B.2.5) the noun thing to which

belongs being implied declined according to decl. 1.
of nouns third person-masculine-absolute state. The im-

it

plied

noun would be

in the nominative to ]oOl; or

^O itself

might be considered as a collective noun and in the nomi

native to looi (80. A.I and Bern.).
* X

ra)

V.8. w.2.,

Olpila by

the

hand of him or by

his

hand

O is a prefix preposition governing H^* The whole word

is compounded of the
preposition 2 by, the noun ^t emphatic

}rl 7mnf?,and the

rivative

suffix

noun (39), from

,-

Ol_ of him or

and takes a

a de-

his.

,u}

suffix

(Hebrew TI

is

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH

PARSING.

301

Chaldee*p)-2nd.declension-singular. Absolute and constr.,*,

emphatic
emphaticl *ri|,pluralabs<>lute r* *r l, construct ^p*!,
*
r
Mr *l third singular masculine (45. masculines B) abla-

and governed by

tive case

noun attached

Ol_

(75.5).

emphatic .state and

masculine
(16. Table)
a)-third singular
to the

B.2) and governed

by ^Jl (16
to be is

V.3.W.3., looi

ri)

16. B;

is

falls

a suffix pro-

away (46.1.

genitive case (54.

74).

here rendered was, the imperfect

being sometimes thus formed (65).

It agrees

with

"f at

V.3. w.4., .-1010,% v")Q

o)

of the conjunction

and

without

o, the preposition

him

compounded

,VV>, and the

suffix
f*

o and,

wicnio^.

a conjunction as above. ^V")

It governs its suffix
without is a preposition with a suffix.
"7
..7
*jOiO- vO!O- him, is a noun suffix
plural (16.Table)

pronoun

third singular masculine

jilo

\P
2>| also.

sense.

ablative case

and governed by

(75.5).

p) V.3. w.5., fla]

and

is

]3

not

S*

is

also not, neither

compounded of JI

not,

2>| is

a conjunction(53.2.a) and continues the

an adverb and

qualifies 2oqi.

q)

Y.3. W.6.,

(rM one, any one, a certain one, certain, any;

pronoun (58.10.a and b) or a numerical adjecHere it has the sense of an indefinite pronoun
tive (50.2).
singular feminine and belongs like an adjective to the noun
from

r*j, is

*0^-io (58.10.a).
) is changed into 2 to
r) V.3.W.7., 2opi to be from looi*
form the feminine (19. Table). Imperfect and parsed like

(vid.

n.supra)

EXERCISES IN SYBIAC GRAMMAR.

302

V.3. w.8.,

s)

^o,So any

that of },** above

thing,

has a similar meaning to

but has more the sense of a noun.

It is

.?

sometimes used in the same manner as

r**

(58.10.6).

It is

rM belongs to it, as
one of minor impor1*

the pause between }oOl and iO,__io

is

10)-third singular feminine-absolute state-

tance (^f 11. c]

nominative case to Zooi (80).

V.3. w.9.,

t)

>

which

is

tOl> which was

a relative pronoun

nominative to

lar

him.

is

is

17.2)

in the third singu-

looi

u) Y.4. w.l., oi-T) in him,

compounded of }ool and j.

compounded of

in

and OL.

a preposition, governing the ablative (75.5);

OL.

is

a suffix pronoun

l6.Table;

singular

in the ablative case

compare

54.B.l).

52.Table)-third person

and governed by

75.5.

. .^K ?

v) V.4. w.2.,

?y^, is

a verbal noun(concrete)(40Ta-

bleA). It occurs always" in the plural form(44.Kem.6),generally with a singular signification (vid.Lexicon;

ed from V-*
plural forms
is

its

to

80.2)-deriv-

Ztve-appears in the emphatic form,like other

mentioned(44.Kem.6 and45.Rem.)though this

It is an anomalous noun having no

usual form.

person plural masculine (45.Eem.)regular declension-third

_

nominative case to fool (80.2. Z>).

*

w) Y.4.
tion

and,

above, only
2. a).

w.4., JJL^O

and )^-M
it

is

and life

life.

This

compounded of the conjuncparsed like the same word

is

in the nominative to

a plural verb (80.

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH

PARSING.

was, literally were

x) V.4. w.5., ^oouZu")

303
third person

plural masculine, and agrees with jl!l. in gender and number (80.2.a; vid.also c. and d. supra).
y) V.4. w.6.,

iou

light, is

a verbal noun from 5ou

an infinitive form in the emphatic state like

shine

^^o

from

IJOIQJ

40.Table, II. A.

or ioou, emphatic

which appears
39.2.6.and

which

it

to

W^QO

Infinitive absolute >OU,

a).

The io

state 1>OU, ]jou, ]>O1QJ.

infinitive
here dropped (compare
though the emphatic form is the one in

in the

40),

is

usually appears-declensionIV.(45.masculines,D)-

third person singular-masculine-emphatic state, and in the

nominative case after ^oou/ul, but used as the construct before > of the next word (74.2.a).

li

genitive

from

',> son,

of the sons of men, a composite

>!*">>

(41.1)-compounded
the

y>

Y.4. w.7.,

1)

case,

of

>,

VJl

>

of,

which follows (74.3).

is

a sign of

AlJb sons,

is

anomalous. Singular absolute ^D,

primitive

oJii and

noun

construct ;o. emphatic 1^3, plural absolute ^iio, construct

p
* "7

...10^

emphatic ]*1O (49.masculines)-third person plural-

masculine-construct state(in form and because the next noun

in the genitive)-genitive case, though in the construct

is

state, as
(i

sometimes occurs

in

434. l\ govornod

raramar,

Hebrew

(vid. Stuart's

>

]JLJ

by

(74).

man,

Hebrew
is

from

*AJ], the 1

being dropped (12. 3.a)-derived from theHebrew

word

man (Chaldee

"Epja

'CnDJSjVa primitive noun-declension

but somewhat irregular

third person
(vid. Lexicon)
has not Kibui, though it has the same form
which appears in the plural-masculine emphatic state abso1,

singular as

it

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

304
lute

and construct

x(>

emphatic V*j], absolute

ufcj],

or |mJJ-genitive case and governed

V '*M

noun

-kJT)

ocno (vifLsupra

e).

3) V.5. w.2., \jcnoj light,is in the

y above.
*

"

4) V.5. w.3.,

preposition

pQ*n>O in(the)darkness,is compounded of the

2 in,

noun

and pa*** darkness. pQ*x is a sub(the Hebrew form is 'nts'lf* a verbal noun)

declension fourth
lar

nominative absolute, with

For farther explanation of the

the participle >ouio(76.1).

stantive

by

_ p

vid.

the preceding

(74).

2) V.5. w.l.,

word

plural

45. masculines

third person singu-

D)

masculine-emphatic state-ablative case and governed by

(75.5).
5) V.5. w.4.,

9OI&D permitting to shine a

participle from the

irregular ^2>, active intransitive verb (20.2)

-in the

Aphel conjugation

19 Table;

an active participle (19.B. 4;

to

shine (33)

19.B.4;
It

23.1).

>OU

23.1)-

used here

is

for

the third person singular of the present tense(64.2.A.Eem.)

and rendered the same as though it were a verb (vid. Trans.
^[I4)third person singular. Conjugate to the place where
Preter. Peal JOU, preter. Ethpeel >ou2f (

found.
II,

21.1), preterite Pael >ou (l9.Table

and

preterite Ethpaal >CTj2i*(

preterite

JOUJ

19.

Table

Aphel >duf (19. Table

(19. Table

II;

19.B.2,5;

Table

II;

19. B. 1;

19.

(19.Table

II;

II,

II;

22.

23.1),

23.1),

II,

l9.Table

and

22.1),

and

Kern.),

future

Aphel

imperative Aphel

23.1), infinitive

I9.B.3 and 9;

it is

Aphel

23.1)participle active

KIUHTEENTH

KXI'U'MS

iouk)

Apln-1
in the

(l!).T:ible II;

19.B.4;

Aphel conjugation-active
\P

and belongs

der,

305

PARSING.
It

23.1).

found

is

masculine gen-

participle

*.

to JJOIOJ

64. 1. A), or is absolute with

it.

w 5., poa >jQ and the darkness. O is a conjuncabove, and po.>* is in the nominative case to

6) V.5.

tion as
*

T
"*

For farther explanations see

Oi_oi>|.

4.

supra.

%r

7) V.5. w.7., Ol-O>j|

live intransitive verb,

comprehended

an irregular

it~is
*

ac-

composed of ^>> and Ol_

Irregular-

active voice-intransitive (19. Table 1 )-indicati ve (65.l.B.b)

*

-Aphel
is

preterite.

The usual form is

appended, the final vowel of the verb

and the

last

When

^>>|*

is

the suffix

dropped (15.3)

consonant forms a syllable with the suffix

*

OU.

_^

It is in the 3rd.person masc.;

*7

^>j,

Peal

**

* ^f

^ j>, Ethpeel ^>?M,

Ethpaal *i?M, Aphel ^>>|, and agrees with

its

Pael

nom-

inative ]">*
r
The suffix CTL is a personal pronoun
third masculine singular-accusative case (54.B.l) and gov-

erned by

*^5>1.

8) V.6. w.l., looi ivax, is a

Lomadh Olaph verb

Peal

active voice-3d. singular-masculine-indicative mood-present

tense (32.1) and agrees with |^j;*"^ (vid. ^IS.c).

\V

]*J;Q son of man, is a composite noun (42.

r
r
p
;Q is a primitive
1) compounded of ^3 son and *J| man
noun anomalous singular, construct (vid. paradigm 49.
third person masculine
nominative case
in.-isculines)
9) V.6. w.2.,

11*
opi.

itivr
])ltatio

(AJ man,

is

a noun derived from

>~

ofcJf ??2an

prim-

declension first-third person singular masculine-emstate-in the genitive case

1181).

and governed by ^D (74;

306

EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.

>?A]> who was sent,is compounded of j who,

10) Y.6 w.3.,

and 5>A1 was se?^.

culine, a

mood
its

is

>

W*

In Ethpaal and the other passive conjugations

paal >>A*|.

(17.

is

imperfect tense (60.4), and agrees with

* i ^
7
y 7
Peal >>, Ethpeel i?A |, Pael >>, Eth-

preterit

nominative
77

to >>A*]

a verb in the Ethpaal conjugation pasregular third singular masculine indicative

J>A)

voice

sive

a relative pronoun-third singular mas-

and in the nominative case

prefix,

56).

j is

transposed (vid.^[15.2.a).
ft

11) V.6. w.4.,

^o from, o/J is a preposition and governs the

ablative case (75.5).

loOL

12) Y.6.W.5.,

singular masculine

erned by

^>

God, a

emphatic

(75.5

noun

declension

state

ablative case,

first

*l8.g).

of So
compounded
*
anomalous
a noun from Ul

13) V.6. w.6., Olio* his name,

*

Sa

and Olhis.

is

Absolute and constr. singular

singular masculine.

phatic

suffix state OlSo* (vid. paradigm,

UQ

third

and gov-

name
third

^Q, em-

49.

mascu-

JL of the absolute state falls away in the emphatic

and from the emphatic is formed the suffix state by
_
and adding Ol (46. La) nominative case to
dropping
lines).
state,

f>

looi wiOioA-0 was (implied).

OU

In reference to looi aOloA*f

a suffix pronoun, third singular masculine (l6.Table)-genitive case (54.B. 2) and gov-

(vid.^[18. b

and

erned by SQ

c).

(16

14) V.6. w.7.,

his, is

16.B

74).

^-L-wQa John, a noun proper-anomalous-

third singular masculine, absolute state-nominative case after IOCTI

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH
V.

15)

w.

7.

307

a demonstrative pronoun,
*

this

pen same,

1.,

PARSING.

singular, masc. nominative case to ]L] (vid. ^[18. fy.

16) V. 7. w. 2., JZI came Lomath Olaph (U*) active

voice-Peal conjugation-pret. imperfect-3d pers. singular,
*

mood and

masc. indicative
17) V.

3.,

IZojOifflbk/or

and

*i'7

|2Lo>OlflD

The form

the verb joioo to witness.

(27 Tab.;

compounded of
ig a noun derived from

?OlflD

appears as a noun
*

of

he 2d declension.

Ijoifl)

32).

a witness

*
>'*
jZojOlflO witness.

Jk/<',

w.

7.

ft

agrees with Jioi

Absolute and construct

JOlfiD,

emph.

(45. masculines B). The feminine absolute has the

t

same form

as the

emphatic masc.

viz. (jOlflD.

In

many nouns

inserted before the final ] in the feminine ; o with L is

also sometimes inserted (45. 3 and Bern. 3) as in this word.
That indeed
It has the form here of the emph. feminine.
seems to be the usual form in which the word appears

is

3d

and governed by

pers. singular, dative case

18) V.

4., ?oi

compounded of

ness

bear

voice-regular

Aph.

pret. JO12D],

Aph.

Aph.

?aiflo2],

(23.

2.

a)

bear witness-Aph.

(26)-intransitive.

3d

masc. gender.

nominative

>

(23.2, where are ex-

19, Tables I
here used in the sense of the

in the last syllable.

The future tense is

subjunctive mood imperfect
its

witness

shall (should)

usually we find - in the last sylla-

II).

agrees with

fut. >OlfiOJ-fut. tense,

3d. masc.

1).

Pa. ?oia> 3 Ethpa. JouoZ),

but sometimes as here we have

amples, with

and

bear

>oiflD to
beget, to

Peal >ai0, Ethpe.

ble

to

(75.

shall (should) bear wit-

a verb from

sing.

fut.

who

who, and jai-fiO

>

conjugation-active

In the

i>

.ffi

cause

or

witness,
m,..i is

>oi

w.

7.

Compare

tense (61. 3. A. b) and

? is a relative pronoun-3d

308

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH

masculine-a prefix-nominative

singular,

pers.

19) V.

7.

w.

^oi

5.,

j>.

7.

w.

against, on account

to,
*

position governing poiQJ

20) V.

PAUSING.

of,

fiAiwe-declension fourth,

to

q/-pre-

(JOIQJ

6.,

case

?^-verbal noun from iou

3d

pers. singular, masculine,

fo

em-

phatic state, ablative case and governed by ^J> (1[18. y).

21) V.

7.

*iis>-compounded of > that, ^b all,

man-* is a conjunction (85. 3 & 4, d)-prefix

w.
e

every,

and **J

7.,

*"

QJ and
connecting ?C5i
^ v>>ou ^o every, a??, is a proused
as an adjective (58. B. 2. b. a) and
but
here
noun,

belongs to *~*i

For declension,

etc. vid. ^f 18.

1.

*-*i man,

from -*> I declension first, but is somewhat irregular-3d pers. singular, masc. absolute state, nom. case to
*

is a noun
7

^.V)iou.

22) V.
irregular,

For further explanation^,

7.

^ Snou

\v. 8.,

]a and

^,

and

might

is

vid. ^f 18. 1.
believe-a,

placed

verb doubly

among the

defective
7<

>*

verbs (35. 2.

K7

In the Aph. conjugation. Pe. ^o|,

c).

!V * i

'

Aph. ^10*01, future Aph. ^lQ*oll-active voice-intransitive3d pers. singular masc.-future tense and used in the sense
of the subjunctive mood, imperfect tense, and agrees with
o

nominative

its

23) V.

7.

For parsing,
24) V.

w.

-*i
9.,

vid. ^[

(cornp. ^[18. 18).

or ly the hand of him.

Olpila through
18* m., where the same expression occurs.

w.

1.,

(J

25) V. 8. w.

2.,

ooi he,

8.

not, is

an adverb and
is

qualifies *|ooi

a personal pronoun separatek

3d

pers. singular masc.

If 18

and nominative case to (001 (comp.

e)-

26) V.

with

8.

w.

ooi for

3.,

its

IOCFI

was-&n irregular verb agreeing

nominative

(vid. ^[18. n).

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH
27) V.

8.

28) V.

w.

8.

300

w.

case after "jooi

PAUSING.

poioi Ught-a, noun and nominative

4.,
(

vid. ^[18. y).

&w-a

UJ

5.,

conjunction, a contraction of

fj

no, and

{} ?/ ; it continues the sense.

Following this and
preceding the next word, there is something implied
;

after U ] supply l2o>Olfn.\ 12} came for a witness, the same

which is expressed in verse 7. For the remaining three
words of this verse, vid.^f 18. 18, 19, 20.

29) V.

w. 1 and

9.

2.,

]ocn jOioA*] was-* verb and

agrees with |JO1O-J understood, IJOICLJ JJOT that light,

being implied. For parsing this verb fully, vid. ^f 18. b. & c.
it

30) V.
the sense.

9.

w.

a conjunction continuing

3., 'rt^tfor, is

^
*

11jOiO-J

after fool

^oioL^

Ught-a, noun-nominative case

(vid. ^[18. y).

f

(>t? of frw^-compounded of > of, and

PJ* truth. ])',* is a noun derived from the verb >^ to be
co7mVicec?-declension first (vid. 48. A. decl. 1. Rem.)32) V.

9.

w.

5.,

singular. Construct

and absolute, t* or >;, emphatic 1>^

j

_ falls away on acforming the emphatic state, from J*

count of the addition at the end (15. 3), then -*? presenting two vowelless consonants, ? takes the new vowel (15. 4. 6)-3d pers. singular, masc.-genitive case after j
_

(74.

The

2. a).

*A

&

expression |>f*> |>O1Q-J

is

an instance

p o

in which the abstract

tive,

and the phrase

r

33) V.

9.

w.

compounded
which.

>O1

6., JCTLJL _lD>

of >Ol
1

has the sense of an adjec\*\

properly rendered the true light.

noun

is

.V) is

ivhich shineth, or having shone-

V> shineth, or having shone, and

an Aph. participle from >OU, absolute

EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH

310
with

> (^[18. 5).

>

which,

is

tive absolute with >OT-JL-So

9.

w.

7.,
"^

ed of \ upon, -^3

a relative pronoun, nomina

(76.

1J18. 3).

*t

V^

34) V.

PASSING.

upon every man, compound9

**l
man. ^ is a preposition
every and
i

governing the accusative or dative.

^3

is

adjectively and belongs to J*-l (vid.

in the accusative and governed by!^

18.

1).

35) V.

9.

]Z| comes.

w.

8.,

12]

is

and agrees with

36) V.
of

!^

9.

into,

(^[18. 1, 9, 21).

IM? wAo comes, composed of

nominative
]V)

9.,

Svs

> (^[18.

and ]VrSV the world.

is

;or?c2-compounded

a preposition

is

a noun from V>\\

?t

second declension. Absolute and construct

t

V)N\ emphatic

\j
In SniA the

P&^X

and

16).

the

into

governing the accusative. |V).Nv

+

> t#7io,

a verb-Peal conjugation, present tense,

its

w.

a pronoun used
**i is a noun

vowel
falls away in the emphatic state as a syllable is added (15. 3)-3d pers. singular, masc. accusative case and governed by ^
37) V. 10. w. 8., (the seven preceding words are exfinal

t>

plained above).
7

oui r^ knew Am-compounded

7*

of Oi- him,

and ^r knew.

^r

tached* to it-derived

anomalous.

**-2>

is a verb with a suffix pronoun atfrom the Hebrew 3? to know, doubly

and

^-Peal

preterit

-3d

pers. singular,

masc. indicative mood and agrees with JaQl

By taking
The common form of
a suffix the usual form is changed.
- falls away and - falls back upon
the Peal preterit is <Xr
the first radical when the verb takes a suffix (vid. 36).

Ol-

is

a suffix pronoun with

its

union vowel (16. Tab. a)

-3d pers. singular, masc.-accusative,

(54. B.

1).

and governed by

i,

CHRESTOMATHY.

CHRESTOMATHY,
FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.
JOHN

i.

10.

^7

OO10

lA\k)

VA\SO |001

-.mn'X.')

001 }ooi ^oioAut IOI^NO

Zooi

Zo\ AU-I^D

]6i!&

p..

(1 in>
~

aio>>]

11
(J

jiCTIQJ

,T

pa*AjO

*.

jooi>
*

..f

001 pkM 010 4

ioulo

U-*<*O

K..7

^OOUA^I

-\

Iboi

oi^t

Vooi

wiOioA*!' tioi 2

IOCTI

^oio^loo
-

ffaV

Vr*

ZoX

loi^L

A..|o

>e>

>

IJOIQJ 0010 5

PQAMJO

(001 c
T

pen

V
Ul

>.
.

IIOIQJ

|ooi

001

(J

1?>V
t/|?

"

**

"

T
.

.aiNnN >aulD>

'

^i

*"

Jv^j liaioj -^^

\ ?

^aio^l

|oai

]^VvV
]]'

]LAio

looi

ai.l-.'i-^

V-Solio

looi

V>\so

10

314 CHRESTOMATHY

FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

MATTHEW
7

"

'

oo.">

ii.

10.

t
Snn\A*o<i

(jOOT-0

r-M

^jfc*

>r

>

JX>>

2 ;**.
T

3 ^_o

XiS!o] otSoo

oiSoI
4 ^{j^oo
5

o^oV^?
*.

Uo^? T^acbo

f.AiA

>V> ,}LiA\o

U^cn

p^-

.001^2 uiao*

la-ilj

^ooil }ooi

Ijoau?

]3"
.

r
*.

^29

"i-joio

ooi>

^iiuZo ^..r

^A-iOOi

1';Aa
o

^QJcfi*

M*i'2Z

^aaskj

'pt-.t

'r

n.\

o2
r.?>

9 loio

olil

*ct

1^^^

liO^ ^OOUSOrO

]OC31

nsv^

^_i>

^QJOI*

^?V l^l.V)*^ OV^J

OCTI

ail

]ri2QD
ffl?

CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

MARK
^VnkAV
7

*.

jiOJO

i* i

3242.

xiv.

Vneo

.p^QASr>y Ipi^AoO,^ oZ^O*

'

i vi '.

.""

Ol^i ^?O*

^nr~iv.\r> (gy>|n\

315

'

'

*>

P| Uf-^3

33

Q2Z 33

IO>O1

liiOM

"

'?

(OO1 |J>V>Q

tt

1 7

t*
tt
i
^\_i \\giin \\.\o

JL>(

^^'^

^*

* *

'

^''

SJOO*
T

w^s] (s] ;!0|o* .]Ai^ ouio jr^iZ

o

j^lLj

]]]

wAa?

in. y UJ

ii

1^ -<<^

)joi

rrtk'ji
y

ip Vp^a

0^77

*.

^oZ
*

**
<.

(Jo

* r

1*

**

"

^A'"

^001^ -^JO ^il^l A^Z> |Z|0*

Oil

o^^pn^y^o

foio

"jAi*

ZZIo IZ-^

"i

^001 ii >s? \v^k>

!>

.
>

wooi ^;>n*

A^

^IJ^LD>

**>''

^O'^p

owujZZlo

\>lp
.

LUKE

Zooi>

xxiii.

.mirng

-J-X

18

i>oSLC> 001

27.

001*

,QJ(
J

]llD 0001

it 7^ x

01
1c

3-,

ITL^IDO U^^ U*o>

^010*

1Z]
"7

1?

k
>r

|J 1

roi|

30

01

35

41

CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

316

..

Tit

oOl

OOOI ^ SO _*9
^ .OJOl*
-

21

^OJL^

<K

A.
4l

|;J9 pD Ot r
>.

k^01^2)QOl

31

O9 JJ&OJO

,^1

llOl

>iO9

_.

I
23

01^ oooi ^_jk^jo

7 7

*.

oooi

(lei JJora
x

-x

.x

[)

OO1
l

77nx7
.

*.

all*? 001 Ivlco]

oil

]V

1>P

AJ^

loai )k

O1JAO |OO1

QfiD

P7

1.001
^

LUKE
.^SoZ ^01Q2lLO1

OOL^
>\\N -v~

34^1

VI

42.

777

,7

33

33

xxiii.

*.

lASiD'rD la'rOASO)

.e*inf~im

JQJ

7.

(OOl

fr**

^loj

^Q*u

"7

35

012 OOOI

.o.Vf>Vor>

JV^O ]SQ1

^9

7*7
po*

lAoo,l oZ|

J001

-_a>

OO1*

CHRESTOMATIIY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

lOOl

OlO
.

i*

0001
x

U^

311

oil

_.^i

_ko*rnl>oo
^,] [ojooLij |nllo 001 AJ!

oii

j]

^-i^i:

tOJOl ^lD ^_i> rM*

70

_
&

ft

,^,0

_ 7

|po*

'

*^

*7

si\

QJO1
77pNVn'x

pi)OOU)

\+2<o ./a^i

(J

o.*.7

"
I

1 1

*.

'*'/

*~i

r
.

'

L'^Z) ir^l>

tu]o

'

rr -^

"

A^^?!"!

^ 40

x
'

L>jO

^O,iD _ij pOl

^> ooi
AJ]

; ]-"

77

A--*I.M^

|icft%

\J_

U^

Tffx
->O_>?

)OI

P707

'

<>

LUKE
.

*,

jiVnn

..\ p|

.^
*

xxiii.

..o

43

jlJo|
r

53.

.Vr>|
..

QQA* Oil

liO|* 43

err

|4^

(,

7.

47

77

e>

."JOOIJ

CBEESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

318

480001

iii~)?

49

*ji

p OQ2G1

vA ^ i?)^fe
.

.001X00*
JJLID "
*

V<^

OOOl

I
*

*"%

^^0 01
_
50

51

*MiZ,

^^

\\
(*

oo^

fc

l^
i.

OVj

fOGl^O LO>jO)

.M*

1>

JOOlJ iOpiO

'^0^^P^

Ol QiL

.}ooi ]ru>i VJQ..

^\

A.I

_*A^JI
^-

I
i

L&J
P^ o

^o^Ljt)

Vn

]jOI*

]boi

53OISDCOO

i>n

*)jA2> li

^i

J001 V>er>77]

OlDpO

'^

"

*jl V? OO1

^*P|^

.0122
*-*+

ACTS

xvii.

2232.
r

'

%DOtj|o JDoLoS)
x7

i>O

23
.

A^oai ]LMO A^oai

001

*1liirt

lailL?

;^..

*ou.^i }oai
x

'

^xi^

JJ

p>

fc

.\..;% ^oAj

pii) >.. ]aiK*

^nn\ VI ;^mV> pi
QLiOOlO

.7X

1>

7 7

CIIKESTOMATHY-FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

*

***r

^.^OO'^

* kAJ2LJ

r*

*t*t
.AJl_k^^

-*_-*>

.^L

ivy
.n.

>.? IOCTI

*v

01!^

"- ^-.

x
7*^

1*

U ^)> ^^So

ft

*J^-\Q

v^iJ^^O

* *

OT^ O Ol )

319

001

in
.
(

oai cnilo

7X07

-v

(>

J 'rA..

AJ]

^j

*.]! iin

,Uoj|ao oila U'

!>

*X77

**?7

m7r>iVn.rnV

T7

OOO1

'

7P

OOO1

ROMANS

vi.
*

10.
7

IQOJ

^^j"

2C

CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS

320

IN TRANSLATING.

?
P

i]?

*<o AJ]

.IZoSol lA->nVisV>n oiSoi

'H-.

tin

loou oiASn

nn

]IDOI

>]

^H

U o

'.aiZolDj

>..

*.(iV) ^ai
*

.012
fc

]>

^Ajlo \uj5oi

V>>

777
^M)O

ff

4-^A*^ M ]Zolco
7

X777

Q^2

'^1

v^?

iii.

>

(>.

.oAj)

&]

. 7

0.

JmiV]^

.^VnViv^>mn

^r-iOl

,]L*

15.

7,

^
*

^
*

\y^r>ai

77

---- r> .',

77*.*.
iM QjOOlJ
>>^l
X7

^"7P7i'P

^'
^01 ^oAioo
'4V>
*

*>

poZo
T

/UiD 001

IrAt

'"t

COLOSSIANS

(M^^C?

_P

.Z|io

.Ql

10OO1 ^J-M

*]A*4M ^So ail

^j
7

Uyy

&

>o
t
p

aiu.oi |Z1
\k

'HKI
\k

r
v-Aai

^^4^* .IpAa AL^? ^01

^*

CHRE8TOMATHY-FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

"

(ZniO
A*
1

321

(AScu, |kiO j

7
.

r^

.]a>Q..

10
11
'

*
t

99

ff

."jZoljOlO

7ft*.

U'
1>

'

*"

'

'

,001

]J012

">;>.

P..

'.

,>

HSJ

^^

nn

.0.

V
v-L

OIlOjs*

..

,acan

oAj1

*2)]

TT
.in %

---

13

ijl

IIDOI M

>77
.o/uocno

7
.

^a

>

REVELATIONS
7

15

v.

10.

001
7

^ j n ^?

.l>

a.

..

CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING

322
JL

ff

]3o

.JiVl

o V=>Anl
*

17

*.

OO1 *ri??
7

>

.wA

7*-^^i7

(>

.OJ01
.

'*

i>

Ir^

*>(>

1*1*0

'rlD]

oai

:!?OCTlj>

17

77

'

!>

po*

*r

]A2^ ^SO9 OO1

11

>

fc

-Ji

:|Snfhn

z r

*77

JEOJov^ ^u?

. .

'la*?

]ooi

7"*

^A )]o x^il ].vn-^

x
|J

*|oAo^ ..

(;Vr\r>

o^As^ol

PJDZ

f^\
0770

907

13

."

.OlX.J

(JO*

ooi>

*>

CHKKSTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS

REVELATIONS
]*J

^-1

'rD

xxii.

323

10.

0.

IN TRANSLATING.

001 o

To*

i>

-(VnVnv\ "j/n.nnjl
*

T.

NOOU aio

1'r^o]

7r

ooi>o

]oau

"

1^

loou

|J

^ooil loou
r

on \Vnin

po

oai

A\ZLJ

001
j

Ai2

..

wiU,

'

t**
wA ^o* ^Aai
^A loai

]OM^O>

s,

fJSol 5x)oA^Z U

wA ^"jo*
* 7

'rO) 'r^..

loil]]
'O^jJS)
7^ 7 PC

U^l

POT
f

001 .]jOT j^AOj

10

CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

324

REVELATIONS
7

77

*>

xxii. 11

'7

^o^

OO1

11 1?
y r

13].

Vn

*t

14

001

* x

Of.*'

*.

MAOf> f*

llo

'

.OIO ^SL^ p] p|*

?

4>

.film .Qj|
V
\

.^QiSoj 001*

x y

.7

V>CLU

.A.
p

21.
1>

CrUk*}
^

001O

H/t\.f)m

t*-J'

.7

P 9

OO1

OO1O

(jj-j|
-

*..7

-p

(,11 ^OToAj|5

|jJio
16

piOj?

(mi

..

^^
o l^ai 001 ^A*| p| .\L^ ^0,
(>

.7

U%*

0010 ,U]j Id.

'

r*'

>

0010

<

k*

71

.U **r^P

PI jaico*

i
AJ]

^o* *pai

*7P
21

ll

|">

ff

^7

^Q

.7

0010
7

10

I 7

.KrS. 001 i)****) \23QD OO1

001
1>>

-x

.")-

CHHKSTOMATHY-FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

PSALM

xlv. 1

325

10.

*~\

tt*

m. ip 2
i3
4

.VnVv
v*

]ZoL.?i

.mor>
)

Vn.

*..i

.O

)]2UO1

Vn
10

PSALM

**oi> ^Soo

]l

110.

li.

^oi ^So ^iii..

:]j}

^p*

326

CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.

AJ|*

^.

-w

AioZ l^oio

PSALM
)CL1

civ.

10

^L

Va^
9

10

)i j]]

ouomojo i":^^
t^rAoiio

|J ?

^ooilu

IJ'Q^

Aiaiao

nnSm*
ASoco

ISoow*

.]J**jri

: .

CHRESTOMATHY.
NOTES ON THE BEADING LESSONS.

AFTER having analyzed the first page of the Chrestomathy, and thus
given a specimen of the manner in which the learner should proceed in
reading his first lessons in Syriac, it will only be necessary, in respect to the remaining pa-res of the Chrestomathy, to explain the
derivation and formation of the most difficult words which there
1

Thus the student

occur.

be induced,

it is

he thrown upon his

will

hoped, to assiduously study his

own

resources,

and

grammar.

EXPLANATIONS.
MATTHEW
1) Verse

1.

word

3.,

ii.

10.

i *

i>

,-^tZ^

is

a verb in the Ethpeel conjugation,

V*

from
ti)
r

V.

1. w.7.,

_fclon**")

is

compounded of

a preposition and

*V)Q-i a noun of the fourth

7

3) V.
(viil.

1.

Is.

4) V.

2.

w. 10.,

decl. construct plural, from

oZ]

^OQ*

is

a verb from ]Z] Pe. pret. 3d. masc. plural

16).

w.

5.,

^-V**

is

a verb from |]-M

or

imV)

5) V.

2.

w. 10.,

0) V.

3.

w.

5.,

M^lZZ]

1.

w.

1.,

.am

is

is

a verb in the infin. pret., from

a verb

in Kth]>eel

rve&*

conjugation, from

^J>1

7) V.

is

a verb

in

Pa. conjugation, from *A13.

NOTES ON THE CHKESTOMATHY.

328

8) V. 4. w.
masc. plural.

9) V.

4.

w.

-X

A3

and takes the noun

2.,

^poila-from

3.,

*xO>-constr. plural from

10) Y.

4.

w.

11) V.

4.

w. 8 and

^iso-is a

7.,

from

part,

IOCT

11.,

suffix-3d

,S^Ak). These two words

word being a passive parti-

indicate the imperfect tense, the latter

64. 2. B. a;
65. B. a).
ciple ( vid.

*jAOO1 is a verb

12) V.

6.

w.

6,,

13) V.

6.

w.

12.,

*OQ2LJ-third, masc.
TV

14) V.

6.

w. 15., wiOIOi

15) Y.
Lexicon).

7.

w.

16) Y.

7.

w. 10.,

17) Y.

8.

w.

28. 1

and

V,J

is

a verb in the

from

(vid.

^l]

(vid.

2).

8.

w.

f>

8.

w.

him-ZA. masc.

imperative from

*">\

7.,

19) Y.

suffix,

the imperative from

in

18) Y.

with

fut.

a verb in Ethpe. pret. from |V*

is

a verb

is

*oaj*

compounded of puf and

is

-V"M
*

Q^l

from

M-ipO

6.,

fut. Pe.,

from |OOI

It

i*
8.,

in the second person

'

*A

suffix,

^*

uCJLJOA*xSL

12.,

^Q1*
iOU -meaning

composed of

j is

>

a conjunction*-and

* that

JOA*xQ|

a verb

in

Aph.

conjugation, 2d. plural,

20) Y.

8.

w.

o2

13.,

is

from

a verb 2d.

>

i^
masc. (vid.

pi.

28. 2.

Rem.)-

11

imperative from

21) Y.

8.

"\L\ to come.

*77

'

w. 14.,

wiJOfOM

plural, imperative, with a

with suffixes
37. 3).

suffix

is

a verb from

pronoun

(vid.

^ If

(OM

2d. masc.

37. table of verbs |T

22) Y. 10. w.

5.,

23) Y. 10. w.

7.,

a verb from (,*

Q^rMis
*

.p

(AS)

is

an adjective noun,

fern. sing,

construct,

from
*In connection with the preceding word

meaning when.

(vid.

85. 4. d. a).

PO,

it

forma a compound conjunction

NOTES OX THE CHRESTOMATHY.

MARK
24) V. 32. w.

The

5<i.

25) V. 32. w.
2f>)

V.

l^'^ASo

n)

.'{.

Q^

8.,

32. w. 11.,

A *

and

(lie

verb

28) V. 33. w.

infinitive

the prep. -^ and the verb

7

w.

9.,

30) V. 34.

\v.

11.,

32) V. 35. w.
53)

V. 37. w.

imperative from

^2-lV.

17

*)dl

or

|QD
Ethixj.

from

fern, participle,

from

future,

from

;L.

a participle, plural from

.*V>> and

^>*
b-^ZALD -infinitive, Ethpe. from iOL

If).,

35) V. 38. w.

2.,

36) V. 38. w.

4.,

.oil!

37) V. 38. w.

8.,

]n i \"*\\

38) V. 40. w.

9.,

tOOl

Q-kf praij imperative, Pa.

from|^

or \L.

(\G)shull enter-Ve. fut. 2nd. plural, from

i I i

irillin>T-a.rt. part.

S ///>

(V/c.s-from

f.

|1

Pa. from

^>Q&.

>\ with a plural

pronoun.
f..

19)
T

Rem).
.

x
is

34) V. 37. w.

suffix

l\.

^i"lSg>

5.,

from

composed of the conjunction O,

O^ZZJo-iraperative,

10.,

that from the verb

is

|M>*>V>-Aph.

9.,

29. 2.

Jl) V. 35. w.

Ethpe.

OOO-

.'it.

29) V.

js

the infinitive from

in

composed of the prefix preposi-

is

QQlZAsiAo

8.,

and

Ethpe. pass, participle, from

act, participle

O'rLQOASOA

7.,

an

is

lSliO-Pa.

Vr^

of

pronoun should be rendered that

imperative from

27) V. 33. w.

42.

eomjKxsed

relative J with the preceding

which (vid.

tion

is

)lj>AlsOj

4.,

32

xiv.

329

V. 40. w.

n*n*

10., *

heavy-tin adjective In the plural, from

40) V. 40. w.

13.,

lipi

Jt/M-M'-from
*

i*. ..

41) V. 41. w.

8.,

Q*JuiJZZ|o

/*',</

ye-Ethpe. imperative from

NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.

330
42) Y. 41. w.

14.,

43) Y. 42. w.

2.,

y>\AV) being betrayed-Efhpe.

lj

future of

44) V. 42. w.

6.,

from

participle

to go.

V>\V? betraying-Aph.

LUKE

18

xxiii.

participle

from

27.

45) Y.

18. w.

n\D

1.,

cried out-3&.

46) Y. 18. w.

^ O1 \cins

6.,

imperative, with

suffix

47) Y. 20. w.

8.,

masc. plural, from

Ov

f>

pronoun

take him

36.

(vid.

l^AJ-future from

away-2nA. masc.

plural,

table of suffixes).

to release.

>*

48) Y.

21. w.

aCTL^>QOl

6.,

crucify Am-imperative, with a suffix

from

1Q1
49) Y. 22. w.

**OlQjj>l-/

19.,

will chastise him-iut. 1st. sing. Pe.

from (>> with a

suffix

pronoun.

50) Y. 22. w.

21.,

^*

^QIDin. *"!!-/

will

kirn ^o-future,

let

Pe.

1st. singular,

with a

suffix

pronoun, from

51) Y. 23. w.

3.,

52) Y. 23. w.

10.,

r>.

*")")/,

rt *">*

with

OOO1 urged-a

^OUJQaap

part,

from

JQOL

(that) they shall crudfy him-

pret. Pe. fut. 3d. masc. plural, with suffix pronoun,

from

iOl

(vid.

36. Table).

53) Y. 24. w.

4.,

sing, noun,

5.,

should Je-future

1ooi7
"

*v

54) Y. 24. w.

7*

tOOlA^t*

with a plural

suffix

(according

(16.

16., tOCTil

iO

plural from

to) their desire-& feminine,

Table).

ti

>

55) Y. 25. w.

of "(oat

TV

their

will-&

noun with a

suffix

iO
x

56) Y. 26. w. 2., ^

^*^
part, plural from

4.,

leading or causing to lead

*
r

57) Y. 26. w.

\noSo

OA*|

,,
laid hold o/-from ,**]

away-Aph.

NOTES ON THE CHRE8TOMATHY.

58) V. 26. w.

13.,

59) V. 27. w.

8., t

might carry-future from

bcwailing-A^h. part, from .09

LUKE
60) V. 33. w.

5.,

331

xxiiL 33

42.

UjJDA^ ^-Ethpe. pass, participle, from

*
r

)1)

Y.

34. w.

62) V. 34. w.
*)3)

V.

*OQJQ* /or^tre-imperative, from

7.,

0*ioit ow/-Aph.

16.,

35. w.

3d. plural from

s/attdw^-participle from

1.,

64) V. 35. w.

<rfA-plural from

/o

12.,

^>*]-with

the

prefix prep. Loniad.

f

65) Y. 35. w.

13.,

66) V. 35. w.

14.,

srt?W-Aph.

prot,

from

M-M*
%*

from U^.

shall srtre-Aph. future,

67) V. 3G. w.

69) V. 42. w.

1.,

-part. from >japD

Aph. from (--M

remember wic-imperat. Ethpe. with

:>.,

suf.

from JS>

LUKE
*

TO) V. 45. w.

3.,

wtpgt
o

3.,

72) V. 46. w.
preposition,

73) V. 46. w.

4.,

12. 2.

iv/i<r-with

s^i^|o

is

Rem.).

?'/

a prefix preposition.
/^/ Aflw/A'-from

with a prefix

pronoun.

iOJCO w/Wi<j--Pe.
x

74) V. 48. w.

rcnt-FAlipe. part, from (;-

sullix

8.,

53.
.

was

(.

into

(JQ

7.,

and a

43

transposed and changed

71) V. 46. w.

xxiii.

act. participle

from ^OQflD

>>!').. came

together- Aph. pret. plural

from

NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.

332
75) Y. 48. w.

tOOUpM

16.,

their

HH^

breasts-horn.

with

suf.

plural.

76) V. 49. w.

1.,

r> ytaTK&Kg-part.

Sf)

77) V.

49. w.

6.,

78) V. 51. w.

7.,

Pe. plural from

-X

XlQ

>

j01QLO r

(10^

his acquaintance-from

ft

with

suffix.
7

79) V. 53. w.

1.,

is

doubled

took

01 dug
|*'

8.,

81) V. 53. w.

* W

OlA**!

down-Aph.

80) V. 53. w.

ACTS

pret.

2232.

xvii.

passing %-Ethpe. part, from

3.,

^.pAlD

83) V. 23. w.

9.,

An] Ifound-Kph.

84) y. 23. w.

14.,

on

it

y',

pret. 1st. singular

from

^A with a suffix.

23. w. 29., ;*-)fT>V) dedare-P&. part, from

Z

^J

31. 2).

82) y. 23. w.

OljAl

from

from A**J

out-part, passive, Peal from

Hem

12. 2.

85) y.

pret.

NOiffiZZf was laid-Etbpe.

13.,

(vid.

t>

:>

l2OSozmifo7tg--participle from fnco

^
T

86) y. 25. w.

2.,

*SoA*So ?z7or5Ai^w7zg--Ethpa. part, from *SQ

87) y. 26. w.

8.,

tOOOU

fut. 3d. plural

4.,

should dwell-Pe.

'

from (12*

^ i ^HSV) . seeking, feeling-P&Ql pass,

participlo

TIT
4.,

qj

i i

our

life-pi,

absolute form with

suf.

^_

91) y. 28. w.

from

^iOl

seeA-Mzg-participle

90) y. 28. w.

suffix

'^*^

2.,

89) y. 27. w.
y
from -^ ov

I i i

with

of the defective verb (OO1

88) y. 27 w.

from

shall be,

^Ol

5.,

or ^1

,J i\ilZA!aD

owr

wiot^-Ethpe.

part,

and

NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.

92) V. 28. w.

with and >

fQ2-^> who

12.,

you^-composed of

'.).">

person plural from A*]

with,

tQO

you,

-irhn.

94) V. 28. w.
biillix

1st.

^Aa}../r

6.,

93) V. 28. w.

333

our offspring-horn pOOICL^ with

^sDGlQ^

16.,

pronoun.
)

V. 29. w.

8.,

* t

ni

;nmV)*

our

debt,

9.,

JT) V. 29. w.

15.,

(ZuA..-

98) V. 29. w.

16.,

I'ZoiLDolG by

99) V. 30. w.

15.,

+e

written or ^rawi-participle, Pe.

100) V. 31. w.

suffix.

with a

think-m&mtivc, PC. from

9(5; V. 29. w.

to

from .*1i

QoAj

shall

art,

from I'ZoiiOo).
Pe.

report-future

from

fO,J> that shall jiulge-faimc Pe. from

6.,

from

with

the prefix >

1

101) V. 31. w.

102) V. 32.

14.,

8.,

il^fO ami

1.

w.

4.,

known-Aph. from

iniV>V> wootz^-participle, Pa.

ROMANS
103) V.

showed, made

]oQJ
T

vi.

10.

5^// /e;ai-Pa. future from

104) V.

1.

w.

8.,

JA^ZZ ^j//iciM?M/an/-Etlipa.

105) V.

2.

w.

7.,

UJ ./<// /r-futiirc
7

106) V.

3.

w.

6.,

]oo

Pe. from

future from

>A*.

\L.

tr^t? who

baptized-prct.

Pe.

are iwr/<v/-Ethpc. pret.

1st.

icere

1st.

pi.

from ,101 with the prefix >

T

107) V.

4.

w.

4.

w. 14., wiOiao|>^^w/rt//^;r-anouuiuthe8uffixstate,

1.,

^aoZ]

pi.

com.

from ;^XQ.
.

I')8)

V.

NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.

334

3d. masc. singular, from

'

&(

with the prefix >

*AOU

109) V.

4. w. 20.,

110) V.

5.

111) Y.

5.

w. 11., ToCTU shall Je-future Pe. from YOOI.

112) V.

6.

w.

1.,

^1 tSpi knowing-participle, with a

113) V.

6.

w.

5.,

*2lQ>l1

114) V.

6.

w.

1.,

^^sAjj /^

Vf.4t.,^^^3L\

should watt-future Pa. from

hare been planled-Ethpe.pret. from

t^fJ*

is

crutified-'Etbpe. pret.

suffix

from

from

should be destroyed-^fhp&. from

with the prefix J

*

115) Y.

8.

w.

116) Y. 8 w.
117) Y.
from

9.

w.

^SOtOU JeZiei-e-Aph.
10., }^J shall live-Mme
6.,

future from

Pe. from

77

*4^Afl0

13.,

being powerful-Ethpgi.

participle

+Q\

118) Y. 10. w.

JUM

9.,

Zm?z^--part.

COLOSSIANS

119) Y.

1.

w.

7.,

Q1O

iii.

Aph. from

15.

seg&-imperative of

7 7

120) Y.
perative,

2.

w.

2.,

QljZ) to

affections be

placed-Efhpe. im-

from p>>
*

121) Y. 3. w. 4.,
pron. and the prefix O
4.

w.

9.,

123) Y.

5.

w.

1.,

124) Y.

5.

w.

3.,
.

>

?/ottr

/i/e-from

(i

7
i

with a

suffix

tOXtLi

(ye) shall oppear-future Ethpe. from

oAxSo] mortify-Aph. imperative from

7 t 7
nniV)>Ol your wtewiiers-Suffix state, 2nd. masc.
V
i

07
from >O>O1

7 7

..

m>

*.

122) Y.

plural

2/oiir

NOTES ON THE CHRE8TOMATHT.

125) V.

*0l **ai>*

w. 11 and 12.,

5.

include the substantive verb (coinp.

X

126) V.

7.

These pronouns seem to

54. 3. a).

w.

8.,

^'"XJM'nAVn turning or having turned-Ethpz.

w.

3.,

Qu..1| put away-A.ph. from

from

335

ascn .
T.T

127) V.

8.

*.

*QJ

or

ojJ

128) V.
129) V.

w.

9.

w.^

from

131) V.

^
w.

3.,

^ \\r^
^*

9.

w.

7.,

-lOlCUx-^O* put

tywgi deccitfvJr-p&rticiple Pa.,

off,

cast

from

away-imperative Pe.,

It takes a suffix.

9.

from }oOI

>

9.

130) V.

ye shall ie-future

^OOOlZ

2.,

^Oioaaboi

w. 12.,

his deeds-stiff, state,

plural

from

-X

paooi.
1:52)

V.

10. w.

^.fj^ALDj ?Mo

3.,

'

ici//^

renezoft-Ethpa. part, pas-

27,-M with the prefix >

133) V. 10. w.

icho created

OU'pOj

6.,

him-from

1^

with a

suf.

pronoun, with the prolix >.

134) V. 12. w.
with the prefix

135) V.

]*Vi*nMO and

1.,

^pA*OO1O

fee/<7w^-plural

13. w.

pi.

and yf-from O01 with the verbal

with the prefix

if n

2.,

fnV? forbearing-Pti.

v
OlV)X>0 and
w.
V.
15.
1.,
137)
O
and
prefix
pronoun,

his pence,

15. w.

140) V. 15. w.

6.,

ioL*iaL]

10.,

^-oo

part,

from

from fin\

'o>.

with

suf.

138) V. 15. w.4. M aa2oA?/o,/-/v*r/,v, from

139) V.

".

from ]^>

13. w.

termination-2nd.

136) V.

7.,

U^ with

suf.

pron."

ye are called-YA\\. 2nd. plural from

So

thiin.kful-\w[(t. active

Aph. from

NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.

336

REVELATIONS

v.

10.

141) V.

1.

w.

A^VxO and I saw-Aph.

1.,

pret.

1st.

from

sing,

with prefix O.
w. 10.,

o^A^VlX

w. 17.,

OLQuVlN

'

142) V.

2.

with prefix

X
II

143) V.

3.

4.

w.

from

infinitive

open-Pe.

ww^)

Ti

to look

on #-infin. with

from

suffix

^V** with the prefix

144) Y.

to

2.,

A*OO1

ii

w-formed from Zu| and OO1,

] being

The phrase, including the word preceding and the one

dropped.
following, means literally, it is weeping much.
145) Y.

4.

w.

7.,

tMk2*

was found-Ethpe. from

literally thou shalt weep-2nd.

146) Y. 5. w. 8., ao
61. B. a).
masc-put for the imperative (vid.

147) Y.

6.

w.

64. 3. B.

(rid.

6.,

^OpOj

to

stand.^Q\O

is

per.

fut.

a participle from

Rem.).

fa^1 s/aw-pass.

148) Y.

6.

w.

149) Y.

6.

w. 21.,

8.,

o>A*1> who

part. Peal. fern,

from

were sent-3d. per.

f.

plural,

.77

Ethpa. from

)>.
REVELATIONS xxiL

150) Y.

suffix,

^OlQa^O

2. w. 23.,

and

prefix

151) Y.

3.

w.

152) Y.

3.

w.

and

10.

leaves

of tV-from

]a^ with

O*

foou shall &e-future of looi.

14., wOUJQASnjU shall serve him-ht.
~
ASa with a suffix.

4.,

3d.

masa

plural,

Pa. from

153) Y.

>ou.

5.

w.

16.,

JOUkJ

causing to shine-Aph. part. masc. from

NOTES ON THE CHRE8TOMATHY.

*

337
T

my

fliOnV)\

154) Y.

6.

w.

155) V.

8.

to worship, to prawe-infinitive, Peal

w. 13.,
ryiff>Vl\

from

rV^B

15.,

to s&nfl-infinitive,

Pa. from **<!***

r f

156) V.

11. w.

157) V. 14. w.

7.,

lUfrJ *^#

<oSu

15.,

be filthy-fat.

Ethpa. from

they shall enter in-fat.

]L.

3d. masc. Peal

from \>A
9

158) V. 17. w.

4.,

|Z (xwie-imperative of |2|

159) V. 19. w.

3.,

>k^J

. T

, f

s/ta# teA-

away-Pe&l

future from

>^

NOTES ON THE CHEESTOMATHY.

338

POETRY.
WE

present a few specimens of Syriac poetry, taken from the

Peshito Bible, published by the British and Foreign Bible Society,
in 1826.
It will be observed that the text does not appear in a

The

rhythmical form, nor are there any divisions into verses.

Peshito or literal version was made near the close of the

first,

or beginning of the second century, while the divisions into chapters

and verses were introduced in the thirteenth century. Points, in
addition to Ribui, will be noticed over and under particular letters.

These are intended to mark the occurrence of Kushoi and Rukok.

PSALM
1) Verse

word

2.

9.,

xlv.

pOTSfjiV)

110.

therefore.

conjunction

This

is

composed of the

^4^

and the

suffix

pronoun JJ01*

Conjunctions as

well as other particles often take suffixes.

2) V.

3.

w.

1.,

cast

]k)>l

See a similar instance

in

Matt.

(gird)-Aph. imperative, from ]So5

xvii. 27.

PSALM
3) V.

2.

w.

1.,

f-yt&Dl

li.

110.

multiply-imperative,

Aph. from

(%**&

here adverbially in the sense of very much.

4) V.

with a

2.

w.

suffix

2.,

il

pronoun.

..>] wash

wze-imperative,

Aph. from

-..

NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.

5) Y.
guffix

2.

w.

p>

/w-imperative, Pa. from

-iJL2>

7.,

339
with a

pronoun.

6) V.

3.

w.

8.,

^njSnn

in

and the prdix preposition,

that
7) V. 4. w.8., D>>lZ>

8) V.

>

all

always-from

//ion migktest be

just-Ethpa. 2nd. sing.

falls

away

as the con-

j)rt'C('(lcs.

6.

w.
T

7.,

^^

9) V.

w.

9.

*A-lAljO| thou makest me

with a
i

7.,

suffix

M>\

know-Snd.

sing. pret.

pronoun.

blot

^-imperative Pe. from

PSALM
10) V.

5.

w.

1.,

11) V.

5.

w.

4.,

12) Y.

7.

w.

13) Y.

9.

w.

plural, Pa.

to

Aph. from

preceding.

time,

in.

The preformative

muse, future from JDj1

junction >

all

from

^oAl

7.,

6.,
. '

Ol

civ.

10.

prepared, laid-Ethpe.from

nASo-participle with a

^QOliAiO

OUQmaJO

jDO

]iO.

suftix

hastening-m Ethpe.

pronoun from

participle,

aiul (that) they should not

from

cwer-3d.

with a

siitliv

prunoiin,

and the conjunction

SYRIAC
r

^ *1 T

(2 1,

"

1'

<^a| a

suf.
r

^ i 9i

"

LEXICON.

1*Ol_>|

"

father, pi.

Jerusalem.

'^'

|IO1O|

to go, to

parents.

go away.

to perish,

Aph.

to cause to

W-

brother.

perish, to destroy.

to

to be sad, to be disturbed.

Abnil (name of an
*

hold

the

idol).

to

hold,

"

'

Abraham.

H^r^f

an

letter,

ear.

an Egyptian.

x
1

-F

DOf

(mark of the vocative).

like

Adverb,

namely, that

I2aiibol
f.

is

(from o|

skill, ability.

Egyptians.
*}

hand-ui Hebrew ^i

*!

who, which,

a nation.

Ophir (a pro]>er name).

*i
jiOl9O| Edessa in Mesopotamia
,

fern,

of

puj.

so as, according to, as to,

IF just
as,

therewith.

where?

(a proper name).

!'*!

IM)O| a way.

*'i

f *

the

and

m.

a writing.

oVor.

ol

fern.

another;

pi.

>

l^il
^
|J>|

lay

the end.

last,

m. a reward.
|L\1
^\

to

seize,

of.

*i

|A_>O|

the law book of Moses,

the Pentateuch.

where

]*1

iy whither ?

whence?
^io
T
T

Qlu|

where.

there,

SYRIAC LEXICON.

342

how?

Aph. to cause to

to learn,

SO

learn, to teach.

that.

they,

pi.

ship.

to constrain, to compel,
I..7

truly, certainly, yes.

to

*^3

urge any one,

at what,

v^

op-

pressed,

(a proper name).
oppressed.
Israel (a proper name).

mother.

mark

honor, a

of esteem,

Amida

a solemn procession.
I

il it is, *jiAjl

I am, etc.

17

1>

]l iV>l, surely, firmly.

(e;

Aph.
at the same time-together.

just

as, >

i rr>

of
to say, to speak.
7

i-

a lamb.

a stranger, a guest

>

jASo] (with

y)

but,

yet

(aXXa),

if

J following)

not
f

it.

1>

jJ 0)|J} to

fut.

Adv. constantly.

].SO,bf

such a quality (qnalis}.

ff

1,

to believe.

to eat, to consume.

>

Mesopotamia

(a proper name).
,

serpent

in

]j1

I, pi.

XT*

lament.

^LM

m. ^i

God.

we.
**

.il

f.,

that (<w

J.CG.)

Antinum

(a

proper

godly.

name).
f.

divinity, the

godhead.

an Alexandrian.
Olaph, the
the alphabet.

first letter

7J>

Ethpa. to sigh.

man, a certain
of

and

man,

pi.

SYRTAC LEXICON.

as

luiniaiiity,

concrete,

'1

343

lion.

X T

mankind.

_iV

>

ni.

thou

f.

l]

Arias.

pi.

Areopagite.
.

>{ a ruler,

U^'

you.

an

errorist,

heretic.

ij heresy (a'tgetfts).
>] earth, land, country.

pi

to find, Ethpe. to

stylite

(according

ZA]

to

be found.

the six days work,

the creation.

Assem.)

ft

]Z] to come, Aph. to lead, to

bring, to conduct.

sedition.
oil

a Syrian, a Gentile.
>

a healing.

j*O>l a bound,
a prison.

a woman, a wife.

]Zaco)

a chief man.

"

f
f.

/ nr

of cinnamon.

vn

JL\, \yL\ a place, a region.

soldier.

:l

external

appearance,

in,

from, through, to.

dress,
*

ASOLUCDJ

a possessor of a bath.
hypocrite

09

")

also,
T k7 ^

Va]
*1 T

|-.g|

>\,

i]i

t*
face,

" 7*J

\yi

^^2)

according

towards.
,

hence.

to,
a

shame, disgrace.

a bishop

to he anxious, unea.-y.

p^)>]

jn*

z>

four.

6>| heterodox.

ashamed, Aph. to

make ashamed.
"

I*

.X

(|3ij|*a).

wk>|
to be

over,

a pulpit

neither.

C*'
-/f>\r>o
a counselor.

amiableness.
K

JOQ

awkward, uneducated.

SYRIAC LEXICON.

344

*42

Pa.
mock.

i.

+*\*

to

Basilius

to

(a pro-

per name.

M.

\L\

deride,

(from |Z^is.| end)

f.

finally.

joy, benignity.

m. back.
cease, to destroy.

to perfume.

to conceive.

odors.
*

pregnant.

to seek, with

]A*x3

entreat,

to demand.

among, between.
in.

^Lo to

enemy, an adversary.

evil.

m. an evil person-pi.

the seekmg, the finding out.

to take away.

m. small-|i**JD feminine.

malice.

a small matter (for the

Besoe (a monk-proper
name).
*

A
A

Al

7
->

i .

1>

?.

Adj. small).

between, by

Vfl

out

n o

to explore, to discover,

Ethpa. with

JD

to contemplate,

a gnat, a midge.

Mesopotamia.
7

sou.

|A*i a house,
the Roman dominion.

]Alj^S0 .iio an

inhabitant qf the city,

Ti

to create.

Bethlehem (a proper
name).

Barabbas

to weep.

|1*")

pl.

without
m.

a Barbarian.
sons.

Bardesanes

Const.

|Elal*") men,

of men.

^Q is

lit.

sons

always used in the

pO

sing, for son.

.,;

to despise. Par^. P.

(a proper

name).

despised.

(a proper

name).

houses, pl. feminine.

to fall down, to

bend the

knees, Ethpa. to receive a benediction, to bless one's-self.

RYRIAC LEXICON.

345

m. blasphemy,

but, yet.

Ethpa. to become man.

shame, disgrace.

man.

|>

lid.." Guria

L'fC)

,'fZ),

C
j

',

pi.

IZioVyi

Ik

for.

a maiden.

>A)

after,
i 7

7.

circumcision,

to laugh, to mock,

A^O Ao a young woman,

,.

of

a woman).

the lightning, brightness.

a daughter,

name

(proper

JA^>
^-S
?

vnNo )Ao

soon,

to

-.t

afterwards.

to

uncover,

discover,

Ethpe. to be discovered, to be

(literally),

made known.

shortly thereupon.

^.. to rob, Ethpe. to be robbed.

public, free.

^K\

an arrow> dart

^,

%P

to choose, to select.

side,

the

a part,

wrong

side,

*^

p Vi

Galilee (a proper name).

a revelation.

\^

^.. to engrave.
^

>

i.

e.

**

an j/r>'.vr>

enemy.

an

accomplishment,

perfection.

to

the choice.

\'t^\ a man, a person.

to finish.

mighty.

a formation, a creature.
^ 7

fulfill,

Pass. Part. ll-J-y\

hidden,

unknown,

Gethsemane (a proper

to lend.

namej!
2>_i Pa.

*_.

to

>,.

meet with any one, to

happen to any one.

Q.I

in

1'O-yi

]cQL. race, family (ysvo$ ),

to blaspheme.

the midst, Q-v-^ within.

a troop, a multitude.

offspring.
.rr>pn . Aph,

*&\t

to scold, with

to lie

*S

u. the north.
3J-.

a bone, a limb.

down.

SYEIAC LEXICON.

346

>
tive

mark of the Genitive; RelaDaison

Pronoun ; while, that, there- l^t>

with, in order that.

> to offer,

an

1^i> a

Pa. the same,

Mr?

offering.

cloister.

ti

monk.
monastic

to carry, to take, Ethpe. to

JQ>

proper name

(the

of a river).

be conducted, to conduct ones-

life.

testament

self.

> to

lie,

p>, M-2?

Pa.

P>
a falsehood.

>

pure, clean.

17
Pa. **3> to purify.

ff

;D> to remember.
> gold.

^O>, and )LO> the blood.

behavior.

David, sometimes written

>OOU>

(a proper name).

p6>, 1AOO>,

^O>,
*

*>

O>,

a resemblance, an image,

a likeness.
similar.

CoTw^r. S^. wkiD> value.

place.

to crush.

to sleep.
I 7

> to fear, to worship.

*

i*

> fear, terror, ]j

superstition.
.e o

pQ-j

Matt.

viii.

24, pi.

at,

to be

^ i nV)> .
^1SD> to weep.

]Qa> an
Y" '

,i*V)> sleeping

M, A^w>

evil spirit,

the Devil.

to be possessed of

an

o> Ethpa. to wonder

evil

astonished.

spirit.

*^._>

a word accompanying the

to

t>

judge,

Pass. Part.

^>

judged.

Pron.
my, or my.

Possessive

who
I

^Xk>
^-i>

is

'

16,

i\i>

of Christ
thy, or

who

is

pLD> the beard.

but (&).

>>"

is

^A.

^'

^>>| to comprehend.

an arm.

formed from > and >^ .

reference above.

Jlu> judgment.
* This

Epiphany.

thy.

p-ij a Judge.

-n

J*iJj the feast of the appearance

Tr.

Vid.

>> to encounter, to speak with

any one.

8YRIAC LEXICON.

347

advantage, pleasure.
to

lo

return,

Aph. to lead

back.
*j>jOl to lead, to guide.

.I'a.

]>Cl

JL

erod (a proper name.)

Pron.(Chal., ytf]).

this, she,

(jOl

'

p>Ol

here, hither.
ff

members.

|>>O1 honor, glory.

9

now, at present.

*.

OO1 m. **O1

f.

and OO1 m.

-iOl

f.

that, the former

>

*jOT

t>

to be

Iboi
-*

>
;

the letter Van, and.

IT

OO1 who;
1*

since.

(Feri

to redeem, Put.

Put.

iSM&tf.)

foou.
CUOOT lie,
.

lOl

*""

-X

1,

she.

]l51

]lQl Acts

time, pi.

xvii. 26.

OOl them.
customs, deeds.

twice

there, then.

v il*^l A_kZ

CTI

faith,

belief,

before.

a temple, a palace.

n iVl

thrice

doc-

ul

to

to put to

grow dumb,

silence.

1*k>a* ^^*'^

trine,

tlie

say>l just, upright.

ing faith.

in like

manner.

jl
it *is

to be just,
suitable,

it is

*
>*} it

befits,

becoming.

therefore.

70

!>

t>

so, iu this

hence,

manner.

1A

?1

for, there.

_1G1

<

in.

(>G1

-.

f.

plur.

^QJOI

praise,
r

.JkJOl

f.

this.

show, splendor.

Zenobius

1>

m.

carefully.

>O11 Ethpa. to beware.

they, these.

^01,

corres-

alms.

oi Pa. to wander, to go forth,

to walk.

o.o

agreement,

pondence.

name).

(a proper

SYRIAC LEXICON.

348

17
^1 to move, to be

i,

restless,

a moving, a dance,

.r** lame.

I?
7

r**

m. |pM

f.

any one

at.

..

](L1 honor, splendor.

a weed,

*"!*")

pM

sunday.
I

rejoice

|As>

to rejoice very much.

\LOf*

to arm.

->p~^ to

Ir~K,

.C.-x

fliOrM rejoicing.

to conquer, to vanquish.

(jrM mutual,

a conqueror.
a song.

reciprocal.

'

'l*

VrfciOl

one, a certain one,

.07

hyssop.

t-Ofj* gladness.

ft

il

species, kind.
in.

joy.

fornication,

the breast,

fornication.

9011, fjoil

little,

pi.

suff.

Luke,

xxiu. 48.

JQ11S B>

not

to suiTOund, to flow around.

*

y.

small.

pjOl

honor, majesty.

to cry, to call.

around.

uipM
*

cross,

27 * to renew.

to crucify, to torture.

IX
new,

pi.

Qx, Pa.

V** free,

Ijiw^

free.

Q-w
ought.
quiet, concealed

love.
*
Qjst perseverance, patience.

resi-

dence.

injury.
z

beloved,

^>*^.

pi.

Habib (a proper name).

7

an

;O
any

associate,

the other,

to see Ethpe. to be seen, to

appear.

y
[OV

A* a vision,

apparition.

t>

to enclose.
feast,

(I

one.

to show, to in-

dicate.

aCU

a feast day.

June.
to bind.

pi.

^..
pop^

an

SYRIAC LEXICON.

349

to dream,

bond, union.

a view.

of.

anger, wrath.

and

(A.^lM

sin.

f.

to re-

Ethpe. to be angry,

crime, pi.

sin,

instead

for,

to err, to sin.

m.

Ethpe.

cover.

sigh.

"fi

wheat,

a heathen, an idolater.

to live, Aph.

and

life.

rf)Ot

It always

has the plural form but generally a singular signification.

..

m. a debtor,

*S*

one's-self.

diligently.

an army.

force,

to strengthen.

to blush, to be ashamed,

the back, the loins.

and )jAS

>GUK to be white,

strong.

-^

to see, to look out.

linen, fine linen.

IT
|^iO>*
17

17

it.

to cover Ethpa. to conceal

an animal,

97

|J.*-K

be

vehement, strong,

a monster.
w,

far

to envy, with

M>

^iH

pi.

living creature,
I

from p|

us, pi. c.

we,

pi.

..

.o

wise,

-..

XT

-.7

to curse, to detest.

plural

and (V)i^

Pa. to

liberate.

* 99 7

\visdom.

UAJ vinegar.
-X

|4Q

\'r^ a

magician, a sorcerer.

\L'r+*

from 12;*jl

f.

finally,

the

XM a gnat, a fly.
\t to mingle, Ethpa,

take

any

i)ivrt,

to

associate

end, enough.
to

with

]jiuj endurance, suffering.

nm -*, ^ao

one.
>,

]V>i\

to wash.

darkness,

Eph.
sound, healthy.

iv.

18.

to mark, to seal,

seal.

pi

SYBIAC LEXICON.

350

to carry.

Ethpa. to be dispersed.
a rumor, a report.

foul, detestable.

good. Adv. very.

j-

unclean.

Part. P. m. sealed.

uncleanness.

seal.

&

to wander, to

JQ^ Pa. n>

be willin.

(t

to be ready, to

to forget, with

to mislead, to deceive, to cheat.

happy, blessed.

pO.

error, heresy.

to taste, to taste well.

kind, family,

offspring.

be laden, to bear, Aph.

to

to cause to carry, to bring.

vine, branch,

to over-

readiness,

a part (tomus.)
to

to overflow,

run.

swim over any-

to

fill.

thing, to overflow.

a mountain.

quiesce, to obey.

'

to ac-

Ethpe.

&

from

fall

something, to apostatize, Aph.

the pious, the good,

and

wander around,

^ to

5*04

distress, misfortune.
x

>^4 to chase away, to drive away.

'

04 that which is
cealed, |lja4^ secret.
,.

>

Y 7

con-

Zosu-^

^^

to strike,

i'
1
\2>'r4

JE%e.

l^af.

'i

goodness, excel-

lence, benevolence, grace.

(7

to order, (racro'sjv).

(7

V>|Li fine, suitable, proper.

i>7

an

arrangement,

order,

to wish very much, Ethpa.

the same.

state

a young man, a youth,

to lead, to lead away.

X

girl,

a maiden.

to dry up.

SYBIAC LEXICON.

351

r*

U
p

hand,

on account

],_
*

now

by, with help,

ri)

in

to believe in something, to

^OO

a Greek, U(

use,

to bring forth, Ethpe. to

to know, to be acquainted
known ;
'with
Ethpe. to be
;

make known,

to

jlj>A.

to

in-

be born.

.,

.,

"
a teacher, a learned

an acquaintance, one

man.

known.
knowledge, insight, device.

to
-

up

one's
x

\M2ll to

|VY

1*^

* to

give

..

swear, Aph. to cause to

to.

the right hand, the right,

*"C^

J.O

a suckling, a baby.

Jews.

Aph. to add.

Jovinian (a proper

to increase rapidly.

name).
i

the sea.

swear, to swear

life.

)OOla Judaea,
pi.

to learn, Aph. to inform.

* f

with

0*

Imperative

give,

small boy, a child.

]>Q__Aj a

dicate.

advantage.

a hermit.

knowledge.

1O> Adverb

ing to the Greeks.

m. acknowledged, known.

.
t

daily.
'

the Greek manner, accord-

confess.
m
r

\\*

i\O
i

JCU

of.

-?o] to thank, with

A^/i.

'

r>_.

.Tnhn

(a proper name. )

Joseph (a proper name).

Jacob (a proper name).

%P

\S)Q ^i one

who

takes care,

*,

L, Julius (a proper name).

1

mni . \n.

Julian

(a

to burn.
flame, holocaust.

proper

XT

name).
,

l;*^'

illustrious,

honored,

a doctrine, teaching.

]Soal

day,

lV)V^iO

by day, ^SbQji, (liOQ^

to day,

great.
*x
to be great, to increase (in
respectability).

SYBIAC LEXICON.

352

a month.

blush.

Jesus.

AA

being, essence.

.7

(*

1Q

-X

to

remain,

settle, to
x

to

dwell,

of

laying on
the
hand

to

sit.

7
,

_Lo

the

extendin

or

^A*

feO'p*^)

every,

\ O each.

iAu more than.

;_

a dog.

x 7

superfluity.

a crown.

to win, to abound.

every thing, any thing,

a bride.
to prevent, to rebuke.
x

lop

[a,

how much, how much

passion.

to give a surname,

justly.

a fellow servant,

justice, righteousness.

bosom,

a stone, a rock, Cephas,

or Peter.

l/P

f.

gether, Ethpa.. to be assembled.

a rebuke.

as, during (pleonastic before

the Part.).

paiO
C

(03
(CO

a cup.
to conceal,

Ethpa. to hide

Pa. to cover,
one's-self.

priest.

the priesthood.

]ZoJOl3
P

an assembly.

perhaps.

lap.

to assemble, to collect to-

'f&

more,

to be amazed, to be sad.

(O3, (m*),

|m*>

concealed,

-X

IrAjQO shame.
famine.

m. a

star, pi.

Matt. xxiv. 29.

to deny, to refuse, to desert

(with .0)*

priest.

where,

a cup.
a

cell.

JT"

there where.

to feel pain,
one.

^ A*p

it

pains

8YRIAC LEXICON.

sorrowful,

sad,

to

353

abuse, insult.

by, to go.

I.-S

|(JL*p
!.

against, towards.

'

kfl

GUp,

to

infirm,

weak.

to, by, besides, with.

announce

to blot out.
only, alone.

a christian.

to involve, to roll up, to pass

^^f)l.^>^

by.

HIS,

pa
a

night,

ft.

scroll.

]]*D a
-

roll,

bread.

collision,

*^
to

a shock.

Ethpa.,

humbly

*>

not.

it is

]]

A an insane

person.

entreat.
,

to write, yl^A. the same.

up

,-^D

^1L before,

besides.

to eat.

a writing, a book.
flax, linen.

opponent.
ft *

* Xy

a shoulder.

tongue, language,

>

to remain, to remain behind.

that,

U not,

no

|J> lest,

what

>
;

]lD when.

word, discourse, a part

without.

of speech.

heart.

handle, a covering.

p]i> a
*">*\-L to arouse, to cheer,

spring, fountain.
dress,

a garment.
decision, reliance,

a blessing, a benediction.

to hold, to take hold.

scroll,

outside, without,

volume,

roll.

to clothe, to cover.

Pa. to accompany, Ethpa

^.SD

freely.

*
,

to be accompanied, to be confirmed.

l*o.*S0 a wise man,

pi.

SVHIAC LEXICON.

354

|*.f1,Sn an

a heretic, a seducer.

altar.

a desert.
1?

cloister,

V) water.

redemption.

secretly.

"

to die, Aph. to cause to die,

a chamber.

to mortify.
thus, thence, therefore.

}Al_i^D a town, a
**

distuiguished, excellent.

city.

humility, modesty.

if

something, i>O,iO

JJ

nothing.
affable,

]i1,V>

eastern,

modest.

the

noW) immediately.

East.
intelli-

lowliness,

a song, a hymn.

gence.

believing, with

,aVf), j^So to be depressed.

orthodox.

]3_SD to be full, Pa.

prompt, ready.

to be
e

gift.

y.

word, saying,

to deride.

pQlD

-<^^>

_pZ?ir.

death.

|M.

Ptff

^V> a captain.
to advise, to

to strike, to prick, to

bite.

consult, to

reign.

blow,

plague,

pi.

]h \V> a

king.

a kingdom.
\\\-

weak, humble.

on the morrow.

V)

to speak, to converse:

Abs. word.

1..1

a tempest,

pZ.

waves.
.,

to go, to come,

wordy/.

to arrive,

3/. Prrf.
learning.

from,
of; J

1>

W So*

an angel, a messenger.

myrrh.

M> ...V)

-E%*.

fill,

to

filled.

of,

over,

^i^i) whUe.

on account
speech.

(JiO.

SYRIAC LEXICON.

SJiOwho?

>

Y y

,,V>

is

this?

who

355

which,

that,

tical
(i.

certainly (fJ^v);

it

often

is

e.

($0

Christ)

**.o

of,

from,

of,

since

'

*^1 afterwards, hereafter,

title for

precious

stone.

^i

of;

a pearl,

Zol

ecclesiastical ladies.

superfluous.

from, on account

our Lord,

person),

to
to

fall

make

ofif,

to cast away,

free.

with

sutf.

^iSfl

a falling

of us.

what?

bold,

oflF,

an

injury.

impudent,

a faithful servant,
a garment,

a candlestick,

bitter, sorrowful,

a part.
T
^

a chariot, a throne.

patience,

which

that

poor.

relates

to

Christ,
f.

baptism.

hollow,

-iA;LD a flock, an assembly, a

community.

cavern.

an

a messenger,

interpreter,

an explainer.
,

to anoint.

\^

U fciD

*So changable, variegated.

possible.

the Anointed, the Mes-

to be able, Ethpe. the same,

to have

power to do (with

siah.

known, distinguished.

by, through).
splendor, light.
in

complete, perfect.

SDaV) a

the midst.

deacon, a minister.

OlaViaVf) the

midst.

office

of a dea-

con.

Lord,

my Lord

Sir,
(title

for

bishop or auy other ecclesias-

a person sick of the palsy,

position,

a bed.

SYRIAC LEXICON.

356

to extend,

U^iJ a

time, a period.

A*jJ to go down, to descend,

ALo an

valley.

to lay down, to take down, to

interpreter.

*^.>.7Avn

"jA.i

abstemiousness.

obedience,

f.

bring, to deliver.
f

x.

(>.

necessity.

AMJ

m. a garment,

a catechumen.

/Wl,

pi.

J.
to drop.
7

m. a prophet, Matt.

i.

22.

^J
P

to take care
f.

f.

out,

patience,

to watch.

lenity,

meekness.

Nicsea (a proper name).

prophecy.

drawing

of,

'X

.0

piJ.

a yoke, a bow.

I'piJ

guilt, injury, crime.

suffering.
X

to augment, to honor, to

shining, bright.
7

>OU to shine,

Aph. to

light,

sacrifice, to slay.

Ethpa.

t
.rf>r>vr>i

to be bright.

aw

>OU
1".

.*"imi to take, to receive.

river.

ItJOIQJ

m.

light,

from

3OU

-x

to

pnmi

temptation.

shine.

>*QJ,

11*

v^OU

MJ

to pour, Ethpe.

nmi

to repose, to be ap-

to ascend.

peased, Aph. to lay aside, to

refreshment.

put away.
+ o

*>

.r>mil|

to

fall.

rest.
e 9

^pO
f.

to

>

a stranger,

also Newter.

!>OQJ ^QJ to sleep.

go out, Aph. to take

out,

spread.
*

*l^

the soul, reflexive,

J to

fight, to attack.

\m

self.

*t>

-x

I^OQJ
*

>OJ

1".

distribution, expending.

fire.

o^J

to plant.

r
SYRIAC LEXICON.

JfCD to order, to arrange.

a victory, an exploit.
i

Jsesibis

tainia (a proper
victorious,

in

Mcsopo-

name).

-i

superior, clear.

Ethpa. to be avenged

ULJ

(pi.

OP

IjOlCD Emph. of >GICD a witness,

a martyr
P.

=fiaTU).

(ZojOlCD testimony, witness, mar.

to dig, to dig out.

to testify, to witness, Aph.

to die as a martyr.

to adhere, to follow.

JTU

>O1D

tyred one.

Q0

)ZA/|) a woman.

a multitude.

"

(>Aj a downfall, a curse.

onense.

ID*
|LD}OD

silver,

>nro to long
take pleasure

money.

for something, to
in.

*.

t>

IJ^JQCD thought.

\L\SO a bushel.

an old man, Adj.

to

*>

(n\nm

old.

reception,

ascension to

heaven.
dense, extensive.

^OQD,

an ode, a song.

y).,ro to place, to

to add,
to

to believe, .A/, to declare,

to forbear, yl^A. to suppose.

l0]&

compose

books,

^A^2

to be satisfied.

or

write

inter,

to shut,

(i;O

to punish with death,

to
be interred, to be
Ethpe.
buried.

hope.
to multiply, to increase.

ft.

synod

(tfCv

>

to worship, to honor.

|in.lO._ro

indigence,

poverty,

need.

worship, honor.

ee (

cluster.

a n occurrence.

Syria.
.

i .1 fT>,

(A

..

QD mucli,

yl^/c.

very,
.l'/r.

a multitude.

Syriac.

Syriac,

in

the

SYRIAC LEXICON.

358

i?a0

a Syrian, Adj. Syrian.

to

1'Aaoj,

^/.

VZofflO) the mouth, the

Pa. to

down,

pull

lips,

destroy, Ethpa. to be dispersed.

Pa. to dishonor, to

osj'rCD

violate.

]l^ro Satan (a proper name).

Vr^20 a

side,

a page.

;*^-

<y>

to

to

bear,

endure,

to

|jjl a feast, a feast-day.

7

tolerate.

,li

to do, to perform, to yield,

to

make something (with a

^OuD

the laying on (of hands).

double Accusative).

an assembly.

]AStC1C>

r..

'

(^tfif)

m.

a sword

(f i<pog).
.
T 7
to expect, Pa. i*1Pf> to wait.

*K

PLOD

Mat.
-0

xiii.

pi.

i,ns,

27.

>

*>*

|>Q^1

transgression.

servant,

creator.

to ascend.

i>OD.

iooco

to pass by, to pass over;

;-U>

with *O, to pass around.

to place, to lay upon,

to commit.

Hebrew, Ad.

AJ);A

take
^.Vftm to support, \m*l\ to

Hebra-

ically.

refreshment, to tarry.
shortly.
left,

wrong.
a young cow.

to hate.

hated, mean.
to

need,

& until,

-- X

ASyl
>

until,
.

Pe.

1"

to make, to do, to visit (the

x

,^(10 a scribe,

fl

^rt),

]^Dyl

until that;

>"

,! Pa. to support, to aid.

sick).
I

^, MA time.

'rD

not yet ;

Pr/.

1ffr>

</.

^-

]AlaAcD

r 2kD,

.it
| i

church.
to act unjustly.

a ship.

a book.

UQI

unjust, sinful.

wicked, ungodly.

8YRTAC LEXICON.

a habitation, an abode,

Jdl

359

dipping, baptism.

death.

an answer, an alternative

a n inhabitant.

pillar.

Bong.
trouble, labor.

Ethpe. to be troubled,

to dwell.

uncireumeision.

Q1

or

to hear, to answer, Ethpc. to

to watch,

'fL

converse.

to blot,

>

>

piety.

custom.
_

jl i
i

one

S eye.

who

is

dead.

<>

(ill a cloud.

to stir up.

to arouse, Aph.

X.'

1>

a guardian angel.

Clover,

to, against,

twenty.

Pa. to

on account

J ^1 because.

of;

avarice.

ml, V.A
into,

hibited
one,

23.

xvii.

to go, with

to

gd

^1 to

carry on prointercourse with any

llthpe.

aversion, opposition.

a root.

Acts

altar,

with

>

Pfle/, to inquire.

cause.

an

inter.

1>

ff

1 -

to

go

to

flee.

to avail, to prevail.

>Al prepared,

Par<.

Aph.

into,

(put for

the future).
ancient, old,

f.

to lead, to lead into.

t

11, Empti.

rich.

(SONS world,

race,

generation.
with, above.
X

a nation,

..

fruit,

j)/.

1>]a.

pi.

to meet, to

,&! to sulfer one's self

ic

di]

>

>

happen to (with

>\

to suffer one's-sclf to be baptized.

body.

SYRIAC LEXICON.

360

to blow, to sound.

an apparition, an enchantment.

(a proper name).

work.

>

limit,

an end.

0Q2> mouth.
a command.
.

permit.

to be unwilling.

'

P. w 2

p_OjdZ) redemption,
** *

..0

-X

,"

to free, to deliver.

i?

-X

precept, com-

P_jC12) separation.
to remain, to

come

mand.

to any one.

a camp, a

77

doubt.

>^>
an explanation.
'iS)

(C0)

command.

to

salvation.

^Z.

a work, labor.

]iijO2> a reward, a recompense.

*

a portion,

lot,

>O2> a tower (*

to free, vlp^. to

.fflg>

valley.

paradise.

a redeemer, a deliverer.

phial.

^)
a philosopher.
Pilate

salutiferous, saving.

Persia.
?

(a proper

name).

^) a

Persian.

to recompense, Ethpa. to be
rewarded.

j>
mediation, entreaty.

servant

of

the

church.

;)

cheek, jole.

;>

to divide, Ethpa. to doubt.

t7
^

O . ^2)

Par^. uAi-^P) to work, to

face, presence.

to preserve, to deliver.
to separate, to divide, Ethpe,

to be divided, to appoint.
to break.

serve.

to extend, to spread.
to

return,

Pa. to answer,

Aph. to lead back, to make

known

Ethpe. to turn

one's-self.

just, right.

to interpret.

SYRIAC LEXICON.
.

361

4t

!io-t

As.

^k

a word, a matter.
wide,

r
"

cross.

Sf)\

an image.

figure,

early time, dawn.

^)

to open.

f*

in. idols,

'.

an

idol,

images,

an image of a false

Ethpe. to be

separated, to

burst.

god.

5*

rt

to be filthy.

11^

to be

JO.
_ 0.

to receive

to wish.

wili',;)g,

^^

from the beginning.

^O-^

will,

a sepulchre.

of one's-self, freely.

-D

for,

>

to,

ere, before.
t

*.9

ff

willing, ready.

to pass.

poor)

]ZOO^

come

'r&O to bury.

vile, filthy.

fl^

to happen, to

the

first.

will.

holy.

-n

>*^

will,

purpose.

to thirst.

|OL

^00 .

days of fasting, fast days.

fi.*-

|)0*

a figure,

tf. to incline,

a.

P.

,.

holiness.

JXLO to stand up, to stand,

to set

to erect,
conclude,

to

vA

up,

to

to

de-

\Z3\O

pre-

appoint,
. .

termine; with

make war

ceding, to

M^t

to pray, with

bless.

>QO
U*

pretence.

to pray for any one, to

a

a reception, an entertain-

ment.

PDO

to remain, to stop.

|]aoo

to fast,

}oo

with any

inclined.

Ethjte. to be crucified.

a prayer, an entreaty.

one.
.

a church-yard, burying-ground.

SYRIAC LEXICON.

362
li

OJOO

a servant of the church,

Cappadocia (a prop-

sexton.

"er

17*.
Constantine

name).

(mn cassia.
tf

\'fO to

(a proper name).

name, to

call,

to choose.

11

a town, a

piJOD

to approach, to draw
..*">;
near, Pa. to conduct, to bring;

city.

a Cyrenean (a proper

'

to sacrifice.

name),

war

3 truth.

m. a murderer, a robber,

a crystal.

near.

cunning, ingenious,

%
(1

slaughter, murder.

]*flf) a league, ]V)

(")

^O

reading.

^D a

Ai2

a horn.

consecrated virgins.

'pD calvary.

resurrection,

a song.

tree, bark,

a player on the cithara.

p

>

much, great, loud, chief;

_

pi.

the clergy.

|oi

Pa. to bring
f>

>

a myriad,

y/.

to acquire

Aph. to grant,

> greatness,

^QO>.

a multitude.

to bring.
>,

|ilo

.>

to wish very much, to

a pen, a reed,

a centurion.
\7 I 7

desire,

i to

(jjCOO Csesarea (a proper name),

to

call,

up, to

educate.
T!

a bride.

7 ,

Const.pl.

to grow,

)i

f r

elder.

2) a teacher, Emphat. |Q> Abs.

little.

.cr>n.\n

an

>.

|]-D a voice,

),

priest,

a book.

Cithara, harp.
o

a country.

field,

to cry.

Ethpa. the same.

be angry.

y, ]]..

foot.

8YRIAC LEXICON.

363

i> to stone.

a person of

prince,

rank.
to mark, to

feel,

Aph. the

same, with *fD to perceive, to

-x.

p*0> a sign.
) beloved.

remark.

a wish, a
3

chastise

go, to

with and

(^

ithoiit

,>

y>
desire.

-*"> to
ship.

to

]V)>>

love,

Ethpa.

with

to feel compassion.

benevo-

compassion,

pi.

lence, love.
*

a persecutor.

J love.

i>j persecution.

to

idl> to luisten, to tremble, /,'%'.

to be afraid, to be terrified.
li

lie,

c
>

lloman, Adv. romai-

smell,

spittle,

cally, Latin.

> the first

to run, to hasten.

.0.0

ning,

m.

MO)

firstling,
,J

begin-

|A^Au)

j?Z.

spirit.
i>

i> f.

named.

-t_a~o

anger, misfortune.
i>

to float.

to be far distant.

wind, breath,

the high priest,

spirit.

a person of rank,
spiritual.

to ride.
,OJ

bowel

love,

bowels of

>j

1>

O> Ethpa.

grcies.

(n>O> ^io

distance

im a distance.
!>Q

ph.

moved.
)>, ]L)'>

I T

ii]

to feel mcUned, to be

f.

lASoi high,

loud, p/.

iT"**

to raise up,

]Soi James

iv. 6.

to elevate.

305 a

gift.

o>

to

lie,

to be placed, Aph. to

cast, to send;

with

*VV"')

to

a quarrel.

3OJ a clothj a rag.

administer; with
life.

(a^l

to lose

8YRIAC LEXICON.

364

to praise.

3> Part. P. thrown down, given

captivity, destruction.

up.
f

Luke

j hills,

xxiii.

30.

patience, long

praise- worthy.
suffer-

]A*i

a v i, ie

a sceptre,
to guide, to lead,

evening.

seven,

to sprinkle.
'

Pa.

>

to obtain

seventy.

again,

to leave, to give up, to

Ethpa. to be reconciled.
i

i>

*.

permit, to let go.

&a]SOQl> mournful, deeply moved.

a week.

a herdsman.
*

an uproar.

mind.

) sense,

restless, uneasy.

to be angry.

to kindle.

thunder.

Ethpe. to be moved, to be

to dance, to mourn, to lament.

indignant.
*_;

) sinful,

to

a transgressor.

make a

IP* to throw, to
.*

precipitate.
r T

it* Pa. to

sign.

send,

>>A|

Ethpa.

7,,

wwZ)

to be inflamed, to rejoice.

is sent.
.

5O1* to awake.
Sapores (a proper name).

an

Pa. to ask; with

to ask after

to be worthy, Ethpt. to be

considered as worthy.

evil spirit.

to entreat,

IQ

some

|d, f^d*

equal. ^/. JaQj*

*.?-

ff

*
>

renown.

one.
praise,

renown, glory.

entreaty.

*,CL, wUi to wash.

to reconcile, to cairn.
nearness.

to free, to tear away.

8YRIAC LEXICON.

365

dishonor, shame.

polo* Samona

consummation, end.

(a proper name,.

Simon (a proper name).

to despise.

1*

power, authority, right.

way,

peace,

a name.

change, exchange.

JOO*

IVTS*

in.

ft

V)

heaven.

Samosata

street.

(a

proper

name).

a wall.
.

Vf)

to finish, to complete.

beginning.

to hear.
confirmation.

IJJQA

Simeon, Simon (a proper

gain, advantage,

awkward,

name).

stupid.

to serve.

despised, small, inferior.

f.

)pl.

^iH

t\ to

present, Aph.

be able, to

.\

find,

*,

.0

|-kJ-* insane, foolish.

!Al

Pa. tft\

torment, pam, torture..

rest,

|1
I

to be able, to

<*

tooth.

sharp.

Ethpa.

to approach fulfillment,

Pa.

to complete; with

^\1

Ol

]_L*jOi to give up the ghost,

ness.

to relate..

an hoar;

forthwith.

jest, play.

to salute, Aph. to deliver up;

wAAl
J

be powerful.

to die.

year.

an apostle.

fulfill,

Or

to die.

P-,

sudden,

to

Zol

fnVn\

.*

]l*,

to cease, to rest.
*

Pa. to go away,

P-

Oi*Lo

to send, to put away.

|)ji,

the sun.

beautiful, good, fern, pi

x r
also the neuter, good-

SYKIAC LEXICON'.

'366

to hear, to take; Apk. with

to

not clear, dirty.

that which

go away.

able.

an iuhabitant.

\'f

to

]\M to dwell; with ^\i to besiege,

demand.

on trade, Ethpa. to

;.iZ to carry

Pa. to begin.
J^'r,

fa'r*

2) dregs,

most objection-

is

generation,

bio-

win (by trade), to be added.

wonder,

graphy.
+ t

an abyss.

ff

Li

p."
-

fzx*

light,

"

wax

light,

a candle.

a spectre, an ap-

r^j-*

parition.
T

to be surprised.
.

p'r* the remainder, the

rest.

wonderful,

Tav-last letter of the Alpha-

bet.

>J*,
1*

Ethpa. to be convinced.

;.

l^ij* true, Acfe,

^'

il'fj'p* truly,

A*

again.

to be astonished.

truth.

>oZ

six.
t

interpretation.

17
.

)ZoZ

silently.

to be silent, to be

repentance.

dumb.

limit,
,,

L
n\

to repent, to turn,

to return,

really.

1>^

oZ

or

bound.

A^_aZ under,

from below,
under.

a merchant.

]Z.V)>Z

shame.

Thomas, (a
repentance,

proper name).
to

Theophilus
proper name).

(a

urge,

Luke xxv.
|]Z to

hang

Pai

23.

up, to raise up.

SYRIAC LEXICON.

great, strong.

8DOW.
Ti

make a

scholar,

Ethpa

two

to bo learned, to bo a scholar.

. Ti

XI.* 9^ to explain, to interpret

the Trinity.
to

36f

^>Z

right, true, faithful.

a scholar.

/(Z.

|l>Z a door, a

three.

10 wonder, to be astonished.

the second.

]A^ijZ

gate.

mind, opinion.

wonderful, remarkable.

lV)V)Z honest,
.

there, in that place.

|jZ

P.

Q1Z a hyinn.a song of praise

service, attendance.
.

eight.

to repeat,

1 AAJ

to narrate.

nne.

to narrate, from

a narration.

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE

CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF

TORONTO LIBRARY